Owner's Manual - 2024 Subaru Solterra

“This site contains affiliate links for which OEMDTC may be compensated”

2024MY Solterra Owner’s Manual

MSA5M2430A

A6720BE-A

Main Owner’s Manual

Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle and the illustrations used may differ from your vehicle.

All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. Over time, your vehicle may receive updates that modify the vehicle and make material in this manual incomplete and/or inaccurate. Because of SUBARU’s interest in continual product improvement, SUBARU reserves the right to make changes to this manual at any time without notice.

If SUBARU chooses to update the manual, updated versions can be viewed by selecting your vehicle by model and year at the following URL or on your mobile device if you have access to the SUBARU app.

SUBARU of America
https://www.subaru.com/owners/vehicle-resources.html

SUBARU Canada English
https://www.subaru.ca/manuals

SUBARU Canada French
https://www.subaru.ca/manuals

MSA5M2430A

https://techinfo.subaru.com/stis/doc/ownerManual/MSA5M2430A_STIS-opt.pdf

https://static.oemdtc.com/OwnerManual/MSA5M2430A.pdf

Taking too long?

Reload document

Open in new tab

Download [103.42 MB]

SaleBestseller No. 1

BlueDriver Bluetooth Pro OBDII Scan Tool for iPhone & Android - No Subscription Fee - OBD2 Car Scanner and Code Reader - Diagnose Check Engine, ABS, SRS, Airbag & 7000+ Issues on Vehicles 1996+

[Pro OBD2 Scanner] - BlueDriver is the easiest way to scan and understand your vehicle like a professional mechanic. Read and clear your car’s trouble codes and check engine light.
[Read & Clear All The Codes] - BlueDriver's enhanced vehicle diagnostics gives you access to information normally available only to mechanics on their OBD2 scan tools. Now you can read and clear ABS, Airbag, SRS, TPMS codes, and many more.
[Get The Right Fix & View Live Data] - Much more than a car code reader, BlueDriver is a diagnostic tool. You’ll get unlimited repair reports with possible causes and fixes, plus real-time health monitoring while you drive with the live data feature.
[Wireless & Bluetooth Enabled] - Say goodbye to wires. BlueDriver connects with Bluetooth via your phone/tablet to a sensor that plugs into your car's OBDII port. Get all of the capabilities of an expensive code reader & scan tool without any annoying wires.
[User-Friendly App and Repair Videos] - BlueDriver gives you more ways to scan and fix your vehicle. Our iOS & Android app connects you to a large database of repair videos with step-by-step directions of repairs.

Bestseller No. 2

FOXWELL Car Scanner NT604 Elite OBD2 Scanner ABS SRS Transmission, Check Engine Code Reader for Cars and Trucks, Diagnostic Scan Tool with SRS Airbag, Automotive Diagnostic Tool with Live Data

[Easy to Use--Work out of box] + [FOXWELL 2025 New Version] FOXWELL NT604 Elite scan tool is the 2025 new version from FOXWELL, which is designed for those car owners who want to figure out the cause issue before fixing the car problem via scanning the most common systems like abs srs engine and transmission.The NT604 Elite diagnostic tool comes with latest software, which can be used out of box. No need to waste time to download the software first.
[Affordable] + [Reliable Car Health Monitor] Will you be confused what happen when the warning light of abs/srs/transmission/check engine flashes? Instead of taking your cars to dealership, this foxwell scanner will help you do a thorough scanning and detection for your cars and pinpoint the root cause. It will t-urn off the warning light car after the problem is fixed.👉TIPS: Airbag crash/collision data can NOT be cleared even you replace the new airbag.
[5 in 1 Diagnostic Scanner] Compared with those auto scanners (50-100), NT604 Elite code scanner not only includes their OBDII diagnosis but also it can be an abs/srs scanner, transmission and check engine code reader. When it’s an odb2 scanner, you can use it to check if your car is ready for annual test through I/M readiness menu. In addition, live data stream, built-in DTC library, data play back and print, all these features are a big plus for it. Note: doesn't support maintenance function.
[Fantastic AUTOVIN] + [No extra software fee] Through the AUTOVIN menu, this NT604 Elite car scanner allows you to get your V-IN and vehicle info rapidly, no need to take time to find your V-IN and input one by one. What's more, the NT604 Elite abs srs scanner supports 60+ car makes from worldwide (America/Asia/Europe). You don’t need to pay extra software fee.
[Solid protective case KO plastic carrying bag] + [Lifetime update] Almost all same price-level obd scanner diagnostic tool only offers plastic bag to hold on the scanner.However, NT604 Elite automotive scanner is equipped with solid protective case, preventing your obd2 scanner from damage. Then you don’t need to pay extra money to buy a solid toolbox.

SaleBestseller No. 3

BLCKTEC 430 Bluetooth OBD2 Scanner for iPhone & Android, No Subscription Fee, OBDII Car Code Reader, Diagnose Check Engine, ABS, SRS, Airbag, Supports 1996-2023 Vehicles, App only works in USA &Canada

[Transform Your Car Care Experience] - With BLCKTEC, instantly become your own professional mechanic. Effortlessly read and clear your car’s trouble codes and check engine light, ensuring your vehicle stays in top condition.
[Empower Yourself with Comprehensive Diagnostics] - Unlock the full potential of your vehicle with the BLCKTEC 430. Access detailed diagnostics previously exclusive to professional mechanics’ OBD2 scan tools, including ABS, Airbag, SRS, TPMS codes, and beyond, right at your fingertips.
[Drive with Confidence] - The BLCKTEC 430 is more than just a car code reader; it's your personal vehicle health advisor. Receive tailored repair reports with potential causes and verified solutions for your specific make and model, guiding you to the right fix every time.
[Seamless Connectivity, Ultimate Convenience] - Experience the freedom of wireless diagnostics with this portable car scanner. Easily connect via Bluetooth to our intuitive sensor and enjoy all the functionalities of high-end scan tools without the clutter of wires, directly from your smartphone or tablet. To connect the tool to the App, please DO NOT go to device's Bluetooth settings, instead, open RepairSolutions2 App and follow the instructions on the App to pair the BLCKTEC 430.
[DIY Repairs Made Easy] - Navigate car maintenance with ease using our premium app. Access a vast library of easy-to-follow repair videos, guiding you through each step of the repair process, compatible with both iOS & Android devices.

Bestseller No. 4

FOXWELL NT630 Plus OBD2 Scanner with ABS and SRS, 2025 ABS Scan Tool Bleeding Brake SRS Scanner Live Data, Car Code Reader Diagnostic Tool Bidirectional Scanner with SAS Oil Light

Pro-level ABS SRS OBD2 Scanner - Based on the NT301 FOXWELL Scanner, this car scanner takes OBD-II diagnostics to the next level by in-depth insights on reading ABS SRS Diagnostic Trouble Codes, display the Live Data: Wheel Speed Sensor, Airbag Issues, Wiring Faults, clear the ABS error codes after the car faults repaired, etc... NOTE: This code reader can only read SRS codes but CANNOT reset any Airbag crash codes. Please check the functions coverage BEFORE purchasing. NO Need to Register &Subscription.
Full-Feature ABS Diagnostics - Real-time tracking of wheel speed sensor, brake force distribution, and brake pressure with dynamic graphs for easy analysis. Effortlessly read ABS trouble codes and access freeze frame data to identify and resolve system issues. This ABS scanner diagnostic tool also monitors ABS performance during emergency braking or on slippery surfaces, providing alerts for potential problems.
Basic OBDII Scanner Functions - This obd2 scanner diagnostic tool also can Check Engine Fault Light, diagnose OBD-II modules instantly, display the Live Data with graph (engine RPM, coolant temperature, fuel trim, and sensor readings), locate bad sensors and indicate I/M readiness status before the annual inspection. Reducing the potential driving risk and keep a peak performance on the road.
Top ABS Bleed Scan Tool - After replacing the ABS pump or adding brake fluid, air can enter the ABS module, causing the pedal to feel weak or slow to return. This OBD2 scanner with ABS auto bleed will restore your brake pedal’s firmness by efficiently removing air from the ABS module. For vehicle coverage, check the FOXWELL Diagnostic Coverage List under Support on the official site. NOTE: This feature is NOT compatible with vehicles that support manual bleed.
User-Friendly & Budget-Friendly - Enjoy software updates without subscription for newer vehicle models(Any more issues about update, please let us know）. This car code reader comes with a sturdy case for easy carrying. The code reader for cars will also save diagnostic data to avoid unnecessary diagnostic costs when you must to find the professional mechanic to fix the car faults instead of addressing them by yourself.

SaleBestseller No. 5

ANCEL AD610 Pro OBD2 Scanner - ABS SRS Code Reader, Check Engine Light Diagnostic Tool with ABS Bleeding, AutoVIN, Real-Time Data, Full OBD2 Functions, SAS/Oil/EPB Reset

[ABS Diagnosis] - Quickly identify and resolve ABS-related issues, including sensor faults (such as wheel speed sensors), wiring problems (faulty circuits or connectors within the ABS system), or ABS pump failures (malfunctions in the ECU controlling the ABS). Ensure proper system operation, restore optimal braking performance, and clear any warning lights.
[SRS Diagnosis] - Quickly detect the airbag ECU itself, airbag sensor failure, airbag system plug disconnection or poor contact, seat belt sensor failure, or system error, etc, to ensure that the SRS (Supplemental Restraint system) is working properly. After repair, reset the system to clear the warning light and restore full safety performance. NOTE: It cannot reset Airbag crash or transmission codes.
[Full OBD2 Function] - Read and clear trouble codes for all OBD2 systems, including show real-time data, freeze frame data, I/M Readiness, DTC lookup, test results for o-xygen sensor, On-board monitor test, request vehicle information, component test, modules present and e-vap test. Allowing you to quickly identify and troubleshoot vehicle issues.
[AutoVIN Technology] - It simplifies diagnostics by automatically identifying the vehicle’s model and configuration, eliminating the need for manual input, and ensures accurate diagnostics by applying the correct data and algorithms, reducing errors caused by manual entry. Improves efficiency and streamlines the diagnostic process.
[ABS Auto Bleeding] - Helps bleed your vehicle's Anti-lock Braking System (ABS), removing air from the brake lines to ensure optimal brake performance. It helps prevent brake issues such as spongy pedals, inconsistent braking, and reduced stopping power, and enhances vehicle safety by ensuring the ABS system is working properly, especially during critical driving situations. NOTE: It’s not compatible with vehicles that only support manual bleeding.

Bestseller No. 6

OBD2 Scanner TOPDON AD500, Oil SAS Throttle TPMS BMS EPB Reset, Engine ABS SRS Transmission, Diagnostic Scan Tool, AutoVIN, Car Check Engine Code Reader with Battery Test, Lifetime Wi-Fi Free Update

[Brand-New ArtiDiag500] We've got everything you're looking for! Forget basic OBD2 scanners; TOPDON's ArtiDiag500 car scanner offers more. The all-new ArtiDiag500 not only includes full OBD2 functions and 4-system diagnostics but also provides DIYers with 6 maintenance services. The brand-new, cost effective AD500 is back in full swing!
[4-System Diagnostics] DIY enthusiasts, take notice! Will these 4-system diagnostics be the treasure you've been seeking? The ArtiDiag500 code reader offers in-depth testing for the engine, transmission, ABS, and SRS systems, reading fault codes and data streams. It also visualizes real-time data in chart form, simplifying complex data for storage and future playback, aiding DIY users in problem detection.
[6 Reset Functions] Hey, hang tight for a moment. With these 6 reset functions, the ArtiDiag500 has got you covered. It offers throttle adaptation along with reset capabilities for Oil, SAS, TPMS, BMS, and EPB. Seamlessly aligning the throttle, battery, tires, and brake pads with your vehicle, it also adjusts the steering angle and turns off the oil light. Looking to restore your car to its original condition? Look no further than the ArtiDiag500.
[Multiple Functions] The Smart AutoVIN of this TOPDON OBD2 scanner keeps track of your manual selections for vehicle make, model, and year and directs you to the suitable diagnostics. Max 4 Live Data streams integrated for much easier data processing. Diagnostic feedback online with this diagnostic tool to help you get tough repair operations well-completed. Real-time car battery voltage monitoring identifies probable vehicle defects.
[Global Support] Rest assured about compatibility with your vehicle and language – ArtiDiag500 currently supports 67+ car brands, 10,000+ models, covering most vehicles worldwide, and is available in 12 languages. Whether it's for your car or preferred language, there's an ideal choice for you. Plus, it's fully compatible with Android 11 for smoother use.

Bestseller No. 7

XTOOL D5S OBD2 Scanner - 2025 Code Reader for Cars & Trucks with 15 Reset Functions, Crank Sensor Relearn, FCA AutoAuth, CAN FD for GM, Engine ABS SRS Transmission Car Diagnostic Tool

Comprehensive OBD2 Scanner with 15 Resets: The XTOOL D5S car code reader and vehicle reset tool provides an advanced diagnostic solution with 15 high demand reset functions, including Electronic Parking Brake Reset (EPB), SAS, BMS Reset, Throttle Body Relearn, TPMS Reset, ABS Bleeding, Injector Coding, Gearbox Match, Suspension Adjustment, Headlight, Window Initialization, Crank Sensor Relearn and more. Equipped with CAN FD Protocol and FAC AutoAuth, the D5S obdii scanner diagnostic tool ensures compatibility with a broad range of modern vehicles, allowing users to address common maintenance needs quickly.
4 Main System Car Diagnostic Scanner & Full OBD2 Diagnostics: The XTOOL D5S vehicle code reader is ideal for home mechanics, DIYers, and professionals, providing access to Transmission/Engine/ABS/SRS to read dtcs, and live data can be displayed in text or up to 4 pid data graphs, along with full OBD2 diagnostics to check the engine light on, other obd2 issues and routine maintenance. This scan tool ensures you can keep your vehicles in top condition, avoiding costly repairs or unexpected breakdowns. NOTE: Some vehicles display three systems after connection because the transmission and engine of some vehicles are integrated into one
One-Tap W!Fi Updates + No Software Fees: Enjoy a 5.45” high-resolution touchscreen (1440x720) that’s easy to read, even in low light. Free lifetime software updates over Wi-Fi keep your D5S OBD2 Scanner Diagnostic Tool updated with the latest features—no hidden fees. Ample 32GB storage plus expandable memory ensures room for all your diagnostic data, while durable silicone grips provide comfortable, secure handling. This makes D5S a cost-effective, long-term investment for continuous diagnostic support, a reli~able automotive scanner diagnostic tool for your family
Wide Compatibility Across 90+ Vehicle Brands: The XTOOL D5S Scanner for cars and trucks works with OBDII-equipped vehicles built after 1996, covering over 90 vehicle brands, including 12V diesel and SUVs, minivans, and light-duty trucks. It supports most of protocols include CAN FD for broad compatibility. For vehicle-specific compatibility, send us your vehicle information to check the compatibility before purchase
Super Clear Navigation Display: The XTOOL D5S car scanner enhances your diagnostic workflow with a super clear navigation display, designed for convenience and speed. TOP Capability include a Voltage Display for real-time monitoring of your vehicle’s electrical system, a “My Vehicle” Menu for adding and managing vehicle information, and Quick Button Interfaces for both Auto Scan and OBD2 Diagnostics, ensuring you can quickly access the menu you need. These features streamline the diagnostic process, allowing you to focus on what matters most—Efficient vehicle maintenance

Bestseller No. 8

FOXWELL OBD2 Scanner NT716 Bidirectional Scan Tool, ABS SRS Transmission Engine, 9 Resets, Code Reader, Car Scanner with ABS Bleeding/SAS/Oil Light/EPB/BMS/DPF/Throttle Relearn/Injector Coding/TPMS

2025 FOXWELL Scanner NT716: New Bidirectional Scan Tool – Get active test capabilities for ABS, Airbag, Transmission, and Engine systems, easily perform various tests such as injectors, Cooling Fan, Fuel Pump, etc.The price of $ 200+ enjoys a $ 300-500 code reader service! With the NT716 Scanner Diagnostic Tool, You only need to plug in the device to accurately obtain real -time data information. To understand whether your car's system actuator is normal, prevent danger in advance, and drive with confidence. 👉P.S. The active test function needs to be upgraded before it can be used.
4-System Car Scanner for ABS, Airbag, Transmission, and Engine – Easily read error codes and ECU information, view 4-in-1 live data, and save or download data for later reference. The built-in DTC library explains fault codes clearly, and once issues are fixed, you can clear codes and turn off warning lights with just one tap. FOXWELL NT716 Code Scanner empowers you to handle most diagnostics on your own, saving you time and money instead of relying on an elusive mechanic.
9 Reset Functions – Unlike other obd2 scanner diagnostic tools in this price range that offer only 5–7 resets, FOXWELL NT716 scan tool supports 9 essential reset functions, including ABS Bleeding, SAS, Oil Light, EPB, BMS, DPF, Throttle Relearn, Injector Coding, and TPMS. You can monitor the running status of various systems of the car by live data flow, identify potential problems, reset system data, and extinguish the flashing oil lamp fault light! ❗Notice:This product does NOT have special functions for car k-ey p-rogramming.
Full OBD2 Scanner with Plug-and-Play – Enjoy comprehensive OBDii functions, including AutoVIN for automatic vehicle info recognition, one-click I/M Readiness for emissions checks, real-time data, and freeze frame capture… Scanner FOXWELL NT716 makes it easy to prepare for annual inspections, helping you stay road-ready with confidence each year.
5.5" HD Touchscreen Tablet Diagnostic Scanner– Get rid of the confusion caused by the 2.8" scanner with multi - button operation; Built -in 4000mAh battery, the new version of the battery life is greatly enhanced; No subscription fee, no additional charges, share reports anytime, one - click free WiFi upgrade; Android 9.0 system, 24+language , support 100+ car brands from 1996 to 2025.

Bestseller No. 9

Autel AutoLink AL619 Scanner, 2025 ABS SRS Airbag Warning Light Diagnostic Scan Tool, Up of AL519 ML519 ML619, 10 OBDII Test Modes, DTCs Lookup, Live Data, Turn Off Check Engine Light OBD2 Code Reader

🎉【2025 Upgraded Ver. of AL519/ ML519/ ML619】Autel develops the brand-new AutoLink AL619 as the advanced ver. of Autel ML519, AL519, AL319, MS309. This AL619 OBD2 scanner can scan ABS & SRS systems, and support 10 Modes of OBD II Diagnostics Function on Worldwide Vehicles to read, erase codes and turn off the MIL, ABS, SRS warning lights so that you can better maintain your car when related malfunctions occur and make your vehicle ready for the annual test.🚦📢Kindly note: AL619 only supports 2015 or pre-2015 cars. And services are not universal, please send us your car VIN# to check the compatibility before ordering.📩AutelStoreOnline @ outlook . com📩.
🎉【Accurate ABS/ SRS Diagnostics Functions】The ABS/ SRS diagnostic function is used to retrieve and clear codes from the ABS/ SRS systems. It can read and clear DTCs, show definitions of each code, display live data of multiple sensors in the graph to locate fault causes, and assist home mechanics to do the proper repair and clear ABS & Airbag warning lights. Diagnoses ABS/ SRS system codes on most 1996 and newer major vehicle models. Please email 📩 AutelStoreOnline @ outlook . com 📩 for help.
🎉【All 10 Modes of OBD II Diagnostics Function】The OBD II Diagnostics function is a fast-access option that allows you to carry out a quick test on the engine system of OBD II vehicles. Read Codes, Erase Codes, Live Data, Freeze Frame, Retrieving I/M Readiness Status, O2 Monitor Test, On-Board Monitor Test, DTC Lookup, Component Test, Viewing Vehicle Information, Modules Present.
🎉【Live Data and Freeze Frame Data】With Live Data functions, Autel AL619 OBD2 diagnostic code reader allows you to view the live PID (Parameter Identification Data) of the vehicle's computer module(s) in text, graph to check the status of various sensors. And Freeze Frame Data enables you to view the vehicle's operating parameters at the moment a DTC is detected. These information will aid the technician by allowing the parameters to be duplicated for diagnostic and repair purposes.
🎉【DTC Lookup Feature】Besides showing you the code’s definition while you are reading the diagnostic trouble codes, AL619 features comparably user-friendly DTC Lookup Function which enables you to retrieve the definitions of any error codes from the large database of AL619, saving you from the hassle of wasting time searching definition of every code via Google.

SaleBestseller No. 10

2025 FOXWELL NT614 Elite OBD2 Scanner with 5 Resets ABS Bleeding/SAS Calibration/Oil/EPB/Throttle, Upgrade of NT604 Code Reader Scan Tools, ABS SRS Engine Transmission Battery Test Car Scanner

【UPGRADE OF NT604-POWERFUL 5 RESETS】Wanna to do maintenance service for your car however the basic 4 system scanner tool can't do it? Then FOXWELL NT614 Elite-the upgraded version of nt604, was born for providing you with 5 special functions-ABS Bleeding/Oil Reset/SAS Calibration/EPB Reset/Throttle Reset. These functions are enough for your daily needs. No need to buy those 300-600 dollors obd2 scanner. Saving your unnecessary repair fee with FOXWELL nt614 car scanner diagnostic tool!
【ENGINE/ABS/SRS/TRANSMISSION CODE READER】Don't know what's wrong with your car when the warning light of ABS, transmission, SRS, Engine flashes? NT614 Elite obd2 scanner can pinpoint the problem components. It boasts many functions of engine, abs, srs and transmission such as read & erase fault codes and grapgh live data like engine temp, wheel speed sensor, read transmission temperature, etc. Compared with car repairs, using foxwell nt614 elite is more convenient and a-ffordable.
【Best Bang For Your Buck!-FOXWELL NT614 Elite】1. 2025 New software-faster than old one. 2. One click lifetime WIFI f-ree update, no need to use the annoying Micro SD card. 3. New Update-No need to register on the FOXWELL website before use, more convenient! 4. More intuitive viewing with new interface, you can find I/M, Battery Test, DTC Lookup directly.
【ABS BLEEDING OBD SCANNER】Do you always feel the brake pedal was slowly sinking to floor or it's loose after doing a complete front & rear brake job? And then you need to take more time than normal to stop your car, which is very dangerous. That's because when you open the brake system to replace components, air gets inside. To get a firm brake pedal, the air need to be removed by bleeding the brakes. NT614 Elite odb2 scanner can do ABS BLEEDING perfectly for your cars.
【SMART AUTOVIN & LIFETIME F-REE WIFI UPDATE & PERFECT GIFT CHOICE】With the fantastic AUTOVIN function, this nt614 scan tool can get your VIN and vehicle info rapidly. No need to spend much time in finding your VIN and input it one by one. Also, the lifetime f-ree wifi update is provided for more vehicle coverage, bug fixes, newly added parameters. SAVE AT LEAST 1000+ PER YEAR. And this automotive scanner is a best gift for your Dad, Husband, Boyfriend and Handy Men.

[comment type=”hidden”]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Pictorial index Search by illustration For safety and security Electric Vehicle system Vehicle status information and indicators Before driving Driving Interior features Maintenance and care When trouble arises Vehicle specifications Make sure to read through them (Main topics: Child seat, theft deterrent system) Reading charging-related information (Main topics: Electric Vehicle system, charging methods) Reading driving-related information (Main topics: Meters, multi-information display) Opening and closing the doors and windows, adjustment before driving (Main topics: Keys, doors, seats) Operations and advice which are necessary for driving (Main topics: Starting Electric Vehicle system, driving support systems) Usage of the interior features (Main topics: Air conditioner, storage features) Caring for your vehicle and maintenance procedures (Main topics: Interior and exterior, light bulbs) What to do in case of malfunction and emergency (Main topics: 12-volt battery discharge, flat tire) Vehicle specifications, customizable features (Main topics: Fluids, tire inflation pressure) For owners Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners, and seat belt, SRS airbag and headlight aim instructions for Canadian owners Index Search by symptom Search alphabetically 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS For your information. 8 Reading this manual 14 How to search 15 Pictorial index 16 1 For safety and security 1-1. For safe use Before driving .28 For safe driving 29 Seat belts .31 SRS airbags .35 Front passenger occupant classification system 43 1-2. Child safety Riding with children 48 Child restraint systems.49 1-3. Emergency assistance SUBARU SOLTERRA CON- NECT .63 1-4. Theft deterrent system Immobilizer system 68 Alarm69 2 Electric Vehicle system 2-1. Electric vehicle system Electric Vehicle system fea- tures .72 Electric Vehicle system pre- cautions76 Battery Electric Vehicle driv- ing tips81 Driving range83 2-2. Charging Charging equipment.85 AC charging cable87 Locking and unlocking AC charging connector.93 Power sources that can be used95 Charging methods 97 Charging tips 99 Things to know before charging. 100 How to use AC charging 104 How to use DC charging 112 Using the charging schedule function 117 Using My Room Mode. 127 When charging cannot be carried out . 131 Vehicle status 3 information and indicators 3-1. Instrument cluster Warning lights and indicators 148 Gauges and meters. 152 Multi-information display 155 TABLE OF CONTENTS 3 4 Before driving 5 Driving 4-1. Key information Keys 162 Digital key . 165 4-2. Opening, closing and lock- ing the doors Side doors. 167 Back door 172 Smart key system . 183 4-3. Adjusting the seats Front seats 188 Rear seats. 189 Head restraints 192 4-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors Steering wheel 195 Inside rear view mirror 196 Digital inner mirror. 197 Outside rear view mirrors 205 4-5. Opening, closing the win- dows Power windows . 208 4-6. Favorite settings Driving position memory 211 My Settings . 215 5-1. Before driving Driving the vehicle. 219 Cargo and luggage 225 Vehicle load limits 230 1 Trailer towing . 231 Dinghy towing 232 2 5-2. Driving procedures Power (ignition) switch 233 Shift position 237 3 Turn signal lever 244 Parking brake 245 4 Brake Hold. 248 5-3. Operating the lights and wipers 5 Headlight switch 250 AHB (Automatic High Beam) 252 6 Fog light switch 255 Windshield wipers and 7 washer . 256 8 9 10 4 TABLE OF CONTENTS 5-4. Using the driving support systems SUBARU Safety Sense soft- ware update 259 SUBARU Safety Sense. 260 Driver monitor . 268 PCS (Pre-Collision System) 270 LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) 282 LCA (Lane Change Assist) 288 LDA (Lane Departure Alert) 292 PDA (Proactive driving assist) 297 RSA (Road Sign Assist) 303 Dynamic radar cruise control 305 Cruise control 316 FCTA (Cross Traffic Alert) 320 Emergency Driving Stop Sys- tem 322 Traffic Jam Assist 325 BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) 331 Safe Exit Assist . 336 SUBARU Parking Assist 341 RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) 351 RCD (Rear Camera Detec- tion) . 356 PKSB (Parking Support Brake) 360 Parking Support Brake func- tion (static objects front and rear of the vehicle/static objects around the vehicle) 365 Parking Support Brake func- tion (moving vehicles rear of the vehicle) 369 Parking Support Brake func- tion (pedestrians rear of the vehicle) 371 Advanced Park 373 Drive mode select switch411 X-MODE 412 Driving assist systems. 417 5-5. Driving tips Winter driving tips 423 Utility vehicle precautions 426 TABLE OF CONTENTS 5 6 Interior features 7 Maintenance and care 6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger ALL AUTO (ECO) control 430 Automatic air conditioning system. 432 Remote Air Conditioning Sys- tem 439 Heated steering wheel/seat heaters/seat ventila- tors/radiant heaters . 441 6-2. Using the interior lights Interior lights list 445 6-3. Using the storage features List of storage features . 448 Luggage compartment fea- tures 451 6-4. Using the other interior fea- tures Electronic sunshade 456 Other interior features . 458 Garage door opener 469 7-1. Maintenance and care Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior 478 Cleaning and protecting the 1 vehicle interior . 481 7-2. Maintenance Maintenance requirements 2 485 General maintenance 486 3 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Do-it-yourself service precau- tions. 489 4 Hood 491 Positioning a floor jack 493 Motor compartment . 494 5 Tires 501 Replacing the tire 514 6 Tire inflation pressure 521 Wheels 523 Air conditioning filter 524 7 Electronic key battery 527 Checking and replacing fuses 8 529 Headlight aim 531 Light bulbs . 532 9 10 6 TABLE OF CONTENTS 8 When trouble arises 9 Vehicle specifications 8-1. Essential information Emergency flashers 534 If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency 535 If the vehicle is submerged or water on the road is rising 536 8-2. Steps to take in an emer- gency If your vehicle needs to be towed. 537 If you think something is wrong 541 If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds 542 If a warning message is dis- played 551 If you have a flat tire 557 If the EV system will not start 568 If you lose your keys . 570 If the electronic key does not operate properly 570 If the 12-volt battery is dis- charged . 572 If your vehicle overheats 576 If the vehicle becomes stuck 578 9-1. Specifications Maintenance data 582 Tire information . 588 9-2. Customization Customizable features. 598 9-3. Initialization Items to initialize 612 10 For owners 10-1.For owners Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners . 614 Reporting safety defects for Canadian owners 614 Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French) 615 SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French) 616 Headlight aim instructions for Canadian owners (in French) 622 TABLE OF CONTENTS 7 Index What to do if. (Troubleshoot- ing) 626 Alphabetical Index. 629 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 8 For your information Main Owner’s Manual Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle and the illustrations used may differ from your vehicle. All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. Over time, your vehicle may receive updates that modify the vehicle and make material in this manual incomplete and/or inaccurate. Because of SUB- ARU’s interest in continual prod- uct improvement, SUBARU reserves the right to make changes to this manual at any time without notice. If SUBARU chooses to update the manual, updated versions can be viewed by selecting your vehicle by model and year at the following URL or on your mobile device if you have access to the SUBARU app. ▶ SUBARU of America https://www.subaru.com/ owners/vehicle-resources.html ▶ SUBARU Canada English https://www.subaru.ca/manuals ▶ SUBARU Canada French https://www.subaru.ca/manuals Cyber Attack Risk Installing electronic devices and radios increases the risk of cyber attacks through the installed parts, which may lead to unexpected accidents and leakage of personal informa- tion. SUBARU does not make any guarantees for problems caused by installing non-genu- ine SUBARU products. Accessories, spare parts and modification of your SUBARU A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for SUBARU vehicles are currently available in the market. You should know that SUBARU does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their per- formance, repair, or replace- ment, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your SUB- ARU vehicle. This vehicle should not be modi- fied with non-genuine SUBARU products. Modification with non- genuine SUBARU products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regu- lations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty. Also, remodeling like this will have an effect on advanced safety equipment such as SUB- ARU Safety Sense and there is a danger that it will not work properly or the danger that it may work in situations where it should not be working. Installation of a mobile two-way radio system The installation of a mobile two- way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as: ⚫ EV system ⚫ SUBARU Safety Sense ⚫ Anti-lock brake system ⚫ SRS airbag system ⚫ Seat belt pretensioner system Be sure to check with your SUB- ARU dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation of a mobile two-way radio system. High voltage parts and cables on the battery electric vehicles emit approximately the same amount of electromagnetic waves as the conventional gas- oline powered vehicles or home electronic appliances despite of their electromagnetic shielding. 9 Unwanted noise may occur in the reception of the mobile two- way radio. Vehicle data recording The vehicle is equipped with sophisticated computers that will record certain data, such as: • Electric motor speed (traction motor speed) • Accelerator status • Brake status • Vehicle speed • Operation status of the driving assist systems • Images from the cameras Your vehicle is equipped with cameras. Contact your SUB- ARU dealer for the location of recording cameras. The recorded data varies according to the vehicle grade level and options with which it is equipped. These computers do not record conversations or sounds, and only record images outside of the vehicle in certain situations. ⚫ Data Transmission Your vehicle may transmit the data recorded in these computers to SUBARU without requiring notifica- tion to you. ⚫ Data usage SUBARU may use the data recorded in this computer to diag- nose malfunctions, conduct research and development, and 10 improve quality. SUBARU will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except: • With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if the vehicle is leased • In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency • For use by SUBARU in a lawsuit • For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehi- cle or vehicle owner ⚫ Recorded image information can be erased by your SUB- ARU dealer. The image recording function can be disabled. However, if the func- tion is disabled, data from when the system operates will not be avail- able. ⚫ To learn more about the vehi- cle data collected, used and shared by SUBARU, please visit www.toyota.com/ privacyvts/. Usage of data collected through SUBARU SOL- TERRA CONNECT (U.S.mainland only) If your SUBARU has SUBARU SOLTERRA CONNECT and if you have subscribed to those services, please refer to the SUBARU SOLTERRA CON- NECT Telematics Subscription Service Agreement for informa- tion on data collected and its usage. ⚫ To learn more about the vehi- cle data collected, used and shared by SUBARU, please visit www.toyota.com/ privacyvts/. The content on the website also applies to the SUBARU SOL- TERRA CONNECT. Statement on Warranty Coverage for Aftermarket and Recycled Parts (For U.S. Owners) The Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. s.2301 et seq., makes it illegal for motor vehicle manufacturers to void a motor vehicle warranty or deny war- ranty coverage solely because an aftermarket or recycled part has been used to repair the vehicle or someone other than the authorized service provider performed service on the vehi- cle. This provision does not apply to a new motor vehicle purchased solely for commercial or industrial use. Under federal law, a manufac- turer may deny warranty cover- age and charge for repairs to a vehicle if it is discovered that an aftermarket or recycled part installed on the vehicle is defec- tive or was installed incorrectly and caused damage to another part of the vehicle otherwise covered under warranty. The Federal Trade Commission requires that a manufacturer demonstrate that an aftermar- ket or recycled part or service performed by a person other than an authorized service pro- vider caused damage to another part of the vehicle otherwise covered under warranty before denying warranty coverage. Additionally, federal law allows a manufacturer to void a motor vehicle warranty or deny war- ranty coverage if the manufac- turer provides the article or service to consumers free of charge under the warranty or the manufacturer has secured a waiver from the Federal Trade Commission. Event data recorder This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 sec- onds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is 11 designed to record such data as: • How various systems in your vehicle were operating; • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened; • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelera- tor and/or brake pedal; and, • How fast the vehicle was trav- eling. These data can help provide a better understanding of the cir- cumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-triv- ial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. How- ever, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of per- sonally identifying data rou- tinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufac- turer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the spe- cial equipment, can read the information if they have access 12 to the vehicle or the EDR. ⚫ Disclosure of the EDR data SUBARU will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when: • An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the lessee for a leased vehicle) is obtained • In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency • For use by SUBARU in a lawsuit However, if necessary, SUBARU may: • Use the data for research on vehicle safety performance • Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing information about the specific vehicle or vehicle owner Perchlorate Material Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard- ouswaste/perchlorate. Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may include the airbags, seat belt pretensioners, wireless remote control batteries, and the batter- ies in the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters. “QR Code” The word “QR Code” is regis- tered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED in Japan and other countries. Scrapping of your SUBA- RU The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your SUBARU contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and dis- posed of by a qualified service shop or by your SUBARU dealer before you scrap your vehicle. 13 WARNING ■ General precautions while driving Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to oper- ate your vehicle. Alcohol and cer- tain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coor- dination, which could lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury. Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents. Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Any- thing that distracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or others. ■ General precaution regarding children’s safety Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key. Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a danger that children may injure them- selves by playing with the side windows, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children. 14 Reading this manual Explains symbols used in this manual Symbols in this manual Symbols Meanings WARNING: Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause death or serious injury to people. NOTICE: Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause damage to or a malfunction in the vehicle or its equip- ment. Indicates operating or working procedures. Follow the steps in numerical order. Symbols in illustrations Symbols Meanings Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.) used to operate switches and other devices. Indicates the outcome of an operation (e.g. a lid opens). Symbols Meanings Indicates the compo- nent or position being explained. Means Do not, Do not do this, or Do not let this happen. How to search ■ Searching by name ⚫ Alphabetical index: →P.629 ■ Searching by installation position ⚫ Pictorial index: →P.16 ■ Searching by symptom or sound ⚫ What to do if. (Troubleshoot- ing): →P.626 15 ■ Searching by title ⚫ Table of contents: →P.2 16 Pictorial index Pictorial index ■Exterior Side doors P.167 Locking/unlocking P.167 Opening/closing the side windows . P.208 Locking/unlocking by using the mechanical key P.570 Warning messages P.551 Back door . P.172 Locking/unlocking P.173 Opening/closing the back door P.174 Warning messages P.551 Power back door* . P.175 Outside rear view mirrors . P.205 Adjusting the mirror angle P.205 Folding the mirrors . P.206 Defogging the mirrors P.434 Pictorial index 17 Windshield wipers P.256 Precautions against winter season P.423 To prevent freezing (windshield wiper de-icer). P.434 Precautions against car wash (Rain-sensing windshield wipers) P.479 Charging port . P.85 Charging method . P.97 Tires. P.501 Tire size/inflation pressure . P.587 Winter tires/tire chain . P.423 Checking/rotation/tire pressure warning system P.501 Coping with flat tires. P.557 Hood P.491 Opening . P.491 Coping with overheat . P.576 Warning messages P.551 Light bulbs of the exterior lights for driving (Replacing method: P.532) Headlights. P.250 Parking lights/turn signal lights/ daytime running lights P.250 Front side marker lights P.250 Tail lights. P.250 Turn signal lights . P.244 Stop lights Rear side marker lights . P.250 Tail lights. P.250 Back-up light Shifting the shift position to R P.237 18 Pictorial index License plate lights P.250 Side turn signal lights . P.244 Front fog lights* P.255 *: If equipped Pictorial index 19 ■Instrument panel Power switch P.233 Starting the EV system/changing the modes . P.233, 236 Emergency stop of the EV system . P.535 When the EV system will not start . P.568 Warning messages P.551 Rotary shifter P.238 Changing the shift position. P.238 Precautions against towing P.537 Meters . P.152 Reading the meters/ adjusting the instrument panel light . P.152, 155 Warning lights/indicator lights P.148 When the warning lights come on P.542 Multi-information display P.155 Display . P.155 When the warning messages are displayed P.551 20 Pictorial index Turn signal lever. P.244 Headlight switch P.250 Headlights/parking lights/tail lights/license plate lights/ daytime running lights P.250 Front fog lights*1. P.255 Windshield wiper and washer switch. P.256 Usage. P.256 Adding washer fluid P.500 Warning messages P.551 Emergency flasher switch. P.534 Hood lock release lever . P.491 Tilt and telescopic steering lock release lever P.195 Adjustment . P.195 Air conditioning system P.432 Usage. P.432 Rear window defogger . P.434 Multimedia system*2 *1: If equipped *2: Refer to “MULTIMEDIA OWNER’S MANUAL”. Pictorial index 21 ■Switches Automatic High Beam switch . P.252 Power back door switch*1 . P.176 “S PEDAL DRIVE” switch P.242 Brake hold switch P.248 Parking brake switch . P.245 Applying/releasing P.245 Precautions against winter season P.424 Warning buzzer/message P.247, 551 Drive mode select switch P.411 Camera switch*1, 2 Advanced Park (parking assist system) main switch*1 P.373 VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) off switch . P.418 Grip control switch P.412 “X-MODE” switch . P.412 22 Pictorial index “ODO TRIP” switch P.154 Instrument panel light control switches P.155 *1: If equipped *2: Refer to “MULTIMEDIA OWNER’S MANUAL”. Position memory switches*. P.211 Door lock switches P.170 Power window switches P.208 Outside rear view mirror switches . P.205 Window lock switch . P.210 *: If equipped Pictorial index 23 Meter control switches P.156 TEL switch* . P.156 Cruise control switch Dynamic radar cruise control . P.305 Cruise control . P.316 LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) switch . P.282 Audio remote control switches* Talk switch* Paddle switches . P.241 *: Refer to “MULTIMEDIA OWNER’S MANUAL”. 24 Pictorial index ■Interior SRS airbags P.35 Floor mats. P.28 Front seats P.188 Rear seats . P.189 Head restraints . P.192 Seat belts P.31 Inside lock buttons P.170 Assist grips P.468 Coat hooks . P.468 Cup holders P.449 Console box . P.449 Rear seat heater switches* P.442 *: If equipped Pictorial index 25 ■Ceiling Inside rear view mirror*1 P.196 Digital inner mirror*1 P.197 Sun visors. P.458 Vanity mirrors . P.458 Electronic sunshade switches*1 . P.456 Interior lights*2 . P.446 Personal lights . P.447 “SOS” button P.63 *1: If equipped *2: The illustration shows the front, but they are also equipped in the rear. 26 Pictorial index 27 For safety and security 1 1-1. For safe use Before driving . 28 For safe driving 29 1 Seat belts . 31 SRS airbags . 35 Front passenger occupant classification system 43 1-2. Child safety Riding with children 48 Child restraint systems. 49 1-3. Emergency assistance SUBARU SOLTERRA CON- NECT . 63 1-4. Theft deterrent system Immobilizer system 68 Alarm 69 28 1-1. For safe use Before driving Observe the following before starting off in the vehicle to ensure safety of driving. Installing floor mats Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place onto the carpet. 1 Insert the retaining hooks (clips) into the floor mat eye- lets. 2 Turn the upper knob of each retaining hook (clip) to secure the floor mats in place. The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown in the illustration. WARNING Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may cause the driver’s floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may become difficult to stop the vehi- cle. This could lead to an acci- dent, resulting in death or serious injury. ■ When installing the driver’s floor mat ● Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year vehicles, even if they are SUBARU Genuine floor mats. ●Only use floor mats designed for the driver’s seat. ● Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) provided. ● Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other. ● Do not place the floor mat bot- tom-side up or upside-down. Always align the marks . 1-1. For safe use 29 WARNING ■ Before driving ● Check that the floor mat is securely fixed in the correct place with all the provided retaining hooks (clips). Be espe- cially careful to perform this check after cleaning the floor. ●With the EV system stopped and the shift position in P, fully depress each pedal to the floor to make sure it does not inter- fere with the floor mat. For safe driving For safe driving, adjust the seat and mirror to an appro- priate position before driv- ing. 1 Correct driving posture Adjust the angle of the seatback so that you are sit- ting straight up and so that you do not have to lean for- ward to steer. (→P.188) Adjust the seat so that you can depress the pedals fully and so that your arms bend slightly at the elbow when gripping the steering wheel. (→P.188) Lock the head restraint in place with the center of the head restraint closest to the top of your ears. (→P.192) Wear the seat belt correctly. (→P.32) 30 1-1. For safe use WARNING Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ● Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat while driving. Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. ● Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback. A cushion may pre- vent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the effec- tiveness of the seat belt and head restraint. ● Do not place anything under the front seats. Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident and the adjustment mechanism may also be damaged. ●Always observe the legal speed limit when driving on public roads. ●When driving over long dis- tances, take regular breaks before you start to feel tired. Also, if you feel tired or sleepy while driving, do not force your- self to continue driving and take a break immediately. properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (→P.49) Adjusting the mirrors Make sure that you can see the rear of the vehicle clearly by adjusting the inside rear view mirror (if equipped), Digital inner mirror (if equipped) and outside rear view mirrors properly. (→P.196, 197, 205) Correct use of the seat belts Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle. (→P.32) Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to Seat belts Make sure that all occu- pants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle. WARNING Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury. ■ Wearing a seat belt ●Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt. ●Always wear a seat belt prop- erly. ●Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more than one person at once, including chil- dren. ●SUBARU recommends that chil- dren be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system. ● To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than necessary. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well back in the seats. ● Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm. ●Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips. 1-1. For safe use 31 ■ Pregnant women Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (→P.32) Women who are pregnant should position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in the same manner as other occupants, 1 extending the shoulder belt com- pletely over the shoulder and avoiding belt contact with the rounding of the abdominal area. If the seat belt is not worn prop- erly, not only the pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer death or serious injury as a result of sudden braking or a colli- sion. ■ People suffering illness Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (→P.32) ■ When children are in the vehi- cle →P.57 ■ Seat belt damage and wear ● Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed in the door. 32 1-1. For safe use WARNING ● Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury. ●Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted. If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your SUBARU dealer. ● Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehi- cle has been involved in a seri- ous accident, even if there is no obvious damage. ● Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your SUBARU dealer. Inappropriate handling may lead to incorrect operation. Correct use of the seat belts ⚫ Position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips. ⚫ Adjust the position of the seatback. Sit up straight and well back in the seat. ⚫ Do not twist the seat belt. ■ Child seat belt usage The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size. ●Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (→P.49) ●When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehi- cle’s seat belt, follow the instruc- tions regarding seat belt usage. (→P.31) Fastening and releasing the seat belt ⚫ Extend the shoulder belt so that it comes fully over the shoulder, but does not come into contact with the neck or slide off the shoulder. 1 To fasten the seat belt, push the plate into the buckle until a click sound is heard. 2 To release the seat belt, press the release button . 1-1. For safe use 33 ■ Emergency locking retractor (ELR) The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend so that you can move around fully. ■ Automatic locking retractor (ALR) When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold a child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. Adjusting the seat belt shoulder anchor height (front seats) WARNING ■ Adjustable shoulder anchor Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoul- der. Failure to do so could reduce 1 the amount of protection in an accident and cause death or seri- ous injuries in the event of a sud- den stop, sudden swerve or accident. Seat belt pretensioners When the vehicle is subjected to a severe frontal or side impact or rollover, the pretensioners retract the seat belts of the front seats and rear outer seats to securely restrain the occupants. The pretensioners will not operate in minor frontal or side impacts, or rear impacts. 1 Push the seat belt shoulder anchor down while pressing the release button . 2 Push the seat belt shoulder anchor up. Move the height adjuster up and down as needed until you hear a click. ■ Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been acti- vated If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will acti- vate for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subse- quent collisions. ■ PCS-linked control If the PCS (Pre-Collision System) determines that the possibility of a collision with a vehicle is high, the seat belt pretensioners will be pre- pared to operate. 34 1-1. For safe use WARNING ■ Seat belt pretensioners Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden braking or an accident. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passen- ger’s seat. Doing so will disperse the pas- senger’s weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger’s weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for the front pas- senger’s seat may not operate in the event of a collision. ● If a pretensioner has operated, the SRS warning light will illumi- nate. In this situation, the seat belt cannot be used and must be replaced by your SUBARU dealer. 1-1. For safe use 35 SRS airbags The SRS airbags deploy when the vehicle is subjected to cer- tain types of severe impact that may cause significant injury to the occupants. The airbags work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious injury. 1 SRS airbag system ■ Location of the SRS airbags SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag Help reduce impact to the head and chest of the driver and front passenger SRS knee airbags Help reduce impact to the driver and front passenger SRS side airbags Help reduce impact to the chest of the occupants of the front seats SRS curtain shield airbags • Help reduce impact to the heads of the occupants of the front and rear outer seats • Can help prevent the occupants from being thrown from the vehicle in the event of a vehicle rollover 36 1-1. For safe use Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based on US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The air- bag sensor assembly (ECU) controls airbag deployment based on information obtained from the sensors, etc., shown in the system components diagram above. This information includes crash sever- ity and occupant information. As the airbags deploy, a chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants. unable to communicate, the agent ■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate) ●Slight abrasions, burns, bruising, etc., may be sustained from SRS airbags, due to the extremely high speed of deployment (inflation) by hot gases. ●A loud noise and white powder will be emitted. ●Parts of the airbag module (steer- ing wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well as the parts around the airbags may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot. ●The windshield may crack. ●The EV system will be stopped. (→P.80) ●All of the doors will be unlocked. (→P.168) ●The brakes and stop lights will be controlled automatically. (→P.418) ●The interior lights will turn on auto- matically. (→P.446) ●The emergency flashers will turn on automatically. (→P.534) ●For SUBARU SOLTERRA CON- NECT subscribers, if any of the following situations occur, the sys- tem is designed to send an emer- gency call to the response center, notifying them of the vehicle’s location (without needing to push the “SOS” button) and an agent will attempt to speak with the occupants to ascertain the level of emergency and assistance required. If the occupants are automatically treats the call as an emergency and helps to dispatch the necessary emergency ser- vices. (→P.63) • When an SRS airbag has been deployed • When a seat belt pretensioner has operated • When the vehicle has been involved in a severe rear-end colli- sion ■ The SRS airbags deploy in a frontal impact when ●The following SRS airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds a threshold level (level of force corresponding to an approximately 12 – 18 mph [20 – 30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or deform): • SRS front airbags • SRS knee airbags ● The threshold level at which the SRS airbags will deploy will be higher than normal in the following situations: • When the vehicle collides with an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which moves or deforms on impact • If the vehicle is involved in an underride collision, such as a colli- sion in which the front of the vehi- cle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck ● Depending on the type of collision, only the following may deploy: • Seat belt pretensioners • SRS knee airbags ●The SRS airbags for the front pas- senger’s seat will not deploy if there is no passenger in the front passenger seat. However, the SRS airbags for the front passen- ger’s seat may deploy, even if the seat is unoccupied, if luggage is put on the seat. ●In the event of an especially 1-1. For safe use 37 1 severe frontal collision, the left and right SRS curtain shield air- bags may also deploy. ■ The SRS airbags deploy in a side impact when ●The following SRS airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (level of force corresponding to the impact force produced by an approximately 3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle colliding with the pas- senger compartment at a perpen- dicular angle at an approximate speed of 12 – 18 mph [20 – 30 km/h]): • SRS side airbags • SRS curtain shield airbags ●In the event of a side collision, regardless of the impacted side, both the left and right SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy. ●If the vehicle is involved in a rollo- ver, the following SRS airbags will deploy: • Both left and right SRS curtain shield airbags ■ The SRS airbags deploy in an underside impact when ●The following airbags may deploy if the underside of the vehicle col- lides with a hard object: • SRS front airbags • SRS knee airbags • SRS side airbags • SRS curtain shield airbags ●The following airbags may deploy if the vehicle becomes signifi- cantly tilted or is strongly impacted by skidding into a curb, etc.: • SRS curtain shield airbags ■ The SRS side airbags will not deploy when ●The following SRS airbags will not normally deploy in side or rear col- lisions, vehicle rollovers, or low speed frontal collisions. However, if such a collision causes sufficient sudden deceleration, the SRS air- bags may deploy. • SRS front airbags • SRS knee airbags ●The following SRS airbags may not deploy if the vehicle is collided with at a certain angle or in a side collision where an area of the vehicle other than the passenger compartment is collided with: • SRS side airbags • SRS curtain shield airbags 38 1-1. For safe use ●The following SRS airbags will not normally deploy in front or rear collisions, vehicle rollovers, or low speed side collisions: • SRS side airbags ●The following SRS airbags will not normally deploy in rear collisions, end over end vehicle rollovers, or low speed front or side collisions: • SRS curtain shield airbags ■ When to contact your SUBARU dealer In the following situations, the vehi- cle will require inspection and/or repair. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. ●When any of the SRS airbags have been deployed ●When the front of the vehicle is damaged or deformed, or was involved in a collision that was not severe enough to cause any of the following SRS airbags to deploy: • SRS front airbags • SRS knee airbags ●When a door or its surrounding area is damaged, deformed or has had a hole made in it, or was involved in a collision that was not severe enough to cause any of the following SRS airbags to deploy: • SRS side airbags • SRS curtain shield airbags ●When the pad section of the steer- ing wheel, the dashboard near the front SRS passenger airbag or the lower side of the instrument panel is scratched, cracked, or other- wise damaged. ●When the surface of a seat with the SRS side airbag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged. ●When the part of a front pillar, rear pillar or roof side rail garnish (pad- ding) which covers a SRS curtain shield airbag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged. WARNING ■ SRS airbag precautions Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ●The driver and all passengers must wear their seat belts cor- rectly. The SRS airbags are supple- mental devices to be used with the seat belts. ●The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury, especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) advises: Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 2 – 3 in. (50 – 75 mm) of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to your breast- bone. If your current driving posi- tion places you less than 10 in. (250 mm) away from the driver airbag, you can change your driv- ing position in several ways: • Move your seat to the rear as far as possible while still being able to reach the pedals com- fortably. 1-1. For safe use 39 • Slightly recline the seatback. Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (251 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the seatback somewhat. If reclining the seatback makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by 1 using a firm, non-slippery cush- ion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature. • If your steering wheel is adjust- able, tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of your head and neck. The seat should be adjusted as recommended by the NHTSA, while still being able to control the vehicle with the pedals and steering wheel, and maintaining your view of the instrument panel controls. ● If a seat belt extender has been connected to a front seat belt buckle but the latch plate of the seat belt has not been fastened to the seat belt extender, the SRS airbag system will judge that the occupant is wearing the seat belt even though the seat belt has not been fastened. In this case, the SRS front airbags may not deploy correctly in a collision, resulting in death or serious injury. Be sure to wear the seat belt correctly when using a seat belt extender. 40 1-1. For safe use WARNING ● The SRS front passenger air- bag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury, especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be positioned as far possible from the airbag with the seatback adjusted so that the passenger is sat upright. ● Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. SUBARU strongly rec- ommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle and prop- erly restrained. The rear seats are safer for infants and children than the front passenger seat. (→P.49) ● Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the dash- board. ●Front seat occupants should never hold items on their lap. ● Do not allow a child to stand in front of the SRS front passenger airbag or sit on the lap of a front passenger. ● Do not lean against the door, roof side rail, or front, side, or rear pillar. ● Do not allow anyone to kneel on a seat toward the door or put their head or hands outside the vehicle. WARNING ● Do not attach anything to or lean anything against areas such as the dashboard, steering wheel pad and lower portion of the instrument panel. ● Do not attach anything to areas such as the doors, windshield, side windows, front or rear pil- lars, roof side rails and assist grips. (With the exception of the speed limit label →P.561) ● Do not hang coat hangers or other hard objects on the coat hooks. These items could become projectiles if the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy, possibly leading to death or serious injury. ● If a vinyl cover is attached to the area where the SRS knee air- bag deploys, be sure to remove it. 1-1. For safe use 41 ● Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts from which the SRS airbags deploy, as they may interfere with infla- tion of the SRS airbags. Such accessories may prevent the SRS airbags from deploying correctly, may disable the sys- tem or cause the SRS airbags 1 to inflate unintentionally, possi- bly resulting in death or serious injury. ●Do not strike or apply significant force to the SRS airbag system components, front doors or their surrounding area. Doing so may cause the SRS airbags to malfunction. ● Do not touch any components of the SRS airbags immediately after the SRS airbags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot. ● If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have deployed, open a door or win- dow to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation. ● If a part where an SRS airbag is stored is damaged or cracked, have it replaced by your SUB- ARU dealer. ● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passen- ger’s seat. Doing so will disperse the passenger’s weight, which prevents the sen- sor from detecting the passen- ger’s weight properly. As a result, the SRS front airbags for the front passenger’s seat may not deploy in the event of a colli- sion. 42 1-1. For safe use WARNING ■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system compo- nents Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modi- fications without consulting your SUBARU dealer. The SRS air- bags may malfunction or deploy unintentionally, possibly leading to death or serious injury. ● Removal, installation, disas- sembly or repair of the SRS air- bags ● Repair, removal or modification of the following parts or their surrounding • Steering wheel • Instrument panel • Dashboard • Seats • Seat upholstery • Front pillars • Side pillars • Rear pillars • Roof side rails • Front door panels • Front door trim • Front door speakers ● Modifications to the front door panels (such as making holes in them) ● Repair or modification of the fol- lowing parts or their surrounding • Front fender • Front bumper • Sides of the vehicle interior ● Installation of the following parts or accessories • Bull bars or kangaroo bars • Snow plows • Winches • Roof luggage carriers ● Modifications to the vehicle’s suspension ● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios (RF-transmitter) and CD players ● Modifications to your vehicle for a persons with a physical dis- ability 1-1. For safe use 43 Front passenger occupant classification system Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and activates or deactivates the fol- lowing SRS airbags. ⚫ SRS front passenger airbag 1 ⚫ SRS front passenger knee airbag System components SRS warning light Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light “AIR BAG ON” indicator light 44 1-1. For safe use Front passenger occupant classification system condi- tions and operation ■ Adult*1 Indicators/warn- ing lights Devices ■ Child*4 Indicators/warn- ing lights Devices “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights SRS warning light Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Front passenger airbag Front passenger knee airbag “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights SRS warning light Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Front passenger airbag Front passenger knee airbag “AIR BAG ON” Off Off*2 or flashing*3 Activated “AIR BAG OFF” or “AIR BAG ON”*4 Off Off*2 or flashing*3 Deactivated or activated*4 Deactivated or activated*4 ■ Child restraint system with infant*5 “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights “AIR BAG OFF” *6 Indicators/warn- ing lights Devices SRS warning light Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Front passenger airbag Front passenger knee airbag Off Off*2 or flashing*3 Deactivated ■ Unoccupied 1-1. For safe use 45 Indicators/warn- ing lights Devices “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights SRS warning light Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Front passenger airbag Front passenger knee airbag “AIR BAG OFF” Off 1 Deactivated ■ System malfunction “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights “AIR BAG OFF” Indicators/warn- ing lights Devices SRS warning light Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Front passenger airbag Front passenger knee airbag On Deactivated *1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may not recognize them as an adult depending on their physique and posture. *2: In the event the front passenger is wearing a seat belt. *3: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt. *4: For some children, child in seat, child in booster seat or child in convert- ible seat, the system may not recognize them as a child. Factors which may affect this can be the physique or posture. *5: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (→P.51) *6: In case the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual on how to install the child restraint system properly. (→P.49) 46 1-1. For safe use WARNING ■ Front passenger occupant classification system precau- tions Observe the following precautions regarding the front passenger occupant classification system. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury. ●Wear the seat belt properly. ● Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt plate has not been left inserted into the buckle before someone sits in the front pas- senger seat. ● Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not illuminated when using the seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indi- cator light is illuminated, discon- nect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle, and recon- nect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender while the “AIR BAG OFF” indi- cator light is illuminated, the SRS airbags for the front pas- senger will not activate, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of a collision. ●Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equip- ment (e.g. seatback pocket). ● Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on the front pas- senger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat. ● Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on the seatback with their legs. ● Do not put objects under the front passenger seat. ● Do not recline the front passen- ger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat. This may cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indi- cator light to be illuminated, which indicates that the SRS airbags for the front passenger will not activate in the event of a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback exces- sively may lessen the effective- ness of the seat belt system. ● If an adult sits in the front pas- senger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front pas- senger seat fully rearward. ●When it is unavoidable to install a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat in the proper order. (→P.51) ● Do not modify or remove the front seats. 1-1. For safe use 47 WARNING ● Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the front passenger occupant clas- sification system. In this case, 1 contact your SUBARU dealer immediately. ● Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not con- tact the front seatbacks. ●Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion and seat cover, that covers the seat cushion surface. ● Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat. 48 1-2. Child safety Riding with children Observe the following pre- cautions when children are in the vehicle. Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. ⚫ It is recommended that chil- dren sit in the rear seats to avoid accidental contact with the steering wheel, wiper switch, etc. ⚫ Use the rear door child-pro- tector lock or the window lock switch to avoid children opening the door while driv- ing or operating the power window accidentally. (→P.171, 210) ⚫ Do not let small children operate equipment which may catch or pinch body parts, such as the power window, hood, back door, seats, etc. WARNING ■ When children are in the vehi- cle Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key. Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a danger that children may injure them- selves by playing with the side windows or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children. Child restraint sys- tems Before installing a child restraint system in the vehi- cle, there are precautions that need to be observed, different types of child restraint systems, as well as installation methods, etc., written in this manual. Use a child restraint system when riding with a small child that cannot properly use a seat belt. For the child’s safety, install the child restraint system to a rear seat. Be sure to follow the installa- tion method that is in the oper- ation manual enclosed with the restraint system. Table of contents Points to remember: P.49 Child restraint system: P.51 When using a child restraint sys- tem: P.51 Child restraint system installa- tion method • Fixed with a seat belt: P.53 • Fixed with a child restraint LATCH anchor: P.58 • Using an anchor bracket (for top tether strap): P.60 1-2. Child safety 49 Points to remember The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. as well as Canada now require the use of child restraint systems. ⚫ Prioritize and observe the 1 warnings, as well as the laws and regulations for child restraint systems. ⚫ Use a child restraint system until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. ⚫ Choose a child restraint sys- tem that suits your vehicle and is appropriate to the age and size of the child. WARNING ■ When a child is riding Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ●For effective protection in auto- mobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system which is correctly installed. For installa- tion details, refer to the opera- tion manual enclosed with the child restraint system. General installation instructions are pro- vided in this manual. 50 1-2. Child safety WARNING ●SUBARU strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint sys- tem that conforms to the weight and size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. ● Holding a child in your or some- one else’s arms is not a substi- tute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield or between the holder and the interior of the vehicle. ■ Handling the child restraint system If the child restraint system is not properly fixed in place, the child or other passengers may be seri- ously injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving, or an accident. ● If the vehicle were to receive a strong impact from an accident, etc., it is possible that the child restraint system has damage that is not readily visible. In such cases, do not reuse the restraint system. ● Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided with the child restraint system manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. ●Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use. Do not store the child restraint system unsecured in the passenger compartment. ● If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or store it securely in the luggage com- partment. Child restraint system 1-2. Child safety 51 ■ Types of child restraint system installation methods Confirm with the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system about the installation of the child restraint system. Installation method Page 1 Seat belt attachment P.53 Child restraint LATCH anchors attachment P.58 Anchor brackets (for top tether strap) attach- ment P.60 When using a child restraint system ■ When installing a child restraint system to a front passenger seat For the safety of a child, install a child restraint system to a rear seat. When installing the child restraint system to a front pas- senger seat is unavoidable, adjust the seat as follows and 52 1-2. Child safety install the child restraint system. ⚫ Adjust the seatback angle to the most upright position. ⚫ Move the front seat fully rear- ward. If the passenger seat height can be adjusted, move it to the upper most position. ⚫ If the head restraint interferes with the child restraint system installation and the head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint. Otherwise, put the head restraint in the upper most position. WARNING ■ When using a child restraint system Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ● Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illu- minated. In the event of an acci- dent, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or seri- ous injury to the child if the rear- facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat. ●A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that requires a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat since there is no top tether strap anchor for the front passenger seat. ●A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. When install- ing a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, adjust the seatback angle to the most upright position, move the seat to the rearmost position, even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated. If the head restraint interferes with the child restraint system installation and the head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint. WARNING ● Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front or rear pillars, or roof side rails from which the SRS side airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint sys- tem. It is dangerous if the SRS side and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child. 1-2. Child safety 53 ● If the driver’s seat interferes with the child restraint system and prevents it from being attached correctly, attach the child restraint system to the right-hand rear seat. 1 ● Adjust the front passenger seat so that it does not interfere with the child restraint system. ●When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child’s neck, but not so that it could fall off the child’s shoulder. ● Use a child restraint system suitable to the age and size of the child and install it to the rear seat. Child restraint system fixed with a seat belt A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt. ■ Installing child restraint system using a seat belt (child restraint lock func- tion belt) Install the child restraint system in accordance to the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system. ■ Rear-facing ⎯ Infant seat/convertible seat 1 Adjust the rear seat. If there is a gap between the child restraint system and the seatback, adjust the seatback angle until good contact is achieved. 54 1-2. Child safety 2 Place the child restraint sys- tem on the rear seat facing the rear of the vehicle. 3 Run the seat belt through the child restraint system and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted. 4 Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it in lock mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended. 5 While pushing the child restraint system down into the rear seat, allow the shoul- der belt to retract until the child restraint system is securely in place. After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended. 6 After installing the child restraint system, rock it back and forth to ensure that it is installed securely. (→P.57) ■ Forward-facing ⎯ Convert- ible seat 1 Adjust the seat. When using the front passenger seat: If installing the child restraint system to the front passenger seat is unavoidable, refer to P.51 for front passenger seat adjustment. When using the rear seat: If there is a gap between the child restraint system and the seatback, adjust the seatback angle until good con- tact is achieved. 2 If the head restraint interferes with the child restraint system installation and the head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint. (→P.193) 1-2. Child safety 55 in lock mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended. 1 3 Place the child restraint sys- tem on the seat facing the front of the vehicle. 4 Run the seat belt through the child restraint system and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted. 5 Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it 6 While pushing the child restraint system into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child restraint system is securely in place. After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended. 7 If the child restraint has a top tether strap, follow the child restraint manufacturer’s operation manual regarding the installation, using the top tether strap to latch onto the top tether strap anchor. (→P.60) 8 After installing the child restraint system, rock it back 56 1-2. Child safety and forth to ensure that it is installed securely. (→P.57) ■ Booster seat 1 If installing the child restraint system to the front passen- ger seat is unavoidable, refer to P.51 for front passenger seat adjustment. 2 High back type: If the head restraint interferes with your child restraint system, and the head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint. (→P.193) 3 Place the child restraint sys- tem on the seat facing the front of the vehicle. ▶ Booster type ▶ High back type 4 Sit the child in the child restraint system. Fit the seat belt to the child restraint sys- tem according to the manu- facturer’s instructions and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted. Check that the shoulder belt is cor- rectly positioned over the child’s shoulder and that the lap belt is as low as possible. (→P.31) ■ Removing a child restraint system installed with a seat belt Press the buckle release button and fully retract the seat belt. When releasing the buckle, the child restraint system may spring up due to the rebound of the seat cushion. Release the buckle while holding down the child restraint system. Since the seat belt automatically reels itself, slowly return it to the stowing position. WARNING ■ When installing a child restraint system Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ● Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death. If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt. ●Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted. ●Shake the child restraint system left and right, and forward and backward to ensure that it has been securely installed. ●After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat. 1-2. Child safety 57 ●When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child’s neck, but not so that it could fall off the child’s shoulder. ● Follow all installation instruc- 1 tions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer. ●When securing some types of child restraint systems in rear seats, it may not be possible to properly use the seat belts in positions next to the child restraint without interfering with it or affecting seat belt effective- ness. Be sure your seat belt fits snugly across your shoulder and low on your hips. If it does not, or if it interferes with the child restraint, move to a differ- ent position. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ●When installing a child restraint system in the rear center seat, adjust both seatbacks at the same angle. Otherwise, the child restraint system cannot be securely restrained and this may cause death or serious injuries in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident. ■ When installing a booster seat To prevent the belt from going into ALR lock mode, do not fully extend the shoulder belt. ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only. This could cause injury or discomfort to the child. (→P.33) 58 1-2. Child safety Child restraint system fixed with a child restraint LATCH anchor ■ Child restraint LATCH anchors LATCH anchors are provided for the outboard rear seats. ■ When installing in the rear outboard seats Install the child restraint system in accordance to the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system. 1 Adjust the seat. If there is a gap between the child restraint system and the seatback, adjust the seatback angle until good contact is achieved. 2 If the head restraint interferes with the child restraint system installation and the head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint. (→P.193) ▶ With flexible lower attach- ments 3 Latch the hooks of the lower attachments onto the LATCH anchors. For owners in Canada: The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower con- nector system. Canada only ▶ With rigid lower attachments 3 Latch the buckles onto the LATCH anchors. For owners in Canada: The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower con- nector system. Canada only 4 If the child restraint has a top tether strap, follow the child restraint manufacturer’s operation manual regarding the installation, using the top tether strap to latch onto the top tether strap anchor. (→P.60) 5 After installing the child restraint system, rock it back and forth to ensure that it is installed securely. (→P.57) 1-2. Child safety 59 ■ Laws and regulations pertain- ing to anchors The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2. Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 speci- fications can be used. This vehicle is designed to conform 1 to SAE J1819. WARNING ■ When installing a child restraint system Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ●When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint system. ● Follow all installation instruc- tions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer. ●Child restraint systems cannot be installed in the rear center seat. Do not install the child restraint system in the rear center seat using the LATCH anchors. ●When securing some types of child restraint systems in rear seats, it may not be possible to properly use the seat belts in positions next to the child restraint without interfering with it or affecting seat belt effective- ness. Be sure your seat belt fits snugly across your shoulder and low on your hips. If it does not, or if it interferes with the child restraint, move to a differ- ent position. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. 60 1-2. Child safety WARNING ● If the seat is adjusted, reconfirm the security of the child restraint system. Using an anchor bracket (for top tether strap) ■ Anchor brackets (for top tether strap) Anchor brackets are provided for each rear seat. Use anchor brackets when fix- ing the top tether strap. ▶ Outboard rear seats Anchor brackets Top tether strap ▶ Rear center seat Anchor bracket Top tether strap ■ Fixing the top tether strap to the anchor bracket Install the child restraint system in accordance to the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system. ▶ Outboard rear seats 1 Remove the head restraint. (→P.193) 2 Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top tether strap. Make sure the top tether strap is securely latched. (→P.57) Hook Top tether strap 3 If the head restraint does not interfere with the child 1-2. Child safety 61 restraint system installation, install the head restraint. 1 ▶ Rear center seat 1 Adjust the head restraint to the upmost position. If the head restraint interferes with your child restraint system, and the head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint. (→P.193) 2 Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top tether strap. Make sure the top tether strap is securely latched. When installing the child restraint system with the head restraint being raised, be sure to have the top tether strap pass underneath the head restraint. Hook Top tether strap ■ Laws and regulations pertain- ing to anchors The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2. Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 speci- fications can be used. This vehicle is designed to conform to SAE J1819. WARNING ■ When installing a child restraint system Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ● Firmly attach the top tether strap and make sure that the belt is not twisted. ● Do not attach the top tether strap to anything other than the anchor bracket. ● After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat. ● Follow all installation instruc- tions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer. 62 1-2. Child safety WARNING ● Rear center seat: When install- ing the child restraint system with the head restraint being raised, after the head restraint has been raised and then the anchor bracket has been fixed, do not lower the head restraint. SUBARU SOLTERRA CONNECT SUBARU SOLTERRA CON- NECT is a subscription- based telematics service that uses Global Position- ing System (GPS) data and embedded cellular technol- ogy to provide safety and security features to sub- scribers. SUBARU SOL- TERRA CONNECT is supported by SUBARU’s designated response center, which operates 24 hours per day, 7 days per week. SUBARU SOLTERRA CON- NECT service trials are automatically activated for your convenience. By using the SUBARU SOL- TERRA CONNECT service, you are agreeing to be bound by the Telematics Subscription Service Agree- ment and its Terms and Conditions, as in effect and amended from time to time, a current copy of which is available at www.Toyota.com/ privacyvts. All use of the SUBARU SOLTERRA CON- NECT service is subject to such then applicable Terms and Conditions. 1-3. Emergency assistance 63 If you wish to deactivate services, please contact a SUBARU SOLTERRA CON- NECT specialist by pushing the in-vehicle SOS button or calling the applicable call center number below: 1 System components Microphone “SOS” button LED light indicators Speaker Services Subscribers have the following SUBARU SOLTERRA CON- NECT services available: ⚫ Automatic Collision Notifica- tion* Helps drivers receive necessary response from emergency service providers. (→P.65) 64 1-3. Emergency assistance *: U.S. Patent No. 7,508,298 B2 ⚫ Stolen Vehicle Location Helps drivers in the event of vehicle theft. (→P.65) ⚫ Emergency Assistance Button (“SOS”) Connects drivers to response- center support. (→P.66) ⚫ Enhanced Roadside Assis- tance Provides drivers various on-road assistance. (→P.66) Subscription After you have signed the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and are enrolled, you can begin receiving ser- vices. A variety of subscription terms are available for purchase. Con- tact your SUBARU dealer, call the following or push the “SOS” button in your vehicle for further subscription details. ⚫ The United States (866) 384-3574 ⚫ Canada (800) 263-8802 NOTICE ■ SUBARU SOLTERRA CON- NECT Services Information ●Phone calls using the vehicles Bluetooth® technology will not be possible during SUBARU SOLTERRA CONNECT. ● SUBARU SOLTERRA CON- NECT is available beginning May 2022 on select SUBARU models (in the contiguous United States only). Contact with the SUBARU SOLTERRA CONNECT response center is dependent upon the telematics device being in operative condi- tion, cellular connection avail- ability, and GPS satellite signal reception, which can limit the ability to reach the response center or receive emergency service support. Enrollment and Telematics Subscription Ser- vice Agreement are required. A variety of subscription terms are available; charges vary by sub- scription term selected and location. ● Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance and Sto- len Vehicle Location are avail- able in the United States, including Hawaii and Alaska, as well as Canada, and Enhanced Roadside Assistance are avail- able in the United States and Canada. ● Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance, Stolen Vehicle and Enhanced Road Assistance will not function in the United States Virgin Islands. For vehicles first sold in the USVI, no SUBARU SOL- TERRA CONNECT services will function in and outside the United States Virgin Islands. ● SUBARU SOLTERRA CON- NECT services are not subject to section 255 of the Telecom- munications Act and the device is not TTY compatible. NOTICE ■ Languages The SUBARU SOLTERRA CON- NECT response center will offer support in multiple languages. The SUBARU SOLTERRA CON- NECT system will offer voice prompts in English, Spanish, and French. Please indicate your lan- guage of choice when enrolling. ■ When contacting the response center You may be unable to contact the response center if the network is busy. SUBARU SOLTERRA CONNECT LED light Indi- cators When the power switch is turned to ON, the red indicator light comes on for 2 seconds then turns off. Afterward, the green indicator light comes on, indicat- ing that the service is active. The following indicator light pat- terns indicate specific system usage conditions: ⚫ Green indicator light on = Active service ⚫ Green indicator light flashing = SUBARU SOLTERRA CONNECT call in process ⚫ Red indicator light (except at vehicle start-up) = System malfunction (contact your SUBARU dealer) ⚫ No indicator light (off) = SUB- ARU SOLTERRA CONNECT 1-3. Emergency assistance 65 service not active SUBARU SOLTERRA CONNECT services ■ Automatic Collision Notifi- cation 1 In case of either airbag deploy- ment or severe rear-end colli- sion, the system is designed to automatically call the response center. The responding agent receives the vehicle’s location and attempts to speak with the vehicle occupants to assess the level of emergency. If the occu- pants are unable to communi- cate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency, contacts the nearest emer- gency services provider to describe the situation, and requests that assistance be sent to the location. ■ Stolen Vehicle Location If your vehicle is stolen, SUB- ARU SOLTERRA CONNECT can work with local authorities to assist them in locating and recovering the vehicle. After fil- ing a police report, call the Cus- tomer Experience Center at (866) 384-3574 in the United States or (800) 263-8802 in Canada, and follow the prompts for SUBARU SOLTERRA CON- NECT to initiate this service. In addition to assisting law enforcement with recovery of a 66 1-3. Emergency assistance stolen vehicle, SUBARU SOL- TERRA CONNECT vehicle location data may, under certain circumstances, be shared with third parties to locate your vehi- cle. Further information is avail- able at Toyota.com. ■ Emergency Assistance But- ton (“SOS”) In the event of an emergency on the road, push the “SOS” button to reach the SUBARU SOL- TERRA CONNECT response center. The answering agent will determine your vehicle’s loca- tion, assess the emergency, and dispatch the necessary assis- tance required. If you accidentally press the “SOS” button, tell the response-center agent that you are not experiencing an emergency. ■ Enhanced Roadside Assis- tance Enhanced Roadside Assistance adds GPS data to the already included warranty-based SUB- ARU road side assistance. Subscribers can press the “SOS” button to reach a SUB- ARU SOLTERRA CONNECT response-center agent, who can help with a wide range of needs, such as: towing, flat tire etc. For a description of the Enhanced Roadside Assistance services and their limitations, please see the SUBARU SOLTERRA CON- NECT Terms and Conditions, which are available at Toyota.com. Safety information for SUBARU SOLTERRA CONNECT Important! Read this informa- tion about exposure to radio fre- quency signals before using SUBARU SOLTERRA CON- NECT; The SUBARU SOLTERRA CONNECT system installed in your vehicle is a low-power radio transmitter and receiver. It receives and also sends out radio frequency (RF) signals. In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) adopted RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for mobile wireless phones. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standards previously set by the following U.S. and international standards bodies. ⚫ ANSI (American National Standards Institute) C95.1 [1992] ⚫ NCRP (National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement) Report 86 [1986] ⚫ ICNIRP (International Com- mission on Non-Ionizing Radi- ation Protection) [1996] Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic evaluations of the relevant sci- entific literature. Over 120 scien- tists, engineers, and physicians from universities, and govern- ment health agencies and industries reviewed the avail- able body of research to develop the ANSI Standard (C95.1). The design of SUBARU SOL- TERRA CONNECT complies with the FCC guidelines in addi- tion to those standards. 1-3. Emergency assistance 67 1 68 1-4. Theft deterrent system Immobilizer system The vehicle’s keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the EV system from starting if a key has not been previously regis- tered in the vehicle’s on- board computer. Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle. This system is designed to help prevent vehicle theft but does not guarantee absolute security against all vehicle thefts. ■ System maintenance The vehicle has a maintenance-free type immobilizer system. ■ Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction ● If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object ●If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security sys- tem (key with a built-in transpon- der chip) of another vehicle NOTICE ■ To ensure the system oper- ates correctly Do not modify or remove the sys- tem. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed. Operating the system The indicator light flashes after the power switch has been turned to OFF to indicate that the system is operating. The indicator light goes off after the power switch has been turned to ACC or ON to indicate that the system has been can- celed. Alarm The alarm uses light and sound to give an alert when an intrusion is detected. The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the alarm is set: ⚫ A locked door or back door is unlocked or opened in any way other than using the entry function or wire- less remote control (The doors will lock again auto- matically.) ⚫ The hood is opened. Setting/deactivating/stop- ping the alarm system 1-4. Theft deterrent system 69 The indicator light changes from being on to flashing when the sys- tem is set. 1 ■ Deactivating or stopping Do one of the following to deac- tivate or stop the alarms: ⚫ Unlock the doors. ⚫ Turn the power switch to ACC or ON, or start the EV system. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a few sec- onds.) ■ Items to check before lock- ing the vehicle To prevent unexpected trigger- ing of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the following: ⚫ Nobody is in the vehicle. ⚫ The windows are closed before the alarm is set. ⚫ No valuables or other per- sonal items are left in the vehicle. ■ Setting Close the doors, back door and hood, and lock all doors. The system will be set automatically after 30 seconds. ■ Setting the alarm The alarm can be set if all the doors are closed even with the hood open. ■ System maintenance The vehicle has a maintenance-free type alarm system. ■ Triggering of the alarm The alarm may be triggered in the following situations: (Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.) ●The doors are unlocked using the mechanical key. 70 1-4. Theft deterrent system ●A person inside the vehicle opens a door, the back door or hood, or unlocks the vehicle. ●The 12-volt battery is recharged or replaced when the vehicle is locked. (→P.574) ■ Alarm-operated door lock In the following cases, depending on the situation, the door may auto- matically lock to prevent improper entry into the vehicle: ●When a person remaining in the vehicle unlocks the door and the alarm is activated. ●While the alarm is activated, a person remaining in the vehicle unlocks the door. ●When recharging or replacing the 12-volt battery. NOTICE ■ To ensure the system oper- ates correctly Do not modify or remove the sys- tem. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed. Pre-alarm If a door is unlocked with the mechanical key while the alarm is being set, the pre-alarm will sound for 10 seconds. If either the door is locked again or the pre-alarm is stopped within those 10 seconds, an alarm will sound. Do any of the following in order to deactivate or stop the pre- alarm: ⚫ Close the doors, and lock all doors by entry function or wireless remote control. ⚫ Turn the power switch to ACC or ON, or start the EV system. (The alarm will be deactivated and stop after a few seconds.) 71 Electric Vehicle system 2 2-1. Electric vehicle system Electric Vehicle system fea- tures . 72 Electric Vehicle system pre- cautions 76 Battery Electric Vehicle driv- 2 ing tips 81 Driving range 83 2-2. Charging Charging equipment. 85 AC charging cable 87 Locking and unlocking AC charging connector. 93 Power sources that can be used . 95 Charging methods 97 Charging tips 99 Things to know before charging 100 How to use AC charging 104 How to use DC charging 112 Using the charging schedule function 117 Using My Room Mode 127 When charging cannot be carried out . 131 72 2-1. Electric vehicle system Electric Vehicle system features Battery electric vehicles are considerably different from con- ventional vehicles. They use electricity charged in a traction battery, to drive the electric motor. Since battery electric vehicles are driven using electricity, they do not emit any emissions such as CO₂ (Car- bon Dioxide) and NOx (Nitrogen Oxides). Battery electric vehicles are environmentally friendly vehicles. System components The illustration is an example for explanation and may differ from the actual item. ESU: Electricity Supply Unit (built in onboard traction battery charger/DC-DC converter) Electric motor (traction motor)/Inverter (front/rear) Traction battery Provides electricity to the electric motor. Charging port 12-volt battery 2-1. Electric vehicle system 73 Provides electricity to various vehicle systems such as the SRS airbags, headlights, wipers, etc. ■ When braking (regenera- tive braking) The electric motor (traction motor) charges the traction bat- tery. The driving range can be extended by actively using this regenerative braking to store electricity in the traction battery. Charging The battery electric vehicle is driven using electricity, which is received from an external power source and stored in the traction battery. Not only public charging stations, but also household out- lets can be used for charging. Procedures are different from refueling a conventional vehi- cle. Therefore, make sure to read the following thoroughly. ⚫ Charging equipment (→P.85) ⚫ AC charging cable (→P.87) ⚫ Power sources that can be used (→P.100) ⚫ Things to know before charging (→P.100) ⚫ How to charge your vehicle (→P.104, 112) ⚫ When charging cannot be performed normally (→P.131) ■ Regenerative braking In the following situations, kinetic energy is converted to electric energy and deceleration force can be obtained in conjunction with the recharging of the traction battery. ●The accelerator pedal is released 2 while driving with the shift position in D. ●The brake pedal is depressed while driving with the shift position in D. ■ Charging the 12-volt battery The 12-volt battery is charged from the traction battery when the EV system is operated or while the trac- tion battery is being charged. If the vehicle has not been used for a long time, the 12-volt battery may become low due to self-discharge. If this occurs, follow the correct proce- dures. (→P.572) ■ When not using the vehicle for an extended period of time ●When the vehicle will not be used for an extended period of time, charge the traction battery once a month. This protects the traction battery from extreme voltage decline due to self discharging. ●When the vehicle will not be used for an extended period of time, the 12-volt battery will be charged from the traction battery to reduce the risk of the 12-volt battery dis- charged. In this case, the cooling fan may operate, however it is not a malfunction. ● To prevent the 12-volt battery from being discharged, do not leave the charging port lid open or the charging cable connected to the vehicle. 74 2-1. Electric vehicle system ■ Charging the traction battery Be sure to maintain the traction bat- tery charge level suitable for your driving needs. If the traction battery fully dis- charges, the vehicle cannot be driven at all. When the battery becomes low, charge it as soon as possible. ■ If the traction battery becomes low ●If the traction battery becomes low, the traction battery charge warning light comes on or flashes and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display. (→P.544) ●If the traction battery is completely discharged, the EV system cannot be started and driving will not be possible. When the traction bat- tery becomes low, charge it as soon as possible. ■ Sounds and vibrations specific to a battery electric vehicle Because there is no engine sound or vibration, it is easy to mistake the battery electric vehicle for being off when it is actually still running, as indicated by the “READY” indicator being illuminated. For safety, make sure to always shift the shift position to P and apply the parking brake when parked. Before and after the EV system is started, the following sounds and vibrations may occur. However, these sounds and/or vibrations are not signs of malfunctions: ●The brake system operation sound may be heard from the front of the vehicle when the driver’s door is opened. or stops. ● Relay operating sounds such as a snap or soft clank will be emitted from the traction battery in the fol- lowing situations: • When the EV system is started or stopped • When charging starts or com- pletes • When the vehicle is driven the first time after the traction battery has been charged using DC charging ●Sounds may be heard due to regenerative braking when the brake pedal is depressed or as the accelerator pedal is released. ● Cooling fan operating sounds from the radiator. ● The operation sound of the air conditioning system (air condition- ing compressor, blower motor). ■ Maintenance, repair, recycling, and disposal Contact your SUBARU dealer regarding maintenance, repair, recy- cling and disposal. Do not dispose of the vehicle yourself. Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System A sound which changes in accordance with the driving speed, will be played in order to warn people nearby of the vehi- cle’s approach. This sound may be heard inside the vehicle. The sound will stop when the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 23 mph (37 km/h). ●Motor sounds may be heard from the motor compartment or lug- gage compartment. ●Electrical relay sounds may be heard from the motor compart- ment when the EV system starts ■ Acoustic Vehicle Alerting Sys- tem In the following cases, the Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System may be dif- ficult for surrounding people to hear. 2-1. Electric vehicle system 75 ●In very noisy areas ●In the wind or the rain Also, as the Acoustic Vehicle Alert- ing System is installed on the front of the vehicle, it may be more diffi- cult to hear from the rear of the vehi- cle compared to the front. 2 76 2-1. Electric vehicle system Electric Vehicle system precautions Be careful of the high voltage components (nominal voltage at 355.2 V), such as the traction battery, electricity supply unit, orange colored high voltage cables, and electric motor, as well as high temperature components such as the cooling radiator, which are provided on the battery electric vehicle. For the high voltage components, warning labels are pro- vided on them. Read them when they need to be handled. System components The illustration is an example for explanation and may differ from the actual item. Warning label High voltage cables (orange) ESU: Electricity Supply Unit (built in onboard traction battery charger/DC-DC converter) Service plug AC charging inlet 2-1. Electric vehicle system 77 DC charging inlet Traction battery Electric motor (traction motor)/Inverter (front/rear) Air conditioning compressor ■ Electromagnetic waves ●High-voltage parts and cables on the battery electric vehicles incor- porate electro-magnetic shield- ing, and therefore emit approximately the same amount of electromagnetic waves as con- ventional gasoline-powered vehi- cles or home electronic appliances. ●Your vehicle may cause sound interference in some third party- produced radio parts. ■ Traction battery (Lithium-ion battery) The traction battery has a limited service life. The traction battery capacity (the ability to store energy) reduces with time and use in the same way as other rechargeable batteries. The extent at which capacity reduces changes drastically depending on the environment (outside tempera- ture, etc.) and usage conditions, such as how the vehicle is driven and how the traction battery is charged. This is a natural characteristic of lithium-ion batteries, and is not a malfunction. Also, even though the driving range decreases when the traction battery capacity reduces, vehicle performance does not sig- nificantly become worse. In order to reduce the possibility of the capacity reducing, follow the directions listed on P.102, “Capacity reduction of the traction battery”. ■ Starting the EV system in an extremely cold environment When the traction battery is extremely cold (below approxi- mately -22°F [-30°C]) due to the 2 temperature outside of the vehicle, it may not be possible to start the EV system. In this case, try to start the EV system again after the tempera- ture of the traction battery increases due to the outside temperature increasing, etc. WARNING ■ High-voltage precautions The vehicle has high voltage DC and AC systems as well as a 12- volt system. DC and AC high voltage systems are very dangerous and can cause severe burns and electric shock that may result in death or serious injury. ● Never touch, disassemble, remove, or replace the high volt- age parts, cables (orange) or their connectors. ● The EV system will become hot after starting as the system uses high voltage. Be careful of both the high voltage and the high temperature, and always obey the warning labels attached to the vehicle. 78 2-1. Electric vehicle system WARNING ● Never try to open the service plug access hole located under the floor. The service plug is used only when the vehicle is being serviced and is subject to high voltage. ■ Road accident cautions Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or seri- ous injury: ●Stop the vehicle in a safe place to prevent subsequent acci- dents. While depressing the brake pedal, apply the parking brake and shift the shift position to P to stop the EV system. Then, slowly release the brake pedal. ● Do not touch the high voltage parts, cables (orange) and con- nectors. ● If electric wires are exposed inside or outside your vehicle, an electric shock may occur. Never touch exposed electric wires. ● Do not touch the traction battery if liquid is leaking from or adhered to it. If electrolyte (Organic Carbonate-based electrolyte) from the traction battery comes into contact with the eyes or skin, it could cause blindness or skin wounds. In the unlikely event that it comes into contact with the eyes or skin, wash it off immediately with a large amount of water, and seek immediate medical attention. ● If electrolyte is leaking from the traction battery, do not approach the vehicle. Even in the unlikely event that the traction battery has been damaged, the internal construc- tion of the battery will prevent a large amount of electrolyte from leaking out. However, if electro- lyte leaks, vapors will be emit- ted. These vapors are an irritant to skin and eyes and could cause acute poisoning if inhaled. ● Do not bring burning or high- temperature items close to the electrolyte. The electrolyte may ignite and cause a fire. ●If a fire occurs in the battery electric vehicle, leave the vehi- cle as soon as possible. Never use a fire extinguisher that is not meant for electrical fires. Using even a small amount of water may be dangerous. ● If your vehicle needs to be towed, be sure to transport the vehicle with the four wheels raised. If the vehicle is towed with the wheels which are con- nected to the electric motor (traction motor) contacting the ground, electricity generated by the operation of the motor may cause a fire to occur depending on the nature of the damage or malfunction. (→P.537) WARNING ● Carefully inspect the ground under the vehicle. If leaked liq- uid (other than water from the air conditioning) is found on the ground, the traction battery may have been damaged. Leave the vehicle as soon as possible. In addition, contact your SUB- ARU dealer with regard to the leakage found on the ground. Even in the event of a minor accident, the traction battery and surrounding parts may be damaged. In case of an acci- dent, have the traction battery inspected at a SUBARU dealer. ■ Traction battery ●Your vehicle contains a sealed lithium-ion battery. ● Never resell, hand over or mod- ify the traction battery. To pre- vent accidents, traction batteries that have been removed from a disposed vehi- cle are collected through your SUBARU dealer. Do not dis- pose of the battery yourself. Unless the battery is properly collected, the following may occur, resulting in death or seri- ous injury: • Do not illegally dispose of or dump the traction battery, and it is hazardous to the environment or someone may touch a high voltage part, resulting in an electric shock. 2-1. Electric vehicle system 79 • The traction battery is intended to be used exclusively with your battery electric vehicle. If the traction battery is used outside of your vehicle or modified in any way, accidents such as electric shock, heat generation, smoke generation, an explo- sion and electrolyte leakage may occur. When reselling or handing over your vehicle, the possibility of an accident is extremely high because the per- 2 son receiving the vehicle may not be aware of the dangers from these modifications. ● If your vehicle is disposed of without the traction battery hav- ing been removed, there is a danger of serious electric shock if high voltage parts, cables and their connectors are touched. In the event that your vehicle must be disposed of, the traction bat- tery must be disposed of by your SUBARU dealer or a quali- fied service shop. If the traction battery is not disposed of prop- erly, it may cause electric shock that can result in death or seri- ous injury. ●For information about traction battery collection locations, con- tact information, or the recycling process, contact your SUBARU dealer. ■ Caution while driving ● Pay special attention to the area around the vehicle. Because there is no engine noise, pedes- trians, people riding bicycles or other people and vehicles in the area may not be aware of the vehicle starting off or approach- ing them, so take extra care while driving. Therefore, take extra care while driving even if the Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System is active. 80 2-1. Electric vehicle system WARNING ● If the vehicle under floor area receives strong shock or impact while driving, stop the vehicle in a safe place and check around the bottom of the vehicle. If there is damage to the traction battery or liquid leakage, it may lead to a vehicle fire, etc. Do not touch the vehicle and immedi- ately contact your SUBARU dealer. Even if no damage can be seen under the floor, the traction bat- tery may be damaged. If the vehicle received an impact under the floor, have the traction battery inspected at a SUBARU dealer. ■ Modifications Do not make modifications that lower the height of the vehicle. The traction battery in the under floor area may come into contact with the ground when the height of vehicle is lowered. If the trac- tion battery is damaged, a vehicle fire may occur, possibly resulting in death or serious injury. Emergency shut off sys- tem When a certain level of impact is detected by the impact sensors, the emergency shut off system turns off the EV system and blocks the high voltage current. If the emergency shut off system activates, your vehicle will not restart. To restart the EV sys- tem, contact your SUBARU dealer. Warning message A message is automatically dis- played when a malfunction occurs in the EV system or an improper operation is attempted. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions. (→P.140, 551) ■ If a warning light comes on, a warning message is displayed, or the 12-volt battery is discon- nected The EV system may not start. In that case, try to start the system again. If the “READY” indicator does not come on, contact your SUBARU dealer. ■ When the traction battery is completely discharged When the EV system cannot be started due to the traction battery being completely discharged, restart the system after AC charging or DC charging. When charging, it is rec- ommended to charge the traction battery until the traction battery charge warning light turns off in order to ensure sufficient driving dis- tance. 2-1. Electric vehicle system 81 Battery Electric Vehi- cle driving tips Unlike the conventional vehicles, the electricity con- sumption efficiency of bat- tery electric vehicles will decline if they continue driving on highways (or freeways) or at high aver- age speeds, causing the possible driving distance to reduce. Therefore, if the remaining charge of the traction battery is low, avoid relying on the displayed possible driving distance too much as well as driving on highways (or freeways). Driving the vehicle at mod- erate speeds, the traction battery’s electricity con- sumption can be controlled. The following driving tips will contribute to reduction in the battery consumption and increase in the driving range. Shift position operation Shift the shift position to D when stopped at a traffic light, or driv- ing in heavy traffic, etc. Shift the shift position to P when parking. When shifting the shift position to N while driving, there is no positive effect on electricity con- sumption. In the N, the traction battery cannot be charged. Also, when using the air conditioning system, etc., the traction battery electricity is consumed. (→P.238) Delays Repeated acceleration and deceleration due to traffic con- 2 gestion, long waits at traffic lights, and driving on steep inclines will lead to poor electric- ity consumption. In order to avoid those situations as much as possible, check traffic reports before leaving. If the vehicle is driven in traffic congestion, gen- tly release the brake pedal to allow the vehicle to move for- ward slightly, avoid overuse of the accelerator pedal. Doing so can help minimize unnecessary electricity consumption. When braking Make sure to operate the brakes gently and a timely manner. A greater amount of electrical energy can be regenerated when slowing down. Highway (or freeways) driving Control and maintain the vehicle at a constant speed. Before stopping at a toll booth or simi- lar, allow plenty of time to 82 2-1. Electric vehicle system release the accelerator and gen- tly apply the brakes. A greater amount of electrical energy can be regenerated when slowing down. Air conditioning ⚫ Use the air conditioning only when necessary. Doing so can help reduce excessive electricity consumption. In summer: When the ambient tem- perature is high, use the recircu- lated air mode. Doing so will help to reduce the burden on the air condi- tioning system and reduce electric- ity consumption as well. In winter: Excessive or unneces- sary heating should be avoided. Also, electricity consumption can be improved by avoiding overuse of the heater. ⚫ When the ALL AUTO (ECO) switch on the air conditioner operation switch is turned ON, the air conditioning system prioritizes the use of direct heating such as seat heaters to warm the surroundings of the occupants and reduce power consumption by the air conditioner. ⚫ When using the Remote Air Conditioning System (→P.439) while the AC charging cable is connected to the vehicle, electricity con- sumption immediately after starting off will be reduced because air conditioning is operated mainly using elec- tricity from an external power source. Checking tire inflation pressure Make sure to check the tire infla- tion pressure frequently. Improper tire inflation pressure can cause poor electricity con- sumption. Also, as snow tires can cause large amounts of friction, their use on dry roads will lead to poor electricity consumption. Use tires that are appropriate for the season. Luggage Carrying heavy luggage will lead to poor electricity consumption. Avoid carrying unnecessary lug- gage. Driving range The driving range dis- played on the multi-informa- tion display, etc., shows the reference distance that driv- ing is possible, and the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed. Displayed value A value for which a sufficient level of driving performance can be provided is estimated based on the remaining charge of the traction battery, the state of the traction battery, the outside tem- perature, etc., and is displayed on the multi-information display. (→P.152) When the outside temperature is low, the traction battery output may be decreased, causing the possible driving distance to be shorter. However, this is not a malfunction. Charge the trac- tion battery earlier than usual. Tips for extending the driving range Possible driving distance varies significantly depending on how the vehicle is driven, road condi- tions, the weather, the outside temperature, usage conditions of electrical components and the 2-1. Electric vehicle system 83 number of occupants. Possible driving distance could be extended if the followings are performed: ⚫ Maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front and avoid unnecessary acceleration and deceleration ⚫ Accelerate and decelerate the 2 vehicle as smoothly as possi- ble ⚫ Drive at moderate speeds as much as possible and main- tain a constant speed ⚫ Set the air conditioning sys- tem to a moderate tempera- ture and avoid using the heating and cooling functions excessively. ⚫ Use tires of the specified size and maintain the specified tire pressure ⚫ Do not add unnecessary weight to the vehicle Display when charging is completed The followings indicate that charging has been carried out properly. ⚫ The AC charging indicator turns off ⚫ “Charging complete” is dis- played on the multi-informa- tion display when a door is opened while the power 84 2-1. Electric vehicle system switch is off. (→P.100) Regardless of the type of power source or whether the charging schedule function is used, charging is completed if the above can be confirmed. Charging-related messages: →P.140 2-2. Charging 85 Charging equipment Charging equipment and names 2 AC charging inlet Charging indicator (→P.86) and Charging inlet light DC charging inlet Charging port lid (→P.85) AC charging cable (If equipped)* (→P.87) Charging port *: For proper handling and precautions for the AC charging cable, refer to the owner’s manual that comes with it. Opening/closing the charging port lid ■ Open Slightly open the charging port lid by pressing the rear edge of it (the position shown in the illus- tration) Fully open the charging port lid by hand. 86 2-2. Charging ■ About lid lifter ●The charging port lid is not closed if the lid lifter is pushing in before closing the charging port lid. In that case, push again with the door unlocked and release the lid lifter, and close the charging port lid again. ■ Close Move the charging port lid to the slightly open position and then press the rear edge (the position shown in the illustration) to close it. ■ About the charging port lid open/close detection switch When the charging port lid is open, be careful not to touch the charging port lid open/close detection switch. When the charging port lid is open, be careful not to touch the charging port lid open/close detection switch (position shown in the figure). If you accidentally touch the switch, the vehicle may incorrectly indicate that. Charging indicator The illumination/flashing pattern changes to inform the user of the charging status in the follow- ing ways. 2-2. Charging 87 Illumina- tion/flashi ng pat- tern Illumi- nated Flashes nor- mally*2 Flashes rapidly*2 Vehicle condition • Charging is in prog- ress*1 • Battery heater (→P.97) is operating When charging sched- ule is registered (→P.117) and AC charging cable is con- nected to vehicle When charging cannot be carried out due to malfunction in a power source or the vehicle, etc. (→P.133) AC charging cable* *: if equipped The function, correct oper- ating procedure, etc., of the AC charging cable are explained. WARNING ■ When using the AC charging 2 cable and CCID (Charging Circuit Interrupting Device) Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may cause an unexpected accident, resulting in death or serious injury. ● Do not attempt to disassemble or repair the AC charging cable, charging connector, plug or CCID (Charging Circuit Inter- rupting Device). If a problem arises with the AC charging cable or the CCID (Charging Circuit Interrupting Device), stop charging immediately and con- tact your SUBARU dealer. ● Do not subject the AC charging cable, charging connector, plug or CCID (Charging Circuit Inter- *1: The indicator is dimmed when the charging is done *2: Flashes for a certain period of time, and then turns off. rupting Device) to strong force or impact. ● Do not apply excessive force to the AC charging cable by force- fully folding, twisting, pulling or dragging the AC charging cable. ● Do not damage the AC charging cable with sharp objects. ● Do not fold the charging con- nector or plug or insert foreign objects into them. ● Do not put the charging connec- tor and plug into water. 88 2-2. Charging WARNING ● Do not bring the AC charging cable to a high-temperature item such as a heating device. ● Do not apply a load to the AC charging cable and plug-cord (such as wrapping the AC charging cable around the CCID [Charging Circuit Interrupting Device] and the charging con- nector). ● Do not use or leave the AC charging cable in situations where a load is applied to the outlet and the plug (such as when the CCID [Charging Cir- cuit Interrupting Device] is hanging in the air without con- tacting the ground). NOTICE ■ Precautions when handling AC charging cable Make sure to observe the follow- ing precautions. Failure to observe these precautions may result in damage to the AC charging cable and AC charging inlet. ● Insert the charging connector straight into the AC charging inlet. ●After inserting the charging con- nector, do not apply excessive force to or twist the connector. Also, do not lean on the connec- tor or hang any objects from it. ● Do not step on or trip over the AC charging cable. ●Before removing the charging connector, make sure that it is unlocked. (→P.93) ●After removing the AC charging cable, promptly return it to its proper location. ● After removing the charging connector, securely install the AC charging inlet cap. ■ When using the AC charging cable and related parts →P.104 ■ Precautions for low tempera- tures In low temperatures, the AC charging cable and plug-cord may become hard. Therefore, make sure to not apply excessive force when they are hard. If excessive force is applied to the hardened AC charging cable and plug-cord, they may be damaged. 2-2. Charging 89 The names of each part of the AC charging cable 2 Charging connector Latch release button Plug Plug-cord CCID (Charging Circuit Interrupting Device) Power indicator (→P.90) Charging indicator (CCID) (→P.90) Error warning indicator (→P.90) Safety functions The CCID (Charging Circuit Interrupting Device) has the fol- lowing safety features. ■ Electrical leakage detec- tion function If an electrical leakage is detected during charging, the power source will be automati- cally interrupted, thus prevent- ing fires or electrical shocks caused by electrical leakage. If the power source is interrupted, the error warning indicator flashes. If the power source is interrupted: →P.90 90 2-2. Charging ■ Automatic check function This is an automatic system check that is run before charging begins to check for problems in the operation of the electrical leakage detection function. If a malfunction is found in the elec- trical leakage detection function as a result of the check, the error warning indicator flashes to inform the user. (→P.90) ■ Temperature detection function A temperature detection func- tion is equipped to the plug. While charging, if heat is gener- ated due to looseness on the outlet side etc., this function suppresses heat by controlling the charging current. ■ Conditions for supplying current to the vehicle The CCID (Charging Circuit Interrupting Device) is designed to prevent electrical current from being supplied to the charging connector when it is not con- nected to the vehicle, even if the plug is inserted into the outlet. CCID (Charging Circuit Interrupting Device) indi- cators ■ Indicator operation 3 indicators are used to indicate the following conditions. Power indicator Illuminates when electricity is flow- ing to the CCID (Charging Circuit Interrupting Device). Charging indicator Illuminates when charging is in progress. Error warning indicator Flashes when there is an electrical leakage or when a malfunction occurs in the CCID (Charging Cir- cuit Interrupting Device). ■ When a malfunction occurs during charging The indicators on the CCID (Charging Circuit Interrupting Device) use a combination of different statuses (not illuminated, illuminated or flashing) to inform the user of internal malfunctions. When the error warning indicator is illuminated or flashing, temporarily remove the plug from the outlet and then reconnect it to check if the error indicator turns off. If the error warning indicator turns off, charging is now possible. 2-2. Charging 91 If it does not turn off, perform the correction procedure in the following chart. Status Charging sys- tem error Plug tempera- ture detection malfunction Plug tempera- ture increase detection AC charging cable life span notice AC charging cable life span Power indica- tor Not illumi- nated Illuminated Flashes Flashes Illuminated Illuminated Error warning indicator Not illumi- nated or illu- minated Flashes Flashes Not illumi- nated Flashes Illuminated Details/Correction procedure An electrical leakage is detected and charging is canceled, or there is a mal- function in the AC charging cable. → Consult your SUBARU 2 dealer There is a malfunction in the plug temperature detection part. → Consult your SUBARU dealer An increase in the tem- perature of the plug is detected due to an improper connection between the outlet and plug. → Check that the plug is securely connected to the outlet. While the power indicator is flash- ing, charging is per- formed with limited current. The number of charges using the AC charging cable is nearing the end of its usable life span. → Consult your SUBARU dealer The number of charges using the AC charging cable has exceeded its usable number of charges. → Consult your SUBARU dealer 92 2-2. Charging Inspecting the AC charging cable For safety, inspect the AC charging cable on a routine basis. WARNING ■ Routine inspection Check the following points regu- larly. Failure to do so may cause an unexpected accident, resulting in death or serious injury. ●The AC charging cable, plug, charging connector, CCID (Charging Circuit Interrupting Device), etc., have not been damaged ●The outlet has not been dam- aged. ●The plug can be securely inserted into the outlet. ●The plug does not get extremely hot during use ●The tip of the plug has not been deformed. ●The plug is not dirtied by dust, etc. Remove the plug from the outlet before inspecting it. If any abnor- malities are found in the AC charging cable as a result of the inspection, immediately stop use and consult your SUBARU dealer. ■ Maintaining the AC charging cable When the AC charging cable is dirty, first remove the dirt with a hard, wringed cloth, and then wipe the cable with a dry cloth. However, never wash it with water. If the AC charging cable is washed with water, fire or electric shock may occur during charging, possibly resulting in death or seri- ous injury. ■ When not using the AC charging cable for a long time Remove the plug from the outlet. Dust could accumulate on the plug or in the outlet, possibly causing overheating which could lead to a fire. Also, keep the cable in a place free from moisture. Locking and unlock- ing AC charging con- nector 2-2. Charging 93 ■ AC charging connector lock function If the AC charging connector is The AC charging connector will be locked when it is connected to the AC charging inlet, preventing the AC charging cable from being disconnected while charging. The AC charging connector is locked/unlocked, in connection with the locked/unlocked state of the door, when it is inserted into the AC charging inlet. Locking and unlocking the AC charging connec- tor ■ Locking the charging con- nector If the door is locked while the AC charging connector is inserted into the AC charging inlet, the AC charging connector will be locked. If the door is locked and the AC charging connector is inserted, the con- nector locks automatically. ■ Unlocking the charging connector The AC charging connector will be unlocked when the doors are unlocked. locked/unlocked repeatedly, it may not work temporary due to protect the system by AC charging system. In this case, wait for a while before connecting the AC charging connec- tor to AC charging inlet again. The AC charging connector lock function does not guarantee that theft of the AC charging cable will be 2 prevented, and is not necessarily effective for all mischiefs. ■ When the AC charging connec- tor cannot be inserted into the AC charging inlet Check that the connector lock pin is not extended. If the connector lock pin is extended, the connector lock is operating. Unlock the doors using the smart key system or wireless remote con- trol and unlock the AC charging con- nector lock and check that the connector lock pin is not extended. ■ If the AC charging connector cannot be unlocked The AC charging connector can be unlocked by operating the emer- gency release wire. 1 Open the hood. (→P.491) 2 Pull the emergency release wire. The AC charging connector is unlocked and can be removed. 94 2-2. Charging WARNING ■ When connecting the AC charging connector to the AC charging inlet ● Do not insert hand into the con- nector lock portion. A hand may be caught in the connector lock pin, resulting in an injury. 3 After unlocking the AC charging connector, fix the handle of the emergency release wire to the attachment. This method is a temporary correc- tion procedure for emergency use only. If the problem persists, have the vehicle inspected by your SUB- ARU dealer immediately. Do not operate the emergency release wire when the charging con- nector can be unlocked in the nor- mal procedure. NOTICE ■ When locking the AC charging connector Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may cause a malfunction in the charging con- nector locking system. ● Check that the AC charging connector is compatible with this vehicle. A charging connector of the dif- ferent type or a charging con- nector with damaged or deformed insertion part may not be locked. ● Do not apply excessive force to the AC charging connector after the charging connector is inserted. When removing the AC charging connector, make sure to unlock the AC charging con- nector. Power sources that can be used An external power source that fulfills the following cri- teria is necessary for charging this vehicle. Con- firm this before charging. WARNING ■ Warnings for electrical faults Make sure to observe the precau- tions in this Owner’s Manual when charging the vehicle. Failure to use a power source that fulfills the requirements, or failure to observe regulations while charging could lead to an acci- dent, possibly resulting in death or serious injury. Power sources ⚫ Connect to an AC 120 V out- let (NEMA 5-15R) with a Ground-Fault Circuit-Inter- rupter (GFCI) and a circuit breaker. Use of a 15A individ- ual circuit is strongly recom- mended to ensure AC charging cable will operate properly. ⚫ When charging outdoors, make sure to connect to a weatherproof outlet that is certified for outdoor use. Checking Ground-Fault Cir- cuit-Interrupter (GFCI) opera- tion before its use is recommended. 2-2. Charging 95 Outlets that can be con- nected NEMA 5-15R outlet The illustration is an example shown for demonstration pur- poses, and may differ from the actual configuration. 2 ■ The charging environment For safe charging, the following charging equipment and settings are recommended. ●Weatherproof outlet When charging outdoors, connect the plug to a weatherproof outlet, and ensure that the plug remains waterproof while the plug is con- nected. ● Dedicated circuit • To reduce the risk of fire, connect only to an at least 15A branch cir- cuit with an over-current protec- tion in accordance with the National Electric Code, ANSI/NFPA 70. • To reduce the risk of electric shock when working with the plug, con- nect to a outlet with a Ground- Fault Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) or that has an Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker installed. 96 2-2. Charging WARNING ■ Power sources precautions Observe the following precau- tions. If you do not follow them, fire, electrical shock or damage may occur, possibly resulting in death or serious injury. ● Connect to an AC 120 V outlet (NEMA 5-15R) with a Ground- Fault Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) and supplied by a circuit breaker per your local code. Use of a 15A individual circuit is strongly recommended. ● Do not connect the AC charging cable to a power strip, multiple electrical outlet adapter or con- version plug. ● Connecting the AC charging cable to an extension cord is strictly prohibited. The exten- sion cord may overheat and does not contain a Ground- Fault Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI). The leakage detection function of the CCID (Charging Circuit Interrupting Device) (→P.90) may not operate correctly. ● Do not connect to a branch electrical outlet. ● Use of a block heater for charging is prohibited. ● Make sure to connect the charging connector and AC charging inlet directly. Do not connect a converting adaptor or extension cord between the charging connector and AC charging inlet. 2-2. Charging 97 Charging methods The following methods can be used to charge the trac- tion battery. Types of charging meth- ods ■ AC charging (→P.104) This is a charging method used when charging from an AC out- let with the AC charging cable or charging that use an AC char- ger. By setting charging schedule, it is also possible to charge at the desired date and time. (→P.117) ■ DC charging (→P.112) This is a charging method that uses a DC charger that com- plies with SAE J 1772. The trac- tion battery can be charged in a shorter time than AC charging. SAE is an abbreviation for an industrial standard issued by the Society of Automotive Engi- neers. Charging-linked functions This vehicle is equipped with several functions that are linked with charging. ■ My Room Mode (→P.127) When the charging cable is con- nected to the vehicle, electrical components such as the air con- ditioning system and audio sys- tem can be used by the power supply from an external power source*. *: Depending on the situation, elec- tricity of the traction battery may be consumed. ■ Traction battery heater When the outside temperature 2 is low and the charging cable is connected to the vehicle, this function automatically warms the traction battery until it reaches or exceeds a certain temperature. ⚫ The operation of this function is stopped automatically when the charging cable is discon- nected or if the charging cable is left connected to the vehicle for approximately 3 days. ⚫ When the timer is charging (→P.117), it operates accord- ing to the charging start time. ■ Traction battery warming control This control operates after the charging cable remains con- nected to the vehicle for approx- imately 3 days and the traction battery heater automatically stops. It automatically insulates the traction battery in extremely low temperatures. ⚫ This control stops 31 days after the charging cable is connected, even if it is still connected to the vehicle. 98 2-2. Charging ⚫ When this control operates, charging schedule settings are ignored and charging starts. ■ Traction battery cooler When the traction battery is hot and the AC charging cable is connected to the vehicle, this function cools the traction bat- tery to protect it. The function may operate when continuously driving at high speeds such as driving on high- ways or freeways, or during DC charging. ■ Using My Room Mode during DC charging →P.128 ■ Traction battery heater ●Traction battery heater may oper- ate when charging is not being performed. ●When traction battery heater is operating, the charging indicator illuminates. ●When traction battery heater is operating during charging, the charging may take longer than normal. ● The remaining charge of the trac- tion battery declines when the traction battery heater operates, it might be necessary to recharge the traction battery again in order to supplement the remaining charge. ■ Traction battery cooler ●For AC charging: Traction battery cooler settings can be changed on the multi-information display. (→P.98) ●The charging indicator is illumi- nated while traction battery cooler is on standby or operating. ●When the charge level of the trac- tion battery is low, the traction bat- tery cooler may not operate, even if the temperature of the traction battery is high. ●When the following conditions are met while the traction battery cooler is operating, the cooling operation will stop. • The hood is opened • The power switch is turned to ACC or ON. • The shift position is changed to any position other than P • The Remote Air Conditioning Sys- tem is operated (→P.439) • The remaining charge of the trac- tion battery drops below a certain amount ● The traction battery cooler oper- ates using power supplied by the traction battery and an external power source. • While the traction battery cooler is operating, the charge of the trac- tion battery will increase and decrease within a certain range, and will not increase as during AC charging. • When the traction battery cooler operates, charger will recognize it as the battery being charged. If this function operates while a charger which charges a charging fee is connected to the vehicle, AC charging fees will apply. ■ Changing of the traction battery cooler setting Setting can be changed on the multi-information display. Use the meter control switches (→P.156) and select “Vehicle Set- tings”, “Charging Settings”, “Battery Cooler”, and change the setting. When selecting to off, the traction battery output may be restricted depending on the driving situation. 2-2. Charging 99 Charging tips This section explains meth- ods for using the charging function for this vehicle and checking information related to charging. Systematically charging To enable the use of battery electric vehicle, we recommend systematically charging the vehicle. ■ Before leaving home In order to use the Electric Vehi- cle, charge the traction battery at home before leaving. ■ On the way to the destina- tion or at the destination When the remaining charge of the traction battery gets low, recharge the battery at the near- est charging station. ■ After returning home In order to drive the next time, 2 charge the traction battery. Settings the charging schedule allows you to charge the traction battery at the desired time such as late at night or early in the morning. Furthermore, the charging schedule can be set to automatically charge the traction battery every day or at the same time on certain days. (→P.117) Checking information related to charging Information related to charging is displayed and can be checked on the multi-information display. ■ While charging When any door is opened during charging with the power switch off, the current charging condi- tion and approximate time remaining until charging is com- plete are displayed for a certain period of time. The actual charging time may differ depending on conditions such as the remaining capacity 100 2-2. Charging of the traction battery, outside temperature, and specifications of the charger. The time until charging com- pleted may not be displayed if the charging current to the trac- tion battery becomes smaller and the charging time becomes longer. ■ After charging is complete When any door is opened with the power switch off after charging is complete, a mes- sage detailing the results of the charging is displayed for a while. Also, a message is displayed if an operation that stops charging is performed or a situation where charging cannot be per- formed occurs. When a message is displayed, follow the instructions displayed on the screen. (→P.140) Things to know before charging Make sure to read the fol- lowing precautions before charging the traction bat- tery. ■ Safety functions ● The EV system will not start while the charging cable is attached to the vehicle, even if the power switch is operated. ● If the charging cable is connected while the “READY” indicator is illu- minated, the EV system will stop automatically and driving will not be possible. WARNING ■ Caution when charging People with implantable cardiac pacemakers or cardiac resynchro- nization therapy-pacemakers should not carry out the charging procedure. Ask someone else to do it. ● Do not approach the charger and charging cable while charging. Charging procedure may affect the operation of such devices. ● Do not remain in the vehicle during charging. Charging procedure may affect the operation of such devices. ● Do not enter the vehicle even to take something out of the lug- gage compartment. Charging procedure may affect the operation of such devices. 2-2. Charging 101 WARNING ■ When the charging cable is connected to the vehicle Do not change the shift position from P. In the unlikely event that the charging cable has been dam- aged, the shift position may change from P to another position and the vehicle could move, pos- sibly leading to an accident. ■ Charging precautions This vehicle has been designed to allow charging from an external power source using an AC charging cable for exclusive use with standard household AC out- lets. However, the vehicle differs greatly from standard household electrical goods in the following ways, and incorrect usage could cause fire or electric shock, possi- bly leading to death or serious injury. ●When charging, a large amount of current will flow for a long time. (→P.95) ● Depending on the charging environment, perform charging outdoors. NOTICE ■ Charging precautions To charge properly, follow the pro- cedure after reading the explana- tion below. Charging is intended to be carried out by licensed driv- ers only who properly understand the charging procedure. ● Do not allow people who is not used to charging, such as chil- dren, to perform charging with- out supervision. Also, keep the AC charging cable out of reach of infants. ●When charging with a charger, follow the procedures for using each charger. Confirm the following 2 before charging Before charging, always check the following items. ⚫ The parking brake is applied. (→P.245) ⚫ The power switch is turned to OFF. (→P.233) ⚫ Lights such as the headlights, emergency flashers and inte- rior lights, etc. are turned off. If these light switches are turned on, then these features will con- sume electricity, and charging time will increase. Inspecting the AC charging cable Before charging, make sure that each part of the AC charging cable is in good condition. (→P.92) ■ During charging ●The charging starting time may differ depending on the state of the vehicle, but this does not indi- cate a malfunction. ● During charging, sounds may be heard from near the traction bat- 102 2-2. Charging tery in accordance with the opera- tion of the air conditioning system or “Battery Cooler” (→P.98). ●The surface of the CCID (Charging Circuit Interrupting Device) may become hot, but this does not indicate a malfunction. ●Depending on radio wave condi- tions, interference may be heard on the radio. ■ AC charging and DC charging AC charging and DC charging can- not be performed at the same time. Even if it is connected the charging cable to both of the two charging inlets, only one of them will be charged. ■ When charging using a public charging facility, check the set- ting of the charging schedule function. ●When the charging schedule is registered, temporarily turn off the function or turn “Charge Now” on. (→P.117) ●When the charging schedule is set to on, charging will not start even if the AC charging cable is con- nected. Also, charging fee may occur due to connection of the AC charging cable. ■ Capacity reduction of the trac- tion battery The capacity of the traction battery will decline gradually when the trac- tion battery is in use. The rate at which it declines will differ in accor- dance with environmental conditions and the way in which the vehicle is used. Observing the following can help suppress the decline in the traction battery capacity. ● Avoid parking the vehicle in high temperature areas, under direct sunlight when the traction battery is fully charged. ● Avoid accelerating and decelerat- ing frequently and suddenly. ● Avoid frequent driving at high speed. ● Use the charging schedule func- tion as much as possible in order to fully charged the traction bat- tery before starting off. (→P.117) ●Avoid frequent DC charging Also, if the capacity of the traction battery capacity reduces, the dis- tance that can be driven decreases. However, vehicle performance does not significantly become worse. ■ When the remaining charge of the traction battery is low after charging In the following situations, the remaining charge of the traction bat- tery after charging completes may be less than normal in order to pro- tect the traction battery (the driving range after the battery is fully charged may be shorter).* ● Charging is performed when the outside temperature is low or high ● Charging is performed immedi- ately after high-load driving or in extreme heat In any other situation, if the remain- ing charge of the traction battery is significantly lower than normal after charging completes, have the vehi- cle inspected by your SUBARU dealer. *: When this occurs, even if the remaining charge display of the traction battery shows that it is fully charged, the remaining charge rapidly decreases faster than normal. ■ When the charging amount sent to the traction battery decreases When usage of A/C or operation of the “Battery Heater”, etc., reduces the charging power sent to the trac- tion battery, the charging amount sent to the traction battery or the amount of remain charge in the trac- tion battery may decrease. 2-2. Charging using DC charging. ●When selecting “DC charging 103 ■ Certification This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harm- ful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. ■ Charging time may increase In the following situations, charging time may become longer than nor- mal: ●In very hot or very cold tempera- tures. ●When the traction battery becomes hot, such as immedi- ately after high-load driving. ●The vehicle is consuming a lot of electricity, for example, when the headlights are on, etc. ●When using “My Room Mode”. (→P.127) ●There is a power outage during charging. ●When adjusting the power supply with the charger. ●There is a drop in the voltage of external power source. ● The charge in the 12-volt battery is low, for example due to the vehicle being left unused for a long period of time. ●When the upper limit of charging current is changed in the charging current setting of the vehicle (→P.106) ●When the battery heater operates. (→P.98) ●When the “Battery Cooler” is oper- ated before charging. (→P.98) ●When the plug generates heat due to a loose outlet connection, etc. ●When frequently and repeatedly power” setting other than “MAX”. ●When the temperature of charging-related parts is high. ■ AC charging electricity This vehicle can be charged up to approximately 7 kW. However, depending on the used charger or AC charging cable, charging electricity may be limited. 2 104 2-2. Charging How to use AC charging This section explains the procedure for charging the traction battery with an AC charging cable. When using an AC charger, make sure to check the operation instructions on the AC charger. When the charging sched- ule is registered, make sure “Charge Now” is turned on before charging. (→P.122, 126) ●When inserting the plug into or removing the plug from the out- let, make sure to hold the body of the plug. ● Do not damage the AC charging inlet cap with a sharp object. ● Do not forcefully pull the AC charging cable that is caught or entangled. If the cable is entan- gled, disentangle it before using. ● Do not disassemble, repair or modify the AC charging inlet. When the AC charging inlet needs to be repaired, consult your SUBARU dealer. Charging precautions →P.100 NOTICE ■ When using the AC charging cable and related parts To prevent damage to the AC charging cable and related parts, observe the following precautions. ●When interrupting or canceling charging, remove the charging connector before removing the plug. ●When removing the AC charging cable, check that the charging connector is unlocked. ● Do not forcefully pull the charging connector cap and AC charging inlet cap. ● Do not apply a vibration to the charging connector while charging. Charging may be stopped. ● Do not insert anything but the charging connector into the AC charging inlet. When charging 1 Prepare the AC charging cable. (→P.87) 2 Insert the AC charging cable into the outlet of the external power source. Make sure to hold the body of the plug and insert it firmly into the out- let. When the remote switch is equipped, turn it on. Check that the power indicator on the CCID (Charging Circuit Inter- rupting Device) is illuminated. (If it is not illuminated, refer to P.131) In order to reduce the load on the outlet and plug, when inserting the plug, use a string, etc., to hang the CCID (Charging Circuit Interrupting 2-2. Charging 105 Device) on a hook or equivalent. 5 Remove the charging con- nector cap and secure it to the cable. 2 3 Open the charging port lid. (→P.85) The AC charging inlet light will illuminate. 4 Open the AC charging inlet cap. 6 Insert the charging connector into the AC charging inlet. Align the guide position on the bot- tom of the charging connector, and push the charging connector straight into the AC charging inlet as far as possible. Once a click sound is heard, check that the charging connector is securely con- nected. The AC charging connector is locked when the door is locked. If the door is locked and the AC charging connector is plugged in, it will automatically lock. 7 Confirm that the charging indicator of the charging port is illuminated. 106 2-2. Charging Charging will not start if the charging indicator does not illumi- nate when the charging connector is inserted. (→P.131) If the charging indicator is flashing, the charging schedule is registered. (→P.106) If the error warning indicator on the CCID (Charging Circuit Interrupting Device) flashes during charging, check P.90 and follow the correc- tion procedure. The charging indicator will turn off when charging is completed. The charging indicator will also turn off when charging is stopped for some reason before completion. In this case, refer to P.131 ■ When connecting the AC charging connector If the door is opened or the power switch is turned to ON with the AC charging connector connected, the charging cable indicator turns on to notify that the AC charging connec- tor is connected. ■ If the charging indicator of the charging port flashes after con- necting the AC charging cable The charging schedule (→P.117) is registered and charging cannot be performed. To cancel charging using the charging schedule and start charging, perform any of the follow- ing procedures. ●Turn “Charge Now” on (→P.122, 126) ●While the charging indicator is flashing, remove and reconnect the charging connector immedi- ately ■ When the charging connector cannot be inserted into the AC charging inlet →P.93 ■ Safety function If the latch release button is pressed, charging will not begin even if the AC charging cable is connected. Also, charging will be stopped if the latch release button is pressed and held for several seconds during charging. When restarting charging, reinsert the charging connector after pulling it out, and check that the charging indicator of the charging port illuminates. ■ Charging time may increase →P.103 ■ When your circuit breaker trips during charging The upper limit of the charging cur- rent can be changed on the multi- information display or multimedia. ●Setting operations on multi-infor- mation display 1 Press or of the meter control switches to select . 2 Press or of the meter control switches to select “Vehi- 2-2. Charging 107 cle Settings”, and then press and hold . 3 Press or of the meter control switches to select “Charging Settings”, and then press . The “Charging Settings” screen will be displayed. 4 Press or of the meter control switches to select “Charging Current”, and then press . The “Charging Current” screen will be displayed. 5 Press or of the meter control switches to select “16A” or “8A” and then press . ●Setting operations on multimedia 1 Select . 2 Select “Vehicle customize”. 3 Select “Charging”. 4 Select “Charging current”. 5 Select “16A” or “8A”. The maximum charging current is limited to less than or equal to the selected current.* If the breaker still trips while charging, even after changing the upper limit of the charging current, check if the connected power source meets the specified charging conditions. (→P.95) *: Restricting the charging current will lengthen the charging time. ■ Changing the “Charging Limit” settings The upper limit of the charge capac- ity can be changed in “Vehicle Set- tings” on the multi-information display or multimedia. The selected upper limit value is common to AC charging and DC charging. ●Setting operations on multi-infor- mation display 1 Press or of the meter control switches to select . 2 Press or of the meter control switches to select “Vehi- cle Settings”, and then press and 2 hold . 3 Press or of the meter control switches to select “Charging Settings”, and then press . The “Charging Settings” screen will be displayed. 4 Press or of the meter control switches to select “Charging Limit”, and then press . The “Charging Limit” screen will be displayed. 5 Select “Full”, “90%”, “80%”, “70%”, “60%” or “50%” and then press . ●Setting operations on multimedia 1 Select . 2 Select “Vehicle customize”. 3 Select “Charging”. 4 Select “Charging limit”. 5 Select “Full”, “90%”, “80%”, “70%”, “60%” or “50%”. If the setting is changed during DC charging, charging may stop due to the operation of the DC charger timer and the traction battery cannot be fully charged. 108 2-2. Charging ■ Protection function of AC charging inlet overheating By installing a temperature sensor to the AC charging inlet, prevents parts from melting when the tem- perature rises due to foreign matter entering the charging connector. When a certain temperature increase is detected, charging is stopped immediately. After this, when the power switch is off, a message will be displayed on the multi-information display (→P.140) WARNING ■ When charging Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may cause an unexpected accident, resulting in death or serious injury. ● Connect to a power source suit- able for charging. (→P.95) ● Check that the AC charging cable, plug and outlet are free of foreign matter. ●Before charging, check that the AC charging inlet is not deformed, damaged or cor- roded, and check that the inlet is free of foreign matter such as dirt, snow and ice. If there is dirt or dust in these areas, remove completely before inserting the charging connector. ●Only use outlets where the plug can be securely inserted. ● Do not bundle or wind the AC charging cable while charging, as doing so may result in over- heating. ● Do not touch the terminals of the charging connector and AC charging inlet with a sharp metal objects (needles, etc.,) or hands, or short them with for- eign objects. ●When charging outdoors, make sure to connect to a weather- proof outlet for outdoor use. Ensure the weatherproof outlet cover closes completely. If the weatherproof outlet cover can- not be closed, install a weather- proof outlet cover that will close. ● In order to stop charging at the charging station, follow the instructions of the charger. ● If any heat, smoke, odors, noise or other abnormalities are noticed during charging, stop charging immediately. ● Do not insert the plug if the out- let is submerged in water or snow. ●When charging while it is raining or snowing, do not connect or disconnect the plug if your hands are wet. Also, do not get the plug or outlet wet. ● Do not charge the vehicle during a lightning storm. ● Prevent the AC charging cable from being caught in the door or back door. ● Do not let the wheels on the AC charging cable, plug, charging connector and CCID (Charging Circuit Interrupting Device). ●Firmly insert the plug into the outlet. ● Do not use an extension cord and converting adaptor. WARNING 2-2. Charging ■ Onboard traction battery charger 109 ● Close the hood before using the charging system. The cooling fan may start oper- ating suddenly. Touching or get- ting close to rotating parts such as the fan may cause your hands or clothes (especially a necktie or scarf) to become caught and result in a serious injury. ●After connecting the charging cable, confirm that it is not wound around anything. ● If the power indicator on the CCID (Charging Circuit Inter- rupting Device) does not illumi- nate after plugging the AC charging cable into the outlet, unplug it immediately. ■ If the error warning indicator on the CCID (Charging Circuit Interrupting Device) illumi- nates or flashes during charging There may be an electrical leak- age in the power source path, or there may be a malfunction in the AC charging cable or CCID (Charging Circuit Interrupting Device). Refer to P.90 and follow the cor- rection procedure. If the error warning indicator does not turn off even after performing the correc- tion procedure, immediately stop charging, remove the AC charging cable and contact your SUBARU dealer. Continuing to charge the vehicle in that condi- tion may lead to unforeseen acci- dents or serious injury. The onboard traction battery char- ger is located in the motor com- partment. Make sure to observe the following precautions regard- ing the onboard traction battery charger. Failure to observe these precautions may result in death or serious injury such as burns and electric shocks. ●The onboard traction battery 2 charger is hot during charging. Do not touch the onboard trac- tion battery charger, as doing so may result in burns. ● Do not disassemble, repair or modify the onboard traction bat- tery charger. When the onboard traction battery charger needs to be repaired, consult your SUBARU dealer. NOTICE ■ When charging Do not insert the plug into the AC charging inlet. The AC charging inlet may be damaged. ■ Using private power genera- tor Do not use private power genera- tors as a power source for charging. Doing so may make charging unstable, the voltage may be insufficient, and the charging operation may stop. ■ Charging station Due to the environment in which the power equipment is located, charging may be unstable due to noise, the voltage may be insuffi- cient, and the charging operation may stop. 110 2-2. Charging After charging 1 Unlock the doors to unlock the charging connector. (→P.93) The charging connector will be unlocked and the AC charging inlet light will illuminate when the doors are unlocked. 2 Pull the charging connector towards you while pressing the latch release button. If the latch release button is pressed during charging (while the charging indicator is illuminated), charging will be interrupted. 3 Attach the charging connec- tor cap. 4 Close the AC charging inlet cap and close the charging port lid. 5 Remove the plug from the outlet when the charging equipment will not be used for a prolonged period of time. Hold the body of the plug when removing. Make sure to put the cable away immediately after disconnecting. (→P.111) When leaving the plug inserted, inspect the plug and connector once a month to check if dirt or dust has accumulated. ■ When the outside temperature is low or high The level shown on the SOC (State of Charge) gauge (→P.152) may drop slightly when the power switch is turned to ON, even if charging has been completed and the trac- tion battery is fully charged. How- 2-2. Charging 111 ever, this does not indicate a malfunction. ■ When removing the charging connector Press the latch release button, check that the lever raises up, and then pull the charging connector towards you. If the lever does not raise up even after the latch release button is pressed, the charging connector is locked. If this occurs, unlock the doors using the smart key system or wireless remote control to unlock the charging connector. (→P.93) ■ If the charging connector can- not be unlocked →P.93 ● After removing the plug from the outlet, keep it in a safe place free from moisture and dust. The AC charging cable or plug may be damaged if the cable is stepped on or ridden over by the vehicle. ● After disconnecting the charging connector from the AC charging inlet, make sure to close the AC charging inlet cap and close the charging port lid. 2 If the AC charging inlet cap is left open, water or foreign objects may enter the AC charging inlet, which could lead to vehicle damage. WARNING ■ After charging Remove the plug if it will not be used for a long time. Dirt and dust may accumulate plug or outlet, which could cause a malfunction or fire, possibly leading to death or serious injury. NOTICE ■ After charging ●Store the AC charging cable out of reach from infants and chil- dren. 112 2-2. Charging How to use DC charging This section explains the DC charging procedure for the traction battery. When using a DC charger, make sure to check the operation instructions of the DC charger. WARNING ■ When using a DC charger Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may cause an unexpected accident, resulting in death or serious injury. ● Use a SAE J 1772 compliant DC charger. ● Do not use the charging cable longer than 30 meters. Confirm the following before charging →P.100 When charging 1 Open the charging port lid. (→P.85) 2 The charging inlet light will illuminate. 3 Open the AC charging inlet cap, and then open the DC charging inlet cap. 4 Insert DC charging connector firmly and fully into the charging inlet. The DC charging connector shape and treatment will differ depending on the type of DC charger. Perform the operations in accordance to handling procedures of the DC charger. 2-2. Charging 113 5 Operate the DC charger and start the charging. Follow the handling procedures of the DC charger to start charging. Charging starts after a system check is done. Stop the charging in accordance to the handling procedures of the DC charger when it is desired to inter- rupt the DC charging. ■ When the DC charging connec- tor cannot be inserted into the DC charging inlet →P.93 ■ If a message indicating vehicle error on the DC charger side is displayed Even if a message indicating vehicle error on the DC charger side (ex. vehicle error found, vehicle error occurred, etc.) is displayed, there is no vehicle fault but possibly a com- munication error between the DC charger and vehicle. In this case, there may be terminal damage (bad contact) in the DC charging connec- tor. If there is no error with the vehi- cle, contact the facility manager of the DC charger. ■ During DC charging ●The current charging condition can be checked on the multi-infor- mation display. ●The actual charging time may dif- fer from that displayed on the DC charger during charging. ●There may be occasions the radio cannot be heard due to noise occurrence during DC charging ●As the battery approaches full charge, the charging speed will decrease and it will take longer to complete charging. ●Depending on the specifications of the charger (stand), charging will stop before fully charging. ● The time to complete charging may change, or charging may stop before reaching the upper limit of the charge capacity, due to the remaining charge of the trac- tion battery, the outside tempera- ture, the specifications of the charger (stand), etc. ● It is recommended to avoid fre- quent DC charging to prevent a decline in the traction battery capacity. ●Quickly move from the DC 2 charging space for other users after the DC charging is com- pleted. ● If DC charging is performed while the traction battery is extremely cold, such as in cold weather, steam may come out of the motor compartment or dew may be formed on the hood. This is because the heat, generated while the traction battery is warmed, causes snow, ice, or frost to evaporate. This is not a malfunction. ● Depending on the specifications of the DC charger, charging may stop before the battery is fully charged. ●The charge amount is corrected when the battery is fully charged, so 100% remaining drive battery may not be displayed. ■ How to set the DC charging power You can change the DC charging power limit on the multi-information display or multimedia. ●Setting operations on multi-infor- mation display 1 Press or of the meter control switches to select . 2 Press or of the meter control switches to select “Vehi- 114 2-2. Charging cle Settings”, and then press and hold . 3 Press or of the meter control switches to select “Charging Settings”, and then press . The “Charging Settings” screen will be displayed. 4 Press or of the meter control switches to select “DC charging power”, and then press . The “DC charging power” screen will be displayed. 5 Press or of the meter control switches to select the charging power from “MAX”, “125kW”, “100kW”, “75kW”, “50kW” and then press . The maximum power when charging is limited to the selected power or less. If “MAX” is selected, the vehicle will be charged with the maximum power that can be charged. ●Setting operations on multimedia 1 Select . 2 Select “Vehicle customize”. 3 Select “Charging”. 4 Select “DC charging power”. 5 Select from “MAX”, “75kW”, “50kW”. The maximum power when charging is limited to the selected power or less. If “MAX” is selected, the vehicle will be charged with the maximum power that can be charged. ■ Changing the “Charging Limit” settings →P.107 ■ If “Check Charging System Close Charging Port Lid See Owner’s Manual” is displayed on the multi-information display If the system check after DC charging is not completed success- fully, the EV system will not start even if the power switch is pressed while depressing the brake pedal. Perform a system check with the fol- lowing procedures. 1 Be sure to engage the parking brake and then turn the power switch off. 2 Close the charging inlet cap, close the charging port lid. 3 Check if “Checking Charging System” is displayed on the multi-information display when the power switch is turned to ON. Do not open the charging port lid while the charging system is check- ing. When the system check is com- pleted, the power switch automati- cally turns off. 4 Press the power switch while depressing the brake pedal. The “READY” indicator turns on. Contact your SUBARU dealer if the charging system check is done and the message on the multi-informa- tion display does not go off. WARNING ■ Warnings for DC charging Be sure to observe the following when using DC charging. Failure to do so may cause an accident that could lead to death or serious injury. ● Check that the DC charger and DC charging inlet are not dam- aged. If there is any damage to the DC charging inlet, do not perform a DC charge and have it inspected immediately at your SUBARU dealer. 2-2. Charging 115 WARNING ● Do not touch the terminals of the DC charging connector or inlet with metallic sharp tips (wires and needles), or allow a short circuit to occur with foreign objects. ● Do not insert anything other than the DC charging connector into the DC charging inlet. ● Check that the DC charging cable is not coiled up or pinned underneath heavy objects. ●Be sure the DC charging inlet makes direct contact with the DC charging connector. Do not connect conversion adapters, extension cords, etc., between the DC charging con- nector and DC charging inlet. ●When DC charging is inter- rupted, follow the handling pro- cedures of the DC charger. Immediately stop the DC charging when there is an out- break of heat, smoke, strange noises or smells, etc., during charging. ● Check that the DC charging connector and DC charging inlet do not have foreign objects or snow or ice attached to it. If any- thing is attached to the inlet, be sure to completely remove the material before connecting the DC charging connector. ● Do not charge the vehicle when there is a possibility of lightning. If you notice lightning while charging the vehicle, do not touch the vehicle and the DC charging cable. ● Do not get the DC charging inlet terminals wet. ● Close the hood when using DC charging. The cooling fan may suddenly start to run. Keep hands and clothing (especially a tie, a scarf or a muffler) away from the fan. Failure to do so may cause the hands or cloth- ing to be caught, resulting in serious injury. ■ When connecting the DC charging connector ●Follow the handling procedures 2 of the DC charger to connect the DC charging connector. If the connector is not connected properly, the system cannot rec- ognize the connection, and it may be possible to start the EV system. After charging is completed, make sure to remove the DC charging connector from the DC charging inlet before starting the EV sys- tem. If the vehicle is started off with the connector still connected, it could lead to an accident, possibly resulting in death or serious injury. ● Do not remove the DC charging connector from the DC charging inlet during DC charging. After operating the DC charger to stop charging, remove the DC charging connector from the DC charging inlet. NOTICE ■ When using DC charging Make sure to follow the handling procedures of the DC charger. If the procedures are not followed properly, the vehicle and the DC charger may be damaged. 116 2-2. Charging After charging 1 Operate the DC charger and stop the charging. DC charging connector will be unlocked automatically when charging is completed. 2 Remove the DC charging connector. The DC charging connector shape and treatment will differ depending on the type of DC charger. Perform the operations in accordance to handling procedures of the DC charger. Return the removed DC charging connector to its original position. 3 Close the DC charging inlet cap, and then close the charging port lid. function, etc. Door unlock button on the wireless remote control, or next to the driver’s seat. You can also stop DC charging by pressing the door unlock switch three times at about 1 second inter- vals. ■ If the DC charging connector cannot be unlocked →P.93 ■ After DC charging Even if the traction battery is charged to the upper limit value that is set, the level of charge displayed on the DC charger may be lower than the actual one. NOTICE ■ Caution after DC charging ● Be sure to close the DC charging inlet cap to the DC charging inlet and then close the charging port lid after removing the DC charging con- nector from the inlet. If the DC charging inlet cap is not attached, foreign materials may get into the inlet and the may be malfunctioning. ■ When DC charging cannot be stopped If charging cannot be stopped from the DC charger side due to a mal- 2-2. Charging 117 Using the charging schedule function AC charging can be carried out at the desired time by registering the charging schedule. ■ Calendar settings Charging schedule is performed according to the date and time shown on the multi-information dis- play. Refer to the multi-information display manual for settings. If the calendar settings check screen is displayed when an attempt was made to register a charge schedule, check that the cor- rect date is set. If it is incorrect, be sure to correct it. If the calendar information is wrong, the charging schedule function will not operate normally. Settings of the charging schedule function When registering the charging schedule, the following settings can be changed. ■ Select the charging mode One of the two following charging modes can be selected. ▶ “Start” Starts charging at the set time* and finishes charging when fully charged. ▶ “Start-Stop” AC charging is performed according to the set start time and stop time.* *: There might be a slight error in the timing when charging starts due to the state of the traction battery. ■ Repeated setting The periodic charging schedule can be set by selecting your desired day of the week. Select 2 one or more day of the week to do the charging schedule. ■ Turning “Charge Now” on and off To start charging without chang- ing the charging schedule set- ting, turn “Charge Now” on to temporarily cancel the charging schedule and enable charging after connecting the AC charging connector.* *: If the charging connector is removed while the charging schedule is registered and “Charge Now” is on, “Charge Now” turns off. ■ “Next Event” Of the registered charging schedules, the closest charging schedule after the current time is called the “Next Event”. For charging schedule, AC charging will be performed according to the Next Event. 118 2-2. Charging Registering the charging schedule The charging schedule can be registered on the multi-informa- tion display or multimedia. ⚫ Multi-information display operation: →P.119 ⚫ Multimedia operation: →P.123 ■ Charging schedule function ●The charging schedule cannot be set while driving. ●A maximum of 15 charging sched- ules can be registered. If the charging mode is set to “Start- Stop” and the start time and end time are set to the same time, charging will be performed for 24 hours from the start time. The charging schedule function can not be used when using DC charging. ■ To make sure that the charging schedule function operates cor- rectly Check the following items. ●Adjust the clock to the correct time (→P.158) ● The calendar is set to the correct date (→P.158) ●Check that the power switch is turned off ●After registering the charging schedule, connect the AC charging connector The charging start time is deter- mined based on the charging schedule at the time that the AC charging connector was connected. ● Connect the AC charging connec- tor before the start time When the charging mode is set to “Start”, if you connect the AC charging connector after the set start time, the next charging sched- ule will be referenced. When the charging mode is “Start- Stop”, if you connect the AC charging connector after the start time, charging will start immediately and charging will be performed until the stop time. ●After connecting the AC charging connector, check that the charging indicator of the charging port flashes (→P.86) ● Do not use an outlet that has a power cut off function (including a charging schedule function) Use an outlet that constantly sup- plies electricity. For outlets where the power is cut off due to a charging schedule function, etc., charging may not be carried out according to plan if the power is cut off during the set time. ■ When the AC charging connec- tor remains connected to the vehicle ●When the charging mode is set to “Start”, even if multiple consecu- tive charging schedules are regis- tered, the next charge will not be carried out according to the charging schedule until the AC charging connector is removed and reconnected after charging completes. Also, when the traction battery is fully charged, charging 2-2. Charging 119 according to the charging sched- ule will not be carried out. ●If the charging stop time is reached before the traction bat- tery is fully charged and the charging mode is set to “Start- Stop”, the nearest charging schedule after the stop time is updated as the next charging schedule, and charging is repeated until the battery is fully charged. ■ Smartphone-linked operation After applying to SUBARU Solterra Connect Mobile App, it is possible to use the smartphone application to change charging schedule settings. ■ When charging schedules are ignored When the following operations are performed while the charging schedule is on standby, charging schedule is temporarily canceled and charging is started. ●When the Remote Air Condition- ing System (→P.439) is operated ●When turning “My Room Mode” on (→P.127) ●When turning “Charge Now” on (→P.122, 126) ●When an operation that temporar- ily cancel charging using the charging schedule (→P.106) ■ Battery heater (→P.98)/“Battery Cooler” (→P.98) Depending on the temperature of the traction battery, the traction bat- tery heater or traction battery cooler may be activated and the charging indicator may light up while the charging schedule is waiting for charging. Setting operations on multi-information display When operating charging schedule, use the meter control switches. 2 Meter control switches (→P.156) Multi-information display ■ Display the “Charging Schedule” screen 1 Press or of the meter control switches to select . 2 Press or of the meter control switches to select “Vehicle Settings”, and then press and hold . 3 Press or of the meter control switches to select “Charging Settings”, and then press . 4 Press or of the meter control switches to select “Charging Schedule”, and then press . The “Charging Schedule” screen 120 2-2. Charging will be displayed. ■ Registering the charging schedule 1 Display the “Charging Sched- ule” screen. (→P.119) 2 Press or of the meter control switches to select “Scheduled Events”, and then press . The “Scheduled Events” screen will be displayed. 3 Press or of the meter control switches to select “+add”, and then press . The “Charging Mode” screen will be displayed. 4 Press or of the meter control switches to select the item to change with the cur- sor, and then press or to change the setting, select the charging mode, and then press . Set the time that is desired to start the charging when charging mode is “Start”. Set the time that is desired to start and completion time when charging mode is “Start-Stop”. 5 Setting desired charging time, and press . If you selected the charging mode “Start-Stop” in step 4, continue to set the stop time. 6 Press or of the meter control switches to select the desired day to activate for the repeated setting, and then press . Each time is pressed, the repeated setting switches between on and off. When set to on, the charging 2-2. Charging ■ Changing the registered charging schedules 121 schedule is repeated on that day. It is possible to set more than one day to on. When setting are complete, select “Done”, and then press . A screen where the settings can be saved will be displayed. 7 Select “Save” and press . The settings will be saved. After setting operations are com- plete, when the AC charging con- nector is connected to the vehicle, charging will be carried out accord- ing to the charging schedule set- tings. ■ Switching charging sched- ules between on and off The registered charging sched- ules can be turned on and off. 1 Display the “Charging Sched- ule” screen. (→P.119) 2 Select “Scheduled Events” and then press . A list of the registered charging schedule will be displayed. 3 Select the item to turn ON/OFF, and then press . Each time is pressed, the selected charging schedule switches between on and off. When set to off, a charging sched- ule is ignored and charging accord- ing to the charging schedule is not carried out. The registered charging sched- ules can be modified or deleted. 1 Display the “Charging Sched- ule” screen. (→P.119) 2 Select “Scheduled Events” and then press . 2 The “Scheduled Events” screen will be displayed on the screen. 3 Select the item to operate, and perform the necessary operation. ⚫ “Edit” Select the contents are desired to be changed, press and hold the and then select “Edit”. Change the desired settings as described starting from step 4 of the “Registering the charging 122 2-2. Charging schedule” procedure. (→P.120) Select “Save” and press to save the settings. ⚫ “Delete” Select the contents are desired to be changed, press and hold the and then select “Delete”. A deletion confirmation screen will be displayed. Press or of the meter con- trol switches to select “Yes”, and then press to delete the selected charging schedule. To cancel deletion of the registered contents, select “No” and then press . ■ Setting “Charge Now” to on The “Charge Now” setting can be changed by performing one of the two following procedures. ▶ Operation on “Charging Schedule” screen 1 Display the “Charging Sched- ule” screen. (→P.119) 2 Press or of the meter control switches to select “Charge Now”, and then press . Each time is pressed, “Charge Now” switches between on and off. ▶ Operation on “Closing Dis- play” screen 1 Turn the power switch off. The “Closing Display” screen* will be displayed on the multi-information display. (If the door is opened while waiting for charging sched- ule, the same screen will be displayed.) *: If “Closing Display” is not set to “Charging Schedule” on the screen of the multi-information display, the “Closing Display” is not displayed. In this case, check the settings on the multi-informa- tion display. 2 Press to set “Charge Now” to on. After setting operations are complete, charging starts when the AC charging connector is connected. ■ Displaying “Next Event” 1 Display the “Charging Sched- ule” screen. (→P.119) 2 Press or of the meter control switches to select “Next Event”, and then press . The “Next Event” screen will be dis- played. ■ When charging schedule set- ting operations are canceled When the vehicle is in the following conditions, charging schedule set- ting operations are canceled. ●The power switch is operated before the settings are confirmed 2-2. Charging Charging Schedule settings in Accessory Mode. 2 Select and “Charging 123 ●The vehicle starts off ●A display with a higher priority than that of the charging schedule setting is shown ■ When charging schedule are changed while charging If the charging schedule is changed, Next Event will be updated and charging may stop. After changing the charging schedule, please check Next Event. If you want to continue charging, turn on “Charge Now”. Schedule”, in that order. The “Charging Schedule” screen will be displayed. 2 NOTICE ■ While performing the setting operation When performing the setting operation while the EV system is stopped, be careful that the 12-volt battery will not be dis- charged. Setting operations on multimedia For details on how to operate the audio system screen, refer to “MULTIMEDIA OWNER’S MANUAL”. Setting operations related to the charging schedule are per- formed on the “Charging Sched- ule” screen. ■ Displaying the “Charging Schedule” screen 1 Turn the power switch ON and display the menu screen. It is not possible to control the 124 2-2. Charging ■ How to read the “Charging Schedule” screen Charging schedules Displays the week-long registered charging schedule in a list using icons. “Add” button Press to add a new item to the charging schedule. (→P.124) “Edit” button Press to change or delete registered items on the charging schedule. (→P.125) “Charge Now” button Each time the button is pressed, “Charge Now” switches between on and off. (→P.126) Return button Press to close the “Charging Schedule” screen. ■ Registering the charging schedule 1 Display the “Charging Sched- ule” screen. (→P.123) 2 Press “Add”. The “Add event” screen will be dis- played on the screen. 3 Select the charging mode. Select the button in the row of the “Start at set time” or “Start and stop at set times”. 2-2. Charging 125 4 Operate “Start at set time” screen and select desired time, and then select . When the charging mode is “Start at set time”, set the charging start time. When the charging mode is “Start and stop at set times”, also set the charging stop time. 5 When activating the repeated settings, select the desired day, and then select . Each time the day is selected, the repeated setting for the selected day switches between on and off. When turned on, the check box is highlighted and the charging sched- ule is repeated on that day. It is possible to turn more than one day on. 6 After setting operations are complete, press “Save”. The charging schedule is added to the list and an icon is added to the “Charging Schedule” screen. ■ Switching charging sched- ules between on and off 1 Display the “Charging Sched- ule” screen. (→P.123) 2 Press “Edit”. The “Scheduled Events” screen will be displayed on the screen. 3 From the items displayed on the screen, press on or off in the row of the charging schedule you wish to change. If the charging schedule you wish to change is not displayed on the screen, scroll the list up and down to display it. Each time the button is pressed, the charging schedule switches between on and off. 2 ■ Changing the registered charging schedules 1 Display the “Charging Sched- ule” screen. (→P.123) 2 Press “Edit”. The “Scheduled Events” screen will be displayed on the screen. 3 Press “Edit” on the “Events” screen. 4 From the items displayed on the screen, press “Edit” in the row of the charging schedule you wish to change. ⚫ Changing registered items: Change the desired settings as described starting from step 3 of the “Registering the charging schedule” procedure. (→P.124) When a setting is changed, its icon 126 2-2. Charging on the calendar also changes. ⚫ Deleting registered items: Press “Delete”. A deletion confirmation message will be displayed. Press “Delete” to delete the selected charging schedule. When a charging schedule is deleted, its icon is also deleted from the “Charging Schedule” screen. ■ Turning “Charge Now” on 1 Display the “Charging Sched- ule” screen. (→P.123) 2 Press “Charge Now”. Each time the button is pressed, “Charge Now” switches between on and off. After setting operations are complete, charging starts when the AC charging connector is connected. ■ Displaying Next Event Turn the power switch off. Next event will be displayed according to the charging schedule settings.* *: If the multimedia customize con- tent “ACC customize” is not set to OFF, the ending screen will not be displayed. If it is this case, check the settings of the multime- dia. When press “OK”, close Next charging event screen. When press “Charge Now”, charge now is turned on. ■ When all charging schedules are turned off The icon is not displayed on the “Charging Schedule” screen. The icon will be displayed by turning it ON on the “Events” screen. ■ When charging schedule set- ting operations are canceled When the vehicle is in the following conditions, charging schedule set- ting operations are canceled. ● The power switch is turned off before the settings are confirmed ●The vehicle starts off ●A display with a higher priority than that of the charging schedule setting is shown ■ When charging schedule are changed while charging If the charging schedule is changed, Next Event will be updated and charging may stop. After changing the charging schedule, please check Next Event. If you want to continue charging, turn on “Charge Now”. NOTICE ■ While performing the setting operation When performing the setting operation while the EV system is stopped, be careful that the 12-volt battery will not be dis- charged. Using My Room Mode When the charging cable is connected to the vehicle, 2-2. Charging Display information for electric power balance during My Room Mode 127 electrical components such as the air conditioning sys- tem and audio system can be used by the power sup- ply from an external power source. Starting My Room Mode 1 Connect the charge cable to the vehicle to start charging. AC Charging: →P.104 DC Charging: →P.112 2 Turn the power switch to ON while charging. My Room Mode settings is auto- matically displayed on the multi- information display. 3 Operate the meter control switches to select “Yes”, and then press “OK”. My Room Mode is started and it is possible to use the air conditioning system, audio system, etc. Select “No” and press “OK” when My Room Mode is not being used. To disable My Room Mode, turn the power switch off. My Room Mode will automatically be off when DC charging is com- pleted. When starting My Room Mode, the electric power balance will be automatically displayed on the multi-information display, and an approximation of the electricity balance (the balance 2 between the amount of electric- ity provided and electricity con- sumed) during My Room Mode can be checked. Discharging (-) Charging (+) The size of the arrow symbol changes depending on the power supply and electricity consumption amounts. If the electricity consumption is more than the power supply, is displayed more than . If the power supply and electricity consumption amounts are equal, and are displayed as the same size. 128 2-2. Charging ■ Meter display while charging After turning the power switch to ON while charging, the power switch automatically turns off if My Room Mode is not selected within approxi- mately 100 seconds. ■ When using My Room Mode the following may occur ●When the remaining charge of the traction battery drops to the lower limit, the air conditioning system automatically stops. In that case, the air conditioning system can not operate until the remaining charge of the traction battery increases. Turn off the power switch once, then use My Room Mode after the remaining charge of the traction battery increases. ● The charging time of the traction battery gets longer. ●Noise may be heard from the radio depending on conditions of the radio wave. ●The surrounding area of the onboard traction battery charger in the motor compartment may become hot. ●The electric power steering sys- tem warning light (yellow) may turn on, but this is not a malfunc- tion. ●When charging the battery in nor- mal mode, the amount of charge is controlled so that the battery is not fully recharged in order to maintain the My Room Mode. ■ Using My Room Mode during DC charging ●When using My Room mode during DC charging, the amount of charge at the time of charge com- pletion will be lower than when not using it. In addition, when DC charging during low outdoor tem- peratures and a high humidity environment, the windows may fog up. Turning on the cooling and dehumidification functions (→P.433) will dehumidify the vehi- cle interior and remove fogging from the windows. In this case, the temperature control of the traction battery will be stopped and the amount of charge may decrease. ●When the battery is fully charged, the system will exit the My Room Mode. ■ When “My Room Mode” is used while the traction battery is fully charged When the power switch is turned on while the traction battery is fully charged and the charging connector that supplies power is connected, “Charging Port Lid is Open” is dis- played on the multi-information dis- play. In this case, press on the meter control switches to display the setting screen of “My Room Mode”, and then select “My Room Mode”. When “My Room Mode” is used while the traction battery is fully charged, the electric power of the traction battery may be consumed. In this case, charging may be per- formed again. ■ Warning message display 2-2. Charging 129 When trying to start My Room Mode or My Room Mode is being used, if a message is displayed on the multi-information display, refer to the corre- sponding table and perform the appropriate correction procedures. Message Correction procedure “Traction Battery is too Low for “My Room Mode”” ““My Room Mode” has stopped due to low trac- tion battery” ““My Room Mode” will stop when traction bat- tery is too low Reduce power usage to continue using “My Room Mode”” There is no remaining charge of the traction bat- tery to start My Room Mode. Wait until the remaining charge of the traction battery increases, start My Room Mode. The remaining charge of the traction battery is 2 insufficient. Stop using My Room Mode and charge the traction battery. When My Room mode electricity consumption exceeds the charge amount, the traction battery charge level becomes too low.* • If the electricity consumption of the vehicle can not be improved, My Room Mode will be off. • When My Room Mode continuation is desired, turn off the air conditioning system, audio sys- tem, etc., to increase the remaining charge of the traction battery. *: During My Room Mode, the information for electric power balance can be checked on the multi-information display. 130 2-2. Charging WARNING ■ Warnings for using My Room Mode Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may result in death or a serious health hazard. ● Do not leave children, people who need care, or pets inside the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high or low due to features such as the automatic shut-off. The children, people who need care, or pets left inside the vehicle may suffer heatstroke dehydra- tion or hypothermia. Also, since the wipers, etc., can be oper- ated, there may be accidental operation, possibly leading to an accident. ● Use the mode after sufficiently checking the vicinity of the vehi- cle for safety hazards. 2-2. Charging 131 When charging cannot be carried out When charging does not start, even though the normal proce- dure is followed, check each of the following items. If a mes- sage is shown on the multi-information display, also refer to P.140. When charging cannot be carried out Refer to the following table and carry out the appropriate correction 2 procedure. ■ Charging indicator of the charging port does not illuminate, even though charging connector is connected. Likely cause Correction procedure Plug is not properly connected to outlet Power is out Remote switch is off Building breaker is tripped and power is cut off Check that the plug is properly con- nected to the outlet. After power is restored, carry out the charging procedure again. If the remote switch is equipped, turn the switch on. Building breaker is tripped and power is cut off Check that the breaker is connected and if there is no malfunction, check if the vehicle can be charged through another outlet. When there are no other outlets nearby, contact your SUBARU dealer. If charging is possible, the first outlet may have a malfunction. Contact the building or facility man- ager, or an electrician. If the problem is not resolved with the check described above, the AC charging cable (including the plug-cord) may be damaged. Therefore, immediately stop charging and contact your SUBARU dealer. 132 2-2. Charging ■ The error warning indicator on the CCID (Charging Circuit Interrupting Device) flashes Likely cause Correction procedure When the voltage is insufficient, the error warning indicator may flash when there is noise interference. Electrical leakage detection function or self-diagnostic function operates and power is cut off Perform a reset and connect to a proper power source. (→P.90) If charging does not start, immedi- ately stop charging and contact your SUBARU dealer. ■ Charging indicator of the charging port does not illuminate, even though AC charging connector is connected. Likely cause Correction procedure Check the connection status of the AC charging connector. • When connecting the AC charging connector, make sure not to touch the latch release button. Insert the AC charging connector securely until you hear a click. The AC charging connector may not be connected correctly if the latch release button is pressed while AC charging connector is not securely connected to AC charging inlet Traction battery is already fully charged inserting. • After connecting the AC charging connector, check that the latch release button is not pressed and the charging indicator of the charging port is turned on. If the charging indicator of the charging port does not illuminate, even though the AC charging con- nector is securely connected, there may be a malfunction in the system. Immediately stop charging and con- tact your SUBARU dealer. When the traction battery is fully charged, charging is not performed. 2-2. Charging 133 Likely cause The remaining charge of the traction battery exceeds the set upper limit of the charge capacity The AC charger does not operate Correction procedure Change to a higher upper limit set- ting than the current remaining charge capacity and perform charging again. (→P.107) Please contact the facility manager when there is a problem with AC charger. ■ Charging indicator of the charging port flashes and charging 2 cannot be carried out. Likely cause Correction procedure When you wish to charge according When charging indicator of the charging port flashes normally*: Charging schedule is registered When charging indicator of the charging port rapidly flashes*: Mal- function occurred in an external power source or the vehicle to the charging schedule, wait until the set time. To start charging, set “Charge Now” to on. (→P.122, 126) When a door is opened while the power switch is off, a message will be displayed on the multi-information display. Follow the instructions dis- played on the multi-information dis- play. *: Refer to P.86 for details regarding charging indicator of the charging port illumination and flashing. 134 2-2. Charging When DC charging cannot be performed normally ■ DC charging does not start Likely cause Correction procedure Check the connection status of the DC charging connector and be sure that it is locked. The DC charging connector is not properly connected to the vehicle. The DC charging connector is not securely locked. Error is detected by the DC charger or vehicle’s system check. The DC charger power goes off. Traction battery is already fully charged AC charging connector is also con- nected. If the DC charging does not start, even though the DC charging con- nector is securely connected, there may be a malfunction with the DC charger or charging system. • If there is a malfunction with the DC charger, contact the charging station manager. • If there is not a malfunction with the DC charger, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your SUBARU dealer. There may be a malfunction with the DC charger or charging system. • If there is a malfunction with the DC charger, contact the charging station manager. • If there is not a malfunction with the DC charger, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your SUBARU dealer. • If the EV system can not be started, contact your SUBARU dealer. Contact the charging station man- ager and check the power status. When the traction battery is fully charged, DC charging cannot be per- formed. DC charging and AC charging can not be performed together. 2-2. Charging 135 Likely cause The EV system is started. The upper limit of the charge capac- ity is lower than the remaining charge of the traction battery DC charging was repeatedly per- formed Correction procedure When the EV system is started, DC charging cannot be started. Also, if the shift position is not in P, DC charging cannot be performed. Set the upper limit of the charge capacity to a value higher than the current remaining charge of the trac- tion battery, and then perform the charging procedure again. 2 After waiting a few minutes after starting the EV system, stop the EV system and perform charging again. ■ When DC charging is interrupted Likely cause Correction procedure Depending on the type of the DC charger, the timer may be set to stop The timer for the DC charger oper- ates. The power for the DC charger is off. The temperature of the traction bat- tery is extremely high or low. charging after a certain time. Check with the charging station man- ager. Check the power status of the DC charger. If there are uncertainties with the power status, contact the charging station manager. DC charging may not be performed in extremely high or extremely low temperature environments. Charge the traction battery after the tem- perature has been stabilized. 136 2-2. Charging Likely cause Error is detected by the DC charger or vehicle’s system check. High temperature of charging related parts The electrical components such as the air conditioning system stop operating while the traction battery is approximately fully charged. Correction procedure There may be a malfunction with the DC charger or charging system. • If there is a malfunction with the DC charger, contact the facility manager. • If there is not a malfunction with the DC charger, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your SUBARU dealer. • If the EV system can not be started, contact your SUBARU dealer. If the temperature of charging related parts is high, DC charging may not be possible. Wait for a while and then charge again. Keep the electrical components such as the air conditioning system in the OFF state, and then perform the charging procedure again. ■ EV system does not start after DC charging Likely cause Correction procedure Do a system check following the pro- cedures on P.114. If the system System check is not completed prop- check can not be completed properly erly after charging. even after these procedures are per- formed, contact your SUBARU dealer. 2-2. Charging 137 Likely cause The DC charging connector is still connected. The DC charging system is malfunc- tioning Correction procedure For safety, the EV system can not be started when the DC charging con- nector is connected. (→P.100) Remove the DC charging connector immediately after the charging is completed. • Depending on the type of malfunc- tion, the EV system can be started after closing the DC charging port 2 lid. • If the EV system can not be started, contact your SUBARU dealer. When charging schedule function does not operate nor- mally When charging schedule function does not operate normally Refer to the following table and carry out the appropriate correction procedure. ■ Cannot charge at desired time Likely cause Correction procedure The vehicle calendar and clock is not set correctly. AC charging connector is not con- nected to vehicle AC charging connector was con- nected after set time Check the calendar setting and set it to the correct date. (→P.158) Before using the charging schedule, connect the AC charging connector. Connect the AC charging connector before the time set in “Start”. When the charging mode is set to “Start-Stop”, the traction battery will charge even if the start time has passed, if the AC charging connector is connected before the stop time. 138 2-2. Charging ■ Charging starts, even though charging schedule is registered Likely cause Correction procedure When charging according to the “Charge Now” is set to on Charging schedule is set to off The charging mode is set to “start- stop” and the AC charging connector is connected between the start and end times. AC charging connector was removed charging schedule, set “Charge Now” to off. (→P.122, 126) Check that charging schedule is not set to off. (→P.117) When the charging mode is “start- stop”, if the AC charging connector is connected after the start time, charging will be carried out until the end time. Check the charging sched- ule. If the AC charging connector is removed and reinserted while the and reinserted while charging indica- charging indicator is flashing, the tor of the charging port was flashing charging schedule is canceled. Tem- porarily remove the AC charging connector, and then reconnect it. 2-2. Charging 139 Likely cause The Remote Air Conditioning Sys- tem was operated Outside temperature is low and trac- tion battery warming control (→P.98) operated (Alaska and Canada only) Correction procedure When the Remote Air Conditioning System is operated, the system will start charging, even if the charging schedule is registered. To carry out charging using the charging sched- ule, stop the Remote Air Condition- ing System, and then reconnect the AC charging connector. • When traction battery warming 2 control operates, the charging schedules are ignored and charging starts. In order to protect the traction battery, allow charging to continue. • After the 12-volt battery is removed and reconnected, the charging schedule setting may be disabled due to the initial setting of the tem- perature control system for the drive battery, even when the out- side temperature is not low. In this case, after driving a few times, the system initial settings will be com- pleted and the charging schedule settings will be enabled when the outside temperature is not low. 140 2-2. Charging When charging related message is displayed When a door is opened with the power switch off, after charging, a message is displayed in the multi-information display. When this occurs, follow the instructions displayed on the screen. ■ If “Charging Stopped Due to Pulled Charging Connector” is shown Likely cause AC charging connector is removed while AC charging After the traction battery is fully charged, the AC charging connector is removed while the traction battery is being recharged again because electricity-consuming functions* have been used and the remaining charge is now reduced. Correction procedure When the AC charging connector is removed while AC charging, charging stops. If you want to fully charge the traction battery, recon- nect the AC charging connector. 2-2. Charging 141 Likely cause AC charging connector is not securely connected Latch release button of AC charging connector was pressed while AC charging Correction procedure Check the connection status of the AC charging connector. • When connecting the AC charging connector, make sure not to touch the latch release button. Insert the AC charging connector securely until you hear a click. The AC charging connector may not be connected correctly if the latch release button is pressed while 2 inserting. • After connecting the AC charging connector, check that the latch release button is not pressed and the charging indicator of the charging port is turned on. If charging cannot be carried out, even though the proper procedures were followed, have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer. When the latch release button is pressed while AC charging, charging stops. To continue charging, recon- nect the AC charging connector. *: Electricity is consumed when operating battery heater (→P.98), the Remote Air Conditioning System (→P.439). ■ If “Charging Complete Limited Charge Due to Battery Temp” is shown Likely cause Correction procedure Charging was stopped to protect the traction battery as it continued to remain hot for a certain period of time. Allow the traction battery to cool down and perform charging again if the charging amount has not reached the desired amount. 142 2-2. Charging ■ If “Charging Stopped Check Charging Source” is shown Likely cause Correction procedure Check the following items. • The plug is securely inserted. • Extension cord is not used and electrical outlet is not overloaded. • The remote switch is not off. • Connected to a dedicated power line. • Power outage has occurred or not. • The power indicator on the CCID (Charging Circuit Interrupting Device) is illuminated. • The circuit breakers have not tripped. Problem in power supply from external power source AC charging is stopped by AC charger If all of the above conditions are met, the out- let may be malfunctioning. Contact an electri- cian and request an inspection. Furthermore, if the error warning indicator on the CCID (Charging Circuit Interrupting Device) is flashing, there may be electrical leakage. Contact your SUBARU dealer. If charging cannot be performed, even though there is no problem with the power source path, there may be a malfunction in the sys- tem. Have the vehicle inspected by your SUB- ARU dealer. Depending on the specifications of charger, charging may be canceled by an interruption of power supply. Charging may be stopped by the following. Refer to charger handling methods. • The charging stop button of charger is pressed. • Charger with off charging schedule function canceled charging • Charger that is not compatible with the charging schedule function of the vehicle • Check if it is possible to charge with the AC charging cable equipped with the vehicle. If charging cannot be carried out even when using the genuine AC charging cable, con- tact your SUBARU dealer. 2-2. Charging 143 Likely cause The AC charger is not com- patible with the vehicle The DC charger is malfunc- tioning. Correction procedure Check if it is possible to charge with the AC charging cable equipped with the vehicle. If charging cannot be carried out even when using the genuine AC charging cable, contact your SUBARU dealer. Check if it can be charged with another AC charger. If the message above is displayed when DC charging has not stopped operations, the DC 2 charger may be damaged, so do not use that The DC charger is not com- DC charger. Check if it is possible to charge patible with the vehicle. with another DC charger. ■ If “Charging Stopped High Energy Use See Owner’s Manual” is shown Likely cause Correction procedure Check the following items, and then carry out charging again. • If the headlights and audio are turned on, turn them off. • Turn the power switch off. Power is being consumed by electri- cal components of vehicle If charging cannot be carried out, even after performing the above, the 12-volt battery may not be suffi- ciently charged. Operate the EV sys- tem for approximately 15 minutes or more to charge the 12-volt battery. ■ If “Charging System Malfunction See Owner’s Manual” is shown Likely cause Malfunction occurred in charging system Correction procedure Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer. 144 2-2. Charging ■ If “The Traction Battery Temp is low System put priority on charging to preserve battery condition” is shown Likely cause Correction procedure When the traction battery warming control operates, the charging The traction battery warming control is operated (→P.98) schedule is not used and charging is performed. This is a control to protect the trac- tion battery, and not a malfunction. ■ If “Check Charging System Close Charging Port Lid See Owner’s Manual” is shown Likely cause Correction procedure The EV system can not be started System check is not completed prop- until the system check is completed erly after DC charging. properly. Perform a system check following the procedures on P.114. ■ If “Charging Stopped Time Limit Reached” is shown Likely cause Correction procedure • Depending on the type of DC char- ger, the timer may be set to stop charging after a certain time. Check with the charging station manager. Depending on the condition of the vehicle, the charging time may become longer than normal, and the The DC charging is not completed within the restricted time with DC charger. DC charging may not be completed within the restricted time. • When the A/C, headlights, audio system, etc., are turned on, the electricity consumption of the vehi- cle will be increased. Perform the DC charging after turning off all of the above. • The temperature of the traction battery may be low. Perform the DC charging after warming up the traction battery. 2-2. Charging 145 ■ If “Charging Stopped Check Charging Source or Vehicle” is shown Likely cause Malfunction occurred in connector locking system. Correction procedure Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer. ■ If “The Traction Battery Temp is low System put priority on charging to preserve battery condition” is shown (Alaska and Canada only) 2 Likely cause Correction procedure When the traction battery warming control operates, the charging The traction battery warming control was operated (→P.97) schedule is not used and charging is performed. This is a control to protect the trac- tion battery, and not a malfunction. 146 2-2. Charging 147 Vehicle status informa- tion and indicators 3-1. Instrument cluster Warning lights and indica- tors 148 Gauges and meters 152 Multi-information display 155 3 148 3-1. Instrument cluster Warning lights and indicators The warning lights and indicators on the instrument cluster and outside rear view mirrors inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems. Warning lights and indicators displayed on the instru- ment cluster For the purpose of explanation, the following illustrations display all warning lights and indicators illuminated. The units used on the meters and some indicators may differ depending on the target region. Warning lights Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in the indicated vehicle’s systems. Brake system warning light*1 (→P.542) (U.S.A.) Brake system warning (Canada) light*1 (→P.542) (Yellow) (U.S.A.) Brake system warning light*1 (→P.542) Charging system warning light*2 (→P.542) SRS warning light*1 (→P.543) ABS warning light*1 (→P.543) ABS warning light*1 (Red) (Canada) (→P.543) Inappropriate pedal oper- ation warning light*2 (→P.543) Electric power steering system warning light*1 3-1. Instrument cluster PCS warning light*1 (Flashes (→P.547) or illumi- nates) 149 (Red) (Yellow) (Yellow) (→P.544) Electric power steering system warning light*1 (→P.544) Traction battery charge warning light (→P.544) (U.S.A.) (Flashes) Slip indicator*1 (→P.548) Parking brake indicator (→P.548) Parking brake indicator (Yellow) (Yellow) (Yellow) (Yellow) (Yellow) Driver’s and front passen- ger’s seat belt reminder light (→P.544) Rear passengers’ seat belt reminder lights (→P.545) Tire pressure warning light*1 (→P.545) LDA indicator (→P.545) LTA indicator (→P.546) Driving assist information indicator*1 (→P.546) SUBARU Parking Assist OFF indicator*1 (→P.547) PDA indicator (→P.546) Cruise control indicator (→P.547) Dynamic radar cruise con- trol indicator (→P.547) (Canada) (→P.548) (Flashes) 3 Brake hold operated indi- cator*1 (→P.548) (Flashes) *1: These lights come on when the power switch is turned to ON to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the EV system is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a sys- tem if the lights do not come on, or turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer. *2: This light illuminates on the multi-information display. WARNING ■ If a safety system warning light does not come on Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS warning light not come on when you start the EV system, this could mean that these systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or seri- ous injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately if this occurs. 150 3-1. Instrument cluster Indicators The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle’s various systems. Turn signal indicator (→P.244) Headlight indicator (→P.250) (U.S.A.) Tail light indicator (→P.250) (Canada) Headlight high beam indi- cator (→P.252) AHB indicator (→P.252) Front fog light indicator (if equipped) (→P.255) PCS warning light*1, 2 (→P.270) PDA indicator (→P.297) (*3) Cruise control indicator (*3) (Flashes) (U.S.A.) LTA indicator (→P.296) Driving assist information indicator*1, 2 (→P.331, 336, 351, 356, 360) SUBARU Parking Assist OFF indicator*1, 2 (→P.341) SUBARU Parking Assist detection indicator*5 (→P.341) Slip indicator*1 (→P.418) VSC OFF indicator*1, 2 (→P.418) Charging cable indicator (→P.99) Smart key system indica- tor*6 (→P.233) “READY” indicator (→P.233) Parking brake indicator (→P.245) (*3) (*3) (*3) (→P.316) Dynamic radar cruise con- trol indicator (→P.305) Outside rear view mirror indicators*4 (→P.331, 336, 351) LDA indicator (→P.296) LDA OFF indicator*2 (→P.296) (Canada) Parking brake indicator (→P.245) Brake hold standby indi- cator*1 (→P.248) Brake hold operated indi- cator*1 (→P.248) Low outside temperature indicator*7 (→P.153) Security indicator (→P.68, 69) “AIR BAG ON/OFF” indicator*1, 8 (→P.43) Eco drive mode indicator (→P.411) (*9) (*9) Power mode indicator (→P.411) Downhill assist control system indicator (→P.412) Grip control indicator (→P.412) Grip control set speed indicator (→P.415) “S PEDAL DRIVE” indica- tor (→P.242) SNOW/DIRT mode indi- cator (→P.413) D.SNOW/MUD mode indi- cator (→P.413) Stop lights indica- tor*10 REC indicator 3-1. Instrument cluster 151 *6: This light illuminates on the multi-information display with a message. *7: When the outside temperature is approximately 37°F (3°C) or lower, the indicator will flash for approximately 10 seconds, then stay on. *8: This light illuminates on the over- head console. *9: Depending on the operating con- dition, the color of the light change. *10: This light comes on when the 3 stop lights are illuminated by the operation of the brake pedal or the driving assist system. ■ SUBARU Parking Assist OFF indicator Vehicles without multimedia display: *1: These lights come on when the power switch is turned to ON to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the EV system is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a sys- tem if the lights do not come on, or turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer. *2: This light comes on when the system is turned off. *3: Depending on the operating con- dition, the color and illuminat- ing/flashing state of the light change. *4: This light illuminates on the out- side rear view mirrors. *5: Vehicles without multimedia dis- play or rear camera. The indicators turn off when the shift position is changed to R regardless of whether the SUBARU Parking Assist function is turned on or off. 152 3-1. Instrument cluster Gauges and meters The meters display various drive information. Meter display ■ Locations of gauges and meters The units of measure may differ depending on the intended destination of the vehicle. Multi-information display Presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data. (→P.155) Displays warning messages if a malfunction occurs. (→P.551) Display/hide for the multi-information display can be changed. (→P.154) Outside temperature Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40°F (-40°C) to 140°F (60°C). Power meter (→P.153) Displays EV system output or regeneration level. Speedometer Displays the vehicle speed. Clock (→P.155) Shift position indicator/regenerative braking power indicator. (→P.237) SOC (State of Charge) gauge 3-1. Instrument cluster Displays the amount of charge remaining in the traction battery. Driving range Displays driving range with remaining charge. (→P.237) 153 When the air conditioning system is operating, and the driving range with the air conditioning system on are displayed. Odometer and trip meter display (→P.154) ■ Power meter Charge area Shows regeneration*1 status. Regenerated energy will be used to charge the EV battery (traction bat- tery). Power area Displays the EV system output (acceleration force) while driving. Regeneration*1 restrictions refer- ence display*2 In the following situations, regenera- tive braking is restricted, and the ref- erences for those restrictions are displayed in the charge area. • When the traction battery has a large amount of charge and can no longer be regenerated • When the temperature of the trac- tion battery is extremely high or extremely low Output restrictions reference dis- play*2 In the following situations, the out- put is restricted, and the references 3 for those restrictions are displayed in the power area. • When the traction battery has a low amount of charge and can no longer output power • When the temperature of the trac- tion battery is extremely high or extremely low *1: The meaning of “Regeneration” here means converting kinetic energy into electrical energy. *2: The actual restrictions may differ depending on the vehicle condi- tion. ■ Outside temperature display ● In the following situations, the cor- rect outside temperature may not be displayed, or the display may take longer than normal to change: • When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 16 mph [25 km/h]) • When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.) ●When “–” is displayed, the system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to your SUBARU dealer. 154 3-1. Instrument cluster ●When the outside temperature is approximately 37°F (3°C) or lower, the indicator will flash for approximately 10 seconds, then stay on. ■ Liquid crystal display →P.156 ■ Customization The gauges and meters can be cus- tomized in of the multi-informa- tion display. (→P.598) WARNING ■ The information display at low temperatures Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed. For example, there is a lag between the driver’s shifting and the regenerative braking power appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to down- shift again, causing rapid and excessive regenerative braking and possibly an accident resulting in death or injury. Switching the meter dis- play The Multi-Information display can be switched between dis- play and hidden. Odometer and trip meter display ■ Display items ⚫ Odometer Displays the total distance the vehi- cle has been driven. ⚫ Trip meter A/Trip meter B Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and display different distances independently. ■ Switching the display The display switches each time the switch is pressed. Also, when the switch is continuously pressed during the trip meter display, the driving distance can be changed to “0”. 3-1. Instrument cluster 155 Adjusting the clock The clocks on the following can be adjusted on the audio system screen. ⚫ Multi-information display ⚫ Audio system screen For details, refer to “MULTIME- DIA OWNER’S MANUAL”. If is displayed when is selected on the multi-information display, the system may be malfunc- tioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer. Adjusting the instrument panel light control The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted. 1 Darker 2 Brighter ■ Instrument panel illumination adjustment The brightness level can be adjusted when the surroundings are bright (daytime, etc.) or dark (night- time, etc.). Multi-information dis- play Display and menu icons ■ Display 3 Driving support system status display area Displays an image when the follow- ing systems are operating and a menu icon other than is selected: • LDA (Lane Departure Alert) (→P.292) • LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (→P.282) • LCA (Lane Change Assist) (→P.288) • RSA (Road Sign Assist) (→P.303) • Dynamic radar cruise control (→P.305) • Cruise control (→P.316) • PDA (Proactive driving assist) (→P.297) Content display area By selecting menu icons on the multi-information display, a variety of driving-related information can be displayed. The multi-information display can also be used to change 156 3-1. Instrument cluster display settings and other vehicle settings. Warning or advice pop-up displays are also displayed in certain situa- tions. ■ Menu icons The menu icons will be dis- played by pressing the or meter control switch. Driving information display (→P.157) Driving support system information display (→P.157) Audio system-linked dis- play (→P.158) Vehicle information dis- play (→P.158) Settings display (→P.158) Warning message display (→P.551) ■ Liquid crystal display Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenom- enon is characteristic of liquid crys- tal displays, and there is no problem continuing to use the display. WARNING ■ Caution for use while driving ●When operating the multi-infor- mation display while driving, pay extra attention to the safety of the area around the vehicle. ● Do not look continuously at the multi-information display while driving as you may fail to see pedestrians, objects on the road, etc., ahead of the vehicle. ■ The information display at low temperatures →P.153 Changing the meter dis- play The multi-information display is operated using the meter control switches. / : Select menu icons, scroll the screen and move the cursor / : Change displayed content, scroll the screen and move the cursor Press: Enter/Set Press and hold: Reset/Dis- play customizable items Return to the previous screen Call sending/receiving and history display Linked with the hands-free system, sending or receiving call is dis- played. For details regarding the hands-free system, refer to the “MULTIMEDIA OWNER’S MAN- UAL”. 3-1. Instrument cluster 157 Content of driving infor- mation ■ Power consumption Use the displayed values as a reference only. Current power consumption Displays instantaneous current power consumption. Trip Average/Total Average To reset the average power con- sumption display, press and hold the meter control switch. The average power consump- tion display can be changed in . (→P.598) ⚫ Trip Average Displays the average Power con- sumption since EV system start. ⚫ Total Average Displays the average power con- sumption since the vehicle was reset. ■ Power consumption It is a numerical value that rep- resents the power consumption rate and corresponds to the fuel con- sumption rate of gasoline engine vehicles. In this car, the number of miles traveled (miles/kWh) per kilo- watt hour of electricity (1 kWh) is displayed on each screen as “elec- tricity cost”. Driving support system information display ■ Driving support system information Select to display the operational status of the following systems: ⚫ LDA (Lane Departure Alert) 3 (→P.292) ⚫ LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (→P.282) ⚫ LCA (Lane Change Assist) (→P.288) ⚫ RSA (Road Sign Assist) (→P.303) ⚫ Dynamic radar cruise control (→P.305) ⚫ Cruise control (→P.316) ⚫ PDA (Proactive driving assist) (→P.297) ■ Navigation system-linked display (if equipped) Select to display the following navigation system-linked infor- mation: ⚫ Route guidance to destination ⚫ Compass display (heading-up display) 158 3-1. Instrument cluster Audio system-linked dis- play The operating conditions of the audio system can be displayed on the multi-information display. Vehicle information dis- play ■ Display items ⚫ Drive information ⚫ Torque distribution ⚫ Tire inflation pressure ■ Drive information 2 items that are selected using the “Drive Info. Items” setting (average speed, distance and total time) can be displayed ver- tically. The displayed information changes according to the “Drive Info. Type” setting (since the system was started or between resets). (→P.158) Use the displayed information as a reference only. Following items will be dis- played. ⚫ “Trip” • “Average Speed”: Displays the average vehicle speed since EV system start* • “Distance”: Displays the distance driven since EV system start* • “Total Time”: Displays the elapsed time since EV system start* *: These items are reset each time the EV system stops. ⚫ “Total” • “Average Speed”: Displays the average vehicle speed since the display was reset* • “Distance”: Displays the distance driven since the display was reset* • “Total Time”: Displays the elapsed time since the display was reset* *: To reset, display the desired item and press and hold the meter control switch. ■ Torque distribution Displays the drive status of each wheel in 6 steps from 0 to 5. ■ Tire inflation pressure Displays inflation pressure of each tire. Settings display ■ Meter display settings that can be changed ⚫ Language Select to change the language dis- played. ⚫ Units Select to change the units of mea- sure displayed. ⚫ • Power consumption display Select to change the average power consumption display Trip Average/Total Average. (→P.157) ⚫ Select to display/not display the audio system linked display. ⚫ Select to change the displayed con- tent of the following: • Display contents Select to display/not display the torque distribution display. • Drive information type Select to change the drive informa- tion type display between after start/after reset. • Drive information items Select to set the first and second items of the drive information dis- play to any of the following: aver- age vehicle speed/distance/elapsed time. ⚫ Closing Display Select to set the items displayed when the power switch is turned off. ⚫ Pop-up display Select to enable/disable pop-up displays for each relevant system. ⚫ Calendar The year, month, and day can be set. ⚫ Default setting Select to reset the meter display settings to the default setting. ■ Vehicle functions and set- tings that can be changed →P.598 3-1. Instrument cluster 159 ■ Suspension of the settings dis- play ●Some settings cannot be changed while driving. When changing set- tings, park the vehicle in a safe place. ● If a warning message is displayed, operation of the settings display will be suspended. NOTICE ■ During setting up the display To prevent 12-volt battery dis- charge, ensure that the EV sys- 3 tem is operating while setting up the display features. Suggestion function Displays suggestions to the driver in the following situations. To select a response to a dis- played suggestion, use the meter control switches. ■ Suggestion to enable the power back door (if equipped) If the power back door system is disabled (setting on set to off) and the power back door switch on the instrument panel is operated, a suggestion mes- sage will be displayed asking if you wish to enable the power back door system. To enable the power back door system, select “Yes”. After enabling the power back door system, press the power 160 3-1. Instrument cluster back door switch again to open or close the power back door. ■ Suggestion to turn on the headlights If the headlight switch is in other than or , and the vehicle speed is 3 mph (5 km/h) or higher for a certain amount of time when the surroundings are dark, a suggestion message will be displayed. ■ Suggestion to turn off the headlights If the headlights are left on for a certain amount of time after the power switch has been turned off, a suggestion message will be displayed. ■ Customization The suggestion function can be turned on/off. (Customizable fea- tures: →P.598) Before driving 4 4-1. Key information Keys 162 Digital key . 165 4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors Side doors. 167 Back door 172 Smart key system . 183 4-3. Adjusting the seats Front seats 188 Rear seats. 189 Head restraints 192 4-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors Steering wheel 195 Inside rear view mirror 196 Digital inner mirror. 197 Outside rear view mirrors 205 4-5. Opening, closing the win- dows Power windows . 208 4-6. Favorite settings Driving position memory 211 My Settings . 215 161 4 162 4-1. Key information Keys Key types The following keys are provided with the vehicle. Electronic keys • Operating the smart key system (→P.183) • Operating the wireless remote control function (→P.164) • Operating the Remote Air Condi- tioning System (→P.439) Mechanical keys Key number plate ■ When riding in an aircraft When bringing an electronic key onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press any buttons on the elec- tronic key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying an elec- tronic key in your bag, etc., ensure that the buttons are not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the electronic key to emit radio waves that could inter- fere with the operation of the air- craft. ■ Electronic key battery depletion ●The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years. ●If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display when the EV system stops. ● To reduce key battery depletion when the electronic key is to not be used for long periods of time, set the electronic key to the bat- tery-saving mode. (→P.185) ●As the electronic key always receives radio waves, the battery will become depleted even if the electronic key is not used. The fol- lowing symptoms indicate that the electronic key battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. • The smart key system or the wire- less remote control does not oper- ate. • The detection area becomes smaller. • The LED indicator on the key sur- face does not turn on. You can replace the battery by your- self (→P.527). However, as there is a danger that the electronic key may be damaged, it is recommended that replacement is carried out by your SUBARU dealer. ● To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) of the following electri- cal appliances that produce a magnetic field: • TVs • Personal computers • Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers • Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones • Table lamps • Induction cookers ● If the electronic key is near the vehicle for longer than necessary, even if the smart key system is not operated, the key battery may become depleted faster than nor- mal. ■ If a message regarding the state of the electronic key or power switch mode, etc. is shown To prevent trapping the electronic 4-1. Key information NOTICE ■ To prevent key damage ● Do not drop the keys, subject 163 key inside the vehicle, leaving the vehicle carrying the electronic key on your person without turning the power switch to OFF or other pas- sengers from unintentionally taking the key out of the vehicle, etc., a message that prompts the user to confirm the state of the electronic key or power switch mode may be shown on the multi-information dis- play. In those cases, follow the instructions on the display immedi- ately. ■ If “Key Battery Low Replace Key Battery” is displayed on the multi-information display The electronic key has a low battery. Replace the electronic key battery. (→P.527) ■ Replacing the battery →P.527 ■ Confirmation of the registered key number The number of keys already regis- tered to the vehicle can be con- firmed. Ask your SUBARU dealer for details. ■ If “A New Key has been Regis- tered Contact Your Dealer for Details” is displayed on the multi-information display This message will be displayed each time the driver’s door is opened when the doors are unlocked from the outside for approximately 10 days after a new electronic key has been registered. If this message is displayed but you have not had a new electronic key registered, ask your SUBARU dealer to check if an unknown elec- tronic key (other than those in your possession) has been registered. them to strong shocks, or bend them. ● Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for long periods of time. ●Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer, etc. ● Do not attach metallic or mag- netic materials to the keys or place the keys close to such materials. ● Do not disassemble the keys. 4 ● Do not attach a sticker or any- thing else to the surface of the electronic key. ● Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as TVs, audio sys- tems and induction cookers. ● Do not place the keys near medical electrical equipment such as low-frequency therapy equipment or microwave ther- apy equipment, and do not receive medical attention with the keys on your person. ■ Carrying the electronic key on your person Carry the electronic key 3.9 in. (10 cm) or more away from elec- tric appliances that are turned on. Radio waves emitted from electric appliances within 3.9 in. (10 cm) of the electronic key may interfere with the key, causing the key to not function properly. 164 4-1. Key information NOTICE ■ In case of a smart key system malfunction or other key- related problems →P.570 ■ When an electronic key is lost →P.570 Wireless remote control The electronic keys are equipped with the following wireless remote control: ■ Theft deterrent panic mode When is pressed for longer than about 1 second, an alarm will sound intermittently and the vehicle lights will flash to deter any person from trying to break into or damage your vehicle. To stop the alarm, press any button on the electronic key. Using the mechanical key Locks all the doors (→P.167) Unlocks all the doors (→P.167) Opens the side windows*1 (→P.167) Opens and closes the power back door*2 (→P.175) Operates Remote Air Condi- tioning System (→P.439) Sounds the alarm (→P.164) *1: These settings must be custom- ized at your SUBARU dealer. *2: If equipped To take out the mechanical key, slide the release lever and take the key out. The mechanical key can only be inserted in one direction, as the key only has grooves on one side. If the key cannot be inserted in a lock cyl- inder, turn it over and re-attempt to insert it. After using the mechanical key, store it in the electronic key. Carry the mechanical key together with the electronic key. If the electronic key battery is depleted or the entry function does not operate properly, you will need the mechanical key. (→P.570) 4-1. Key information 165 ■ If you lose your mechanical keys →P.570 ■ If a wrong key is used The key cylinder rotates freely to isolate inside mechanism. Digital key* *: If equipped A smartphone can be used instead of the electronic key of the vehicle by installing the dedicated Digital Key App on a smartphone. Also, Digital Key can be shared with your family or friends using the Digital Key App. ■ Free/open source software information This product contains Free/open source software (FOSS). 4 License information and/or the source code of this FOSS can be obtained at the following URL: https://www.denso.com/global/en/ opensource/dkey/toyota/ Digital key usage condi- tions In order to use the Digital Key, you need to install the SUBARU SOLTERRA CONNECT Mobile App, Register the Vehicle to the customer’s SUBARU SOL- TERRA CONNECT Mobile App profile, and subscribe to Remote Services, and enroll in Digital Key. Digital key precautions ⚫ A Digital Key can be used when the smartphone and server can communicate. The Digital Key may become 166 4-1. Key information unusable if the smartphone is not connected to the Internet. Be sure to carry the electronic key of the vehicle if traveling to a location with unreliable communications. ⚫ If the smartphone battery is depleted, the smartphone cannot be used as Digital Key. If the battery level is low, be sure to charge the smart- phone prior to going out. ⚫ The Digital Key system is related to the Smart key sys- tem. If the Smart key system has been deactivated in the vehicle customization setting, the Digital Key will also be disabled. ⚫ Depending on the radio wave environment, the Digital Key may not be able to be used. →P.185 ⚫ When transferring vehicle ownership, make sure to delete the Digital Keys. ⚫ If the vehicle is not operated for 14 days or more, the Digi- tal Key will not connect auto- matically. Therefore, it may take some time before the system operates after a door handle is touched. ⚫ A part of the services may be stopped for a certain period of time due to server mainte- nance. However, registered Digital Keys can be used during the maintenance. ⚫ A smartphone with the Digital Key App enabled will be able to lock and unlock the doors, start the EV system and per- form any other operations as same as the electronic key of the vehicle. Be especially careful not to lose the smart- phone or allow it to be stolen. If the smartphone is lost or stolen, contact your SUBARU dealer immediately. ⚫ When taking your vehicle to a SUBARU dealer for an inspection or repairs, make sure to bring an electronic key. ⚫ With the Digital Key alone, no vehicle lights will illuminate when approached to the vehi- cle. Also, with the digital key alone, some functions, such as the power back door’s close & lock function, etc., cannot be used. 4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors 167 Side doors The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function, wireless remote control, door lock switches or inside lock but- tons. Unlocking and locking the doors from the outside ■ Using the entry function Carry the electronic key to enable this function. 1 Grip the driver’s door handle to unlock the door. Holding the driver’s door handle for approximately 2 seconds unlocks all the doors. Grip the front passenger’s door handle or rear door han- dle (vehicles with lock sen- sor) to unlock all the doors*. Make sure to touch the sensor on the back of the handle. The doors cannot be unlocked for 3 seconds after the doors are locked. 2 Touch the lock sensor (the indentation on the side of the door handle) to lock the doors. Check that the door is securely locked. *: The door unlock settings can be changed. ■ Using the wireless remote control 4 1 Locks all the doors Check that the door is securely locked. 2 Unlocks all the doors Pressing the button unlocks the driver’s door. Pressing the button again within 5 seconds unlocks the other doors. Press and hold to open the side windows.* *: This setting must be customized at your SUBARU dealer. ■ Switching the door unlock func- tion It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks using the wireless remote control. Perform the switching operation in the vehicle or within approximately 3.2 ft. (1 m) of the vehicle. 1 Turn the power switch to OFF. 2 When the indicator light on the key surface is not on, press and 168 4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors hold , (if equipped) or for approximately 5 seconds while pressing and holding . The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below. (When changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at least 5 seconds, and repeat step 2.) Multi-informa- alarm will automatically be set.) In a case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (→P.69) ■ Locking the front doors from the outside without a key 1 Move the inside lock button to the lock position. (→P.170) 2 Close the door. The door cannot be locked if the power switch is in ACC or ON, or the electronic key is left inside the vehicle. Depending on the position of the tion dis- play/Beep Exterior: Beeps 3 times Exterior: Beeps twice Unlocking func- tion Holding the driver’s door han- dle unlocks only the driver’s door. Holding the front passenger door handle or rear door handle (vehicles with lock sensor) unlocks all the doors. Holding a front door handle or rear door handle (vehicles with lock sensor) unlocks all the doors. electronic key, the key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked. ■ Impact detection door lock release system In the event that the vehicle is sub- ject to a strong impact, all the doors are unlocked. Depending on the force of the impact or the type of accident, however, the system may not operate. ■ Operation signals Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice) Side windows: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the side windows are operating. ■ Security feature If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, the security fea- ture automatically locks the vehicle again. (However, depending on the To prevent unintended triggering of the alarm, unlock the doors using the wireless remote control and open and close a door once after the settings have been changed. (If a door is not opened within 60 sec- onds after is pressed, the doors will be locked again and the location of the electronic key, the key may be detected as being in the vehicle. In this case, vehicle may be unlocked.) ■ When the door cannot be locked by the lock sensor on the surface of the door handle When the door cannot be locked even if the lock sensor on the sur- 4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors 169 face of the door handle is touched by a finger, touch the lock sensor with the palm. When gloves are being worn, remove the gloves. ■ Open door warning buzzer If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds continu- ously for 5 seconds. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once more. ■ Setting the alarm Locking the doors will set the alarm system. (→P.69) ■ Conditions affecting the opera- tion of the smart key system or wireless remote control →P.185 ■ If the smart key system or the wireless remote control does not operate properly ●Use the mechanical key to lock and unlock the doors. (→P.570) ●Replace the key battery with a new one if it is depleted. (→P.527) ■ If the 12-volt battery is dis- charged The doors cannot be locked and unlocked using the smart key sys- tem or wireless remote control. Lock or unlock the doors using the mechanical key. (→P.570) ■ Rear seat reminder function ●In order to remind you not to for- get luggage, etc., in the rear seat, when the power switch is turned to OFF after any of the following con- ditions are met, a buzzer will sound and a message will be dis- played on the multi-information display for approximately 6 sec- onds. • The EV system is started within 10 minutes after opening and closing a rear door. • A rear door has been opened and closed after the EV system was started. However, if a rear door is opened and then closed within approxi- mately 2 seconds, the rear seat reminder function may not operate. ●The rear seat reminder function determines that luggage, etc., has been placed in a rear seat based on opening and closing of a rear door. Therefore, depending on the 4 situation, the rear seat reminder function may not operate and you may still forget luggage, etc., in the rear seat, or it may operate unnecessarily. ●The rear seat reminder function can be enabled/disabled. (→P.598) ■ Customization Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed. (Customizable features: →P.601) WARNING ■ To prevent an accident Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant could be thrown out of the vehicle, resulting in death or serious injury. ● Ensure that all doors are prop- erly closed and locked. 170 4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors WARNING ● Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving. Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened even if the inside lock buttons are in locked posi- tion. ●Set the rear door child-protector locks when children are seated in the rear seats. ■ When opening or closing a door Check the surroundings of the vehicle such as whether the vehi- cle is on an incline, whether there is enough space for a door to open and whether a strong wind is blowing. When opening or clos- ing the door, hold the door handle tightly to prepare for any unpre- dictable movement. ■ When using the wireless remote control or mechanical key and operating the power windows Operate the power window after checking to make sure that there is no possibility of any passenger having any of their body parts caught in the side window. Also, do not allow children to operate the wireless remote control or mechanical key. It is possible for children and other passengers to get caught in the side window. Unlocking and locking the doors from the inside ■ Using the door lock switches 1 Locks all the doors 2 Unlocks all the doors ■ Using the inside lock but- tons 1 Locks the door 2 Unlocks the door The front doors can be opened by pulling the inside handle even if the lock buttons are in the lock position. ■ Open door warning buzzer If the vehicle speed reaches 3 mph (5 km/h), a buzzer sounds to indi- cate that the door(s) or the hood is not fully closed. The open door(s) or hood is dis- played on the multi-information dis- play. 4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors 171 ■ When all the doors are locked with the entry function or wire- less remote control ●The doors cannot be unlocked with the door lock switch. refer to P.598. Function Operation All doors are automatically ●The door lock switches can be reset by unlocking all the doors with the entry function or wireless remote control. Rear door child-protector lock The door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock is set. 1 Unlock 2 Lock These locks can be set to prevent children from opening the rear doors. Push down on each rear door switch to lock both rear doors. Speed linked door locking function Shift position linked door lock- ing function Shift position linked door unlocking func- tion Driver’s door linked door unlocking func- tion locked when vehicle speed is approximately 12mph (20 km/h) or higher. All doors are automatically locked when shifting the shift position other than P. All doors are 4 automatically unlocked when shifting the shift position to P. All doors are automatically unlocked when driver’s door is opened within approximately 45 seconds after turning the power switch off. Automatic door locking and unlocking systems The following functions can be set or canceled: For instructions on customizing, 172 4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors Back door The back door can be locked/unlocked and opened/closed by the fol- lowing procedures. WARNING Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ■ Before driving ● Make sure that the back door is fully closed. If the back door is not fully closed, it may open unexpect- edly while driving and hit near- by objects or luggage in the lug- gage compartment may be thrown out, causing an acci- dent. ● Do not allow children to play in the luggage compartment. If a child is accidentally locked in the luggage compartment, they could get heat exhaustion or other injuries. ● Do not allow a child to open or close the back door. Doing so may cause the back door to operate unexpectedly, or cause the child’s hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing back door. ■ Important points while driving ●Keep the back door closed while driving. If the back door is left open, it may hit near-by objects or lug- gage in the luggage compart- ment may be thrown out, causing an accident. ● Never let anyone sit in the lug- gage compartment. In the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or a collision, they are susceptible to death or serious injury. ■ Back door handles Do not hang any object to the back door handles. If any object is hung, the back door may suddenly shut, causing parts of the body to be caught, resulting in death or serious injury. ■ Operating the back door Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in death or serious injury. ● Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the back door before opening it. Failure to do so may cause the back door to suddenly shut again after it is opened. ●When opening or closing the back door, thoroughly check to make sure the surrounding area is safe. ● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the back door is about to open or close. ● Use caution when opening or closing the back door in windy weather as it may move abruptly in strong wind. WARNING 4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors ●Vehicles without power back door: Do not pull on the back 173 ●Vehicles without power back door: The back door may sud- denly shut if it is not opened fully. It is more difficult to open or close the back door on an incline than on a level surface, so beware of the back door unexpectedly opening or closing by itself. Make sure that the back door is fully open and secure before using the luggage compartment. ●Vehicles with power back door: The back door may suddenly shut if it is not opened fully, while on a steep incline. Make sure that the back door is secured before using the lug- gage compartment. ●When closing the back door, take extra care to prevent your fingers, etc., from being caught. ●Vehicles without power back door: When closing the back door, make sure to press it lightly on its outer surface. If the back door handle is used to fully close the back door, it may result in hands or arms being caught. door damper stay (→P.175) to close the back door, and do not hang on the back door damper stay. Doing so may cause hands to be caught or the back door damper stay to break, causing an accident. ●Vehicles with power back door: Do not pull on the back door spindle (→P.181) to close the back door, and do not hang on the back door spindle. Doing so may cause hands to be caught or the back door spin- dle to break, causing an acci- dent. ●Vehicles without power back 4 door: If a bicycle carrier or simi- lar heavy object is attached to the back door, it may suddenly shut again after being opened, causing someone’s hands, head or neck to be caught and injured. When installing an accessory part to the back door, using a genuine SUBARU part is recommended. Unlocking and locking the back door from the out- side ■ Using the entry function Carry the electronic key to enable this function. 174 4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors 1 Unlocks all the doors The doors cannot be unlocked for 3 seconds after the doors are locked. 2 Locks all the doors Check that the door is securely locked. ■ Using the wireless remote control →P.167 ■ Close Lower the back door using the back door handle, and make sure to push the back door down from the outside to close it. Be careful not to pull the back door sideways when closing the back door with the handle. ■ Operation signals →P.168 ■ Security feature →P.168 Unlocking and locking the back door from the inside ■ Using the door lock switches →P.170 Opening/closing the back door (vehicles without power back door) ■ Open Raise the back door while pressing up the back door opener switch. ■ Luggage compartment light ●The luggage compartment light turns on when the back door is opened. ●When the power switch is turned to OFF, the light will go off auto- matically after 20 minutes. ■ If the back door opener is inop- erative The back door can be unlocked from the inside. 1 Remove the cover. To prevent damage, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag. 4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors 175 2 Loose the screw and move the cover. 3 Move the lever. 4 When installing, reverse the steps listed. ■ Open door warning buzzer →P.170 NOTICE ■ Back door damper stays The back door is equipped with damper stays that hold the back door in place. Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may cause dam- age to the back door damper stay, resulting in malfunction. 4 ● Do not attach any foreign objects, such as stickers, plastic sheets, or adhesives to the damper stay rod. ● Do not touch the damper stay rod with gloves or other fabric items. ● Do not attach any accessories other than genuine SUBARU parts to the back door. ● Do not place your hand on the damper stay or apply lateral forces to it. Opening/closing the back door (vehicles with power back door) ■ Using the wireless remote control Press and hold the switch. The power back door automatically opens/closes. Pressing the switch while the power back door is opening/closing stops 176 4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors the operation. When the switch is pressed and held again during the halted operation, the back door will perform the reverse operation. ■ Using the power back door switch on the instrument panel Press and hold the switch. The power back door can be oper- ated when it is unlocked*. Pressing the switch while the power back door is opening/closing stops the operation. When the switch is pressed and held again during the halted operation, the back door will perform the reverse operation. *: Opening of the power back door when it is locked can be enabled by a customized setting. (→P.598) ■ Opening the back door using the back door opener switch When the back door is unlocked: Press the back door opener switch. When the back door is locked: While carrying the electronic key on your person, press and hold the back door opener switch. The power back door automatically opens. Pressing the switch while the power back door is opening stops the operation. Pressing the switch again will open the back door auto- matically. ■ Using the power back door switch on the back door ⚫ Close Press the switch. The power back door automatically closes. Pressing the switch while the power back door is operating will stop the operation. When the switch is pressed again during the halted operation, the back door will perform the reverse operation. 4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors 177 ⚫ Close the back door and lock all doors (close & lock func- tion) While carrying the electronic key on your person, press the switch. After operating the switch, the power back door will not close for about 30 seconds when it is within the detection area of the electronic key. (→P.184). After operating the switch, the power back door closes when it goes out of the detection area of the electronic key. Also, if entering the detection area of the electronic key while power back door is closing, the power ■ Using the back door han- dles Lower the back door using the back door handle. The back door closing assist (→P.178) will be activated, and the power back door will fully close 4 automatically. back door will stop. A different buzzer than the normal one will sound and the power back door will begin closing automati- cally. When the power back door is closed, all of the doors will lock simultaneously and operation sig- nals will indicate that all of the doors have been locked. If the switch is pressed while the power back door is closing, the operation will stop. When the switch is pressed again during the halted operation, the back door will perform the reverse operation. ■ Luggage compartment light ●The luggage compartment light turns on when the back door is opened. ●When the power switch is turned to OFF, the light will go off auto- matically after 20 minutes. ■ Back door closer In the event that the back door is left slightly open, the back door closer will automatically close it to the fully closed position. Whatever the state of the power switch, the back door closer oper- ates. 178 4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors ■ Power back door operating con- ditions The power back door can automati- cally open and close under the fol- lowing conditions: ●When the power back door sys- tem is enabled. (→P.182) ●When the power switch is in ON, in addition to the above for the opening operations, the back door operates for any of the following conditions: • Parking brake is engaged • The brake pedal is depressed • The shift position is in P. ■ Operation of the power back door ●A buzzer sounds and the emer- gency flashers flash twice to indi- cate that the back door is opening/closing. ●When the power back door sys- tem is disabled, the power back door does not operate but it can be opened and closed by hand. ●When the power back door auto- matically opens, if an abnormality due to people or objects is detected, operation will stop. ■ Jam protection function Sensors are equipped on both sides of the power back door. If anything obstructs the power back door while it is closing, the back door will auto- matically operate in the opposite direction or stop. ■ Fall-down protection function While the power back door is open- ing automatically, applying exces- sive force to it will stop the opening operation to prevent the power back door from suddenly shutting. ■ Back door closing assist If the back door is lowered manually when the back door is stopped at an open position, the back door will fully close automatically. ■ Back door reserve lock function This function is a function which reserves locking of all doors, before- hand, when the power back door is open. When the following procedure is performed, all the doors except the power back door are locked and then power back door will also be locked at the same time it is closed. 1 Close all doors, except the back door. 2 During the power back door clos- ing operation, lock the doors using the smart key system from the side doors (→P.167) or the wireless remote control. (→P.167) Operation signals will indicate that all the doors have been closed and locked (→P.168). ● If the electronic key is placed inside the vehicle after starting a close operation via the door reserve lock function, the elec- tronic key may become locked inside the vehicle. ● If the power back door does not fully close due to the operation of the jam protection function, etc., while the back door is automati- cally closing after a door reserve lock operation is performed, the door reserve lock function is can- celed and all the doors will unlock. ●Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that all the doors are closed and locked. ■ Close & lock function When the power back door is open, this function closes the power back door and then locks all of the doors 4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors 179 simultaneously. When the following procedures are performed and there are no elec- tronic keys for the vehicle within the vehicle, all of the doors will lock when the power back door is com- pletely closed. 1 Close all of the doors except the power back door. 2 While carrying an electronic key, press the switch on the lower part of the power back door (→P.176). A different buzzer than the normal one will sound and then the power back door will begin closing auto- matically. When the power back door is closed, all of the doors will lock simultaneously and operation signals will indicate that all of the doors have been locked. The double locking system will not operate at this time. ■ Situations in which the close & lock function may not operate properly In the following situations, the close & lock function may not operate properly: ●If the switch on the lower part of the power back door (→P.176) is pressed by a hand which is holding an electronic key ●If the switch on the lower part of the power back door (→P.176) is pressed when the electronic key is in a bag, etc., that is placed on the ground ●If the switch on the lower part of the power back door (→P.176) is pressed with the electronic key not near the vehicle. ■ When reconnecting the 12-volt battery To enable the power back door to operate properly, close the back door manually. ■ If the back door opener is inop- erative The back door can be unlocked from the inside. 1 Remove the cover. To prevent damage, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag. 4 2 Loose the screw and move the cover. 3 Move the lever. 4 When installing, reverse the steps listed. ■ Customization Some functions can be customized. (Customizable features: →P.602) 180 4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors WARNING ■ Back door closer ● In the event that the back door is left slightly open, the back door closer will automatically close it to the fully closed posi- tion. It takes several seconds before the back door closer begins to operate. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else in the back door, as this may cause bone fractures or other serious injuries. ● Use caution when using the back door closer as it still oper- ates when the power back door system is canceled. ■ Power back door Observe the following precautions when operating the power back door. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury. ● Check the safety of the sur- rounding area to make sure there are no obstacles or any- thing that could cause any of your belongings to get caught. ● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the back door is about to open or close. ● If the power back door system is turned off while the back door is operating automatically, the automatic operation is stopped. The back door then has to be operated manually. Take extra care when on an incline, as the back door may open or close unexpectedly. ● If the operating conditions of the power back door are no longer met, a buzzer may sound and the back door may stop opening or closing. The back door then has to be operated manually. Take extra care when on an incline, as the back door may open or close abruptly. ●On an incline, the back door may suddenly shut after it opens. Make sure the back door is fully open and secure. ● In the following situations, the power back door may detect an abnormality and automatic operation may be stopped. In this case, the back door has to be operated manually. Take extra care when on an incline, as the back door may open or close abruptly. • When the back door contacts an obstacle • When the 12-volt battery volt- age suddenly drops, such as when the power switch is turned to ON or the EV system is started during automatic opera- tion 4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors 181 WARNING ● If a bicycle carrier or similar heavy object is attached to the back door, the power back door may not operate, causing itself to malfunction, or the back door may suddenly shut again after being opened, causing some- one’s hands, arms, head or neck to be caught and injured. When installing an accessory part to the back door, using a genuine SUBARU part is rec- ommended. ■ Jam protection function Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury. ● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function. ●The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the back door fully closes. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else. ●The jam protection function may not work depending on the shape of the object that is caught. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else. NOTICE ■ Back door spindles The back door is equipped with spindles that hold the back door in place. Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may cause dam- age to the back door spindle, resulting in malfunction. 4 ● Do not attach any foreign objects, such as stickers, plastic sheets, or adhesives to the spindle rod. ● Do not touch the spindle rod with gloves or other fabric items. ● Do not attach any accessories other than genuine SUBARU parts to the back door. ● Do not place your hand on the spindle or apply lateral forces to it. ■ To prevent back door closer malfunction Do not apply excessive force to the back door while the back door closer is operating. Applying excessive force may cause the back door closer to malfunction. 182 4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to the power back door ● Make sure that there is no ice between the back door and frame that would prevent move- ment of the back door. Operat- ing the power back door when excessive load is present on the back door may cause a mal- function. ● Do not apply excessive force to the back door while the power back door is operating. ● Take care not to damage the sensors (installed on the right and left edges of the power back door) with a knife or other sharp object. If the sensor is disconnected, the power back door will not close automatically. ■ Close & lock function When closing the power back door using the close & lock func- tion, a different buzzer than the normal one will sound before the operation begins. To check that the operation has started correctly, check that a dif- ferent buzzer than the normal one has sounded. Additionally, when the power back door is fully closed and locked, operation signals will indicate that all of the doors have been locked. Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the operation signals have operated and that all of the doors are locked. Changing settings of the power back door system (vehicles with power back door) The settings of the power back door system can be changed by displaying the “Vehicle Set- tings” screen from the setting screen of the multi-infor- mation display. (→P.158) The changed power back door set- tings are not reset by turning the power switch to OFF. In order to restore the original settings, they need to be changed back on the setting screen of the multi-informa- tion display. Adjusting the open posi- tion of the back door (vehicles with power back door) The open position of the power back door can be adjusted. 1 Stop the back door in the desirable position. (→P.175) 2 Press and hold the power back door switch on the back door for approximately 2 sec- onds. When the settings are completed, the buzzer sounds 4 times. When opening the back door the next time, the back door will stop at 4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors 183 that position. Smart key system ■ Canceling the adjusted open position of the back door Press and hold the power back door switch on the back door for approxi- mately 7 seconds. After the buzzer sounds 4 times, it sounds twice more. When the power back door does the opening operation the next time, the door will open to the initial settings position. ■ Customization The opening position can be set with the multi-information display. (→P.602) Priority for the stop position is given to the last position set by either the power back door switch on the back door or multi-information display. The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the electronic key on your person, for example in your pocket. The driver should always carry the electronic key. ⚫ Locks and unlocks the doors (→P.167) ⚫ Locks and unlocks the back door (→P.173) ⚫ Starts the EV system (→P.233) 4 ■ Antenna location Antennas outside the cabin (front) Antennas outside the cabin (rear) (if equipped) Antennas inside the cabin Antennas inside the luggage compartment 184 4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors Antenna outside the luggage compartment Antennas outside the cabin (vehicles with Advanced Park with remote control function) cumstances and correction proce- dures are as follows. ●When an exterior alarm sounds once for 5 seconds Situation Correction pro- cedure ■ Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected) An attempt was made to lock the vehicle while a door was open. Close all of the doors and lock the doors again. ●When an interior alarm pings con- tinuously Situation Correction pro- cedure When locking or unlocking the doors The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of the front door handles, rear door handles (if equipped) and back door opener switch. (Only the doors detecting the key can be The power switch was turned to ACC while the driver’s door was open (or the driver’s door was opened while the power switch was in ACC). Turn the power switch to OFF and close the driver’s door. operated.) When starting the EV system or changing power switch modes The system can be operated when the electronic key is inside the vehi- cle. ■ If an alarm sounds or a warning message is displayed An alarm sounds and warning mes- sage displays shown on the multi- information display are used to pro- tect against unexpected accidents or theft of the vehicle resulting from erroneous operation. When a warn- ing message is displayed, take appropriate measures based on the displayed message. When only an alarm sounds, cir- ■ Battery-saving function The battery-saving function will be activated in order to prevent the electronic key battery and the 12- volt battery from being discharged while the vehicle is not in operation for a long time. ● In the following situations, the smart key system may take some time to unlock the doors. • The electronic key has been left in an area of approximately 11.5 ft. (3.5 m) of the outside of the vehi- cle for 2 minutes or longer. • The smart key system has not been used for 5 days or longer. ● If the smart key system has not been used for 14 days or longer, the doors cannot be unlocked at any doors except the driver’s door. 4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors 185 In this case, take hold of the driver’s door handle, or use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key, to unlock the doors. ■ Turning an electronic key to battery-saving mode ●When battery-saving mode is set, battery depletion is minimized by stopping the electronic key from receiving radio waves. Press twice while pressing and holding . Confirm that the electronic key indi- cator flashes 4 times. While the battery-saving mode is set, the smart key system cannot be used. To cancel the function, press any of the electronic key buttons. ●Electronic keys that will not be used for long periods of time can be set to the battery-saving mode in advance. ■ Conditions affecting operation The smart key system uses weak radio waves. In the following situa- tions, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be affected, preventing the smart key system, wireless remote control and immobilizer system from operating properly. ●When the electronic key battery is depleted ●Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facil- ity that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise ●When the electronic key is in con- tact with, or is covered by the fol- lowing metallic objects • Cards to which aluminum foil is attached • Cigarette boxes that have alumi- num foil inside • Metallic wallets or bags • Coins • Hand warmers made of metal • Media such as CDs and DVDs ●When another wireless key (that emits radio waves) is being used nearby ●When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices that emit radio waves • Portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless 4 communication devices • Another electronic key or a wire- less key that emits radio waves • Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs) • Digital audio players • Portable game systems ● If window tint with a metallic con- tent or metallic objects are attached to the rear window ●When the electronic key is placed near a battery charger or elec- tronic devices ●When the vehicle is parked in a pay parking spot where radio waves are emitted. ■ Note for the entry function ●Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detec- tion areas), the system may not operate properly in the following cases: • The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door han- dle, near the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked. • The electronic key is on the instru- ment panel, luggage cover or floor, or in the door pockets or glove box when the EV system is 186 4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors started or power switch modes are changed. ●Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the door pockets when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave reception conditions, it may be detected by the antenna out- side the cabin and the door will become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping the electronic key inside the vehicle. ●As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be locked or unlocked by anyone. However, only the doors detecting the electronic key can be used to lock or unlock the vehicle. ●Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possi- ble to start the EV system if the electronic key is near the window. ●The doors may unlock if a large amount of water splashes on the door handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash when the electronic key is within the effective range. (The doors will automatically be locked after approximately 60 sec- onds if the doors are not opened and closed.) ●If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.) ● Touching the door lock sensor while wearing gloves may delay or prevent lock operation. Remove the gloves and touch the lock sen- sor again. ●When the lock operation is per- formed using the lock sensor, rec- ognition signals will be shown up to two consecutive times. After this, no recognition signals will be given. ●If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the following correc- tion procedures to wash the vehi- cle: • Place the electronic key in a loca- tion 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the vehicle. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.) • Set the electronic key to battery- saving mode to disable the smart key system. (→P.185) ● If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet during a car wash, a message may be shown on the multi-information display and a buzzer will sound outside the vehi- cle. To turn off the alarm, lock all the doors. ●The lock sensor may not work properly if it comes into contact with ice, snow, mud, etc. Clean the lock sensor and attempt to operate it again. ●A sudden approach to the effec- tive range or door handle may pre- vent the doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle again. ● If there is another electronic key in the detection area, it may take slightly longer to unlock the doors after the door handle is gripped. ■ When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods ● To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m) of the vehicle. ● The smart key system can be deactivated in advance. (→P.601) ●Battery-saving mode can reduce the power consumption of elec- tronic keys. (→P.185) ■ To operate the system properly Make sure to carry the electronic 4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors 187 key when operating the system. Do not get the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside of the vehi- cle. Depending on the position and hold- ing condition of the electronic key, the key may not be detected cor- rectly and the system may not oper- ate properly. (The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock pre- vention may not operate.) ■ If the smart key system does not operate properly ●If the doors cannot be locked or unlocked, perform the following. • Bring the electronic key close to the door handle and perform a lock or unlock operation. • Use the wireless remote control. If the doors cannot be locked or unlocked by perform the above, use the mechanical key. (→P.570) However, if the mechanical key is used while the alarm system is set, the warning will sound. (→P.69) ●If the EV system cannot be started, refer to P.571 ■ Customization Settings (e.g. smart key system) can be changed. (Customizable features: →P.601) If the smart key system has been deactivated in a customized setting, refer to the explanations for the fol- lowing operations. ●Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the wireless remote control or mechanical key. (→P.167, 570) ●Starting the EV system and changing power switch modes: →P.571 ●Stopping the EV system: →P.235 WARNING ■ Caution regarding interfer- ence with electronic devices ● People with implantable car- diac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy- pacemakers or implantable car- dioverter defibrillators should keep away from the smart key system antennas. (→P.183) The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the entry function can be disabled. Ask your SUB- ARU dealer for details, such as the frequency of radio waves and timing of the emitted radio waves. Then, consult your doc- tor to see if you should disable the entry function. 4 ● User of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy- pacemakers or implantable car- dioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unex- pected effects on the operation of such medical devices. Ask your SUBARU dealer for details for disabling the entry function. 188 4-3. Adjusting the seats Front seats ▶ Power seat (if equipped) The seats can be adjusted (longitudinally, vertically, etc.). Adjust the seat to ensure the correct driving posture. Adjustment procedure ▶ Manual seat (driver and pas- senger seat) Seat position adjustment lever Seatback angle adjustment lever Vertical height adjustment lever Seat position adjustment switch Seat cushion (front) angle adjustment switch Seatback angle adjustment switch Vertical height adjustment switch Lumbar support adjustment switch (driver seat only) ■ When adjusting the seat ●Make sure that any surrounding passengers or objects are not contact the seat. ● Take care when adjusting the seat so that the head restraint does not touch the ceiling and sun visor. ■ Power easy access system (if equipped) The driver’s seat move in accor- dance with power switch mode and the driver’s seatbelt condition. (→P.211) 4-3. Adjusting the seats 189 WARNING ■ When adjusting the seat posi- tion ● Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are not injured by the moving seat. ● Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury. Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism. ● Make sure to leave enough space around the feet so they do not get stuck. ● Manual seat only: After adjust- ing the seat, make sure that the seat is locked in position. ■ Seat adjustment To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the seat more than necessary. If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increas- ing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident. Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Rear seats Reclining adjustments and folding the seatbacks can be done with lever opera- tion. Adjustment procedure Pull the seatback angle adjust- ment lever , and adjust the seatback angle. 4 WARNING ■ When operating the seatback Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury. ● Keep other passengers from being hit with the seatback. ● Do not bring your hands close to the moving parts or between the seats, as well as do not let any part of your body get caught. 190 4-3. Adjusting the seats WARNING ●After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is locked in position. If the seatback is not securely locked, the red marking will be visible. Make sure that the red marking is not visible. Folding down the rear seatbacks ■ Before folding down the seatbacks 1 Park the vehicle in a safe place. Apply the parking brake (→P.245) and shift the shift position to P. (→P.238) 2 Adjust the position of the front seat and the angle of the seatback. (→P.188) Depending on the position of the front seat, if the seatback is folded backward, it may interfere with the operation of the rear seat. 3 Lower the head restraint of the rear center seat. (→P.192) 4 Stow the armrest of the rear seat if it is pulled out. (→P.468) This step is not necessary when operating the left side seat only. ■ Folding down the rear seat- backs While pulling the seatback angle adjustment lever , fold the seatback down. ■ Returning the rear seat- backs To avoid trapping the seat belt between the seat and the inside of the vehicle, pass the seat belt outside the seat belt guide and then return the seatback securely to the locked position. WARNING ■ When folding the rear seat- backs down Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. WARNING ● Do not attempt to fold the seat- backs down while driving. ●Stop the vehicle on level ground, set the parking brake and shift the shift position to P. ● Do not allow anyone to sit on a folded seatback or in the lug- gage compartment while driv- ing. ● Do not allow children to enter the luggage compartment. ● Do not operate the rear seat if it is occupied. ●Be careful not to get feet or hands caught in the moving parts or joints of the seats during operation. ● Do not allow children to operate the seat. ■ After returning the rear seatback to the upright posi- tion Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ● Make sure that the seatback is securely locked in position by lightly pushing it back and forth. If the seatback is not securely locked, the red marking will be visible on the seatback lock release lever. Make sure that the red marking is not visible. 4-3. Adjusting the seats ● Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seatback. 191 4 192 4-3. Adjusting the seats Head restraints ■ Rear center seat Head restraints are pro- vided for all seats. WARNING ■ Head restraint precautions Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ● Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat. ●Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times. ●After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure they are locked in position. ● Do not drive with the head restraints removed. Vertical adjustment ■ Front seats 1 Up Pull the head restraints up. 2 Down Push the head restraint down while pressing the lock release button . 1 Up Pull the head restraints up. 2 Down Push the head restraint down while pressing the lock release button . ■ Rear outer seats Head restraints cannot be adjusted. ■ Adjusting the height of the head restraints (front seats) Make sure that the head restraints are adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of your ears. ■ Adjusting the rear center seat head restraint Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when using. Removing the head restraints ■ Front seats Pull the head restraint up while pressing the lock release button . If the head restraint touches the ceiling, making the removal difficult, change the seat height or angle. (→P.188) 4-3. Adjusting the seats the head restraints can be removed. 2 Pull the head restraint up while pressing the lock release button . 193 4 ■ Rear center seat Pull the head restraint up while pressing the lock release button . ■ Rear outer seats 1 Pull the seatback lock release lever and fold down the seatback until it reaches the position where Installing the head restraints ■ Front seats Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down to the lock position. Press and hold the lock release button when lowering the head restraint. 194 4-3. Adjusting the seats ■ Rear center seat Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down to the lock position. Press and hold the lock release button when lowering the head restraint. ■ Rear outer seats 1 Pull the seatback lock release lever and fold down the seatback until it reaches the position where the head restraints can be installed. 2 Align the head restraint with installation holes and push it down to the lock position. 4-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors 195 Steering wheel Adjustment procedure 1 Hold the steering wheel and push the lever down. ■ After adjusting the steering wheel Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked. Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an accident, and resulting in death or serious injury. Also, the horn may not sound if the steering wheel is not securely locked. Sounding the horn 2 Adjust to the ideal position by moving the steering wheel horizontally and vertically. After adjustment, pull the lever up to secure the steering wheel. To sound the horn, press on or close to the mark. 4 WARNING ■ Caution while driving Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. 196 4-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors Inside rear view mir- ror* *: If equipped The rear view mirror’s posi- tion can be adjusted to enable sufficient confirma- tion of the rear view. Adjusting the height of rear view mirror The height of the rear view mir- ror can be adjusted to suit your driving posture. Adjust the height of the rear view mirror by moving it up and down. Anti-glare function Responding to the level of brightness of the headlights of vehicles behind, the reflected light is automatically reduced. Changing automatic anti-glare function mode on/off When the automatic anti-glare func- tion is in ON mode, the indicator illuminates. The function will set to ON mode each time the power switch is turned to ON. Pressing the button turns the func- tion to OFF mode. (The indicator also turns off.) WARNING ■ Caution while driving Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving. Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an acci- dent, resulting in death or serious injury. ■ To prevent sensor error To ensure that the sensors operate properly, do not touch or cover them. 4-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors 197 Digital inner mirror* *: If equipped The Digital inner mirror is a system that uses the cam- era on the rear of the vehi- cle and displays its image on the display of the Digital inner mirror. The Digital inner mirror can be changed between optical mirror mode and digital mir- ror mode by operating the lever. The Digital inner mirror allows the driver to see the rear view despite obstruc- tions, such as the head restraints or luggage, ensuring rear visibility. Also, the rear seats are not displayed and privacy of the passengers is enhanced. WARNING Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ■ Before using the Digital inner mirror ● Make sure to adjust the mirror before driving. (→P.199) • Change to optical mirror mode and adjust the position of the Digital inner mirror so that the area behind your vehicle can be viewed properly. • Change to digital mirror mode and adjust the display settings. ● As the range of the image dis- played by the Digital inner mir- ror is different from that of the optical mirror, make sure to check this difference before driving. System components 4 Camera indicator Indicates that the camera is operat- ing normally. Icon display area Displays icons, adjusting gauge, etc. (→P.199) Select/adjust button Press to change the setting of the item you want to adjust. Menu button Press to display the icon display area and select the item you want to adjust. Lever Operate to change between digital mirror mode and optical mirror mode. Changing modes Operate the lever to change between digital mirror mode and 198 4-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors optical mirror mode. 1 Digital mirror mode Displays an image of the area behind the vehicle. will illuminate in this mode. 2 Optical mirror mode Turns off the display of the Digital inner mirror allows it to be used as an optical mirror. ■ Digital mirror mode operating condition The power switch is turned to ON. When the power switch is changed from ON to OFF or ACC, the image will disappear after several seconds. ■ When using the Digital inner mirror in digital mirror mode ●If it is difficult to see the Digital inner mirror image because water, snow, mud, etc. is stuck to the camera lens, operate the Digital inner mirror camera washer (→P.256) or change to optical mir- ror mode. ●When the back door is open, the Digital inner mirror image may not display properly. Before driving, make sure the back door is closed. ●If the display is difficult to see due to reflected light, close the elec- tronic sunshade for the panoramic moon roof (if equipped). ●Any of the following conditions may occur when driving in the dark, such as at night. None of them indicates that a malfunction has occurred. • Colors of objects in the displayed image may differ from their actual color. • Depending on the height of the lights of the vehicle behind, the area around the vehicle may appear white and blurry. • Automatic image adjustment for brighter surrounding image may cause flickering. If it is difficult to see the displayed image or flickering bothers you, change to optical mirror mode. ●The Digital inner mirror may become hot while it is in digital mirror mode. This is not a malfunction. ● Depending on your physical con- dition or age, it may take longer than usual to focus on the dis- played image. In this case, change to optical mirror mode. ● Do not let passengers stare at the displayed image when the vehicle is being driven, as doing so may cause motion sickness. ■ When the system malfunctions If the symbol shown in the illustra- tion is displayed when using the Digital inner mirror in digital mirror mode, the system may be malfunc- tioning. The symbol will disappear in a few seconds. Operate the lever, change to optical mirror mode and have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer. 4-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors 199 Adjusting the mirror ■ Adjusting the mirror height The height of the rear view mir- ror can be adjusted to suit your driving posture. Change to optical mirror mode, adjusting the height of the rear view mirror by moving it up and down. ■ Display settings (digital mir- ror mode) Settings of the display in the dig- ital mirror mode, on/off operation of the automatic anti-glare func- tion, etc. can be changed. 1 Press the menu button. The icons will be displayed. 2 Press the menu button repeatedly and select the item you want to adjust. 3 Press or to change the setting. The icons will disappear if a button is not operated for approximately 5 seconds or more. Icons Settings Select to adjust the bright- ness of the display. Select to adjust the area displayed up/down. Select to adjust the area displayed to the left/right. Select to adjust the angle of the displayed image. 4 Select to zoom in/out the displayed image. Select to enable/disable the automatic anti-glare func- tion.* Responding to the bright- ness of the headlights of vehicles behind, the reflected light is automati- cally adjusted. The automatic anti-glare function is enabled each time the power switch is changed to ON. Select to display Home- Link® Training Tutorial to assist customers to train their Garage Door Opener System. (→P.471) Select to change the lan- guage of the Homelink® Training Tutorial. *: This is a function for the optical mirror mode, however, the setting 200 4-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors can also be changed while using the digital mirror mode. ■ Enabling/disabling the automatic anti-glare func- tion (optical mirror mode) The automatic anti-glare func- tion in the optical mirror mode can be enabled/disabled. The setting can be changed in both the digital mirror mode and the optical mirror mode. ▶ When using the digital mirror mode →P.199 ▶ When using the optical mirror mode 1 Press the menu button. The setting display will be dis- played. 2 Press or to enable (“ON”)/disable (“OFF”) the automatic anti- glare function. The icons will disappear if a button is not operated for approximately 5 seconds or more. ■ Adjusting the display (digital mirror mode) ●The icons will disappear if a button is not operated for approximately 5 seconds or more. ● If the displayed image is adjusted, it may appear distorted. This is not a malfunction. ● If the brightness of the Digital inner mirror is set too high, it may cause eye strain. Adjust the Digi- tal inner mirror to an appropriate brightness. If your eyes become tired, change to optical mirror mode. ●The brightness of the Digital inner mirror will change automatically according to the brightness of the area in front of your vehicle. ■ To prevent the light sensors from malfunctioning To prevent the light sensors from malfunctioning, do not touch or cover them. WARNING Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ■ While driving ● Do not adjust the position of the Digital inner mirror or adjust the display settings while driving. Stop the vehicle and operate the Digital inner mirror control switches. Failure to do so may cause a steering wheel operation error, resulting in an unexpected acci- dent. WARNING 4-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors ror is located as shown. 201 ●Always pay attention to the vehicle’s surroundings. The size of the vehicles and other objects may look different when in digital mirror mode and optical mirror mode. When backing up, make sure to directly check the safety of the area around your vehicle, espe- cially behind the vehicle. Additionally, if a vehicle approaches from the rear in the dark, such as at night, the sur- rounding area may appear dim. ■ To prevent causes of fire If the driver continues using the Digital inner mirror while smoke or odor comes from the mirror, it may result in fire. Stop using the system immediately and contact your SUBARU dealer. Cleaning the Digital inner mirror ■ Cleaning the mirror surface If the mirror surface is dirty, the image on the display may be dif- ficult to see. Clean the mirror surface gently using a soft dry cloth. ■ Cleaning the camera If it is difficult to see the Digital inner mirror image because water, snow, mud, etc. is stuck to the camera lens, operate the Digital inner mirror camera washer or change to optical mir- ror mode. (→P.256) ■ The camera The camera for the Digital inner mir- ■ Cleaning the camera with washer fluid ●When cleaning the camera, it may be difficult to see the image due to the washer fluid. Therefore, take care in the surrounding area while driving. ● If washer fluid remains on the camera lens surface after clean- ing, the image may be difficult to 4 see at night due to the height or inclination of the headlights of the vehicle behind. In this case, change to optical mirror mode. ●Some dirts may not be removed completely after cleaning. In this case, rinse the camera lens with a large quantity of water and then wipe it clean with a soft cloth dampened with water. ●Washer fluid is sprayed onto the camera lens surface. Therefore, the ice, snow, etc. adhering around the camera cannot be removed. NOTICE ■ To prevent the Digital inner mirror from malfunctioning ● Do not use detergents, such as thinner, benzene, and alcohol to clean the mirror. They may dis- color, deteriorate or damage the mirror surface. ● Do not smoke, use matches, use cigarette lighters or allow open flames near the mirror. It may damage the mirror or cause a fire. 202 4-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors NOTICE ● Do not remove, disassemble or modify the mirror. ■ To prevent the camera from malfunctioning ●Observe the following precau- tions, otherwise the Digital inner mirror may not operate properly. • Do not strike or hit the camera or subject it to a strong impact, as the camera installation posi- tion and angle may be changed. • Do not remove, disassemble or modify the camera. • When washing the camera, rinse it with a large quantity of water and then wipe it clean with a soft cloth dampened with water. Do not strongly rub the camera lens, as it may be scratched and will not be able to transmit a clear image. • Do not allow organic solvent, car wax, window cleaner or glass coat to adhere to the cam- era cover. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as possible. • Do not apply hot water to the camera in cold weather, as the sudden change of temperature may cause the camera to not operate properly. • When using a high pressure washer to wash the vehicle, do not directly spray the camera and its surrounding area, as doing so may cause the camera to not operate properly. ● Do not subject the camera to a strong impact as this could cause a malfunction. If this happens, have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. ● Do not block the vent holes of the mirror. Otherwise, the mirror may be hot, leading to a mal- function or a fire. 4-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors If you notice any symptoms If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the following table for the likely cause and the solution. If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer. Symptom Likely cause Solution 203 The image is difficult to see. The mirror surface is dirty. Sunlight or headlights are shin- ing directly into the Digital inner mirror. • The vehicle is in a dark area. • The vehicle is near a TV tower, broadcasting station, electric power plant, or other location where strong radio waves or electrical noise may be present. • The temperature around the Clean the mirror surface gently, using a soft dry cloth. Change to optical mirror mode. (If the light is coming through the panoramic moon roof [if equipped], 4 close the electronic sun- shade.) Change to optical mirror mode. camera is extremely high/low. (Change back to digital • The ambient temperature is extremely low. • It is raining or humid. • Sunlight or headlights are shining directly into the cam- era lens. • The vehicle is under fluores- cent lights, sodium lights, mercury lights, etc. Foreign matters such as water droplets or dust is on the cam- era lens. mirror mode when the conditions have improved.) • Operate the dedicated camera cleaning washer and clean the camera lens. (→P.256) • Change to optical mirror mode. 204 4-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors Symptom The image is out of align- ment. The display is dim and is displayed. goes off. is dis- played. The lever can- not be oper- ated properly. Likely cause The back door is not fully closed. The camera or its surrounding area has received a strong impact. The system may be malfunc- tioning. The Digital inner mirror is extremely hot. (The display will gradually become more dim. If the tem- perature continues to increase, the Digital inner mirror will turn off.) The lever may be malfunction- ing. Solution Fully close the back door. Change to optical mirror mode and have the vehi- cle inspected by your SUBARU dealer. Change to optical mirror mode and have the vehi- cle inspected by your SUBARU dealer. Reducing the cabin tem- perature is recom- mended to reduce the temperature of the mirror. ( will disappear when the mirror becomes cool.) If does not disappear even though the mirror is cool, have the vehicle inspected by your SUB- ARU dealer. Change to optical mirror mode and have the vehi- cle inspected by your SUBARU dealer. (To change to optical mir- ror mode, press and hold the menu button for approximately 10 sec- onds.) 4-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors 205 Outside rear view mir- rors The rear view mirror’s posi- tion can be adjusted to enable sufficient confirma- tion of the rear view. ■ When using the outside rear view mirrors in a cold weather When it is cold and the outside rear view mirrors are frozen, it may not be possible to fold/extend them or adjust the mirror surface. Remove the ice, snow, etc. covering the out- side rear view mirrors. ■ Defogging the mirrors The outside rear view mirrors can be cleared using the mirror defog- gers. Turn on the rear window defogger to turn on the outside rear view mirror defoggers. (→P.434) WARNING ■ Important points while driving Observe the following precautions while driving. Failing to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. ● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving. ● Do not drive with the mirrors folded. ●Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted before driving. ■ When the mirror defoggers are operating Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn you. Adjustment procedure 1 To select a mirror to adjust, turn the switch. 4 Left Right 2 To adjust the mirror, operate the switch. Up Right Down Left 206 4-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors automatic mode. Automatic ■ Mirror angle can be adjusted when The power switch is in ACC or ON. ■ Automatic adjustment of the mirror angle (if equipped) mode allows the folding or extending of the mirrors to be linked to locking/unlocking of the doors. A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and recalled automatically by the driving position memory. (→P.211) Folding and extending the mirrors ▶ Manual type Push the mirror back in the direction of the vehicle’s rear. ▶ Power type 1 Fold 2 Extend Putting the outside rear view mirror folding switch in the neu- tral position sets the mirrors to ■ Customization Some functions can be customized. (Customizable features:→P.603) WARNING ■ When a mirror is moving To avoid personal injury and mir- ror malfunction, be careful not to get your hand caught by the mov- ing mirror. Linked mirror function when reversing (If equipped) When the mirror select switch is in the “L” or “R” position, the out- side rear view mirrors will auto- matically angle downwards when the vehicle is reversing in order to give a better view of the ground. To disable this function, move the mirror select switch to the neutral position (between “L” or “R”) ■ Adjusting the mirror angle when the vehicle is revers- ing With the shift position in R, adjust the mirror angle at a desired position. The adjusted angle will be mem- orized and the mirror will auto- 4-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors matically tilt to the memorized angle whenever the shift posi- tion is shifted to R from next time. The memorized downward tilt posi- tion of the mirror is linked to the normal position (angle adjusted with the shift position in other than R). Therefore, if the normal position is changed after adjustment, the tilt position will also change. When the normal position is changed, readjust the angle in reversing. 207 4 208 4-5. Opening, closing the windows Power windows Opening and closing the power windows The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches. Operating the switch moves the side windows as follows: 1 Closing 2 One-touch closing* 3 Opening 4 One-touch opening* *: To stop the side window partway, operate the switch in the opposite direction. ■ The power windows can be operated when The power switch is in ON. ■ Operating the power windows after turning the EV system off The power windows can be oper- ated for approximately 45 seconds even after the power switch is turned to ACC or OFF. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened. ■ Jam protection function If an object becomes jammed between the side window and the window frame while the side window is closing, side window movement is stopped and the side window is opened slightly. ■ Catch protection function If an object becomes caught between the door and side window while the side window is opening, side window movement is stopped. ■ When the power window cannot be opened or closed When the jam protection function or catch protection function operates unusually and the side window can- not be opened and closed, perform the following operations with the power window switch of that door. ●Stop the vehicle. With the power switch in ON, within 4 seconds of the jam protection function or catch protection function activat- ing, continuously operate the power window switch in the one- touch closing direction or one- touch opening direction so that the side window can be opened and closed. ● If the side window cannot be opened and closed even when performing the above operations, perform the following procedure for function initialization. 1 Turn the power switch to ON. 2 Pull and hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing direction and completely close the side window. 3 Release the power window switch for a moment, resume pulling the switch in the one- touch closing direction, and hold it there for approximately 6 sec- onds or more. 4 Press and hold the power win- dow switch in the one-touch opening direction. After the side window is completely opened, continue holding the switch for an additional 1 second or more. 4-5. Opening, closing the windows 209 5 Release the power window switch for a moment, resume pushing the switch in the one- touch opening direction, and hold it there for approximately 4 seconds or more. 6 Pull and hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing direction again. After the side window is completely closed, continue holding the switch for a further 1 second or more. If you release the switch while the side window is moving, start again from the beginning. If the side window reverses and cannot be fully closed or opened, have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer. ■ Door lock linked power window operation ●The power windows can be opened and closed using the mechanical key.* (→P.571) ●The power windows can be opened using the wireless remote control.* (→P.167) ●The alarm may be triggered if the alarm is set and the power window is closed using the door lock linked power window operation function. (→P.69) *: These settings must be custom- ized at your SUBARU dealer. ■ Power window open reminder function The buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display when the power switch is turned to OFF and the driver’s door is opened with the power windows open. ■ Customization Some functions can be customized. (Customizable features: →P.604) WARNING Observe the following precau- tions. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury. ■ Closing the power windows ●The driver is responsible for all the power window operations, including the operation for the passengers. In order to prevent accidental operation, especially by a child, do not let a child operate the power windows. It is possible for children and other passengers to have body parts caught in the power window. Also, when riding with a child, it is recommended to use the win- dow lock switch. (→P.210) 4 ●Check to make sure that all pas- sengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when a power window is being operated. ●When using the wireless remote control or mechanical key and operating the power windows, operate the power window after checking to make sure that there is no possibility of any passenger having any of their body parts caught in the side window. Also, do not let a child operate the power window by the wireless remote control or mechanical key. It is possible for children and other passengers to get caught in the power win- dow. 210 4-5. Opening, closing the windows WARNING ●When exiting the vehicle, turn the power switch to OFF, carry the key and exit the vehicle along with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to mischief, etc., that may possibly lead to an accident. ■ Jam protection function ● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function. ●The jam protection function may not work if something gets jammed just before the side window is fully closed. Be care- ful not to get any part of your body jammed in the side win- dow. ■ Catch protection function ● Never use any part of your body or clothing to intentionally acti- vate the catch protection func- tion. ●The catch protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the side win- dow is fully opened. Be careful not to get any part of your body or clothing caught in the side window. locked. The passenger windows can still be opened and closed using the driver’s switch even if the lock switch is on. ■ The window lock switch can be operated when The power switch is in ON. ■ When the 12-volt battery is dis- connected The window lock switch is disabled. If necessary, press the window lock switch after reconnecting the 12-volt battery. Preventing accidental operation (window lock switch) This function can be used to prevent children from acciden- tally opening or closing a pas- senger window. Press the switch. The indicator will come on and the passenger windows will be Driving position mem- ory* *: If equipped This feature automatically adjusts the positions of the driver’s seat and outside rear view mirrors to make entering and exiting the vehicle easier or to suit your preferences. Your preferred driving posi- tion (the position of the driver’s seat) can be recorded and recalled by pressing a button. Two different driving posi- tions can be recorded into memory. Each electronic key can be registered to recall your preferred driving position. My Settings: Up to 3 differ- ent driving positions can be recorded for each the driver and guest that have been registered for My Settings. When electronic key assign- ment is registered for My Settings, the driving posi- tion for each driver can be recalled (memory recall function). For details about My Set- tings, please refer to P.215. 4-6. Favorite settings 211 Enabling easier driver entry and exit (power easy access system) When all of the following have been performed, the driver’s seat is automatically adjusted to 4 a position that allows driver to enter and exit the vehicle easily. ⚫ The shift position has been shifted to P. ⚫ The power switch has been turned to OFF. ⚫ The driver’s seat belt has been unfastened. When any of the following has been performed, the driver’s seat automatically return to it original position. ⚫ The power switch has been turned to ACC or ON. ⚫ The driver’s seat belt has been fastened. ■ Operation of the power easy access system When exiting the vehicle, the power easy access system may not oper- ate if the seat is already close to the rearmost position, etc. 212 4-6. Favorite settings ■ Customization The seat movement amount set- tings of the power easy access sys- tem can be customized. (Customizable features: →P.603) WARNING ■ While the power easy access system is operating the seat is moving Be careful not to get body parts or luggage caught. Failure to do so may cause an injury or damage to the luggage. Recording/recalling a driving position ■ Recording procedure 1 Check that the shift position is in P. 2 Turn the power switch to ON. 3 Adjust the driver’s seat and outside rear view mirrors to the desired positions. 4 While pressing the “SET” but- ton, or within 3 seconds after the “SET” button is pressed, press button “1” or “2” until the buzzer sounds. If the selected button has already been preset, the previously recorded position will be overwrit- ten. ■ Recall procedure 1 Check that the shift position is in P. 2 Turn the power switch to ON. 3 Press one of the buttons for the driving position you want to recall until the buzzer sounds. ■ To stop the position recall oper- ation part-way through Perform any of the following: ●Press the “SET” button. ●Press button “1” or “2”. ●Operate any of the seat adjust- ment switches. ■ Using the voice control system (if equipped) The following operations can be performed using the voice control system: ● Driving position registration 4-6. Favorite settings 213 ●Driving position recall (only when the shift position is in P) For details, refer to the “MULTIME- DIA OWNER’S MANUAL”. ■ Seat positions that can be memorized (→P.188) The adjusted positions other than the position adjusted by lumbar sup- port switch can be recorded. ■ Operating the driving position memory after turning the power switch to OFF Recorded seat positions can be activated up to 180 seconds after the driver’s door is opened and another 60 seconds after it is closed again. ■ In order to correctly use the driving position memory func- tion If a seat position is already in the furthest possible position and the seat is operated in the same direc- tion, the recorded position may be slightly different when it is recalled. ■ When recalling the driving posi- tion Take care so that a head restraint does not contact the ceiling or a sun visor. ■ If the 12-volt battery is discon- nected The memorized positions are erased. ■ When the recorded seat posi- tion cannot be recalled The seat position may not be recalled in some situations when the seat position is recorded in a certain range. For details, contact your SUBARU dealer. ■ Jam protection function While the driving position is recalled or the power easy access system is operating, if an object is stuck behind the front seat, the front seat will stop and then slightly move for- ward. When the jam protection func- tion operates, the seat stops at a position other than the set seat posi- tion. Check the seat position. WARNING ■ Seat adjustment caution Take care during seat adjustment so that the seat does not strike the rear passenger or squeeze your body against the steering wheel. Registering/recall/cancel- ing a driving position to an electronic key (mem- ory recall function) 4 ■ Registering procedure Record your driving position to button “1” or “2” before perform- ing the following: Carry only the key you want to register, and then close the driver’s door. If 2 or more keys are in the vehi- cle, the driving position cannot be recorded properly. 1 Check that the shift position is in P. 2 Turn the power switch to ON. 3 Recall the driving position that you want to record. 4 While pressing the recalled button, press and hold the door lock switch (either lock or unlock) until the buzzer sounds. If the driving position could not be registered, the buzzer sounds con- 214 4-6. Favorite settings tinuously for approximately 3 sec- onds. ■ Recall procedure Make sure that the doors are locked before recalling the driv- ing position. Carry the electronic key that has been registered to the driving position, and then unlock and open the driver’s door using the smart key system or wireless remote control. The driving position will move to the recorded position. If the driving position is in a position that has already been recorded, the seat will not move. ■ Cancelation procedure Carry only the key you want to cancel and then close the driver’s door. If 2 or more keys are in the vehi- cle, the driving position cannot be canceled properly. 1 Check that the shift position is in P. 2 Turn the power switch to ON. 3 While pressing the “SET” but- ton, press and hold the door lock switch (either lock or unlock) until the buzzer sounds twice. If the driving position could not be canceled, the buzzer sounds con- tinuously for approximately 3 sec- onds. ■ Recalling the driving position using the memory recall func- tion ● Different driving positions can be registered for each electronic key. Therefore, the driving position that is recalled may be different depending on the key being car- ried. ● If a door other than the driver’s door is unlocked with smart key system, the driving position can- not be recalled. In this case, press the driving position button which has been set. ■ Customization Settings (e.g. the unlock door set- tings of the memory recall function) can be customized. (Customizable features: →P.603) My Settings 4-6. Favorite settings ⚫ Bluetooth® devices 215 By recognizing an individ- ual through a device, such as an electronic key, the driving position and vehicle settings recorded for that driver can be recalled when the vehicle is entered. By assigning an authentication device to a driver in advance, the driver can enter the vehicle with their preferred settings. Settings for up to 3 drivers can be recorded by My Settings. For details on how to assign/delete electronic keys, set driver names, per- form initialization, change drivers manually, or delete a driver, refer to the “MULTI- MEDIA OWNER’S MAN- UAL”. Types of assigned authentication devices An individual can be identified using the following authentica- tion devices. ⚫ Electronic key An individual is identified when the Smart key system detects their electronic key. ⚫ Face identification Individuals are identified by detect- ing the face from the driver monitor. An individual can be identified if the same Bluetooth® device that was used as a hands-free phone the last time the vehicle was entered is connected to the multimedia sys- tem. For information on how to connect Bluetooth® devices, refer to the “MULTIMEDIA OWNER’S MAN- UAL”. If an individual is identified by detecting an electronic key, identifi- cation by Bluetooth® device will not be performed. 4 Recalled functions When an individual is identified from an authentication device, settings for the following func- tions are recalled. ⚫ Driving position (memory recall function) After an individual is identified, the driving position that was set when driving was last completed is recalled when the following opera- tion is performed. The door is unlocked and opened using the smart key system or wire- less remote control. ⚫ Meter displays and multime- dia information* When an individual is identified, the vehicle settings used when the power switch was last turned off are recalled. 216 4-6. Favorite settings ⚫ Vehicle settings that can be set using the multimedia dis- play* When an individual is identified, the vehicle settings used when the power switch was last turned off are recalled. ⚫ Safe driving support function* When an individual is identified, the vehicle settings used when the power switch was last turned off are recalled. *: Some settings are excluded Driving 5 217 5-1. Before driving Driving the vehicle. 219 Cargo and luggage . 225 Vehicle load limits . 230 Trailer towing. 231 Dinghy towing . 232 5-2. Driving procedures Power (ignition) switch 233 Shift position . 237 Turn signal lever 244 Parking brake 245 Brake Hold 248 5-3. Operating the lights and wipers Headlight switch 250 AHB (Automatic High Beam) 252 Fog light switch . 255 Windshield wipers and washer. 256 5-4. Using the driving support systems SUBARU Safety Sense soft- ware update. 259 SUBARU Safety Sense260 Driver monitor 268 PCS (Pre-Collision System) 270 LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) 282 LCA (Lane Change Assist) 288 LDA (Lane Departure Alert) 292 5 PDA (Proactive driving assist) 297 RSA (Road Sign Assist) 303 Dynamic radar cruise con- trol . 305 Cruise control 316 FCTA (Cross Traffic Alert) 320 Emergency Driving Stop System 322 Traffic Jam Assist 325 BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) 331 Safe Exit Assist . 336 SUBARU Parking Assist 341 218 RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) 351 RCD (Rear Camera Detec- tion) . 356 PKSB (Parking Support Brake) 360 Parking Support Brake func- tion (static objects front and rear of the vehi- cle/static objects around the vehicle) 365 Parking Support Brake func- tion (moving vehicles rear of the vehicle) 369 Parking Support Brake func- tion (pedestrians rear of the vehicle) 371 Advanced Park 373 Drive mode select switch 411 X-MODE 412 Driving assist systems 417 5-5. Driving tips Winter driving tips . 423 Utility vehicle precautions 426 Driving the vehicle The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving: Driving procedure ■ Before starting the EV sys- tem Check that the charging cable is disconnected. (→P.104, 112) ■ Starting the EV system →P.233 ■ Driving 1 With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift position to D. (→P.238) Check that the shift position indica- tor shows D. 2 If the parking brake is set, release the parking brake. (→P.245) If the parking brake is in automatic mode, the parking brake will be released automatically. (→P.245) 3 Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to acceler- ate the vehicle. ■ Stopping 1 Depress the brake pedal. 2 If necessary, set the parking brake. (→P.245) If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift position to P. (→P.238) 5-1. Before driving 219 ■ Parking the vehicle 1 Depress the brake pedal to stop the vehicle completely. 2 If the parking brake is released, set the parking brake. (→P.245) Make sure the parking brake indi- cator light is on. 3 Shift the shift position to P. (→P.238) Check that the shift position indica- tor shows P. 4 Press the power switch to stop the EV system. 5 Slowly release the brake pedal. 6 Lock the door, making sure that you have the electronic 5 key on your person. If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed. ■ Starting off on a steep uphill 1 Firmly depress the brake pedal and shift the shift posi- tion to D. The hill-start assist control will be activated. 2 Set the parking brake. (→P.245) 3 Release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelera- tor pedal to accelerate the vehicle. 4 Release the parking brake. (→P.245) 220 5-1. Before driving ■ When starting off on a uphill The hill-start assist control will acti- vate. (→P.418) ■ Driving in the rain ●Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows may become fogged- up, and the road will be slippery. ●Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially slippery. ●Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly. ■ Restraining the EV system out- put (Brake Override System) ●When the accelerator and brake pedals are depressed at the same time, the EV system output may be restrained. ●A warning message is displayed on the multi-information display while the system is operating. ■ Breaking in your new SUBARU To extend the life of the vehicle, observing the following precautions is recommended: ●For the first 200 miles (300 km): Avoid sudden stops. ●For the first 600 miles (1000 km): • Do not drive at extremely high speeds. • Avoid sudden acceleration. • Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods. WARNING Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ■ When starting the vehicle Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the “READY” indicator is illumi- nated. This prevents the vehicle from creeping. ■ When driving the vehicle ● Do not drive if you are unfamil- iar with the location of the brake and accelerator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal. • Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident. • When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to dif- ficulty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly. • Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when mov- ing the vehicle only slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly. • Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emer- gency, resulting in an accident. ●The driver should pay extra attention to pedestrians. As there is no engine noise, the pedestrians may misjudge the vehicle’s movement. Even though the vehicle is equipped with the Acoustic Vehicle Alert- ing System, drive with care as pedestrians in the vicinity may still not notice the vehicle if the surrounding area is noisy. WARNING ● During normal driving, do not turn off the EV system. Turning the EV system off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, however, power assist to the steering will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer smoothly, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. In the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way: →P.535 ● Use regenerative braking to maintain a safe speed when driving down a steep hill. Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to over- heat and lose effectiveness. (→P.242) ● If “Regenerative braking lim- ited. Press brake to decelerate.” appears on the multi-informa- tion display, firmly depress the brake pedal to decelerate the vehicle. (→P.551) ● Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside rear view mir- rors while driving. Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control. ●Always check that all passen- gers’ arms, heads or other parts of their body are not outside the vehicle. ● Do not drive the vehicle off- road. This is not a Symmetrical AWD vehicle designed for off-road driving. Proceed with all due caution if it becomes unavoid- able to drive off-road. 5-1. Before driving 221 ● Do not drive across a river or through other bodies of water. This may cause electric/elec- tronic components to short cir- cuit, damage the EV system or cause other serious damage to the vehicle. ● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high- speed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of con- trol and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to deter- mine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capabil- ity tires or not before driving at such speeds. ■ When driving on slippery road surfaces 5 ● Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce your ability to control the vehicle. ● Sudden acceleration or regen- erative braking due to shift changing could cause the vehi- cle to skid, resulting in an acci- dent. ● After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from functioning prop- erly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected. 222 5-1. Before driving WARNING ■ When shifting the shift posi- tion ● Do not let the vehicle roll back- ward while a forward driving position is selected, or roll for- ward while the shift position is in R. Doing so may result in an acci- dent or damage to the vehicle. ● Do not shift the shift position to P while the vehicle is moving. Doing so can damage the trans- mission and may result in a loss of vehicle control. ● Do not shift the shift position to R while the vehicle is moving forward. Doing so can damage the trans- mission and may result in a loss of vehicle control. ● Do not shift the shift position to a driving position while the vehi- cle is moving backward. Doing so can damage the trans- mission and may result in a loss of vehicle control. ● Changing the shift position to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the EV system. Regenerative braking is not available with the EV system disengaged. ●Be careful not to change the shift position with the accelera- tor pedal depressed. Changing the shift position to any positions other than P or N may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury. After changing the shift position, make sure to confirm the cur- rent shift position displayed on the shift position indicator inside the meter. ■ If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators) Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed. It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded. ■ When the vehicle is stopped ● Do not depress the accelerator pedal unnecessarily. If the shift position is in any position other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate sud- denly and unexpectedly, caus- ing an accident. ● In order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep depressing the brake pedal while stopped with the “READY” indicator is illumi- nated, and apply the parking brake as necessary. ● If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent acci- dents caused by the vehicle roll- ing forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal and securely apply the parking brake as needed. ■ When the vehicle is parked ● Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehicle when it is in the sun. Doing so may result in the fol- lowing: • Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire. 5-1. Before driving 223 WARNING • The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic material of glasses to deform or crack. • Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short cir- cuit in the vehicle’s electrical components. ● Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a place such as the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when luggage is loaded or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire. ● Do not attach adhesive discs to the windshield or windows. Do not place containers such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard. Adhesive discs or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehicle. ● Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a metallized film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause the glass to act as a lens, caus- ing a fire. ●Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift position to P, stop the EV system and lock the vehicle. Do not leave the vehicle unat- tended while the “READY” indi- cator is illuminated. If the vehicle is parked with the shift position in P but the park- ing brake is not set, the vehicle may start to move, possibly leading to an accident. ■ When taking a nap in the vehi- cle Always turn the EV system off. Otherwise, you may accidentally move the shift position or depress the accelerator pedal, causing the vehicle to unintentionally move, which can lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. ■ When braking ●When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously. Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle. ● If the electronically controlled brake system does not operate, do not follow other vehicles closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking. In this case, braking is still pos- sible, but the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual. Also, the brak- ing distance will increase. Have your brakes fixed immediately. ●The brake system consists of 2 or more individual hydraulic sys- tems; if one of the systems fails, the other(s) will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual and the brak- ing distance will increase. Have your brakes fixed immediately. ■ If the vehicle becomes stuck Do not spin the wheels exces- sively when any of the tires is up in the air, or the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, etc. This may damage the driveline components or pro- pel the vehicle forward or back- ward, causing an accident. 224 5-1. Before driving NOTICE ■ When driving the vehicle ● Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during driving, as this may restrain the EV system output. ● Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelera- tor and brake pedals at the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill. ■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts ● Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for an extended period of time. Doing so may damage the power steering. ●When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc. ■ If you get a flat tire while driv- ing A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel firmly and gradu- ally depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle. ● It may be difficult to control your vehicle. ●The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations. ●The vehicle will lean abnor- mally. Information on what to do in case of a flat tire (→P.557) ■ When encountering flooded roads Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain, etc. Doing so may cause the following serious damage to the vehicle: ● Short in electrical components ●Traction battery caused by water immersion In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to have your SUBARU dealer check the follow- ing: ● Brake function ● Changes in quantity and quality of transmission fluid, etc. ● Lubricant condition for the bear- ings and suspension joints (where possible), and the func- tion of all joints, bearings, etc. ● Components connected to the traction battery. If the shift control system is dam- aged by flooding, it may not be possible to shift the shift position to P, or from P to other positions. In this case, contact your SUB- ARU dealer. ■ When parking the vehicle Always set the parking brake, and shift the shift position to P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may acceler- ate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed. ■ When involved in a minor accident Damage to the traction battery or battery peripheral components could cause malfunctions. Even if it is a minor accident, have the vehicle inspected by your SUB- ARU dealer. 5-1. Before driving 225 Sudden start restraint control (Drive-Start Con- trol [DSC]) When the following unusual operation is performed with the accelerator pedal depressed, the EV system output may be restrained. • When the shift position is shifted to R*. • When the shift position is shifted from P or R to forward drive shift position such as D*. When the system operates, a mes- sage appears on the multi-informa- tion display. Read the message and follow the instruction. *: Depending on the situation, the shift position may not be changed. ■ Drive-Start Control (DSC) ●When the TRAC is turned off (→P.418), sudden start restraint control also does not operate. If your vehicle have trouble escap- ing from the mud or fresh snow due to sudden start restraint con- trol operation, deactivate TRAC (→P.418) so that the vehicle may become able to escape from the mud or fresh snow. Also, sudden start restraint control will not operate in the following con- ditions: When the D.SNOW/MUD mode of “X-MODE” is selected Cargo and luggage Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo capac- ity and load. WARNING ■ Things that must not be car- ried in the luggage compart- ment The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the luggage com- partment: ●Receptacles containing gaso- line ● Aerosol cans ■ Storage precautions Observe the following precau- 5 tions. Failure to do so may prevent the pedals from being depressed properly, may block the driver’s vision, or may result in items hit- ting the driver or passengers, pos- sibly causing an accident. ● Stow cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment when- ever possible. ● Do not stack cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment higher than the seatbacks. ● Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations. • At the feet of the driver • On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items) • On the luggage cover (if equipped) • On the instrument panel • On the dashboard 226 5-1. Before driving WARNING • In front of the instrument cluster ●Secure all items in the occupant compartment. ●When you fold down the rear seats, long items should not be placed directly behind the front seats. ● Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage compartment. It is not designed for passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts properly fastened. Capacity and distribution Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants. (Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) – (Total weight of occu- pants) Steps for Determining Cor- rect Load Limit ⎯ (1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard. (2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passen- gers that will be riding in your vehicle. (3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passen- gers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. (4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passen- gers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 – 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.) (5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calcu- lated in Step 4. (6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehi- cle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. (→P.230) WARNING ■ Capacity and distribution ● Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating. ● Even if the total load of occu- pant’ weight and the cargo load is less than the total load capac- ity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury. Calculation formula for your vehicle Cargo capacity Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight) (→P.582) When 2 people with the com- bined weight of A lb. (kg) are rid- ing in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight) of B lb. (kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be C lb. (kg) as follows: B*2 lb. (kg) – A*1 lb. (kg) = C*3 lb. (kg) *1: A = Weight of people *2: B = Total load capacity *3: C = Available cargo and luggage load In this condition, if 3 more passen- gers with the combined weight of D lb. (kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced E lb. (kg) as follows: C lb. (kg) – D*4 lb. (kg) = E*5 lb. (kg) *4: D = Additional weight of people *5: E = Available cargo and luggage 5-1. Before driving 227 load As shown in the example above, if the number of occupants increases, the cargo and lug- gage load will be reduced by an amount that equals the increased weight due to the additional occupants. In other words, if an increase in the num- ber of occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle. WARNING ■ When loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier (if 5 equipped) Observe the following precau- tions: ● Place the cargo so that its weight is distributed evenly between the front and rear axles. ● If loading long or wide cargo, never exceed the vehicle overall length or width. (→P.582) ● Before driving, make sure the cargo is securely fastened on the roof luggage carrier. ● Loading cargo on the roof lug- gage carrier will make the center of gravity of the vehicle higher. Avoid high speeds, sud- den starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or abrupt maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover due to failure to operate this vehicle correctly and result in death or serious injury. 228 5-1. Before driving WARNING ● If driving for a long distance, on rough roads, or at high speeds, stop the vehicle now and then during the trip to make sure the cargo remains in its place. ● The maximum load limit of the cargo, roof luggage carrier kit and carrying attachments must not exceed 176 lb. (80 kg). NOTICE ■ When loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier (if equipped) Be careful not to scratch the sur- face of the panoramic moon roof (if equipped). Roof tent (models with roof rails) Roof tents may be used under certain conditions at your own risk. NOTICE ■ When loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier ● The roof rail load limit for sta- tionary vehicles (700 lb. [317 kg]) applies only when the vehi- cle is parked and the load is evenly distributed left/right and front/rear and the roof crossbars and roof tent are tightly secured to the vehicle. If these condi- tions are not met, the load limit will be lower. ● The maximum load limit of the roof crossbars must be obtained from the manufacturer or retailer of the roof rack. When driving the vehicle, the maxi- mum roof rail load is 176 lb. (80 kg) or the crossbar load limit (whichever is lower). ● Roof tents can only be used on vehicles originally equipped with roof rails. Otherwise, damage to the vehicle’s roof may occur. ■ When driving the vehicle The total weight on the roof rails, including the roof cross- bars and roof tent, must not exceed the vehicle’s roof rail load of 176 lb. (80 kg), evenly distributed. WARNING ■ For safe use Adding weight to the vehicle’s roof can adversely affect handling, braking, and rollover resistance. The vehicle must never be driven with a total roof rail load in excess of 176 lb. (80 kg). 5-1. Before driving 229 ■ When the vehicle is parked on level ground Roof rails Roof crossbars Roof tent B + C < 176 lb. (80 kg) 5 Roof rails Roof crossbars Roof tent Occupants in the roof tent ⚫ The total weight on the roof rails – including the roof crossbars, roof tent, and all occupants and contents in the roof tent – must not exceed either the vehicle’s roof rail load limit (700 lb. [317 kg]), evenly distributed, or the load limit of the roof crossbars, whichever is lower. Load limit of the roof rail (A). B + C + D < 700 lb. (317 kg) ⚫ Exceeding this load limit could cause damage to the vehicle or racking system. The vehi- 230 5-1. Before driving cle must never be driven with occupants in the roof tent. Before the vehicle is driven, occupants and cargo must be removed from the roof tent and the roof rail load must be restored to within the roof rail load limit of 176 lb. (80 kg). Refer to the user manual that accompanied the roof tent for important safety information and instructions on the proper installation and use of the tent. Vehicle load limits Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, TWR (Trailer Weight Rating) and cargo capacity. ⚫ Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight): →P.582 Total load capacity means the combined weight of occu- pants, cargo and luggage. ⚫ Seating capacity: →P.582 Seating capacity means the maximum number of occu- pants whose estimated aver- age weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person. ⚫ TWR (Trailer Weight Rat- ing) SUBARU does not recom- mend towing a trailer with your vehicle. ⚫ Cargo capacity Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants. ■ Total load capacity and seating capacity These details are also described on the tire and loading information label. (→P.521) 5-1. Before driving 231 WARNING ■ Overloading the vehicle Do not overload the vehicle. It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steer- ing and braking ability, resulting in an accident. Trailer towing SUBARU does not recom- mend towing a trailer with your vehicle. SUBARU also does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or the use of a tow hitch car- rier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing or for the use of tow hitch mounted carri- ers. 5 232 5-1. Before driving Dinghy towing Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the ground) behind a motor home. NOTICE ■ To avoid serious damage to your vehicle Do not tow your vehicle with 4 wheels on the ground. Power (ignition) 5-2. Driving procedures 233 Continue depressing the brake switch Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic key on your person starts the EV system or changes power switch modes. Starting the EV system 1 Check that the charging cable is disconnected. (→P.104, 112) 2 Pull the parking brake switch to check that the parking brake is set. (→P.245) The parking brake indicator will come on. 3 Firmly depress the brake pedal. and a message will be dis- played on the multi-information dis- play. If it is not displayed, the EV system cannot be started. When the shift position is N, the EV system cannot start. Shift the shift position to P when starting the EV system. (→P.238) 4 Press the power switch shortly and firmly. When operating the power switch, one short, firm press is enough. It is not necessary to press and hold the switch. If the “READY” indicator turns on, the EV system will operate nor- mally. pedal until the “READY” indicator is illuminated. The EV system can be started from any power switch mode. 5 Check that the “READY” indi- cator is illuminated. The vehicle cannot be driven if the “READY” indicator is off. ■ Power switch illumination 5 According to the situation, the power switch illumination operates as follows. ●When driver’s door or front pas- senger’s door is opened, the power switch illumination illumi- nates. ●When the power switch is in OFF and depressing the brake pedal with carrying the electronic key on your person, the power switch illu- mination blinks. ●When the power switch is in ACC or ON, the power switch illumina- tion illuminates. ●When the power switch mode is changed from ACC or ON to OFF, the power switch illumination illu- minates for a certain amount of time. Afterwards, the power switch illumination turns off. ■ If the EV system does not start ●The immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (→P.68) Contact your SUBARU dealer. ●The charging cable may be con- 234 5-2. Driving procedures nected to the vehicle. (→P.89) ●If a message related to start-up is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and fol- low the instructions. ●If the door is unlocked with the mechanical key, the EV system cannot be started using the smart key system. Refer to P.571 to start the EV system. However, if the electronic key is carried inside the vehicle and the doors are locked (→P.170), the EV system can be started. ■ When the ambient temperature is low, such as during winter driving conditions ●When starting the EV system, the flashing time of the “READY” indi- cator may be long. Leave the vehicle as it is until the “READY” indicator is steady on, as steady means the vehicle is able to move. ●When the traction battery is extremely cold (below approxi- mately -22°F [-30°C]) under the influence of the outside tempera- ture, it may not be possible to start the EV system. In this case, try to start the EV system again after the temperature of the traction battery increases due to the outside tem- perature increase, etc. ■ Sounds and vibrations specific to a battery electric vehicle →P.74 ■ If the 12-volt battery is dis- charged The EV system cannot be started using the smart key system. Refer to P.572 to restart the EV system. ■ Electronic key battery depletion →P.162 ■ Conditions affecting operation →P.185 ■ Note for the entry function →P.185 ■ If “Smart Key System Malfunc- tion See Owner’s Manual” is displayed on the multi-informa- tion display The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately. ■ If the “READY” indicator does not come on In the event that the “READY” indi- cator does not come on even after performing the proper procedures for starting the vehicle, contact your SUBARU dealer immediately. ■ If the EV system is malfunction- ing →P.80 ■ Electronic key battery →P.527 ■ Operation of the power switch ● If the switch is not pressed shortly and firmly, the power switch mode may not change or the EV system may not start. ● If attempting to restart the EV sys- tem immediately after turning the power switch to OFF, the EV sys- tem may not start in some cases. After turning the power switch to OFF, please wait a few seconds before restarting the EV system. ■ Customization If the smart key system has been deactivated in a customized setting, refer to P.571. WARNING ■ When starting the EV system Always start the EV system while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the accelerator pedal while starting the EV system under any circumstances. Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. 5-2. Driving procedures 235 NOTICE ■ When starting the EV system If the EV system becomes difficult to start, have your vehicle checked by your SUBARU dealer immediately. ■ Symptoms indicating a mal- function with the power switch If the power switch seems to be operating somewhat differently than usual, such as the switch sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction. Contact your SUB- ARU dealer immediately. Stopping the EV system 1 Stop the vehicle completely. 2 Set the parking brake. (→P.245) 3 Press the P position switch. (→P.238) Check that the shift position indica- tor shows P and the parking brake indicator is illuminated. 4 Press the power switch. The EV system will stop, and the meter display will be extinguished (the shift position indicator will be extinguished a few seconds after the meter display). 5 Release the brake pedal and check that “ACCESSORY” or “POWER ON” is not shown on the meter. operating for an extended period. ●The EV system will automatically shut off after approximately 1 hour if it has been left operating while the shift position is in P. ● The timer for the automatic EV system shut off feature will reset if the brake pedal is depressed or if the shift position is in a position other than P. ●After the vehicle is parked, if the door is locked with the door lock switch (→P.170) from the inside or the mechanical key (→P.570) from the outside, the automatic EV sys- tem shut off feature will be dis- abled. The timer for the automatic EV system shut off feature will be re-enabled if the driver’s door is opened. ■ When the shift control system malfunctions When attempting to turn the power 5 switch off while there is a malfunc- tion in the shift control system, the power switch mode may change to ACC. In this case, ACC may be turned off by applying the parking brake and pressing the power switch again. If there is a malfunction in the sys- tem, have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately. ■ Automatic P position selection function →P.240 ■ Automatic EV system shut off feature ●The vehicle is equipped with a feature that automatically shuts off the EV system when the shift posi- tion is in P with the EV system 236 5-2. Driving procedures WARNING ■ Stopping the EV system in an emergency ● If you want to stop the EV sys- tem in an emergency while driv- ing the vehicle, press and hold the power switch for more than 2 seconds, or press it briefly 3 times or more in succession. (→P.535) However, do not touch the power switch while driving except in an emergency. Turn- ing the EV system off while driv- ing will not cause a loss of steering or braking control. However, power assist for the steering wheel may be lost mak- ing it difficult to steer smoothly before stopping the vehicle depending on the remaining charge in the 12-volt battery or usage conditions. In this situa- tion, you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. ● If the power switch is operated while the vehicle is running, a warning message will be shown on the multi-information display and a buzzer sounds. ●When restarting the EV system after an emergency shutdown, press the power switch shortly and firmly. Changing power switch modes Modes can be changed by pressing the power switch with the brake pedal released. (The mode changes each time the switch is pressed.) “ACCESSORY” “POWER ON” 1 OFF The emergency flashers can be used. 2 ACC* Some electrical components such as the audio system can be used. “ACCESSORY” will be displayed on the multi-information display. 3 ON All electrical components can be used. “POWER ON” will be displayed on the multi-information display. *: Setting can be customized. (→P.604) ■ Auto power off function If the vehicle is left in ACC for more than 20 minutes or ON (the EV sys- tem is not operating) for more than 20 minutes with the shift position in P, the power switch will automati- cally turn off. However, this function cannot entirely prevent the 12-volt battery discharge. Do not leave the vehicle with the power switch in ACC or ON for long periods of time 5-2. Driving procedures 237 when the EV system is not operat- ing. Shift position NOTICE ■ To prevent 12-volt battery dis- charge ● Do not leave the power switch in ACC or ON for long periods of time without the EV system on. ●If “ACCESSORY” or “POWER ON” is displayed on the multi- information display, the power switch is not in OFF. Exit the vehicle after turning the power switch to OFF. Select the shift position depending on your pur- pose and situation. Shift position purpose and functions Shift position Objective or function Parking the vehi- P cle/starting the EV system R Reversing Neutral N (Condition in which the power is not transmitted) 5 D Normal driving ■ Restraining sudden start (Drive- Start Control) →P.225 ■ If a message about a shift oper- ation is shown To prevent the shift position from being selected incorrectly or the vehicle from moving unexpectedly, the shift position may be changed automatically or operating the rotary shifter may be required. In this case, change the shift position following the messages on the multi-informa- tion display. ■ After recharging/reconnecting the 12-volt battery →P.498 238 5-2. Driving procedures WARNING ■ When driving on slippery road surfaces Be careful of sudden acceleration, as this could result in the vehicle skidding to the side or spinning. NOTICE ■ Situations where shift control system malfunctions are pos- sible If any of the following situations occur, shift control system mal- functions are possible. Immedi- ately stop the vehicle in a safe place on level ground, apply the parking brake, and then contact your SUBARU dealer. ●When the warning message indicating the shift control sys- tem appears on the multi-infor- mation display. (→P.551) ● The display indicates that no shift position is selected for more than a few seconds. Shift position display and how to change the shift position Rotary shifter Operate the rotary shifter slowly and securely. To switch to N, hold down the rotary shifter and hold it for a while. To switch to R or D, hold down the rotary shifter and turn left or right according to the arrow on the shift position indicator. Release the rotary shifter after each shifting operation to allow it to return to its regular position. When shifting from P to N, D or R, from N, D or R to P, from D to R, or from R to D, ensure that the brake pedal is being depressed and the vehicle is stationary. Shift position indicator Meter display: The current shift position is illumi- 5-2. Driving procedures 239 nated. Rotary shifter display: The current shift position is illumi- nated. When selecting the shift position, make sure that the shift position has been changed to the desired position by checking the shift posi- tion indicator provided on the instrument cluster. P position switch Fully stop the vehicle and set the parking brake, and then press the P position switch. When the shift position is changed to P, the switch illuminates. Check that the shift position indica- tor shows P. ■ Changing the shift position in each power switch mode ● The shift position cannot be changed when the power switch is in ACC or off. ●When the power switch is in ON, if the “READY” indicator is not illu- minated, the shift position can only be changed to N. ●When the “READY” indicator is illuminated, the shift position can be changed from P to D, N, or R. ●When the “READY” indicator is flashing, the shift position cannot be changed from P to any other position, even if the rotary shifter is operated. Operate the rotary shifter again after the “READY” indicator changes from flashing to illuminated. ■ Shifting the shift position from P to other positions ●While depressing the brake pedal firmly, operate the rotary shifter. If the rotary shifter is operated with- out depressing the brake pedal, the buzzer will sound and the shifting operation will be disabled. ●When selecting the shift position, make sure that the shift position has been changed to the desired position by checking the shift posi- tion indicator provided on the instrument cluster. ■ The shift position cannot be changed when In the following situations, a buzzer will sound to inform you that the shift position cannot be changed. Use the appropriate operation to attempt to change the shift position again. ●When attempting to change the shift position from P with the brake pedal not depressed ●When attempting to change the shift position from P with the accelerator pedal depressed ●When attempting to change the shift position from N while stopped or driving at an extremely low 5 speed with the brake pedal not depressed ●When attempting to change the shift position from N while stopped or driving at an extremely low speed with the accelerator pedal depressed ●When the P position switch is pressed while driving When driving at an extremely low speed, the shift position may change to P. ■ The shift position automatically changes to N when In the following situations, a buzzer will sound to inform you that the shift position has been changed to N. Use the appropriate operation to attempt to change the shift position again. ●When attempting to change the shift position to R while the vehicle is moving forward When driving at a low speed, the shift position may change to R. 240 5-2. Driving procedures ●When attempting to change the shift position to D while the vehicle is moving backward When driving at a low speed, the shift position may change to D. ■ When N is selected while driv- ing When selecting N while traveling at a speed above a certain level, hold the rotary shifter at the N position. ■ Reverse warning buzzer When shifting into R, a buzzer will sound to inform the driver that the shift position is in R. ■ Automatic P position selection function In the following situations, the shift position is automatically changed to P. ●When pressing the power switch with the vehicle stopped while the power switch is in ON and the shift position is in a position other than P (after the shift position has changed to P, the power switch will turn off)* ●If the driver’s door is opened and all of the following conditions are met, while the shift position is in a position other than P: • The power switch is in ON. • The driver is not wearing the seat belt. • The brake pedal is not depressed. To start off the vehicle after the shift position is changed to P, operate the rotary shifter again. ●When the vehicle is stopped after the EV system has been stopped in an emergency while driving. ●When voltage of the 12-volt bat- tery drops while the shift position is in a position other than P. *: When the power switch is pressed while driving at extremely slow speeds, such as immediately before stopping the vehicle, the shift position may automatically change to P. Make sure that the vehicle is completely stopped before pressing the power switch. ■ If the shift position cannot be shifted from P There is a possibility that the 12-volt battery is discharged. Check the 12- volt battery in this situation. (→P.572) ■ Customization Some functions can be customized. (→P.604) WARNING ■ For the rotary shifter ● Do not remove the rotary shifter knob or use anything but a gen- uine SUBARU rotary shifter knob. Also, do not hang any- thing on the rotary shifter. Doing so could prevent the rotary shifter from returning to position, causing unexpected accidents to occur when the vehicle is in motion. ● In order to prevent the shift position from accidentally being changed, do not touch the rotary shifter when not using them. ■ P position switch ● Do not press the P position switch while the vehicle is mov- ing. If the P position switch is pressed when driving at very low speeds (for example, directly before stopping the vehicle), the vehicle may stop suddenly when the shift position switches to P, which could lead to an accident. WARNING 5-2. Driving procedures position in N* 241 ● In order to prevent the shift position from accidentally being changed, do not touch the P position switch when not using them. NOTICE ■ When exiting the vehicle (driver’s seat only) Check that the shift position indi- cator shows P and that the park- ing brake indicator is illuminated before opening the door and exit- ing the vehicle. Keeping the shift position in N without activating the automatic P position selection function ⚫ By performing the following operation, the shift position can be held in N until the shift position switches to P without activating the automatic P position selection function. 1 Operate the rotary shifter and change the shift position to N when the EV system is oper- ating. 2 Return the rotary shifter to its regular position. 3 Operate the rotary shifter to N and hold it there until the buzzer sounds. 4 Press the power switch within 5 seconds after the buzzer sounds. The EV system stops with the shift Make sure to check that the buzzer sounds and “Holding N Push P Switch When Done” is displayed on the multi-information display. ⚫ In order to shift to a position other than N, first press the P position switch to change the shift position to P. ⚫ If the automatic P position switching operation selection function is performed oper- ated with the EV system stopped, the automatic P position selection function may not operate. Always perform the operation with the EV system started. *: To keep this state, do not operate 5 the power switch. If the power switch is operated repeatedly, the power switch will turn off after the shift position has automatically changed to P. Selecting the drive mode ■ Drive mode select switch →P.411 ■ “X-MODE” →P.412 How to operation the regenerative braking force selection mode By setting the shift position to D and operating the paddle shift switches, the vehicle can drive with the regenerative braking 242 5-2. Driving procedures force fixed when the accelerator pedal is released. The regenerative braking force can be selected from 4 levels. By operating the “-” side of the paddle shift switch, the regener- ative braking force can be made stronger than the current one. By operating the “+” side of the paddle shift switch, the regener- ative braking force can be made weaker than the current one. The regenerative braking power becomes strong as the number of the arrows of (regenerative braking power indicator) on the multi-informa- tion display increases. Paddle shift switch “-” Paddle shift switch “+” Indicator position other than D ● The “+” paddle shift switch is pressed and held ●When “X-MODE” is activated ●When the “S PEDAL DRIVE” is operating ■ Using regenerative brake ●When driving at a high speed, the feeling of deceleration with regen- erative braking is less than that on conventional vehicles. ● If “Regenerative Braking Limited Press Brake to Decelerate” appears on the multi-information display, firmly depress the brake pedal to decelerate the vehicle. ●Operate the paddle switch on the “-” side, and when the number for the regenerative brake force indi- cator reaches 4, the system will switch to “S PEDAL DRIVE” mode. At the same time, the “S PEDAL DRIVE” indicator will turn on. “S PEDAL DRIVE” switch Acceleration/deceleration con- trol can be performed only by operating the accelerator pedal, and the frequency of switching to the brake pedal can be greatly reduced. Since the deceleration when the accelera- tor pedal is released is stronger than that of a conventional vehi- cle, the vehicle can be deceler- ated smoothly by slowly releasing the pedal the acceler- ■ How to cancel the regenerative braking force selection mode In the following conditions, the regenerative braking force selection mode is canceled. ● The shift position is shifted to a ator pedal without completely releasing it. 5-2. Driving procedures 243 When the “S PEDAL DRIVE” switch is pressed, the regenera- tive braking force, when the accelerator pedal is released, becomes stronger than usual. ●The regenerative braking force may change depending on the battery condition. The regenerative braking force may become weak when the traction bat- tery is fully charged or when the temperature of the traction battery is low. The limit can be checked by the size of the charging area or the regeneration limit display in the power meter. (→P.153) If it seems there is slight feeling of deceleration due to the regenerative braking, step on the brakes to slow down or stop. ●“S PEDAL DRIVE” cannot be ■ When “S PEDAL DRIVE” cannot be used In the following cases, the system does not operate. ●When “X-MODE” is activated ●When the brake system or EV system is malfunctioning ●When regenerative braking is lim- ited Regenerative braking may be restricted in the following situations: When the temperature of the elec- tric motor or power control unit is extremely high ■ Regenerative Braking ●The vehicle cannot be stopped by just releasing the accelerator pedal. Step on the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped. ●If the power switch is turned off and then the EV system is restarted, the “S PEDAL DRIVE” will be turned off. ●When driving at high speeds, the feeling of deceleration due to regenerative braking is smaller than in a normal car. ●The maximum deceleration varies depending on the vehicle speed. used when the following message is displayed on the multi-informa- tion display. When decelerating, firmly step on the brake to decelerate. • “S PEDAL DRIVE Unavailable 5 XMODE Activated” • “S PEDAL DRIVE Temporarily Unavailable Press Brake to Decel- erate” • “S PEDAL DRIVE Temporarily Unavailable See Owner’s Manual” ■ Stop lights turning ON When the regenerative braking force exceeds a certain level, the stop lights turns on. 244 5-2. Driving procedures Turn signal lever Operating instructions burned out. ■ If the turn signals stop flashing before a lane change has been performed Operate the lever again. 1 Right turn 2 Lane change to the right (move the lever partway and release it) The right hand signals will flash 3 times. 3 Lane change to the left (move the lever partway and release it) The left hand signals will flash 3 times. 4 Left turn ■ Turn signals can be operated when The power switch is in ON. ■ If the indicator flashes faster than usual Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not Parking brake The parking brake can be set or released automati- cally or manually. In automatic mode, the parking brake can be set or released automatically. Also, even in automatic mode, the parking brake can be set or released manually. Operating instructions ■ Using the manual mode The parking brake can be set and released manually. Parking brake indicator light (U.S.A.) Parking brake indicator light (Canada) 1 Pull the switch to set the parking brake The parking brake indicator light will turn on. 5-2. Driving procedures 245 Pull and hold the parking brake switch if an emergency occurs and it is necessary to operate the park- ing brake while driving. 2 Push the switch to release the parking brake • Operate the parking brake switch while depressing the brake pedal. • Using the parking brake auto- matic release function, the park- ing brake can be released by depressing the accelerator pedal. (→P.246) Make sure that the parking brake indicator light turn off. If the parking brake indicator light flash, operate the switch again. (→P.548) ■ Turning the automatic mode on 5 While the vehicle is stopped, pull and hold the parking brake switch until a buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display. When the automatic mode is turned on, the parking brake operates as follows. ⚫ When the shift position is shifted from P, the parking brake will be released, and the parking brake indicator light will turn off. ⚫ When the shift position is shifted to P, the parking brake will be set, and the parking brake indicator light will turn on. Operate the shift position with the vehicle stopped and the 246 5-2. Driving procedures brake pedal depressed. The auto function may not operate if the shift position is moved extremely quickly. In this situation, apply the parking brake manually. (→P.245) ■ Turning the automatic mode off While the vehicle is stopped and depressing the brake pedal, press and hold the parking brake switch until a buzzer sounds and message is shown on the multi-information display. ■ Parking brake operation ●When the power switch is not in ON, the parking brake cannot be released using the parking brake switch. ●When the power switch is not in ON, automatic mode (automatic brake setting and releasing) is not available. ■ Parking brake automatic release function When all of the following conditions are met in manual mode, the park- ing brake can be released by depressing the accelerator pedal. ●The driver’s door is closed ●The driver is wearing the seat belt ● The shift position is in a forward driving position or reverse driving position ●The brake system warning light is not illuminated. When depressing the accelerator pedal, depress it slowly. If the parking brake is not released when the accelerator pedal is depressed, release the parking brake manually. ■ Parking brake automatic lock function The parking brake will be set auto- matically under the following condi- tions: ●The brake pedal is not depressed ●The driver’s door is open ● The driver’s seat belt is not fas- tened ●The shift position is in a position other than P or N (The shift position is in P during advanced park operation.) (If equipped) ●The brake system warning light are not illuminated ■ If “Parking Brake Temporarily Unavailable” is displayed on the multi-information display If the parking brake is operated repeatedly over a short period of time, the system may restrict opera- tion to prevent overheating. If this happens, refrain from operating the parking brake. Normal operation will return after about 1 minute. ■ If “Parking Brake Unavailable” is displayed on the multi-infor- mation display Operate the parking brake switch. If the message does not disappear after operating the switch several times, the system may be malfunc- tioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer. ■ Parking brake operation sound When the parking brake operates, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard. This does not indicate a malfunc- tion. ■ Parking brake indicator light ● Depending on the power switch mode, the parking brake indicator light will turn on and stay on as described below: ON: Comes on until the parking brake is released. 5-2. Driving procedures 247 Not in ON: Stays on for approxi- mately 15 seconds. ●When the power switch is turned off with the parking brake set, the parking brake indicator light will stay on for about 15 seconds. This does not indicate a malfunc- tion. ■ When the parking brake switch malfunctions Automatic mode (automatic brake setting and releasing) will be turned on automatically. ■ Parking the vehicle →P.245 ■ Parking brake engaged warning buzzer A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is driven with the parking brake engaged. “Parking Brake ON” is dis- played on the multi-information dis- play. (with the vehicle reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]) ■ If the brake system warning light comes on →P.542 ■ Usage in winter time →P.424 WARNING ■ When parking the vehicle Do not leave a child in the vehicle alone. The parking brake may be released unintentionally and there is the danger of the vehicle mov- ing that may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury. ■ Parking brake switch Do not set any objects near the parking brake switch. Objects may interfere with the switch and may lead the parking brake to unexpectedly operate. ■ Parking brake automatic lock function Never use the automatic parking brake engagement function in place of normal parking brake operation. This function is designed to reduce the risk of a collision due to the driver forget- ting to engage the parking brake. Over-reliance on this function to park the vehicle safely may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury. (→P.219) NOTICE ■ When parking the vehicle Before you leave the vehicle, shift the shift position to P, set the park- ing brake and make sure that the vehicle does not move. ■ When the system malfunc- 5 tions Stop the vehicle in a safe place and check the warning messages. ■ When the vehicle 12-volt bat- tery is discharged The parking brake system cannot be activated. (→P.572) ■ When the parking brake can- not be released due to a mal- function Driving the vehicle with the park- ing brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear. Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately if this occurs. 248 5-2. Driving procedures Brake Hold The brake hold system keeps the brake applied when the shift position is in D or N with the system on and the brake pedal has been depressed to stop the vehicle. The system releases the brake when the accelerator pedal is depressed with the shift position in D to allow smooth start off. Enabling the system Turns the brake hold system on The brake hold standby indicator (green) comes on. While the system is holding the brake, the brake hold operated indicator (yel- low) comes on. ■ Brake hold system operating conditions The brake hold system cannot be turned on in the following condi- tions: ●The driver’s door is not closed. ●The driver is not wearing the seat belt. ●“Parking Brake Unavailable” or “Parking Brake Malfunction Visit Your Dealer” is displayed on the multi-information display. If any of the conditions above are detected when the brake hold sys- tem is enabled, the system will turn off and the brake hold standby indi- cator light will go off. In addition, if any of the conditions are detected while the system is holding the brake, a warning buzzer will sound and a message will be shown on the multi-information display. The park- ing brake will then be set automati- cally. ■ Brake hold function ● If the brake pedal is left released for a period of about 3 minutes after the system has started hold- ing the brake, the parking brake will be set automatically. In this case, a warning buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display. ●The brake hold function may not hold the vehicle when the vehicle is on a steep incline. In this situa- tion, it may be necessary for the driver to apply the brakes. A warn- ing buzzer will sound and the multi-information display will inform the driver of this situation. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions. ● To turn the system off while the system is holding the brake, firmly depress the brake pedal and press the button again. ■ When the parking brake is set automatically while the system is holding the brakes Perform any of the following opera- tions to release the parking brake: ● Depress the accelerator pedal. (The parking brake will not be released automatically if the seat 5-2. Driving procedures 249 belt is not fastened.) ●Operate the parking brake switch with the brake pedal depressed. Make sure that the parking brake indicator light goes off. (→P.245) ■ When an inspection at your SUBARU dealer is necessary When the brake hold standby indi- cator (green) does not illuminate even when the brake hold switch is pressed with the brake hold system operating conditions met, the sys- tem may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected at your SUB- ARU dealer. ■ If “Brake Hold Malfunction Press Brake to Deactivate Visit Your Dealer” or “Brake Hold Malfunction Visit Your Dealer” is displayed on the multi-infor- mation display The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer. ■ Warning messages and buzzers Warning messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunc- tion or to inform the driver of the need for caution. If a warning mes- sage is shown on the multi-informa- tion display, read the message and follow the instructions. ■ If the brake hold operated indi- cator flashes →P.548 ■ When stopped on a slippery road The system cannot stop the vehi- cle when the gripping ability of the tires has been exceeded. Do not use the system when stopped on a slippery road. NOTICE ■ When parking the vehicle The brake hold system is not designed for use when parking the vehicle for a long period of time. Turning the power switch off while the system is holding the brake may release the brake, which would cause the vehicle to move. When operating the power switch, depress the brake pedal, shift the shift position to P and set the parking brake. 5 WARNING ■ When the vehicle is on a steep incline When using the brake hold sys- tem on a steep incline, exercise caution. The brake hold function may not hold the vehicle in such a situation. 250 5-3. Operating the lights and wipers Headlight switch The headlights can be oper- ated manually or automati- cally. Turning on the headlights Operating the switch turns on the lights as follows: U.S.A. Canada 1 The side marker, parking, tail, license plate, instrument panel lights, daytime running lights (→P.250) turn on. 2 The headlights and all lights listed above (except daytime running lights) turn on. 3 The headlights, daytime running lights (→P.250) and all the lights listed above turn on and off automatically. 4 The daytime running lights turn off. (for the U.S.A. only) ■ AUTO mode can be used when The power switch is in ON. ■ Daytime running light system ●The daytime running lights illumi- nate using the same lights as the parking lights and illuminate but at a higher intensity. ● To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers during daytime driving, the daytime running lights turn on automatically when all of the following conditions are met. (The daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.) • The EV system is operating • The parking brake is released • : The headlight switch is in the or position • The surroundings are bright The daytime running lights remain on after they illuminate, even if the parking brake is set again. ● For the U.S.A.: Daytime running lights can be turned off by operat- ing the switch. ● Compared to turning on the head- lights, the daytime running light system offers greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help improve electricity con- sumption. ■ Headlight control sensor The sensor may not function prop- erly if an object is placed on the sen- sor, or anything that blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield. Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting the level of ambient light and may cause the automatic head- 5-3. Operating the lights and wipers light system to malfunction. 251 ■ Automatic light off system ●When the headlights are on: The lights turn off 30 seconds after the power switch is turned to ACC or OFF and a door is opened and closed. (The lights turn off immedi- ately if on the key is pressed after all the doors are closed.) ●When only the tail lights are on: The tail lights turn off automati- cally if the power switch is turned to ACC or OFF and the driver’s door is opened. To turn the lights on again, turn the power switch to ON, or turn the light switch to the or position once and then back to or position. ■ Light reminder buzzer A buzzer sounds when the power switch is turned to OFF and the driver’s door is opened while the lights are turned on. ■ Automatic headlight leveling system The level of the headlights is auto- matically adjusted according to the number of passengers and the load- ing condition of the vehicle to ensure that the headlights do not interfere with other road users. ■ Windshield wiper linked head- light illumination When driving during daytime with the headlight switch turned to , if the windshield wipers are used, the headlights will turn on automatically after several seconds to help enhance the visibility of your vehi- cle. ■ 12-volt battery-saving function In order to prevent the 12-volt bat- tery of the vehicle from discharging, if the headlights and/or tail lights are on when the power switch is turned to OFF, the battery saving function will operate and automatically turn off all the lights after approximately 20 minutes. When any of the following are per- formed, the 12-volt battery-saving function is canceled once and then reactivated. All the lights will turn off automatically 20 minutes after the 12-volt battery-saving function has been reactivated: 5 ●When the headlight switch is oper- ated ●When a door is opened or closed ■ If “Headlight System Malfunc- tion Visit Your Dealer” is dis- played on the multi-information display The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer. ■ Customization Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitiv- ity) can be changed. (Customizable features: →P.605) NOTICE ■ To prevent 12-volt battery dis- charge Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the EV sys- tem is not operating. 252 5-3. Operating the lights and wipers Turning on the high beam headlights AHB (Automatic High Beam) 1 With the headlights on, push the lever away from you to turn on the high beams. Pull the lever toward you to the center position to turn the high beams off. 2 Pull the lever toward you and release it to flash the high beams once. You can flash the high beams with the headlights on or off. The Automatic High Beam uses a front camera located on the upper portion of the windshield to detect the brightness of the lights of vehicles ahead, street- lights, etc., and automati- cally changes the head lights between the high beams and low beams. WARNING ■ For safe use Do not overly rely on the Auto- matic High Beam. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings and turning the high beams on or off manually if nec- essary. ■ To prevent unintentional operation of the Automatic High Beam System ●When it is necessary to disable the system: →P.261 Using the Automatic High Beam System 1 Press the Automatic High Beam switch. 5-3. Operating the lights and wipers 253 2 Turn the headlight switch to the or position. When the headlight switch lever is in the low beam position, the AHB system will be enabled and the AHB indicator will illuminate. ■ Automatic operating condi- tions of the high beams ●When all of the following condi- tions are met, the high beams will illuminate automatically: • The vehicle speed is approxi- mately 21 mph (34 km/h) or more. • The area ahead of the vehicle is dark. • There are no vehicles ahead with lights on. • There are few streetlights or other lights on the road ahead. ●If any of the following conditions are met, the headlights will change to the low beams: • Vehicle speed drops below approximately 17 mph (27 km/h). • The area ahead of the vehicle is not dark. • There is a vehicle ahead with lights on. • There are many streetlights or other lights on the road ahead. ■ Front camera detection ●In the following situations, the high beams may not be automatically changed to the low beams: • When a vehicle cuts in front of your vehicle • When another vehicle crosses in front of the vehicle • When vehicles ahead are repeat- edly detected and then hidden due to repeated curves, road dividers or roadside trees • When a vehicle ahead approaches from a far lane • When a vehicle ahead is far away • When a vehicle ahead has no lights • When the lights of a vehicle ahead are dim • When a vehicle ahead is reflecting strong light, such as own head- lights • Situations in which the sensors may not operate properly: →P.265 ●The headlights may change to the low beams if a vehicle ahead that is using fog lights without its head- lights turned on is detected. ● House lights, street lights, traffic signals, and illuminated billboards or signs may cause the high beams to change to the low beams, or the low beams to remain on. ●The following may change the tim- ing at which the headlights change to the low beams: • The brightness of lights of vehi- cles ahead • The movement and direction of vehicles ahead • The distance between the vehicle and a vehicle ahead • When a vehicle ahead only has lights illuminated on one side • When a vehicle ahead is a two- wheeled vehicle • The condition of the road (gradi- ent, curve, condition of the road surface, etc.) • The number of passengers and amount of luggage ●The headlights may change between the high beams and low beams unexpectedly. ●Bicycles and other small vehicles may not be detected. ● In the following situations, the sys- tem may not be able to correctly 254 5-3. Operating the lights and wipers detect the brightness of the sur- roundings. This may cause the low beams to remain on or the high beams to flash or dazzle pedestrians or vehicles ahead. In such a case, it is necessary to manually change between the high beams and low beams. • When there are lights similar to headlights or tail lights in the sur- rounding area • When headlights or tail lights of vehicles ahead are turned off, dirty, changing color, or not aimed properly • When the headlights are repeat- edly changing between the high beams and low beams. • When use of the high beams is inappropriate or when the high beams may be flashing or daz- zling pedestrians or other drivers. • When the vehicle is used in an area in which vehicles travel on the opposite side of the road of the country for which the vehicle was designed, for example using a vehicle designed for right-hand traffic in a left-hand traffic area, or vice versa • When it is necessary to disable the system: →P.261 • Situations in which the sensors may not operate properly: →P.265 ■ Temporarily reducing front camera sensitivity The sensitivity of the front camera can be temporarily reduced. 1 Turn the power switch off with the following conditions met. ●The headlight switch is in or position. ●The headlight switch lever is in the low beam position. ●The Automatic High Beam switch is on. 2 Turn the power switch to ON. 3 Within 60 seconds after perform- ing step 2, push the headlight switch lever to the high beam position then pull it to the original position quickly 10 times, then leave the lever in its original posi- tion. 4 If the sensitivity is changed, the Automatic High Beam indicator will blink 3 times. Turning the high beams on/off manually ■ Changing to the high beams Push the lever forward. The AHB indicator will turn off and the high beam indicator will turn on. Pull the lever to its original position to enable the Automatic High Beam system again. ■ Changing to the low beams Press the Automatic High Beam switch. The AHB indicator will turn off. Press the switch to enable the Automatic High Beam system again. 5-3. Operating the lights and wipers 255 Temporarily changing to the low beams It is recommended to switch to the low beams when use of the high beams is inappropriate or when the high beams may cause problems or distress to other drivers or pedestrians nearby. Pull the lever rearward and then return it to its original position. The high beams will illuminate while the lever is pulled, how- ever, after the lever is returned to its original position, the low beams will remain on for a cer- tain amount of time. After this, the Automatic High Beam sys- tem will operate. Fog light switch* *: If equipped When in difficult driving conditions, such as in rain and fog, turn on the front fog lights to secure front visibility. Turning on the fog lights 5 1 *1 or *2 Turns the front fog lights off 2 Turns the front fog lights on *1: For the U.S.A. *2: For Canada ■ Fog light can be used when The headlights are turned on. 256 5-3. Operating the lights and wipers NOTICE ■ To prevent 12-volt battery dis- charge Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the EV sys- tem is off. Windshield wipers and washer Operating the lever can switch between automatic operation and manual oper- ation, or can use the washer. NOTICE ■ When the windshield is dry Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield. Operating the wiper lever Operating the lever oper- ates the wipers or washer as fol- lows: When “AUTO” is selected, the wipers will operate automatically when the sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically adjusts wiper timing in accor- dance with rain volume and vehicle speed. 1 *1 or *2 Off 5-3. Operating the lights and wipers operation 257 2 Rain-sensing opera- tion 3 *1 or *2 Low speed operation 4 *1 or *2 High speed operation 5 *1 or *2 Temporary operation *1: For the U.S.A. *2: For Canada When “AUTO” is selected, the sensor sensitivity can be adjusted by turning the switch ring. 6 Increases the sensitivity 7 Decreases the sensitivity 8 Washer/wiper dual Pulling the lever operates the wip- ers and washer. The wipers will automatically oper- ate a couple of times after the washer squirts. (After operating several times, the wipers operate once more time after a short delay to prevent drip- ping. However, the dripping preven- tion does not operate while the vehicle is moving.) 9 * Digital inner mirror camera washer operation Pushing the lever operates the washer and cleans the camera for the Digital inner mirror. *: Vehicles with Digital inner mirror 5 ■ The windshield wipers and washer can be operated when The power switch is in ON. ■ Effects of vehicle speed on wiper operation With low speed windshield wiper operation selected, wiper operation will be switched from low speed to intermittent wiper operation when the vehicle is stationary. (However, when the sensor sensitivity is adjusted to the highest level, the mode will not switch.) ■ Raindrop sensor ●The raindrop sensor judges the amount of raindrops. An optical sensor is adopted. It may not operate properly when sunlight from the rising or setting of the sun intermittently strikes the wind- shield, or if bugs, etc., are present on the windshield. 258 5-3. Operating the lights and wipers ●If the wiper switch is turned to the “AUTO” position while the power switch is in ON, the wipers will operate once to show that “AUTO” mode is activated. ●If the wiper sensitivity is adjusted to higher, the wiper may operate once to indicate the change of sensitivity. ●If the temperature of the raindrop sensor is 185°F (85°C) or higher, or 5°F (-15°C) or lower, the auto- matic operation may not occur. In this case, operate the wipers in any mode other than “AUTO”. ■ If no windshield washer fluid sprays Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the windshield washer fluid reser- voir. ■ Using the voice control system The following operations can be performed using the voice control system: ●Operating the windshield wipers only once ●Operating the windshield clean- ing washer (it can be performed only when the vehicle is stopped) For details regarding the voice con- trol system, refer to “MULTIMEDIA OWNER’S MANUAL”. WARNING ■ Caution regarding the use of windshield wipers in “AUTO” mode The windshield wipers may oper- ate unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or the windshield is sub- ject to vibration in “AUTO” mode. Take care that your fingers or any- thing else does not become caught in the windshield wipers. ■ Caution regarding the use of washer fluid When it is cold, do not use the washer fluid until the windshield becomes warm. The fluid may freeze on the windshield and cause low visibility. This may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. NOTICE ■ When the washer fluid tank is empty Do not operate the switch continu- ally as the washer fluid pump may overheat. ■ When a nozzle becomes blocked In this case, contact your SUB- ARU dealer. Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged. ■ To prevent 12-volt battery dis- charge Do not leave the wipers on longer than necessary when the EV sys- tem is off. 5-4. Using the driving support systems 259 SUBARU Safety Sense software update It is necessary to enter a connected services con- tract, provided by SUB- ARU, to use these functions. For details, con- tact your SUBARU dealer. WARNING ■ For safe use When the SUBARU Safety Sense software is updated, the operating methods of functions may change. Using this system without knowing the correct operating methods may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury. ● Make sure to read the Digital Owner’s Manual which corre- sponds to the software version of the system, available at the Owner’s Manual website, before using this system. Content of the SUBARU Safety Sense Owner’s Manual This Owner’s Manual contains information for Ver. 2. For the latest information about the con- trols, use, warnings/precautions, etc., of each function of SUB- ARU Safety Sense, refer to the Digital Owner’s Manual at the Owner’s Manual website. If the software of this system has been updated after initial purchase of the vehicle, before using this system, be sure to read the Owner’s Manual which corresponds to the software ver- sion of the system. ■ Precautions for use ●Be aware that some functions may temporarily be disabled if a legal or safety related issue occurs. ● If a connected services contract has not been entered or has expired, software updates will not be able to be performed wire- lessly. Checking your vehicle’s SUBARU Safety Sense version If the software of this system has been updated after initial 5 purchase of the vehicle, to access the appropriate Owner’s Manual, it is necessary to check the software version of the sys- tem and then visit the Owner’s Manual website. ■ Checking the version using SUBARU Solterra Connect Mobile App The software version of the sys- tem can be checked using SUB- ARU Solterra Connect Mobile App. ■ Using your vehicle’s SUB- ARU Safety Sense version 1 Access the following URL using a computer or smart- phone: 260 5-4. Using the driving support systems ▶ SUBARU of America https://www.subaru.com/ owners/vehicle-resources.html ▶ SUBARU Canada English https://www.subaru.ca/manuals ▶ SUBARU Canada French https://www.subaru.ca/manuels 2 Select the file which includes the previously checked sys- tem version. Updating the software If a software update is available, a notification will be displayed by SUBARU Solterra Connect Mobile App. Follow the instruc- tions displayed on the screen. ■ Software update precautions ●After a software update has been performed, it will not be possible to revert to a previous version. ●Depending on the communication environment and the content of an update, a software update may take several hours. Although an update will be suspended when the power switch is turned off, it will resume when the power switch is changed back to ON. ●SUBARU Safety Sense can still be used while a software update is being performed. ■ What can be checked using the SUBARU Solterra Connect Mobile App The following items can be checked or performed. ●Software version, update details, precautions, use methods, etc. ●Software update SUBARU Safety Sense The SUBARU Safety Sense consists of the driving assist systems and contrib- utes to a safe and comfort- able driving experience: WARNING ■ SUBARU Safety Sense The SUBARU Safety Sense oper- ates under the assumption that the driver will drive safely, and is designed to help reduce the impact to the occupants in a colli- sion and assist the driver under normal driving conditions. As there is a limit to the degree of recognition accuracy and control performance that this system can provide, do not overly rely on this system. The driver is solely responsible for paying attention to the vehicle’s surroundings and driving safely. ■ For safe use ● Do not overly rely on this sys- tem. The driver is solely respon- sible for paying attention to the vehicle’s surroundings and driv- ing safely. This system may not operate in all situations and pro- vided assistance is limited. Over-reliance on this system to drive the vehicle safely may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury. ● Do not attempt to test the oper- ation of the system, as it may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident. WARNING 5-4. Using the driving support systems ●When using an automatic car wash 261 ● If attention is necessary while performing driving operations or a system malfunction occurs, a warning message or warning buzzer will be operated. If a warning message is displayed on the display, follow the instructions displayed. ● Depending on external noise, the volume of the audio system, etc., it may be difficult to hear the warning buzzer. Also, depending on the road condi- tions, it may be difficult to recog- nize the operation of the system. ■ When it is necessary to dis- able the system In the following situations, make sure to disable the system. Failure to do so may lead to the system not operating properly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury. ●When the vehicle is tilted due to being overloaded or having a flat tire ●When driving at extremely high speeds ●When towing another vehicle ●When the vehicle is being trans- ported by a truck, ship, train, etc. ●When the vehicle is raised on a lift and the tires are allowed to rotate freely ●When inspecting the vehicle using a drum tester such as a chassis dynamometer or speed- ometer tester, or when using an on vehicle wheel balancer ●When the vehicle is driven in a sporty manner or off-road ●When a sensor is misaligned or deformed due to a strong impact being applied to the sen- sor or the area around the sen- sor ●When accessories which obstruct a sensor or light are temporarily installed to the vehi- cle ●When tire chains are installed to the vehicle or an emergency tire puncture repair kit has been used ●When the tires are excessively worn or the inflation pressure of the tires is low ●When tires other than the manu- facturer specified size are installed 5 ●When the vehicle cannot be driven stably, due to a collision, malfunction, etc. Driving assist systems ■ AHB (Automatic High Beam) →P.252 ■ PCS (Pre-Collision System) →P.270 ■ LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) →P.282 ■ LDA (Lane Departure Alert) →P.292 ■ LCA (Lane Change Assist) →P.288 262 5-4. Using the driving support systems ■ FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert) →P.320 ■ PDA (Proactive driving assist) →P.297 ■ RSA (Road Sign Assist) →P.303 ■ Dynamic radar cruise con- trol →P.305 ■ Cruise control →P.316 ■ Emergency Driving Stop System →P.322 ■ Traffic Jam Assist →P.325 ■ Driver monitor →P.268 Sensors used by SUB- ARU Safety Sense Various sensors are used to obtain the necessary informa- tion for system operation. ■ Sensors which detect the surrounding conditions ▶ Front Front radar sensor Front camera Front side radar sensors ▶ Rear (rear side radar sensors) ■ Sensors which detect the driver condition Driver monitor camera WARNING 5-4. Using the driving support systems ● Do not attach accessories, 263 ■ To prevent malfunction of the radar sensors Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may lead to a radar sensor not operating prop- erly, possibly leading to an acci- dent resulting in death or serious injury. ●Keep the radar sensors and radar sensor covers clean at all times. Clean the front of a radar sensor or the front or back of a radar sen- sor cover if it is dirty or covered with water droplets, snow, etc. When cleaning the radar sensor and radar sensor cover, use a soft cloth to remove dirt so as to not damage them. Radar sensor Radar sensor cover ●Keep the surrounding area of the front side radar sensors on the front bumper clean at all times. stickers (including transparent stickers), aluminum tape, etc., to a radar sensor or radar sen- sor cover and their surrounding area. ● Do not subject a radar sensor or its surrounding area to impact. If a radar sensor, the front grille, or front bumper has been sub- jected to a impact, have the vehicle inspected by your SUB- ARU dealer. ● Do not disassemble the radar sensors. ● Do not modify or paint the radar sensors or radar sensor cover, or replace them with anything other than SUBARU genuine parts. ● In the following situations, recal- ibration of the radar sensors will 5 be necessary. For details, con- tact by your SUBARU dealer. • When a radar sensor is removed and installed, or replaced • When the front bumper or the front grille has been replaced ■ To prevent malfunction of the front camera Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may lead to the front camera not operating properly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or seri- ous injury. 264 5-4. Using the driving support systems WARNING ●Always keep the windshield clean. • If the windshield is dirty or cov- ered with an oily film, water droplets, snow, etc., clean the windshield. • Even if a glass coating agent is applied to the windshield, it will still be necessary to use the windshield wipers to remove water droplets, etc., from the area of the windshield in front of the front camera. • If the inner side of the wind- shield where the front camera is installed is dirty, contact your SUBARU dealer ● Do not attach stickers (including transparent stickers) or other items to the area of the wind- shield in front of the front cam- era (shaded area in the illustration). Approximately 1.6 in. (4 cm) Approximately 1.6 in. (4 cm) ● If the part of the windshield in front of the front camera is fogged up or covered with con- densation or ice, use the wind- shield defogger to remove the fog, condensation, or ice. ● If water droplets cannot be properly removed from the area of the windshield in front of the front camera by the windshield wipers, replace the wiper insert or wiper blade. ● Do not attach window tint to the windshield. ● Replace the windshield if it is damaged or cracked. If the windshield has been replaced, recalibration of the front camera will be necessary. For details, contact your SUBARU dealer. ● Do not allow liquids to contact the front camera. ● Do not allow bright lights to shine into the front camera. ● Do not damage the lens of the front camera or allow it to become dirty. When cleaning the inside of the windshield, do not allow glass cleaner to con- tact the lens of the front camera. Do not touch the lens of the front camera. If the lens of the front camera is dirty or dam- aged, contact your SUBARU dealer. ● Do not subject the front camera to a strong impact. ● Do not change the position or orientation of the front camera or remove it. ● Do not disassemble the front camera. ● Do not modify any parts around the front camera, such as the inside rear view mirror or ceil- ing. ● Do not attach accessories which may obstruct the front camera to the hood, front grille, or front bumper. For details, contact your SUBARU dealer. ● If a surfboard or other long object is to be mounted on the roof, make sure that it will not obstruct the front camera. 5-4. Using the driving support systems 265 WARNING ● Do not modify or change the headlights and other lights. ■ Front camera installation area on the windshield If the system determines that the windshield may be fogged up, it will automatically operate the heater to defog the part of the windshield around the front cam- era. When cleaning, etc., be care- ful not to touch the area around the front camera until the wind- shield has cooled sufficiently, as touching it may cause burns. ■ Precautions for the driver monitor camera Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may lead to mal- function of the driver monitor cam- era and the systems not operating properly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or seri- ous injury. ● Do not subject the driver moni- tor camera or its surrounding area to strong impact. If subjected to a strong impact, the driver monitor camera may move out of alignment and the driver may no longer be detected correctly. In this case, have the vehicle inspected by your SUB- ARU dealer. ● Do not disassemble or modify the driver monitor camera. ● Do not attach accessories, stickers (including transparent stickers), etc. to the driver moni- tor camera or its surrounding area. ● Do not allow the driver monitor camera or its surrounding area to get wet. ● Do not cover the driver monitor camera or place anything in front of it. ● Keep the lens of the driver mon- itor camera free from damage. ● Do not touch the lens of the driver monitor camera or allow it to become dirty. When there is dirt or fingerprints on the camera lens, clean it with a dry, soft cloth so as to not mark or damage it. ●When cleaning the lens, do not use detergents or organic sol- vents that may damage plastic. ■ Precautions for use Vehicles with a Connected naviga- tion: It is necessary to enter a con- nected services contract, provided 5 by SUBARU, to use these functions. For details, contact your SUBARU dealer. ●LCA (Lane Change Assist) →P.288 ● Radar Cruise Control: Extended resume time →P.305 ●Traffic Jam Assist →P.325 ■ Situations in which the sensors may not operate properly ●When the height or inclination of the vehicle has been changed due to modifications ●When the windshield is dirty, fogged up, cracked or damaged ●When the ambient temperature is high or low ●When mud, water, snow, dead insects, foreign matter, etc., is attached to the front of the sensor ●When in inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow, or a sandstorm 266 5-4. Using the driving support systems ●When water, snow, dust, etc., is thrown up in front of the vehicle, or when driving through mist or smoke ●When the headlights are not illu- minated while driving in the dark, such as at night or when in a tun- nel ●When the lens of a headlight is dirty and illumination is weak ●When the headlights are mis- aligned ●When a headlight is malfunction- ing ●When the headlights of another vehicle, sunlight, or reflected light shines directly into the front cam- era ●When the brightness of the sur- rounding area changes suddenly ●When driving near a TV tower, broadcasting station, electric power plant, radar equipped vehi- cles, etc., or other location where strong radio waves or electrical noise may be present ●When a wiper blade is blocking the front camera ●When in a location or near objects which strongly reflect radio waves, such as the following: • Tunnels • Truss bridges • Gravel roads • Rutted, snow-covered roads • Walls • Large trucks • Manhole covers • Guardrail • Metal plates ●When near a step or protrusion ●When a detectable vehicle is nar- row, such as a small mobility vehi- cle ●When a detectable vehicle has a small front or rear end, such as an unloaded truck ●When a detectable vehicle has a low front or rear end, such as a low bed trailer ●When a detectable vehicle has extremely high ground clearance ●When a detectable vehicle is car- rying a load which protrudes from its cargo area ●When a detectable vehicle has lit- tle exposed metal, such as a vehi- cle which is partially covered with cloth, etc. ●When a detectable vehicle is irregularly shaped, such as a trac- tor, sidecar, etc. ●When the distance between the vehicle and a detectable vehicle has become extremely short ●When a detectable vehicle is at an angle ●When snow, mud, etc., is attached to a detectable vehicle ●When driving on the following kinds of roads: • Roads with sharp curves or wind- ing roads • Roads with changes in grade, such as sudden inclines or declines • Roads which is sloped to the left or right • Roads with deep ruts • Roads which are rough and unmaintained 5-4. Using the driving support systems 267 • Roads which frequently undulate or are bumpy ●When the steering wheel is being operated frequently or suddenly ●When the vehicle is not in a con- stant position within a lane ●When parts related to this system, the brakes, etc., are cold or extremely hot, wet, etc. ●When the wheels are misaligned ●When driving on slick road sur- faces, such as when it is covered with ice, snow, gravel, etc. ●When the course of the vehicle differs from the shape of a curve ●When the vehicle speed is exces- sively high when entering a curve ●When entering/exiting a parking lot, garage, car elevator, etc. ●When driving in a parking lot ●When driving through an area where there are obstructions which may contact your vehicle, such as tall grass, tree branches, a curtain, etc. ●When driving in strong wind ■ Situations in which the lane may not be detected ●When the lane is extremely wide or narrow ●Immediately after changing lanes or passing through an intersection ●When driving in a temporary lane or lane regulated by construction ●When there are structures, pat- terns, shadows which are similar to lane lines in the surrounding ●When there are multiple white lines for a lane line ●When the lane lines are not clear or driving on a wet road surface ●When a lane line is on a curb ●When driving on a bright, reflec- tive road surface, such as con- crete ■ Situations in which some or all of the functions of the system cannot operate ●When a malfunction is detected in this system or a related system, such as the brakes, steering, etc. ●When the VSC, TRAC, or other safety related system is operating ●When the VSC, TRAC, or other safety related system is off ■ Changes in brake operation sound and pedal response ●When the brakes have been oper- ated, brake operation sounds may be heard and the brake pedal response may change, but this does not indicate a malfunction. ●When the system is operating, the brake pedal may feel stiffer than expected or sink. In either situa- tion the brake pedal can be depressed further. Further depress the brake pedal as nec- 5 essary. ■ Situations in which the driver monitor may not operate prop- erly In situations such as the following, the driver monitor camera may not be able to detect the driver’s face, and the function may not operate properly. ●When the inside of the vehicle is hot, such as after the vehicle has been parked in the sun ●When a very bright light, such as the sun or the headlights of follow- ing vehicle, shines onto the driver monitor camera ●When the brightness inside the vehicle changes frequently due to the shadows of surrounding struc- tures, etc. ●When a very bright light, such as the sun or the headlights of an oncoming vehicle, is shining onto the driver’s face ●When light, either inside or out- side of the vehicle, is being 268 5-4. Using the driving support systems reflected from the lenses of eye- glasses or sunglasses ●When there are multiple faces in the detection range of the driver monitor camera, such as when a front or rear passenger is leaning toward the driver’s seat ●When the driver’s face is outside of the detection range of the driver monitor camera, such as when leaned forward or when their head is outside of the window ●When the driver monitor camera is being blocked by the steering wheel, a hand holding the steering wheel, an arm, etc. ●When the driver is wearing a hat ●When the driver is wearing an eyepatch ●When the driver is wearing eye- glasses or sunglasses that do not easily transmit infrared rays ●When the driver is wearing con- tact lenses ●When the driver is wearing a face mask ●When the driver is laughing or their eyes are only slightly open ●When the driver’s eyes, nose, mouth, or shape of their face is blocked ●When the driver is wearing makeup which makes it difficult to detect their eyes, nose, mouth, or shape of their face ●When the driver eyes are blocked by the frame of eyeglasses, sun- glasses, hair, etc. ●When there is a device inside the vehicle that radiates near infrared rays, such as a non-genuine driver monitoring system. ■ Certification →P.655 Driver monitor Basic functions During controlled driving, the driver monitor camera detects the position and direction the driver is facing, and whether their eyes are opened or closed. Through this, the system deter- mines if the driver is checking their surroundings and if the driver can perform driving oper- ations. ■ Warning function In situations such as the follow- ing, a buzzer will sound and a message will be displayed to warn the driver. When the system determines that the driver is not paying attention to the road or their eyes are closed. When the driver’s face cannot be detected or the system deter- mines that the driver has poor driving posture. ■ Face identification The driver monitor is used as a device to identify faces in order 5-4. Using the driving support systems 269 to identify an individual. For information about how to use the face identification func- tion, priorities among other devices of individual identifica- tion, and linked vehicle settings, see “My Settings”. (→P.215) WARNING ■ For safe use ●The driver monitor is not designed to prevent the driver from driving carelessly or hav- ing a poor driving posture. Pay careful attention to the sur- rounding conditions in order to ensure safe driving. ●The driver monitor cannot reduce drowsiness. If you feel unable to concentrate or drowsy, take a break and sleep as necessary in order to ensure safe driving. ■ Warning function These functions may not operate when the vehicle speed is low. ■ Face identification Face identification starts when the door is opened then closed. In face identification, facial traits are digitized and stored in a built-in computer, to be used for identifica- tion in My Settings. ●Face image or video are not stored. Voice is not stored either. ●Digitized face information is not used for any purpose other than identification in My Settings. Addi- tionally, face information cannot be decoded and will not be dis- closed or provided to a third party. ●Face information can be deleted by yourself. ● For the handling of face informa- tion, please consent to the follow- ing before using it: • Face identification does not guar- antee a complete identity authen- tication, collation, or identification. • When face information registration fails frequently or face identifica- tion fails frequently, the driver cameras should be cleaned or face information should be regis- tered again. • Face information stored in the vehicle computer cannot be decoded or moved to another media. Therefore, it is necessary to register face information again once it is deleted or relevant parts are replaced. • Once deleted, face information cannot be restored. It is necessary to register face information again. ■ Situations where face identifi- cation may not be performed correctly This system is designed for use to 5 identify facial traits. In the following situations, face information may not be able to be registered or identified correctly: ●When a part of the driver’s face (eyebrows, eyes, nose, or mouth) is not visible ●When the driver is wearing glasses/sun glasses, a face mask, muffler, etc. ●When the driver is not facing front ●When part of driver’s face is cov- ered with hair, beard, a hand, clothes, jewelry, etc. ●When the driver is closing eyes ●When a non-registered driver is a twin, etc. with a registered driver, whose face looks quite alike with each other ■ Situations in which the driver monitor may not operate prop- erly →P.267 270 5-4. Using the driving support systems Changing Driver monitor settings The settings of Driver monitor can be changed on the custom- ize settings. (→P.606) PCS (Pre-Collision Sys- tem) The pre-collision system uses sensors to detect objects (→P.271) in the path of the vehicle. When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal colli- sion with a detectable object is high, a warning operates to urge the driver to take evasive action and the potential brake pressure is increased to help the driver avoid the collision. If the system determines that the possibility of a collision is extremely high, the brakes are automatically applied to help avoid the collision or help reduce the impact of the collision. The pre-collision system can be disabled/enabled and the warning timing can be changed. (→P.281) WARNING 5-4. Using the driving support systems ⚫ Walls 271 ■ For safe use ● Driving safely is solely the responsibility of the driver. Pay careful attention to the sur- rounding conditions in order to ensure safe driving. Never use the pre-collision system in place of normal braking operations. This system cannot help avoid or reduce the impact of a colli- sion in every situation. Over- reliance on this system to drive the vehicle safely may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury. ●Although the pre-collision sys- tem is designed to help avoid or help reduce the impact of a col- lision, its effectiveness may change according to various conditions. Therefore, it may not always be able to achieve the same level of performance. Read the following items care- fully. Do not overly rely on this system and always drive care- fully. • For safe use: →P.260 ■ When to disable the pre-colli- sion system When it is necessary to disable the system: →P.261 Detectable objects The system can detect the fol- lowing as detectable objects. (Detectable objects differ depending on the function.) ⚫ Vehicles ⚫ Bicycles* ⚫ Pedestrians ⚫ Motorcycles* *: Detected as a detectable object only when being ridden. System functions ■ Pre-collision warning When the system determines that the possibility of a collision is high, a buzzer will sound and an icon and warning message will be displayed on the multi- information display to urge the driver to take evasive action. If the detectable object is a vehi- cle, moderate braking will be performed with the warning. 5 “Pre-Collision System” If the system determines that the accelerator pedal is strongly depressed, the following icon and message will be displayed on the multi-information display. 272 5-4. Using the driving support systems evasive steering maneuvers ⚫ The driver is operating the steering wheel Vehicles with active steering function: The brakes and steer- ing are controlled to help avoid a collision or reduce the impact of a collision, regardless of the “Accelerator Pedal is Pressed” ■ Pre-collision brake assist If the system determines that the possibility of a collision is high and the brake operation by the driver is insufficient, the braking power will be increased. ■ Pre-collision brake control If the system determines that the possibility of a collision is extremely high, the brakes are automatically applied to help avoid the collision or reduce the impact of the collision. ■ Emergency steering assist If the system determines that the following conditions are met, assistance will be provided to help enhance vehicle stability and prevent lane departure. During assistance, in addition to the pre-collision warning, the fol- lowing icon will be displayed on the multi-information display. ⚫ The possibility of a collision is high ⚫ There is sufficient space within the lane to perform evasive steering maneuvers performed by the driver. During assistance, the pre-colli- sion warning will operate and a message will be displayed to warn the driver. ■ Intersection collision avoid- ance support (left/right turn) In situations such as the follow- ing, if the system determines that the possibility of a collision is high, the pre-collision warning and pre-collision braking will operate. Depending on the inter- section, assistance may not operate correctly. ⚫ When turning left/right at an intersection and crossing the path of an oncoming vehicle 5-4. Using the driving support systems 273 ⚫ When turning left/right and a pedestrian or bicycle is detected ■ Intersection collision avoid- ance support (crossing vehicles) At an intersection, etc., if the system determines that the pos- sibility of a collision with an approaching vehicle or motorcy- cle is high, the pre-collision warning and pre-collision brak- ing will operate. Depending on the intersection, assistance may not operate correctly. ■ Acceleration Suppression at Low Speed When driving at a low speed, if the accelerator pedal is strongly depressed and the system determines that there is a possi- bility of a collision, EV system output will be restrained or the brakes will be applied weakly to restrict acceleration. During 5 operation, a buzzer will sound and a warning indicator and message will be displayed on the multi-information display. “Accelerator Pedal is Pressed” WARNING ■ Pre-collision braking ●When the pre-collision braking function is operating, a large amount of braking force will be applied. 274 5-4. Using the driving support systems WARNING ●The pre-collision braking func- tion is not designed to hold the vehicle stopped. If the vehicle is stopped by pre-collision brake control, the driver should oper- ate the brakes immediately as necessary. ●The pre-collision braking func- tion may not operate if certain operations are performed by the driver. If the accelerator pedal is being depressed strongly or the steering wheel is being turned, the system may determine that the driver is taking evasive action and possibly prevent the pre-collision braking function from operating. ● If the brake pedal is being depressed, the system may determine that the driver is tak- ing evasive action and possibly delay the operation timing of the pre-collision brake control. ■ Acceleration Suppression at Low Speed If the steering wheel is being turned, the system may determine that the driver is taking evasive action and possibly prevent the Acceleration Suppression at Low Speed function from operating or possibly causing its operation to be canceled. ■ Emergency steering assist ●The emergency steering assist will be canceled when the sys- tem determines that lane depar- ture prevention control has completed. ● Depending on operations per- formed by the driver, emer- gency steering assist may not operate or operation may be canceled. • If the accelerator pedal is depressed strongly, the steering wheel is turned heavily, the brake pedal is depressed, or the turn signal lever is operated, the system may determine that the driver is taking evasive action and the emergency steering assist may not operate. • While the emergency steering assist is operating, if the accel- erator pedal is depressed strongly, the steering wheel is turned heavily, or the brake pedal is depressed, the system may determine that the driver is taking evasive action and emer- gency steering assist operation may be canceled. • While the emergency steering assist is operating, if the steer- ing wheel is held or turned in the opposite direction of system operation, emergency steering assist operation will be can- celed. 5-4. Using the driving support systems 275 ■ Operating conditions of each function of the pre-collision system The pre-collision system is enabled and the system determines that the pos- sibility of a frontal collision with a detected object is high. However, the system will not operate in the following situations: ●When the vehicle has not been driven a certain amount after a terminal of the 12-volt battery has been disconnected and reconnected ●When the shift position is in R ●When the VSC OFF indicator is illuminated (only the pre-collision warning function will be operational) The following are the operational speeds and cancelation conditions of each function: ●Pre-collision warning Detectable objects Vehicle speed Relative speed between your vehicle and object Preceding vehicles, stopped vehicles Oncoming vehicles Bicycles Pedestrians Preceding motorcycles, stopped motorcycles Oncoming motorcycles Approximately 3 to 110 mph (5 to 180 km/h) Approximately 20 to 110 mph (30 to 180 km/h) Approximately 3 to 50 mph (5 to 80 km/h) Approximately 3 to 50 mph (5 to 80 km/h) Approximately 3 to 110 mph (5 to 180 km/h) Approximately 20 to 110 mph (30 to 180 km/h) Approximately 3 to 110 mph (5 to 180 km/h) Approximately 50 to 130 mph (80 to 220 km/h) 5 Approximately 3 to 50 mph (5 to 80 km/h) Approximately 3 to 50 mph (5 to 80 km/h) Approximately 3 to 50 mph (5 to 80 km/h) Approximately 20 to 110 mph (30 to 180 km/h) While the pre-collision warning is operating, if the steering wheel is operated heavily or suddenly, the pre-collision warning may be canceled. 276 5-4. Using the driving support systems ●Pre-collision brake assist Detectable objects Vehicle speed Relative speed between your vehicle and object Preceding vehicles, stopped vehicles Bicycles Pedestrians Preceding motorcycles, stopped motorcycles ●Pre-collision braking Detectable objects Preceding vehicles, stopped vehicles Oncoming vehicles Bicycles Pedestrians Preceding motorcycles, stopped motorcycles Oncoming motorcycles Approximately 20 to 110 mph (30 to 180 km/h) Approximately 20 to 50 mph (30 to 80 km/h) Approximately 20 to 50 mph (30 to 80 km/h) Approximately 20 to 110 mph (30 to 180 km/h) Vehicle speed Approximately 3 to 110 mph (5 to 180 km/h) Approximately 20 to 110 mph (30 to 180 km/h) Approximately 3 to 50 mph (5 to 80 km/h) Approximately 3 to 50 mph (5 to 80 km/h) Approximately 3 to 110 mph (5 to 180 km/h) Approximately 20 to 110 mph (30 to 180 km/h) Approximately 7 to 110 mph (10 to 180 km/h) Approximately 20 to 50 mph (30 to 80 km/h) Approximately 20 to 50 mph (30 to 80 km/h) Approximately 7 to 50 mph (10 to 80 km/h) Relative speed between your vehicle and object Approximately 3 to 110 mph (5 to 180 km/h) Approximately 50 to 130 mph (80 to 220 km/h) Approximately 3 to 50 mph (5 to 80 km/h) Approximately 3 to 50 mph (5 to 80 km/h) Approximately 3 to 50 mph (5 to 80 km/h) Approximately 20 to 110 mph (30 to 180 km/h) If either of the following occur while the pre-collision braking function is oper- ating, it will be canceled: • The accelerator pedal is strongly depressed • The steering wheel is operated heavily or suddenly 5-4. Using the driving support systems ●Emergency steering assist 277 The emergency steering assist will not operate when the turn signal lights are flashing. Detectable objects Vehicle speed Relative speed between your vehicle and object Preceding vehicles, stopped vehicles, bicy- cles, pedestrians, motorcycles Preceding vehicles, stopped vehicles, bicy- cles, pedestrians, motorcycles Approximately 25 to 50 mph (40 to 80 km/h) Active steering func- tion: *to 50 mph (*to 80 km/h) Approximately 25 to 50 mph (40 to 80 km/h) Active steering func- tion: *to 50 mph (*to 80 km/h) *: Minimum vehicle speed: Vehicle speed at which evasion using pre-colli- sion brake control is difficult While the emergency steering assist is operating, if any of the following are performed, emergency steering assist operation may be canceled: • The accelerator pedal is strongly depressed • The steering wheel is operated heavily or suddenly 5 • The brake pedal is depressed ●Intersection collision avoidance support (left/right turn) The intersection collision avoidance support (for left/right turning vehicles) will not operate when the turn signal lights are not flashing. Detectable objects Oncoming vehi- cles Pedestrians Bicycles Oncoming motor- cycles Vehicle speed Approximately 3 to 25 mph (5 to 40 km/h) Approximately 3 to 20 mph (5 to 30 km/h) Approximately 3 to 20 mph (5 to 30 km/h) Approximately 3 to 25 mph (5 to 40 km/h) Oncoming vehicle speed Approximately 3 to 45 mph (5 to 75 km/h) – – Approximately 3 to 45 mph (5 to 75 km/h) Relative speed between your vehicle and object Approximately 7 to 70 mph (10 to 115 km/h) Approximately 3 to 25 mph (5 to 40 km/h) Approximately 3 to 30 mph (5 to 50 km/h) Approximately 7 to 70 mph (10 to 115 km/h) 278 5-4. Using the driving support systems ●Intersection collision avoidance support (crossing vehicles) ▶ Vehicles without front side radars Detectable objects Vehicles, Motor- cycles (side) Vehicle speed Approximately 3 to 38 mph (5 to 60 km/h) Crossing vehicle speed •Your vehicle speed or less •Approximately 25 mph or less (40 km/h or less) Relative speed between your vehicle and object Approximately 3 to 38 mph (5 to 60 km/h) ▶ Vehicles with front side radars Detectable Vehicle speed objects Crossing vehicle speed Relative speed between your vehicle and object Vehicles, Motor- cycles (side) Approximately 3 to 38 mph (5 to 60 km/h) Approximately 31 mph or less (50 km/h or less) Approximately 3 to 38 mph (5 to 60 km/h) When driving at approximately 29 mph (40 km/h) or more, this system will only operate when the speed of the other vehicle is approximately 29 mph (40 km/h) or less. The system operates only when the crossing vehicle speed is same as or less than the vehicle speed. ●Acceleration Suppression at Low Speed The Acceleration Suppression at Low Speed function will not operate when the turn signal lights are flashing. Detectable objects Vehicle speed Relative speed between your vehicle and object Preceding vehicles, stopped vehicles, Pedestrians, Bicycles, Wall Approximately 0 to 9 mph (0 to 15 km/h) Approximately 0 to 9 mph (0 to 15 km/h) While the Acceleration Suppression at Low Speed function is operating, if any of the following are performed, the low speed sudden acceleration sup- pression function operation will be canceled: • The accelerator pedal is released • The steering wheel is operated heavily or suddenly 5-4. Using the driving support systems 279 ■ Detection of detectable objects Objects are detected based on their size, shape, and move- ment.Depending on the ambient brightness, movement, posture and direction of a detectable object, it may not be detected and the system may not operate properly. The sys- tem detects shapes, such as the fol- lowing, as detectable objects. ■ Situations in which the system may operate even though the possibility of a collision is not high ●In certain situations, such as the following, the system may deter- mine that the possibility of a colli- sion is high and operate: • When passing a detectable object • When changing lanes while over- taking a detectable object • When suddenly approaching a detectable object • When approaching a detectable object or other object on the road- side, such as guardrails, utility poles, trees, walls, etc. • When there is a detectable object or other object by the roadside at the entrance of a curve • When there are patterns or a painting ahead of the vehicle that may be mistaken for a detectable object • When passing a detectable object that is changing lanes or turning left/right • When passing a detectable object which is stopped to make a left/right turn 5 • When a detectable object stops immediately before entering the path of the vehicle • When passing through a location with a structure above the road (traffic sign, billboard, etc.) • When approaching an electric toll gate barrier, parking lot barrier, or other barrier that opens and closes • When turning left/right and an oncoming vehicle, oncoming motorcycle, pedestrian or bicycle crosses in front of the vehicle • When attempting to turn left/right in front of an oncoming vehicle, oncoming motorcycle, pedestrian or bicycle 280 5-4. Using the driving support systems • When turning left/right and an oncoming vehicle, oncoming motorcycle, pedestrian or bicycle stops or changes course immedi- ately before entering the path of the vehicle • When turning left/right and an oncoming vehicle turns left/right in front of the vehicle • When the steering wheel is oper- ated toward the path of an oncom- ing vehicle • When there is an object moving above or under the road ■ Situations in which the system may not operate properly ●In certain situations, such as the following, a detectable object may not be detected by the front sen- sors, and the system may not operate properly: • When a detectable object is approaching your vehicle • When your vehicle or a detectable object is wandering • When a detectable object makes an abrupt maneuver (such as sud- den swerving, acceleration or deceleration) • When suddenly approaching a detectable object • When the detectable object is near a wall, fence, guardrail, man- hole cover, steel plate on the road surface, or another vehicle • When there is a structure above a detectable object • When part of a detectable object is hidden by another object (large luggage, umbrella, guardrail, etc.) • When multiple detectable objects are overlapping • When a bright light, such as the sun, is reflecting off of a detect- able object • When a detectable object is white and looks extremely bright • When the color or brightness of a detectable object causes it to blend in with its surroundings • When a detectable object cuts in front of or suddenly emerges in front of your vehicle • When approaching a vehicle which is diagonal • If a bicycle is a child sized bicycle, is carrying a large load, is carrying an extra passenger, is carrying a forward leaning rider, or has an unusual shape (bicycles equipped with a child seat, tandem bicycles, etc.) • If a pedestrian or bicycle is shorter than approximately 3.2 ft. (1 m) or taller than approximately 6.5 ft. (2 m). • When the silhouette of a pedes- trian or bicycle is unclear (such as when they are wearing a raincoat, long skirt, etc.) • When a pedestrian is bending for- ward or squatting • When a pedestrian or bicycle is moving at high speed • When a pedestrian is pushing a stroller, wheelchair, bicycle or other vehicle • When a detectable object blends in with the surrounding area, such as when it is dim (at dawn or dusk) or dark (at night or in a tunnel) • When the vehicle has not been driven for a certain amount of time after the EV system was started • While turning left/right or a few seconds after turning left/right • While driving around a curve and a few seconds after driving around 5-4. Using the driving support systems 281 a curve • When turning left/right and an oncoming vehicle is driving in a lane 3 or more lanes from the vehicle • When turning left/right and the direction of the vehicle differs greatly from the direction traffic flows in the oncoming lane • When turning left/right, a pedes- trian or bicycle behind the vehicle comes in front of it as if it over- takes the vehicle • When at an intersection, the approaching crossing vehicle is long in overall length, such as a large truck, towing trailer, etc. ●In addition to the preceding, in certain situations, such as the fol- lowing, the emergency steering assist may not operate properly: • When a detectable object is too close to the vehicle • When there is insufficient space to perform evasive steering maneu- vers or an obstruction exists in the evasion direction • When there is an oncoming vehi- cle ●In addition to the preceding, in certain situations, such as the fol- lowing, walls may not be detected as a target object and the Acceler- ation Suppression at Low Speed function may not operate properly: • When scenery behind the wall is visible, such as a glass door, grid fence, etc. • When the wall is slanted or low • When the wall is narrow, such as a pole, etc. • When the wall is made of plants, such as a hedge, etc. • When the road, etc. is reflected on the wall • When the vehicle is approaching the wall at an angle Changing the pre-colli- sion setting ⚫ The pre-collision system can be enabled/disabled through a customize setting. (→P.605) The system is enabled each time the power switch is turned to ON. 5 ⚫ When the system is disabled, the PCS warning light will illu- minate and a message will be displayed on the multi-infor- mation display. ⚫ The pre-collision setting can be changed on the customize settings. (→P.605) ⚫ Vehicles with active steering function: When the pre-colli- sion warning timing is changed, the emergency steering assist (excluding the active steering function) tim- ing will also be changed. When “Later” is selected, the emer- gency steering assist (excluding the active steering function) will not operate in most cases. 282 5-4. Using the driving support systems ⚫ Vehicles with a driver monitor camera: When the system determines that the driver is not facing forward, the pre- collision warning and emer- gency steering assist will operate at the “Earlier” timing, regardless of the user setting. ⚫ When the dynamic radar cruise control is operating, the pre-collision warning will operate at the “Earlier” timing, regardless of the user setting. ⚫ Vehicles with Traffic Jam Assist: When the Traffic Jam Assist is operating, the pre- collision warning will operate at the “Earlier” timing, regard- less of the user setting. LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) LTA functions ⚫ When driving on a road with clear lane lines with the dynamic radar cruise control operating, lane lines and pre- ceding and surrounding vehi- cles are detected using the front camera and radar sen- sor, and the steering wheel is operated to maintain the vehi- cle’s lane position. Use the this function only on high- ways and expressways. If the dynamic radar cruise control is not operating, the function will not operate. In situations where the lane lines are difficult to see or are not visible, such as when in a traffic jam, sup- port will be provided using the path of preceding and surrounding vehi- cles. If the system determines that the steering wheel has not been oper- ated for a certain amount of time or the steering wheel is not being firmly gripped, the driver will be alerted and this function will be temporarily canceled. If the steering wheel is firmly gripped, the function will begin operating again. 5-4. Using the driving support systems 283 ⚫ When the function is operat- ing, if the vehicle is likely to depart from its lane, the driver will be alerted via a display and buzzer. When the buzzer sounds, check the area around the vehicle and carefully operate the steering wheel to move the vehicle back to the center of the lane. WARNING ■ Before using the LTA system 5 ● Do not overly rely on the LTA system. The LTA system is not a system which provides auto- mated assistance in driving and it is not a system which reduces the amount of attention neces- sary for safe driving. The driver is solely responsible for paying attention to their surroundings and operating the steering wheel as necessary to ensure safety. Also, the driver is responsible for taking adequate breaks when fatigued, such as when driving for a long time. ●Failure to perform appropriate driving operations and pay care- ful attention may lead to an accident. ●When not using the LTA system, turn it off using the LTA switch. 284 5-4. Using the driving support systems ■ Lane departure warning func- ■ Operating conditions of func- tion This function is operable when all of the following conditions are met: ●The LTA system detects lane lines or the path of preceding or sur- rounding vehicles. ●The dynamic radar cruise control is operating. ●The lane width is approximately 10 to 13 ft. (3 to 4 m). ● The turn signal lever is not being operated. ●The vehicle is not being driven around a sharp curve. ●The vehicle is not accelerating or decelerating more than a certain amount. ●The steering wheel is not being turned with a large force. ●The hands off steering wheel warning (→P.284) is not operat- ing. ●The vehicle is being driven in the center of a lane. ■ Temporary cancelation of func- tions ●When the operating conditions are no longer met, a function may be temporarily canceled. However, when the operation conditions are met again, operation of the func- tion will automatically be restored. (→P.284) ●If the operating conditions of a function are no longer met while the function is operating, a buzzer may sound to indicate that the function has been temporarily canceled. ●The steering assist operation of the function can be overridden by the steering wheel operation of the driver. tion when the LTA is operating ●Even if the LDA warning method is changed to vibration of the steer- ing wheel, if the vehicle deviates from the lane while the LTA is operating, the warning buzzer will sound to alert the driver. ● If steering wheel operation equiv- alent to that necessary for a lane change is detected, the system will determine the vehicle is not deviating from the lane and the warning will not operate. ■ Hands off steering wheel warn- ing operation ●When the system determines the driver is not holding the steering wheel, a message urging the driver to grip the steering wheel and the icon shown in the illustra- tion will be displayed on the multi- information display to warn the driver. If the system detects that the steering wheel is held, the warning will be canceled. When using the system, make sure to grip the steering wheel firmly, regardless of whether the warn- ing is operating or not. ● If no operations are detected for a certain amount of time, the warn- ing will operate, and the function will be temporarily canceled. This warning may also operate if the driver only operates steering wheel a small amount continu- ously. ■ Situations in which the hands off steering wheel warning may not operate properly ● Depending on the condition of the 5-4. Using the driving support systems 285 vehicle, handle control condition and road surface, the warning function may not operate. ●In the following situations, the sys- tem may not be able to detect when the driver’s hands are off the steering wheel. • When a steering wheel cover is installed • When the driver is wearing gloves • When foreign matter is attached to the steering wheel • When the driver is gripping the wood trim, seam of the leather, spokes, or other part of the steer- ing wheel that does not have sen- sors ●In the following situations, the hands off steering wheel warning may not operate and the LTA func- tion may continue operating even though the driver’s hands are off the steering wheel: • When something other than a hand is contacting the steering wheel • When a wide object or arms are held across the steering wheel Enabling/disabling the system The LTA will change between ON/OFF each time the LTA switch is pressed. When the LTA is ON, the LTA indi- cator will illuminate. WARNING ■ Situations in which the func- tions may not operate prop- erly In the following situations, the functions may not operate prop- erly and the vehicle may depart from its lane. Do not overly rely on these functions. The driver is solely responsible for paying attention to their surroundings and operating the steering wheel as necessary to ensure safety. ●When a preceding or surround- ing vehicle changes lanes (Your vehicle may follow the preced- ing or surrounding vehicle and also change lanes) 5 ●When a preceding or surround- ing vehicle is swaying (Your vehicle may sway accordingly and depart from the lane) ●When a preceding or surround- ing vehicle departs from a lane (Your vehicle may follow the preceding or surrounding vehi- cle and also depart from the lane) 286 5-4. Using the driving support systems WARNING ●When a preceding or surround- ing vehicle is being driven extremely close to the left/right lane line (Your vehicle may fol- low the preceding or surround- ing vehicle accordingly and depart from the lane) ●When there are moving objects or structures in the surrounding area (Depending on the position of the moving object or structure relative to your vehicle, your vehicle may sway) ●When the vehicle is struck by a crosswind or the turbulence of other nearby vehicles ●Situations in which the sensors may not operate properly: →P.265 ●Situations in which the lane may not be detected: →P.267 ●When it is necessary to disable the system: →P.261 5-4. Using the driving support systems Operation display of steering wheel operation support The operating state of the LTA system is indicated. 287 Indicator Lane dis- play Steering icon Situation White Grey/White Grey LTA is on standby Green Green Green LTA is operating Yellow Flashing Yellow Flashing Green The vehicle is departing the lane toward the side which the lane dis- play is flashing 5 288 5-4. Using the driving support systems LCA (Lane Change Assist) LCA functions This function is linked to the LTA and provides assistance in per- forming lane changes through steering wheel operations. Use the this function only on high- ways and expressways. The steering assist operation can be overridden by the steering wheel operation of the driver. The lane change assist function is not designed to operate when changing lanes at a junction. WARNING ■ Before using the LCA system ● Do not overly rely on the LCA system. The LCA system is not a system which provides automated assistance in driving. and it is not a system which reduces the need for checking an adjacent lane for other vehicles, approaching vehicles, etc. when changing lanes. The driver is solely responsible for paying attention to their surroundings and operating the steering wheel as necessary to ensure safety. Also, do not use the LCA to change lanes into which a lane change should not be per- formed (oncoming lanes, road shoulders, etc.). ●Failure to perform appropriate driving operations and pay care- ful attention may lead to an accident. ■ Operating conditions of func- tion This function is operable when all of the following conditions are met: ●The LTA is operating. ●The lane change assist function is enabled by a customize setting. ●The vehicle speed is between approximately 55 and 85 mph (90 and 140 km/h). ● The system detects a broken white line on the side which the lane change is to be performed. ●A vehicle is not detected in the lane toward which the turn signal is operated. ●The steering wheel is not being turned with a large force. 5-4. Using the driving support systems ●The hands off steering wheel warning (→P.284) is not operat- ing. ■ Cancelation of functions In the following situations, opera- tion of the LCA may be canceled with the display and buzzer: ●When the operating conditions 289 (→P.288) are no longer met ●When the system can no longer detect lane lines ●When the turn signal lever is oper- ated to the second position (→P.290) ●When the turn signal lever is oper- ated in the opposite direction of the lane change ●When the system detects opera- tion of the steering wheel, brake pedal or accelerator pedal by the driver If the system detects that a vehicle is quickly approaching in the lane toward which the turn signal is oper- ated, a buzzer will sound and a message will be displayed to alert the driver. At the same time the steering wheel may be slightly oper- ated to help keep the vehicle away from the approaching vehicle. ■ Hands off steering wheel warn- ing operation When the system determines the driver is not holding the steering wheel, a message urging the driver to grip the steering wheel and the icon shown in the illustration will be displayed on the multi-information display to warn the driver. If the sys- tem detects that the steering wheel is held, the warning will be can- celed. When using the system, make sure to grip the steering wheel firmly, regardless of whether the warning is operating or not. ■ Situations in which the hands off steering wheel warning may not operate properly ● Depending on the condition of the vehicle, handle control condition and road surface, the warning function may not operate. ● In the following situations, the sys- tem may not be able to detect when the driver’s hands are off the steering wheel. • When a steering wheel cover is installed • When the driver is wearing gloves • When foreign matter is attached to 5 the steering wheel • When the driver is gripping the wood trim, seam of the leather, spokes, or other part of the steer- ing wheel that does not have sen- sors ● In the following situations, the hands off steering wheel warning may not operate and the LCA function may continue operating even though the driver’s hands are off the steering wheel: • When something other than a hand is contacting the steering wheel • When a wide object or arms are held across the steering wheel 290 5-4. Using the driving support systems Operating the LCA If the turn signal lever is held in the first position, the lane change direction will be dis- played and the function will operate. To change lanes by holding the turn signal lever in the first posi- tion without using the LCA, turn the customize setting of the LCA off. 1 First position: LCA is opera- tional 2 Second position: LCA is not operational WARNING ■ Situations in which the LCA should not be used ●When driving on a one lane road ●When there is no broken white line between the current lane and the lane to be changed to Enabling/disabling the system LCA can be enabled/disabled through a customize setting. (→P.606) 5-4. Using the driving support systems Displays and system operation The operating state of the LCA system is indicated. 291 LCA display Steering icon Condition Blue arrow and white line Green LCA is operating Not displayed Gray Gray Approaching vehicle detected while LCA is operating Lane line no longer detected while LCA is operating 5 292 5-4. Using the driving support systems LDA (Lane Departure Alert) Basic functions The LDA system warns the driver if the vehicle may deviate from the current lane or course*, and also can slightly operate the steering wheel to help avoid deviation from the lane or course*. The front camera is used to detect lane lines or a course*. *: Boundary between the asphalt and grass, soil, etc., or structures, such as a curb, guardrail, etc. ■ Lane departure alert func- tion When the system determines that the vehicle might depart from its lane or course*, a warn- ing is displayed on a display, and either a warning buzzer will sound or the steering wheel will vibrate to alert the driver. Check the area around your vehicle and carefully operate the steering wheel to move the vehicle back to the center of the lane or course*. If the system determines that the vehicle may collide with a vehicle in an adjacent lane, the lane depar- ture alert will operate even if the turn signals are operating. *: Boundary between the asphalt and grass, soil, etc., or structures, such as a curb, guardrail, etc. ■ Lane departure prevention function If the system determines that the vehicle is likely to depart from its lane or course*, it pro- vides assistance through steer- ing wheel operations to help avoid deviation from the lane or course. If the system determines that the steering wheel has not been oper- ated for a certain amount of time or the steering wheel is not being firmly gripped, a warning message may be displayed and a warning buzzer may sound to alert the driver. If the system determines that the vehicle may collide with a vehicle in an adjacent lane, the lane depar- ture prevention function will operate even if the turn signals are operat- ing. *: Boundary between the asphalt 5-4. Using the driving support systems 293 and grass, soil, etc., or structures, such as a curb, guardrail, etc. WARNING ■ Before using the LDA system ● Do not overly rely on the LDA system. The LDA system is not a system which provides auto- mated assistance in driving. However, as it is not a system which reduces the amount of attention necessary for safe driving. The driver is solely responsible for paying attention to their surroundings and oper- ating the steering wheel as nec- essary to ensure safety. Also, the driver is responsible for tak- ing adequate breaks when fatigued, such as when driving for a long time. ●Failure to perform appropriate driving operations and pay care- ful attention may lead to an accident. 5 ■ Break suggestion function If the vehicle is swaying, a mes- sage will be displayed and a buzzer will sound to urge the driver to take a break. ■ Operating conditions of each function ●Lane departure alert/prevention function This function is operable when all of the following conditions are met: • The vehicle speed is approxi- mately 30 mph (50 km/h) or more. Operation may be possible when the vehicle speed is approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more if vehi- cles, motorcycles, bicycles, or pedestrians are detected near the lane. • The system recognizes a lane or course*. (When recognized on only one side, the system will operate only for the recognized side.) • The lane width is approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more. • The turn signal lever is not being operated. (Except when a vehicle is detected in the direction that the turn signal lever is operated.) 294 5-4. Using the driving support systems • The vehicle is not being driven around a sharp curve. • The vehicle is not accelerating or decelerating more than a certain amount. • The steering wheel is not being turned sufficiently to perform a lane change. • When the VSC or TRAC system is not turned off *: Boundary between the asphalt and grass, soil, etc., or structures, such as a curb, guardrail, etc. ■ Temporary cancelation of func- tions When the operating conditions are no longer met, a function may be temporarily canceled. However, when the operation conditions are met again, operation of the function will automatically be restored. (→P.293) ■ Operation of the lane departure alert function/lane departure prevention function ●Depending on the vehicle speed, road conditions, lane departure angle, etc., operation of the lane departure prevention function may not be felt or the function may not operate. ●Depending on the conditions, the warning buzzer may operate even if vibration is selected through a customize setting. ●If a course* is not clear or straight, the lane departure alert function or lane departure prevention function may not operate. ●The lane departure alert function or lane departure prevention func- tion may not operate if the system judges that the vehicle is inten- tionally being steered to avoid a pedestrian or parked vehicle. ●It may not be possible for the sys- tem to judge if there is danger of a collision with a vehicle in an adja- cent lane. ● Depending on the driver condition, the lane departure alert function or lane departure prevention function changes the timing of operation. ●The steering assist operation of the lane departure prevention function can be overridden by the steering wheel operation of the driver. *: Boundary between the asphalt and grass, soil, etc., or structures, such as a curb, guardrail, etc. ■ Hands off steering wheel warn- ing operation In the following situations, a mes- sage urging the driver to operate the steering wheel and an icon will be displayed and a buzzer will sound to warn the driver. When using the sys- tem, make sure to grip the steering wheel firmly, regardless of whether the warning is operating or not. ●When the system determines that the driver is not securely holding the steering wheel, or the steering wheel is not being operated when the steering assist operation of the lane departure prevention function is operating The length of time that the warning buzzer operates will become longer as the frequency of the steering assist operating increases. If the system judges that the steering wheel has been operated, the warn- ing buzzer will stop. The length of time that the warning buzzer operates will become longer as the frequency of the steering assist operating increases. Even if the system judges that the steering 5-4. Using the driving support systems 295 wheel has been operated, the warn- ing buzzer will sound for a certain amount of time. ■ Break suggestion function This function is operable when all of the following conditions are met: ●The vehicle speed is approxi- mately 32 mph (50 km/h) or more. ●The lane width is approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more. Depending on the condition of the vehicle and road surface, the break suggestion function may not oper- ate. Changing LDA settings ⚫ The LDA system can be enabled/disabled through a customize setting. (→P.605) ⚫ The settings of the LDA can be changed on the customize settings. (→P.605) WARNING ■ Situations in which the sys- tem may not operate properly In the following situations, the system may not operate properly and the vehicle may depart from its lane. Do not overly rely on these functions. The driver is solely responsible for paying attention to their surroundings and operating the steering wheel as necessary to ensure safety. ●When the boundary between the asphalt and grass, soil, etc., or structures, such as a curb, guardrail, etc. is not clear or straight ●When the vehicle is struck by a crosswind or the turbulence of other nearby vehicles ●Situations in which the lane may not be detected: →P.267 ● Situations in which the sensors may not operate properly: →P.265 ●Situations in which some or all of the functions of the system cannot operate: →P.267 ●When it is necessary to disable the system: →P.261 5 296 5-4. Using the driving support systems Displays and system operation The operating state of the lane departure alert function and steering assist operation of the lane departure prevention function are indi- cated. Indicator Not illumi- nated Lane dis- play Not illumi- nated Steering icon Not illumi- nated Condition System disabled White Gray Not illumi- nated Lane lines are not detected by the system White Yellow Flashing Green Yellow Flashing White Yellow Flashing Green Yellow Flashing Not illumi- nated Not illumi- nated Green Green Lane lines are detected by the sys- tem Lane departure alert function is operating for the side which the lane display is flashing Lane departure prevention function is operating for the side which the lane display is illuminated Lane departure alert function/lane departure prevention function is operating for the side which the lane display is flashing 5-4. Using the driving support systems 297 PDA (Proactive driv- ing assist) When a detectable object (→P.298) is detected, the proactive driving assist operates the brakes and steering wheel to help pre- vent the vehicle from approaching too close to the object. WARNING ■ For safe use Driving safely is solely the respon- sibility of the driver. ● The proactive driving assist is designed to provide some assistance for regular braking and steering operations, as well as helping to prevent the vehicle from approaching too close to a detectable object. However, the scope of this assistance is lim- ited. The driver should perform brake and steering operations as neces- sary. Read the following items carefully. Do not overly rely on the proactive driving assist and always drive carefully. (→P.299) ●The proactive driving assist is not a system which reduces the amount of attention necessary for safe driving. Even if the sys- tem is operating correctly, the surrounding conditions as rec- ognized by the driver and detected by the system may dif- fer. It is necessary for the driver to pay attention, assess risks, and ensure safety. Over-reli- ance on this system to drive the vehicle safely may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury. ●Proactive driving assist is not a system which allows for inatten- tive driving and is not a system which assists in poor visibility conditions. The driver is solely responsible for paying attention to their surroundings and driving safely. ■ When turning proactive driv- 5 ing assist off ● Situations in which the sensors may not operate properly: →P.265 ●When it is necessary to disable the system: →P.261 298 5-4. Using the driving support systems System operating conditions and detectable objects According to the driving conditions, the operation and detectable objects of the proactive driving assist will change as follows. Conditions Operation Detectable objects A detectable object is detected crossing the road A detectable object is detected on the side of the road A preceding vehi- cle or an adjacent vehicle cutting in front of the vehi- cle is detected A curve is detected ahead of the vehicle Assistance with some brake opera- tions is provided in order to reduce the possibility of a collision. Assistance with some brake and steering wheel operations are pro- vided according to the surrounding conditions to help prevent the vehicle from approaching too close to a detected object. Assistance with steering wheel oper- ations is provided within a range that the vehicle will not deviate from its current lane. The vehicle is gently decelerated so that the vehicle-to-vehicle distance will not be excessively short. The vehicle is gently decelerated if the vehicle speed is determined to be too high for the curve ahead. • Pedestrians • Bicyclists • Pedestrians • Bicyclists • Parked vehicles • Preceding vehi- cles • Motorcycles None ■ Vehicle speeds at which the system can operate ●Detectable object crossing the road assistance Approximately 20 to 35 mph (30 to 60 km/h) ●Detectable object on the side of the road assistance Approximately 20 to 35 mph (30 to 60 km/h) ●Preceding vehicle deceleration assistance Approximately 15 mph (20 km/h) or more ● Curve deceleration assistance Approximately 15 mph (20 km/h) or more ●Steering assist within a lane Approximately 5 to 80 mph (10 to 140 km/h) ■ System operation will be can- celed when ● In the following situations, system operation will be canceled: • When the dynamic radar cruise 5-4. Using the driving support systems 299 control or cruise control is operat- ing • When the PCS is off • Situations in which some or all of the functions of the system cannot operate: →P.267 • When the P, R or N shift position is selected ●In the following situations, the brake operation assist will be can- celed: • Approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or less • When a certain vehicle speed has been reached, as judged by the system, according to the sur- rounding conditions ●In the following situations, system operation may be canceled: • When the brake control or output restriction control of a driving sup- port system operates (For exam- ple: PCS, drive-start control) • When the system determines that a detected object has moved away from the vehicle • When lane lines can no longer be detected • When the brake pedal has been depressed • When the accelerator pedal has been depressed • When the steering wheel has been operated with more than a certain amount of force • When the turn signal lever is oper- ated to the left/right turn position WARNING ■ Situations in which the sys- tem may not operate properly ●Situations in which the lane may not be detected: →P.267 ●When a detectable object stops immediately before entering the path of the vehicle ●When passing extremely close to a detectable object behind a guardrail, fence, etc. ●When changing lanes while overtaking a detectable object ●When passing a detectable object that is changing lanes or turning left/right ●When there are objects (guard- rails, power poles, trees, walls, fences, poles, traffic cones, mailboxes, etc.) in the surround- ing area ●When there are patterns or a painting ahead of the vehicle that may be mistaken for a detectable object ●When passing through a place with a low structure above the road (tunnel with a low ceiling, traffic sign, signboard, etc.) ●When driving on snowy, icy, or rutted roads 5 ●When a detectable object is approaching your vehicle ●When your vehicle or a detect- able object is wandering ●When the movement of a detectable object changes (change in direction, sudden acceleration or deceleration, etc.) ●When suddenly approaching a detectable object ●When a preceding vehicle or motorcycle is not directly in front of your vehicle ●When there is a structure above a detectable object ●When part of a detectable object is hidden by another object (large luggage, umbrella, guardrail, etc.) ●When multiple detectable objects are overlapping 300 5-4. Using the driving support systems WARNING ●When a bright light, such as the sun or headlights of another vehicle, is reflecting off of the detectable object ●When the detectable object is white and looks extremely bright ●When the color or brightness of the detectable object causes it to blend in with its surroundings ●When a detectable object cuts in front of or emerges from beside a vehicle ●When approaching a vehicle ahead which is perpendicular or at an angle to the vehicle, or is facing the vehicle ● If a parked vehicle is perpendic- ular or at an angle to the vehicle ●When a bicycle is a child sized bicycle, is carrying a large load, is carrying an extra passenger, or has an unusual shape (bicy- cles equipped with a child seat, tandem bicycles, etc.) ●When a pedestrian or bicyclist is shorter than approximately 3.2 ft. (1 m) or taller than approxi- mately 6.5 ft. (2 m) ●When the silhouette of a pedes- trian or bicyclist is unclear (such as when they are wearing a raincoat, long skirt, etc.) ●When a pedestrian or bicyclist is bending forward or squatting ●When a pedestrian or bicyclist is moving at high speed ●When a pedestrian is pushing a stroller, wheelchair, bicycle or other vehicle ●When a detectable object blends in with the surrounding area, such as when it is dim (at dawn or dusk) or dark (at night, in a tunnel, etc.) ●When the lane width is 13.1 ft. (4 m) or more ●When the lane width is 8.2 ft. (2.5 m) or less ●When the vehicle has not been driven for a certain amount of time after the EV system was started ●While turning left or right or a few seconds after turning left or right ●While changing lanes or a few seconds after changing lanes ●When entering a curve, driving around a curve and a few sec- onds after driving around a curve Changing proactive driv- ing assist settings ⚫ The proactive driving assist can be enabled/disabled through a customize setting. (→P.605) ⚫ The settings of the proactive driving assist can be changed on the customize settings. (→P.605) 5-4. Using the driving support systems System operation display 301 Depending on the situation, the following indicators or icons will be displayed. Some icons cannot be displayed unless the display is changed to the driving safety support function information screen. Icon Meaning • White: Monitoring for detectable objects • Green: Detectable object crossing the road or detectable object on the side of the road assistance operating A pedestrian has been detected as crossing the road or on the side of the road and brake or steering assis- tance is operating 5 A vehicle has been detected on the side of the road and brake or steer- ing operation assistance is being performed Steering operation assistance is being performed to prevent the vehi- cle from approaching too close to a detectable object on the side of the road Preceding vehicle deceleration assistance is being performed Warning to maintain appropriate vehicle-to-vehicle distance Curve deceleration assistance is being performed 302 5-4. Using the driving support systems ■ Hands off steering wheel warn- ing operation In the following situations, a mes- sage urging the driver to grip the steering wheel and the icon shown in the illustration will be displayed on the display to warn the driver. If the system detects that the steering wheel is held, the warning will be canceled. When using the system, make sure to grip the steering wheel firmly, regardless of whether the warning is operating or not. ●When assistance to a detectable object crossing the road or assis- tance to a detectable object on the side of the road is performed and the system determines the driver is not holding the steering wheel If no operations are detected for a certain amount of time, a buzzer will sound, the warning will operate. This warning may also operate if the driver only operates steering wheel a small amount continuously. ■ Warning operation after preced- ing vehicle deceleration assis- tance has ended After preceding vehicle decelera- tion assistance has ended, if the driver does not operate the brake pedal or accelerator pedal and the vehicle approaches the preceding vehicle, the display will flash and a buzzer will sound to urge the driver to decelerate. If the system deter- mines that the driver is operating the brake pedal or accelerator pedal, the warning will be canceled. RSA (Road Sign Assist) 5-4. Using the driving support systems Display Function ⚫ When the front camera 303 The RSA system detects specific road signs using the front camera and/or navigation system (if equipped) (when speed limit information is available) and warns the driver via dis- plays and buzzers. WARNING ■ For safe use ● Driving safely is solely the responsibility of the driver. Pay careful attention to the sur- rounding conditions in order to ensure safe driving. ● Do not rely solely upon the RSA. The RSA assists the driver by providing road sign information, but it is not a replacement for the driver’s own vision and awareness. Driving safely is solely the responsibility of the driver. Pay careful atten- tion to the surrounding condi- tions in order to ensure safe driving. ■ Situations in which the RSA should not be used When it is necessary to disable the system: →P.261 ■ Situations in which the sys- tem may not operate properly Situations in which the sensors may not operate properly: →P.265 detects a sign or information of a sign is available from the navigation system (if equipped), the sign will be displayed on the display. ⚫ Multiple signs can be dis- played. Depending on the specifications of the vehicle, the number of dis- played signs may be limited. ■ Operating conditions of sign display Signs will be displayed when the fol- lowing conditions are met: ●The system has detected a sign 5 In the following situations, a dis- played sign may stop being dis- played: ●When a new sign has not been detected for a certain distance ●When the system determines that the road being driven on has changed, such as after a left or right turn ■ Situations in which the display function may not operate prop- erly In the following situations, the RSA system may not operate properly and may not detect signs or may display the incorrect sign. However, this does not indicate a malfunction. ●When a sign is dirty, faded, tilted or bent ●When the contrast of an electronic sign is low ●When all or part of a sign is hidden by a tree, utility pole, etc. 304 5-4. Using the driving support systems ●When a sign is detected by the front camera for a short amount of time ●When the driving state (turning, changing lanes, etc.) is judged incorrectly ●When a sign is immediately after a freeway junction or in an adjacent lane just before merging ●When stickers are attached to the rear of a preceding vehicle ●When a sign similar to a system compatible sign is detected as a system compatible sign ●When a speed limit sign for a frontage road is within detection range of the front camera ●When driving around a round- about ●When a sign intended for trucks, etc. is detected ●When a sign is with supplemental sign (End point, day of week, time etc.) ●When a sign is within road works area ●Vehicles with navigation system: When the navigation system map data is out of date ●Vehicles with navigation system: When the navigation system can- not be used In this case, the speed limit signs displayed on the multi-information display and navigation system dis- play may differ. Notification function In the following situations, the RSA system will output a warn- ing to notify the driver. ⚫ If the vehicle speed exceeds the speed warning threshold of the speed limit sign dis- played on the display, the sign display will be emphasized and a buzzer will sound. ⚫ When the RSA system detects a do not enter sign and determines that the vehi- cle has entered a no-entry area, the do not enter sign displayed on the display will flash and a buzzer will sound. ■ Operating conditions of the notification functions ●Excess speed notification function This function will operate when the following condition is met: • A speed limit road sign is recog- nized by the system. ● No entry notification function This function will operate when all of the following conditions are met: • More than one no entry road signs are recognized by the system simultaneously. • The vehicle is passing between no entry road signs recognized by the system. Types of road signs sup- ported ⚫ The following types of road signs can be displayed. However, non-standard or recently introduced traffic signs may not be displayed. 5-4. Using the driving support systems 305 Speed limit Do Not Enter No U-turn No Turn On Red Stop Yield Warning Changing RSA settings The following settings of the RSA can be changed through customize settings. (→P.606) Dynamic radar cruise control This dynamic radar cruise control detects the pres- ence of vehicles ahead, determines the current vehi- cle-to-vehicle distance, and operates to maintain a suit- able distance from the vehi- cle ahead. The desired vehicle-to-vehicle distance can be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch. Use the dynamic radar cruise control only on high- ways and expressways. 5 WARNING ■ For safe use ●Driving safely is solely the responsibility of the driver. Do not overly rely on this system, and pay careful attention to the surrounding conditions in order to ensure safe driving. ●The dynamic radar cruise con- trol provides driving assistance to reduce the driver’s burden. However, there are limitations to the assistance provided. Read the following items carefully. Do not overly rely on this system and always drive carefully. Conditions under which the sys- tem may not operate correctly: →P.311 306 5-4. Using the driving support systems WARNING ●Set the speed appropriately according to the speed limit, traffic flow, road conditions, weather conditions, etc. The driver is responsible for confirm- ing the set speed. ●Even if the system is operating correctly, the condition of a pre- ceding vehicle as recognized by the driver and detected by the system may differ. Therefore, it is necessary for the driver to pay attention, assess risks, and ensure safety. Over-reliance on this system to drive the vehicle safely may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury. ■ Precautions for the driving assist systems Observe the following precau- tions, as there are limitations to the assistance provided by the system. Over-reliance on this sys- tem may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury. ● Details of support provided for the driver’s vision The dynamic radar cruise control is only intended to help the driver in determining the distance between the driver’s own vehi- cle and a designated preceding vehicle. It is not a system which allows for careless or inattentive driving, and is not a system which assists in poor visibility conditions. The driver must pay attention to their surroundings, even when the vehicle stops. ● Details of support provided for the driver’s judgement The dynamic radar cruise control determines whether the dis- tance between the driver’s own vehicle and a designated pre- ceding vehicle is within a set range. It is not capable of mak- ing any other type of judgement. Therefore, it is absolutely nec- essary for the driver to remain vigilant and to determine whether or not there is a possi- bility of danger. ● Details of support provided for the driver’s operation The dynamic radar cruise control does not include functions which will prevent or avoid colli- sions with vehicles ahead of your vehicle. Therefore, if there is ever any possibility of danger, the driver must take immediate and direct control of the vehicle and act appropriately in order to ensure safety. ■ Situations in which the dynamic radar cruise control should not be used Do not use the dynamic radar cruise control in the following situ- ations. As the system will not be able to provide appropriate con- trol, using it may lead to an acci- dent resulting in death or serious injury. ● Roads where there are pedes- trians, cyclists, etc. ●When driving on a highway or expressway entrance or exit ●When the approach warning sounds frequently ● Situations in which the sensors may not operate properly: →P.265 ●Situations in which the lane may not be detected: →P.267 Basic functions 5-4. Using the driving support systems 307 Constant speed cruising: When there are no vehicles ahead The vehicle drives at the speed set by the driver. If the set vehicle speed is exceeded while driving down a hill, the set vehicle 5 speed display will blink and a buzzer will sound. Deceleration and follow-up cruising When a preceding vehicle driving slower than the set vehicle speed is detected When a vehicle is detected driving ahead of your vehicle, the vehicle auto- matically decelerates and if a greater reduction in vehicle speed is neces- sary, the brakes are applied (the stop lights will come on at this time). The vehicle is controlled to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the driver, in accordance with changes in the speed of the preceding vehicle. If vehicle deceleration is not sufficient and the vehicle approaches the vehicle ahead, the approach warning will sound. Acceleration When there are no longer any preceding vehicles driving slower than the set vehicle speed The vehicle accelerates until the set vehicle speed is reached and then resumes constant speed cruising. Starting off: If a preceding vehicle stops, the vehicle will also stop (controlled stop). After the preceding vehicle starts off, pressing the “RES” switch or depressing the accelerator pedal will resume follow-up 308 5-4. Using the driving support systems cruising (start off operation). If a start off operation is not per- formed, the controlled stop will continue. Vehicles with Traffic Jam Assist: While driving on a highway or expressway, if a preceding vehicle stops, your vehicle will stop accordingly. On some highways and expressways, if the system determines that the preceding vehicle starts off within approxi- mately 3 minutes of stopping, a buzzer will sound and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display to notify the driver, and your vehicle will start off accordingly following the pre- ceding vehicle. (Extended resume time) System components ■ Meter display Multi-information display Set vehicle speed Indicators ■ Switches Driving assist switch Driving assist mode select switch Cancel switch Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch “-” switch “+” switch/“RES” switch Using the dynamic radar cruise control ■ Setting the vehicle speed 1 Press the driving assist mode select switch to select dynamic radar cruise control. The dynamic radar cruise control indicator will illuminate. 5-4. Using the driving support systems 309 2 Using the accelerator pedal, accelerate or decelerate to the desired vehicle speed (approximately 20 mph [30 km/h] or more), and press the driving assist switch to set the set vehicle speed. The set vehicle speed will be dis- played on the multi-information dis- play. The vehicle speed at the moment the switch is released will be the set vehicle speed. ■ Adjusting the set vehicle speed ⚫ Adjusting the set vehicle speed using the switches To change the set vehicle speed, press the “+” switch or “-” switch until the desired speed is displayed. 1 Increase set vehicle speed 2 Decrease set vehicle speed Short press adjustment: Press the switch Long press adjustment: Press and hold the switch until the desired set vehicle speed is reached. The set vehicle speed will increase or decrease as follows: ▶ For U.S.A. Short press adjustment: Increases or decreases by 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the switch is pressed Long press adjustment: Increases or decreases in 1 mph (1.6 km/h) increments continuously while the switch is pressed and held ▶ Except for U.S.A. Short press adjustment: By 1 km/h (0.6 mph) or 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each 5 time the switch is pressed Long press adjustment: Increases or decreases in 5 km/h (3.1 mph) or 5 mph (8 km/h) increments continu- ously while the switch is pressed and held ⚫ Increasing the set vehicle speed using the accelerator pedal 1 Depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehi- cle to the desired vehicle speed. 2 Press the “+” switch. 310 5-4. Using the driving support systems ■ Canceling/resuming control 1 Press the cancel switch or driving assist switch to cancel control. Illustra- tion Number 1 2 3 4 Vehicle- to-vehi- cle dis- tance Short Medium Long Extra long Approximate Distance (Vehi- cle Speed: 60 mph [100 km/h]) Approximately 85 ft. (25 m) Approximately 100 ft. (30 m) Approximately 145 ft. (45 m) Approximately 200 ft. (60 m) Control will also be canceled if the brake pedal is depressed. (If the vehicle has been stopped by sys- tem control, depressing the brake pedal will not cancel control.) 2 Press the “RES” switch to resume control. ■ Changing the vehicle-to- vehicle distance Each time the switch is pressed, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance setting will change as follows: If a preceding vehicle is detected, the preceding vehicle mark will be displayed. The actual vehicle-to-vehicle dis- tance varies in accordance with the vehicle speed. Also, when the vehi- cle is stopped by system control, it will be stopped at a certain distance from the preceding vehicle, depending on the situation, regard- less of the setting. ■ Operating conditions ●D shift position is selected. ●The desired set speed can be set when the vehicle speed is approx- imately 20 mph (30 km/h) or more. • If the vehicle speed is set while driving at below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h), the set vehicle speed will be approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). • If the vehicle speed is set while driving at a speed that exceeds the system’s upper limit, the set vehicle speed will be the system’s upper limit. ■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed As with normal driving, acceleration can be performed by depressing the accelerator pedal. After accelerat- ing, the vehicle will return to the set vehicle speed. However, while in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control 5-4. Using the driving support systems 311 mode, the vehicle speed may decrease to below the set vehicle speed in order to maintain the dis- tance from the preceding vehicle. ■ When the vehicle is stopped by system control during follow-up cruising ●When the “RES” switch is pressed while the vehicle is stopped by system control, if the preceding vehicle starts off within approxi- mately 3 seconds, follow-up cruis- ing will resume. ●If the preceding vehicle starts off within approximately 3 seconds of the vehicle being stopped by sys- tem control, follow-up cruising will resume. ■ Automatic cancelation of vehi- cle-to-vehicle distance control mode In the following situations, vehicle- to-vehicle distance control mode will be canceled automatically: ●When the brake control or output restriction control of a driving sup- port system operates (For exam- ple: Pre-Collision System, drive- start control) ●When the parking brake has been operated ●When the vehicle is stopped by system control on a steep incline ●When any of the following are detected while the vehicle is stopped by system control: • The driver’s seat belt is unfas- tened • The driver’s door is opened • Approximately 3 minutes have elapsed since the vehicle was stopped The parking brake may be actived automatically. ●Situations in which some or all of the functions of the system cannot operate: →P.267 ■ Dynamic radar cruise control system warning messages and buzzers For safe use: →P.260 ■ Preceding vehicles that the sen- sor may not detect correctly In the following situations, depend- ing on the conditions, if the system cannot provide sufficient decelera- tion or acceleration is necessary, operate the brake pedal or accelera- tor pedal. As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehi- cles, the approach warning (→P.312) may not operate. ●When a vehicle cuts in front of your vehicle or changes lanes away from your vehicle extremely slowly or quickly ●When changing lanes ●When a preceding vehicle is driv- 5 ing at a low speed ●When a vehicle is stopped in the same lane as the vehicle ●When a motorcycle is traveling in the same lane as the vehicle ■ Conditions under which the system may not operate cor- rectly In the following situations, operate the brake pedal (or accelerator pedal, depending on the situation) as necessary. As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect a vehicle, the sys- tem may not operate properly. ●When a preceding vehicle brakes suddenly ●When changing lanes at low speeds, such as in a traffic jam ■ Conditions for extended resume time Extended resume time is activated when all of the following conditions are satisfied: 312 5-4. Using the driving support systems ●Vehicles with a Connected navi- gation: The connected service that SUBARU provides is sub- scribed to. Contact your SUBARU dealer for details. ●The vehicle is driving on a vehicle- only road, such as an expressway. ●There is a preceding vehicle and the system is able to detect it. ●No vehicle interruptions occur. ●The preceding vehicle has not been replaced. ●Clearance sonar and FCTA are not detecting the object in front of you. ●The driver monitor judges that the driver is looking forward. ●The steering wheel has not been operated. ●The brake pedal has not been operated. Approach warning In situations where the vehicle approaches a preceding vehicle and the system cannot provide sufficient deceleration, such as if a vehicle cuts in front of the vehicle, a warning display will flash and a buzzer will sound to alert the driver. Depress the brake pedal to ensure appropri- ate vehicle-to-vehicle distance. ■ Warnings may not occur when In the following situations, the warning may not operate even though the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is short. ⚫ When the preceding vehicle is traveling at the same speed or faster than your vehicle ⚫ When the preceding vehicle is traveling at an extremely low speed ⚫ Immediately after the vehicle speed has been set ⚫ When the accelerator pedal is depressed Curve speed reduction function When a curve is detected, the vehicle speed will begin being reduced. When the curve ends, the vehicle speed reduction will end. Depending on the situation, the vehicle speed will then return to the set vehicle speed. In situations where vehicle-to-vehi- cle distance control needs to oper- ate, such as when a preceding vehicle cuts in front of your vehicle, the curve speed reduction function will be canceled. ■ Situations in which the curve speed reduction function may not operate In situations such as the following, the curve speed reduction function 5-4. Using the driving support systems 313 may not operate: ●When the vehicle is being driven around a gentle curve ●When the accelerator pedal is being depressed ●When the vehicle is being driven around an extremely short curve Driver Monitor support function While a warning of the driver monitor is being displayed, the vehicle acceleration will be restrained. When the warning of the driver monitor disappears, the restrained acceleration control will end. Support for lane change If your vehicle is being driven at approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) or more and a lane change to the passing lane is performed, when the turn signal lever is operated and the lane is changed, the vehicle will accel- erate up to the set speed to assist in overtaking. The system’s recognition of which lane is the passing lane may be based solely on the location of the steering wheel in the vehicle (left- hand drive/right-hand drive). If the vehicle is driven in a location where the passing lane is on the opposite side of that where the vehicle was originally sold, the vehicle may accelerate when the turn signal lever is operated away from the passing lane. (e.g. The vehicle was manufactured for a right-hand traf- fic location, but is being driven in a left-hand traffic location. The vehi- cle may accelerate when the turn signal lever is operated to the right.) If your vehicle is being driven at approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) or more and the lane is changed to that with a vehicle traveling slower than your vehicle, when the turn signal lever is operated the vehicle will gradually decelerate to assist in changing lanes. Changing Dynamic radar cruise control settings The settings of Dynamic radar cruise control can be changed 5 on the customize settings. (→P.606) 314 5-4. Using the driving support systems Display and system operation state The operating state of Dynamic radar cruise control is indicated. Indicator Multi-information display Situation White Vehicle-to-vehicle distance setting: Gray Dynamic radar cruise control being OFF Green Green Vehicle-to-vehicle distance setting: Blue Set vehicle speed: Green Vehicle-to-vehicle distance setting: Blue Set vehicle speed: Green Preceding vehicle: White Constant speed cruis- ing Follow-up cruising Green Vehicle-to-vehicle distance setting: Orange flashing Set vehicle speed: Green Preceding vehicle: Orange flashing Approach warning 5-4. Using the driving support systems 315 Indicator Green Multi-information display Vehicle-to-vehicle distance setting: Gray Set vehicle speed: White Preceding vehicle: Gray Situation Accelerating with the accelerator pedal Green Set vehicle speed: Green in reverse display Set vehicle speed being exceeded Green Vehicle-to-vehicle distance setting: Gray Set vehicle speed: White Preceding vehicle: Gray Vehicle in controlled stop 5 316 5-4. Using the driving support systems Cruise control The vehicle can be driven at a set speed even if the accelerator pedal is not depressed. Use the cruise control only on highways and express- ways. WARNING ■ For safe use ● Driving safely is solely the responsibility of the driver. Therefore, do not overly rely on this system. The driver is solely responsible for paying attention to the vehicle’s surroundings and driving safely. ●Set the speed appropriately according to the speed limit, traffic flow, road conditions, weather conditions, etc. The driver is responsible for confirm- ing the set speed. ■ Situations in which cruise control should not be used Do not use the cruise control in the following situations. As the system will not be able to provide appropriate control, using it may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury. ●On roads with sharp bends ●On winding roads ●On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow ●On steep downhills, or where there are sudden changes between sharp up and down gradients Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill. ●When it is necessary to disable the system: →P.261 System components ■ Meter display Set vehicle speed Cruise control indicator ■ Switches Driving assist switch Driving assist mode select switch Cancel switch “-” switch 5-4. Using the driving support systems 317 “+” switch/“RES” switch Using the cruise control ■ Setting the vehicle speed 1 Press the driving assist mode select switch to select cruise control. The cruise control indicator will illu- minate. 2 Using the accelerator pedal, accelerate to the desired vehicle speed (approxi- mately 20 mph [30 km/h] or more), and press the driving assist switch to set the set vehicle speed. The vehicle speed at the moment the switch is released will be the set vehicle speed. ■ Adjusting the set vehicle speed ⚫ Adjusting the set vehicle speed using the switches To change the set vehicle speed, press the “+” or “-” switch until the desired speed is dis- played. 1 Increase set vehicle speed 2 Decrease set vehicle speed 5 The set vehicle speed will increase or decrease as follows: Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h) or 1 km/h (0.6 mph) each time the switch is pressed Large adjustment: Increases con- tinuously while the switch is pressed and held ⚫ Increasing the set vehicle speed using the accelerator pedal 1 Depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehi- cle to the desired vehicle speed. 2 Press the “+” switch. 318 5-4. Using the driving support systems ■ Canceling/resuming control 1 Press the cancel switch or driving assist switch to cancel control. Control will also be canceled if the brake pedal is depressed. 2 Press the “RES” switch to resume control. ■ Automatic cancelation of the cruise control In the following situations, the cruise control will be canceled automati- cally: ●When the vehicle speed drops approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) or more below the set vehicle speed ●When the vehicle speed drops below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) ●When the brake control or output restriction control of a driving sup- port system operates (For exam- ple: PCS, drive-start control) ●When the parking brake has been operated ●Situations in which some or all of the functions of the system cannot operate: →P.267 5-4. Using the driving support systems Display and system operation state The operating state of cruise control is indicated. 319 Indicator Multi-information display Situation White Blank Cruise con- trol being OFF Green Set vehicle speed: Green Constant speed cruis- ing Green Set vehicle speed: Green in reverse display Set vehicle speed being 5 exceeded 320 5-4. Using the driving support systems FCTA (Cross Traffic Alert) When approaching an intersec- tion, etc., at a low speed, vehi- cles approaching from the left and right of the front of the vehi- cle can be detected and the driver informed of these vehi- cles. FCTA system control ⚫ When the system detects a vehicle approaching from the left or right in front of your vehicle when approaching an intersection, a notification will be displayed. ⚫ When the system determines that your vehicle may be about to enter an intersection even though a vehicle is approaching from the left or right in front of your vehicle, a buzzer will sound and a mes- sage will be displayed to urge you to depress the brake pedal. • Multi-information display WARNING ■ For safe use Driving safely is solely the respon- sibility of the driver. Pay careful attention to the surrounding con- ditions in order to ensure safe driving. The FCTA system is a supplementary system that informs the driver of vehicles approaching from the left and right of the front of the vehicle. Over-reliance on this system may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury. The details of the warning display may differ from the actual traffic condi- tions. Although the warning dis- play will stop being displayed after a certain amount of time, this does not necessarily indicate that there are no longer any vehicles or pedestrians around your vehi- cle. ■ FCTA system operating condi- tions The system will operate when all of the following conditions are met: ●A shift position other than P or R is selected ●The vehicle speed is approxi- mately 10 mph (15 km/h) or less ●A vehicle is approaching from the left or right in front of your vehicle at a speed between approximately 7 to 37 mph (10 to 60 km/h) ●There are no vehicles in front of your vehicle ●The accelerator pedal is not being strongly depressed ●The brake pedal is not being strongly depressed ■ Situations in which the system may operate even though no vehicles are approaching In certain situations, such as the fol- lowing, the system may operate even though no vehicles are 5-4. Using the driving support systems 321 approaching: ●When approaching objects on the roadside, such as guardrails, traf- fic signs, utility poles, street lights, trees, tall grass, walls, etc. ●When passing an object on the side of the road, such as a parked vehicle ●When a vehicle or pedestrian is approaching from the left or right in front of your vehicle in the dis- tance ●When a vehicle or pedestrian is moving within a parking spot, etc., next to the lane your vehicle is in ●When a pedestrian or bicyclist is approaching on a sidewalk ●When a vehicle or pedestrian is moving away from your vehicle ●When an approaching vehicle is decelerating or stops ●When an approaching vehicle makes a left/right turn immediately in front of your vehicle ●When a pedestrian is approaching your vehicle ●When an oncoming vehicle makes a right/left turn ●When your vehicle enters an inter- section before a vehicle approaching from the left or right in front of your vehicle ●When stopped at traffic light and a vehicle approaches from the left or right in front of your vehicle ●When making a left/right turn in front of an approaching vehicle ●When an oncoming vehicle approaches and passes ●When being overtaken by another vehicle ●When driving next to another vehi- cle or a pedestrian ●When a vehicle or pedestrian approaches the side of your vehi- cle ■ Situations in which the system may not operate properly In situations such as the following, a vehicle may not be detected by a front side radar sensor and the sys- tem may not operate properly: ● If an approaching vehicle moves suddenly (sudden steering, accel- eration, deceleration, etc.) 5 ● If a vehicle is approaching from the left or right of the front of your vehicle diagonally ●When a vehicle is approaching from the left or right in front of your vehicle in the distance ●When there is an object between your vehicle and an approaching vehicle ●When several vehicles are approaching with little space between them Situations in which the sensors may not operate properly: →P.265 Situations in which some or all of the functions of the system cannot operate: →P.267 322 5-4. Using the driving support systems Changing FCTA settings Emergency Driving Stop System ⚫ The FCTA can be enabled/disabled through a customize setting. (→P.607) ⚫ The following settings of the FCTA can be changed through customize settings. (→P.607) The emergency driving stop system is a system which automatically decelerates and stops the vehicle within its lane if the driver becomes unable to con- tinue driving the vehicle, such as if they have suf- fered a medical emergency, etc. During LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) control, if the sys- tem does not detect driving operations, such as if the driver is not holding the steering wheel, and deter- mines the driver is not responsive, the vehicle will be decelerated and stopped within its current lane to help avoid a collision or reduce the impact of a colli- sion. The vehicle will also decel- erate/stop during the Traf- fic Jam Assist controls, when no driver’s response to the vehicle’s warning to hold the steering wheel is detected. 5-4. Using the driving support systems 323 WARNING ■ For safe use ● Driving safely is solely the responsibility of the driver. Pay careful attention to the sur- rounding conditions in order to ensure safe driving. The emer- gency driving stop system is designed to provide support in an emergency where it is diffi- cult for the driver to continue driving, such as if they have had a medical emergency. It is not designed to support driving while drowsy or in poor physical health, or inattentive driving. ●Although the emergency driv- ing stop system is designed to decelerate the vehicle within its lane to help avoid or help reduce the impact of a collision if the system determines that it is difficult for the driver to con- tinue driving, its effectiveness may change according to vari- ous conditions. Therefore, it may not always be able to achieve the same level of per- formance. Also, if the operating conditions are not met, this function will not operate. ●After the emergency driving stop system operates, if driving becomes possible again, imme- diately begin driving again or, if necessary, park the vehicle on the shoulder of the road and set a warning reflector and flare to warn other drivers of your stopped vehicle. ●After this system operates, pas- sengers should attend to the driver as necessary and take appropriate hazard prevention measures, such as moving to a place where safety can be ensured, such as the shoulder of the road or behind a guard- rail. ● This system detects the condi- tion of the driver through the operation of the steering wheel. This system may operate if the driver is aware but intentionally and continuously does not oper- ate the vehicle. Also, the system may not operate if it cannot determine that the driver is not responsive, such as if they are leaning on the steering wheel. ● Situations in which the driver monitor may not operate prop- erly: →P.267 Summary of the system Operation of this system is sep- arated into 4 control states. Through control state “warning phase 1” and “warning phase 2”, 5 the system determines if the driver is aware and responsive while outputting a warning and controlling the vehicle speed. If the system determines the driver is not responsive, it will operate in control state “deceler- ation stop phase” and “stop hold phase” and decelerate and stop the vehicle. It will then operate continuously in “stop hold phase”. ■ Operating conditions This system operates when all of the following conditions are met: ●When the LTA is on Or during the Traffic Jam Assist con- trols 324 5-4. Using the driving support systems ●When the vehicle speed is approximately 30 mph (50 km/h) or more During the Traffic Jam Assist con- trols, the system may operate at below 30 mph (50 km/h). ■ Operation cancelation condi- tions In the following situations, system operation will be canceled: ●When LTA control has been can- celed (the LTA switch has been pressed, etc.) ●When the dynamic radar cruise control has been canceled ●When driver operations are detected (the steering wheel is held, the brake pedal, accelerator pedal, parking brake, hazard light switch, or turn signal lever is oper- ated) ●When the driving assist switch is pressed while in the stop and hold phase ●When the power switch has been turned from ON to OFF ●Situations in which some or all of the functions of the system cannot operate: →P.267 ■ LTA control when operation is canceled When emergency driving stop sys- tem operation is canceled, LTA con- trol may also be canceled. Warning phase 1 If driving operations are not detected after the hands off steering wheel warning oper- ates, a buzzer will sound inter- mittently and a message will be displayed to warn the driver, and the system will judge if the driver is responsive or not. If driving operations, such as holding the steering wheel, are not per- formed within a certain amount of time, the system will enter warning phase 2. Depending on the type of detec- tion of the driver’s unrespon- siveness, the system may skip warning phase 1 and start the control of warning phase 2. Warning phase 2 After entering warning phase 2, a buzzer will sound in short intervals and a message will be displayed to warn the driver, and the vehicle will slowly deceler- ate. If driving operations, such as holding the steering wheel, are not performed within a cer- tain amount of time, the system will determine that the driver is not responsive and enter the deceleration stop phase. The audio system will be muted until the driver becomes respon- sive. When the vehicle is decelerating, the brake lights may illuminate, depending on the road conditions, etc. Deceleration stop phase After entering the deceleration stop phase, a buzzer will sound continuously and a message will be displayed to warn the driver, and the vehicle will slowly decel- 5-4. Using the driving support systems 325 erate and stop. After the vehicle stops, the system will enter the stop and hold phase. Stop hold phase After the vehicle is stopped, the parking brake will be applied automatically. After entering the stop and hold phase, the buzzer will continue sounding continu- ously and the emergency flash- ers (hazard lights) will flash to warn other drivers of the emer- gency. ■ Restricted functions after the operation is canceled After shifting to the deceleration stop phase, the following functions will not be available until the EV sys- tem is re-started even though the emergency driving stop system is canceled: ● LTA ●LCA ●Traffic Jam Assist Traffic Jam Assist Function Outline Traffic Jam Assist is a system which, through confirmation of the conditions by the driver, pro- vides lane keeping, accelerat- ing/decelerating, stopping, and starting off support on some highways and expressways. Also, in an emergency, the sys- tem can decelerate and stop, to help avoid a collision or help reduce the impact of a collision. ■ Precautions for use →P.265 5 Sensors that support the Traffic Jam Assist ⚫ Sensors which detect the sur- rounding conditions (→P.262) ⚫ Sensors which detect the driver condition (→P.262) ■ Situations in which some or all of the functions of the system cannot operate →P.267 ■ Changes in brake operation sound and pedal response →P.267 ■ Situations in which the driver monitor may not operate prop- erly →P.267 326 5-4. Using the driving support systems Emergency Driving Stop System →P.322 Extended resume time of Dynamic radar cruise control →P.305 Traffic Jam Assist Func- tion The Traffic Jam Assist function, through confirmation of the con- ditions by the driver, provides lane keeping, accelerat- ing/decelerating and stopping support on some highways and expressways. This function is operable when all of the operation conditions are met. When this function is operating, it is possible to take your hands off of the steering wheel. Before using the Traffic Jam Assist function, familiarize yourself with the content of the dynamic radar cruise control and the LTA (Lane Tracing Assist). Make sure that the driver steers the vehicle when entering a service area/parking area or toll gate, or when changing lanes. Driver monitor camera recording When the operation of Traffic Jam Assist is started, the follow- ing message will be displayed: ⚫ “Allow Driver Monitor Camera Recording?” When recording is approved, the system records images of the area around the driver in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an SRS airbag being deployed or the vehicle hitting an object on the road. (→P.9) WARNING ■ For safe use ●Driving safely is solely the responsibility of the driver. Do not overly rely on this system, and pay careful attention to the surrounding conditions in order to ensure safe driving. ● The Traffic Jam Assist function is not an automated driving sys- tem. This function provides the driver with information and driving assistance according to the road shape and conditions, traf- fic conditions, and the condition of the driver themself. Always pay careful attention to the sur- rounding conditions as use of the system is the responsibility of the driver. 5-4. Using the driving support systems 327 WARNING ● Depending on the condition of the surrounding area, the road, or the driver, the Traffic Jam Assist function may not operate or operation may be sus- pended. Also, it may not always be able to achieve the same level of performance. Read the operating conditions of the func- tion carefully. Do not overly rely on this function and always drive carefully. ●As the recognition performance and control performance of the Traffic Jam Assist function are limited, driver operation is nec- essary to ensure safety while the system is operating. Also, the steering assist of this sys- tem is designed to operate only for slow steering operations during a traffic jam. While this function is operating, the lane deviation control function of the LDA will not operate. If, for some reason, the vehicle is about to deviate the lane, it is the driver’s responsibility to drive properly. ●Even if Traffic Jam Assist is operating properly, the sur- rounding conditions as recog- nized by the driver and detected by the system may differ. There- fore, it is necessary for the driver to pay attention, assess risks, and ensure safety. Over- reliance on this system to drive the vehicle safely may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury. ●While the Traffic Jam Assist function is operating, as driver operation may become neces- sary, the driver must ensure they have clear visibility of their surroundings. ● In certain situations, a message urging the driver to hold the steering wheel may be dis- played by the Traffic Jam Assist function. In this case, hold the steering wheel and drive the vehicle manually to ensure safety. ● The Traffic Jam Assist function cannot detect the following objects. Operate the steering wheel, accelerator pedal, or brake pedal as necessary to avoid a collision. As the function will not be able to provide appropriate control, using it may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury. • Objects on the road surface • Vehicles outside of a lane (such as on the shoulder of the road) • Potholes, cracks, ruts, or other 5 road damage • Road construction zones • Vehicles running in parallel with your vehicle or nearby walls • Animals ■ Situations in which Traffic Jam Assist Function should not be used Do not use Traffic Jam Assist Function in situations such as the following. As the system will not be able to provide appropriate control, using it may lead to an accident resulting in death or seri- ous injury. ●When it is necessary to disable the system →P.261 ● Situations in which the sensors may not operate properly →P.265 328 5-4. Using the driving support systems WARNING ●Situations in which the lane may not be detected →P.267 ■ Situations in which the func- tion may not operate properly In situations such as the following, the Traffic Jam Assist function may not operate properly. Manu- ally operate the vehicle as neces- sary. ●When a sensor is splashed by water ●When the ambient temperature is high or low ●When a vehicle cuts in front of your vehicle ●When another lane merges into the lane in the same traveling direction as your vehicle ●When driving in low visibility conditions ●When the vehicle posture is changing ●When the traction on the road surface differs greatly between the left and right side tires ●When driving on an expressway with no median strips or when driving on an expressway equipped with temporary median markers, such as poles. ●When there is a significant dif- ference in speed between your vehicle and the other vehicle ●The map data has not been updated properly. ■ To prevent malfunction of the radar sensors →P.263 ■ To prevent malfunction of the front camera →P.263 ■ Front camera installation area on the windshield →P.265 ■ Operating conditions of the function This function is operable when all of the following conditions are met: ●The system detects lane lines and the path of preceding or surround- ing vehicles. ●The dynamic radar cruise control and the lane tracing assist are operating. ● The turn signal lever is not being operated. ●The vehicle is not being driven around a sharp curve. ●The vehicle is being driven in the center of a lane. ●The driver monitor camera is detecting that the driver is facing front of the vehicle. ●The vehicle is driving in traffic jam on a highway or expressway at approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or less. (In some situations, such as when a traffic jam starts, this function may be operational at approximately 20 mph [30 km/h] or less.) ●Vehicles with a connected naviga- tion (display audio): Safety Con- nect is being subscribed to. ●The driver’s door is closed. ● The driver’s seat belt is fastened. ● Customized setting of the Traffic Jam Assist is not set to off. ●Functions and components com- posing the system are in proper condition. ● Customized setting of the PCS 5-4. Using the driving support systems 329 (Pre-Collision System) is not set to off. ●Customized setting of the dynamic radar cruise control (re-start time extension) is not set to off. ■ Temporary cancelation of the function ●When the operating conditions are no longer met, a function may be temporarily canceled. However, when the operation conditions are met again, operation of the func- tion will automatically be restored. ●If the operating conditions of a function are no longer met while the function is operating, a buzzer may sound with a display to indi- cate that the function has been temporarily canceled. If no driver’s responses to the indication are detected, the driver emergency stop assist function may operate. For types of display and action to be taken, see the page mentioned below. (→P.330) ■ Driving operations during con- trolled driving ●Accelerator pedal As with normal driving, acceleration can be performed by depressing the accelerator pedal. When driving at approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or more and the accelerator pedal is depressed, this function will be can- celed. ●Brake pedal As with normal driving, deceleration can be performed by depressing the brake pedal. However, controlled driving will be cancelled. ●Steering wheel As with normal driving, the steering wheel can be operated. If the steer- ing wheel is operated more than a certain amount, controlled driving will be cancelled. ■ When a warning message is displayed ● “Traffic Jam Asst System Malfunc- tion Visit Your Dealer” The Traffic Jam Assist function may not be operating properly. ●“Traffic Jam Asst Unavailable Stop Assist Activated” The system temporarily cannot be used as the driver emergency stop assist function has operated. Changing Traffic Jam Assist settings ⚫ The setting of Traffic Jam Assist can be enabled/dis- abled on the customize set- ting. (→P.607) ⚫ The setting of driver monitor 5 camera recording can be enabled/disabled on the cus- tomize setting. (→P.607) 330 5-4. Using the driving support systems Displays and system operation The following displays indicate the operating status of the Traffic Jam Assist function: Display Status Action to be taken Traffic Jam Assist function is operating (Grey) (Orange) (Red) (Yellow) Traffic Jam Assist function is about to end Traffic Jam Assist function has ended Operation of either or both of dynamic radar cruise control /LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) ended Indicates that driving actions are necessary to cope with cut-in or other behavior of surrounding vehicles Indicates that the recording function of the driver moni- tor camera is operational (Blinking of this icon indi- cates that recording is undergoing, and constant illumination indicates ready for recording.) Hold the steering wheel. Hold the steering wheel. Manually operate the steering wheel immedi- ately. The driver must operate the steering wheel, accel- erator pedal and brake pedal in accordance with the surrounding environ- ment. ⎯ 5-4. Using the driving support systems 331 BSM (Blind Spot Moni- tor) System components The Blind Spot Monitor is a system that uses rear side radar sensors installed on the inner side of the rear bumper on the left and right side to assist the driver in confirming safety when changing lanes. WARNING ■ Cautions regarding the use of the system ●The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings. ●The Blind Spot Monitor is a sup- plementary function which alerts the driver that a vehicle is in a blind spot of the outside rear view mirrors or is approaching rapidly from behind into a blind spot. Do not overly rely on the Blind Spot Monitor. As the func- tion cannot judge if it is safe to change lanes, over reliance could lead to an accident result- ing in death or serious injury. As the system may not function correctly under certain condi- tions, the driver’s own visual confirmation of safety is neces- sary. Meter control switches Turning the Blind Spot Monitor on/off. Outside rear view mirror indi- cators When a vehicle is detected in a blind spot of the outside rear view mirrors or approaching rapidly from 5 behind into a blind spot, the outside rear view mirror indicator (→P.150) on the detected side will illuminate. If the turn signal lever is operated toward the detected side, the out- side rear view mirror indicator will flash and a buzzer will sound. Driving assist information indicator Illuminates when the Blind Spot Monitor is turned off. At this time, a message will be displayed on the multi-information display. ■ Outside rear view mirror indica- tor visibility In strong sunlight, the outside rear view mirror indicator may be difficult to see. 332 5-4. Using the driving support systems ■ Buzzer If the volume setting of the audio system is high or the surrounding area is loud, it may be difficult to hear the buzzer. ■ Customization Some functions can be customized. (→P.607) ■ Certification →P.657 WARNING ■ To ensure the system can operate properly Blind Spot Monitor sensors are installed behind the left and right sides of the rear bumper respec- tively. Observe the following to ensure the Blind Spot Monitor can operate correctly. ●Keep the sensors and the sur- rounding areas on the rear bumper clean at all times. If a sensor or its surrounding area on the rear bumper is dirty or cov- ered with snow, the Blind Spot Monitor may not operate and a warning message will be dis- played. In this situation, clear off the dirt or snow and drive the vehicle with the operation condi- tions of the BSM function (→P.334) satisfied for approxi- mately 10 minutes. If the warning message does not disappear, have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer. ● Do not attach accessories, stickers (including transparent stickers), aluminum tape, etc., to a sensor or its surrounding area on the rear bumper. ● Do not paint the surrounding area of a sensor on the rear bumper. ● Do not subject a sensor or its surrounding area on the rear bumper to a strong impact. If a sensor is moved even slightly off position, the system may malfunction and vehicles may not be detected correctly. In the following situations, have your vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer. • A sensor or its surrounding area is subject to a strong impact. • If the surrounding area of a sen- sor is scratched or dented, or part of them has become dis- connected. ● Do not disassemble the sensor. ● Do not modify the sensor or sur- rounding area on the rear bumper. ●If a sensor or the rear bumper needs to be removed/installed or replaced, contact your SUB- ARU dealer. ●The sensors are likely to be affected by paint on the rear bumper. If the rear bumper is not repaired correctly, the Blind Spot Monitor may not operate with a warning message dis- played. If any paint repair is needed, contact your SUBARU dealer. 5-4. Using the driving support systems 333 Turning the Blind Spot Monitor on/off The Blind Spot Monitor can be enabled/disabled through a cus- tomize setting. (→P.607) When the Blind Spot Monitor is off, the driving assist information indicator (→P.150) will illuminate and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display. Each time the power switch is turned to ON, the Blind Spot Monitor is enabled. Blind Spot Monitor operation ■ Objects that can be detected while driving The Blind Spot Monitor uses rear side radar sensors to detect the fol- lowing vehicles traveling in adjacent lanes and advises the driver of the presence of such vehicles via the indicators on the outside rear view mirrors. 5 Vehicles that are traveling in areas that are not visible using the outside rear view mirrors (the blind spots) Vehicles that are approaching rapidly from behind in areas that are not visible using the outside rear view mirrors (the blind spots) 334 5-4. Using the driving support systems ■ Detection range while driving The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below. The range of each detection area is: Approximately 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) to 11.5 ft. (3.5 m) from either side of the vehicle*1 Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m) forward of the rear bumper*2 Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) from the rear bumper Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) to 230 ft. (70 m) from the rear bumper*3 *1: The area between the side of the vehicle and 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) from the side of the vehicle cannot be detected. *2: While the vehicle is to being overtaken, up to approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) forward of the rear bumper will be detected. *3: The greater the difference in speed between your vehicle and the detected vehicle is, the farther away the vehicle will be detected, causing the outside rear view mirror indicator to illuminate or flash. ■ The Blind Spot Monitor linked function The LDA (Lane Departure Alert) has a function that uses information of detected vehicles driving in an adjacent lane. For details about the function and its operating conditions, P.292. other than R. ■ The Blind Spot Monitor is oper- ational when The Blind Spot Monitor is opera- tional when all of the following con- ditions are met: ●The power switch is in ON. ●The Blind Spot Monitor is on. ● The shift position is in a position ●The vehicle speed is approxi- mately 7 mph (10 km/h) or more. ■ The Blind Spot Monitor will detect a vehicle when The Blind Spot Monitor will detect a vehicle present in the detection area in the following situations: 5-4. Using the driving support systems 335 ●A vehicle in an adjacent lane over- takes your vehicle. ●You overtake a vehicle in an adja- cent lane slowly. ●Another vehicle enters the detec- tion area when it changes lanes. ■ Situations in which the Blind Spot Monitor cannot detect vehicles. The Blind Spot Monitor cannot detect the following vehicles and other objects: ●Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, etc.* ●Vehicles traveling in the opposite direction ●Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects* ● Following vehicles that are in the same lane* ●Vehicles traveling 2 lanes away from your vehicle* ●Vehicles which are being over- taken rapidly by your vehicle* *: Depending on the conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur. ■ Conditions in which a buzzer may not sound In situations such as the following, while the turn signal lever is being operated, the indicator will flash but a buzzer may not sound. • When a second vehicle is detected while the turn signal lever is being held • When overtaking a vehicle in the adjacent lane at a much higher speed than it* *: Depending on the situations, a buzzer may sound. ■ Conditions under which the system may not function cor- rectly ●The Blind Spot Monitor may not detect vehicles correctly in the fol- lowing situations: • When the sensor is misaligned due to a strong impact to the sen- sor or its surrounding area • When mud, snow, ice, a sticker, etc., is covering the sensor or sur- rounding area on the rear bumper • When driving on a road surface that is wet with standing water during bad weather, such as heavy rain, snow, or fog • When multiple vehicles are approaching with only a small gap between each vehicle • When the distance between your vehicle and a following vehicle is short • When there is a significant differ- ence in speed between your vehi- cle and the vehicle that enters the 5 detection area • When the difference in speed between your vehicle and another vehicle is changing • When a vehicle enters a detection area traveling at about the same speed as your vehicle • As your vehicle starts from a stop, a vehicle remains in the detection area • When driving up and down con- secutive steep inclines, such as hills, dips in the road, etc. • When driving on roads with sharp bends, consecutive curves, or uneven surfaces • When vehicle lanes are wide, or when driving on the edge of a lane, and the vehicle in an adja- cent lane is far away from your vehicle • When an accessory (such as a bicycle carrier) is installed to the rear of the vehicle • When there is a significant differ- ence in height between your vehi- cle and the vehicle that enters the detection area 336 5-4. Using the driving support systems • Immediately after the Blind Spot Monitor is turned on • When towing with the vehicle ●Instances of the Blind Spot Moni- tor unnecessarily detecting a vehi- cle and/or object may increase in the following situations: • When the sensor is misaligned due to a strong impact to the sen- sor or its surrounding area • When the distance between your vehicle and a guardrail, wall, etc., that enters the detection area is short • When driving up and down con- secutive steep inclines, such as hills, dips in the road, etc. • When vehicle lanes are narrow, or when driving on the edge of a lane, and a vehicle traveling in a lane other than the adjacent lanes enters the detection area • When driving on roads with sharp bends, consecutive curves, or uneven surfaces • When the tires are slipping or spinning • When the distance between your vehicle and a following vehicle is short • When an accessory (such as a bicycle carrier) is installed to the rear of the vehicle • When towing with the vehicle Safe Exit Assist The safe exit assist is a sys- tem that uses rear side radar sensors installed on the inner side of the rear bumper to help occupants judge if an approaching vehicle or bicycle may col- lide with a door when exit- ing, to help reduce the possibility of a collision. WARNING ■ Cautions regarding the use of the system ●The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings. ● The safe exit assist is a supple- mentary system that, when the vehicle is stopped, informs occupants of the existence of approaching vehicles and bicy- cles. As this system alone can- not be used to judge safety, over-reliance on this system may lead to an accident result- ing in death or serious injury. In certain situations, this system may not function to its fullest extent. Therefore it is necessary for the occupants to visually check for safety directly and using the mirrors. 5-4. Using the driving support systems 337 System components that the system has operated. After the notification through voice guid- ance is made, no more voice guid- ance notifications will be made again until the door is fully closed. Multi-information display Turning the safe exit assist on/off. If collision with a door is likely and the door is opened, the door will be displayed on the multi-information display. Also, if a door is opened when an outside rear view mirror indicator is illuminated, a buzzer will sound as a warning. Outside rear view mirror indi- cators When a vehicle or bicycle which may collide with a door (other than the back door) when opened is detected, the outside rear view mir- ror indicator (→P.150) on the detected side will illuminate. If the door on the detected side is opened, the outside rear view mir- ror indicator will blink. Driving assist information indicator Illuminates when the safe exit assist is turned off. At this time, a message will be displayed on the multi-information display. Speakers When the outside rear view mirror indicator blinks, the driver is informed through voice guidance ■ Outside rear view mirror indica- tor visibility In strong sunlight, the outside rear view mirror indicator may be difficult to see. ■ Buzzer If the volume setting of the audio system is high or the surrounding area is loud, it may be difficult to hear the buzzer. ■ Voice notifications In the following situations, voice notifications will not be output: ●When it is estimated that no occu- pants are on board* 5 ●After opening a door and entering the vehicle, until the EV system is started When 3 minutes or more have elapsed since the EV system was stopped ●When the language setting of the multimedia display has been set to a language that does not sup- port voice notifications ●When all of the doors have been locked from outside the vehicle ●When a door remains open for 1 minute or more after the EV sys- tem is stopped ●When the ACC (→P.604) has been enabled through a custom- ize setting on the multimedia dis- play and the EV system has been stopped ●When the parking assist volume setting on the multimedia display has been set to off *: For each seating position, judg- ment is made based on the open- 338 5-4. Using the driving support systems ing and closing of a door, before driving for ingress and after driv- ing for egress. ■ Customization Some functions can be customized. (→P.607) WARNING ■ To ensure the system can operate properly →P.332 Turning the safe exit assist system ON/OFF The safe exit assist system can be enabled/disabled through a customize setting. (→P.607) When the safe exit assist is off, the driving assist information indicator (→P.150) will illuminate and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display. Each time the power switch is turned to ON, the safe exit assist is enabled. Safe exit assist operation ■ Objects that can be detected by the safe exit assist When the safe exit assist detects the following vehicles or bicycles behind your vehicle using a rear side radar sensor, the occupants of the vehicle are informed through an outside rear view mirror indica- tor, buzzer, multi-information display, and voice notification. Vehicle or bicycle which has a high possibility of colliding with a door (other than the back door) when opened 5-4. Using the driving support systems ■ The safe exit assist detection areas The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below. 339 Approximately 145 ft. (45 m) rearward from the front door* *: The faster a vehicle or bicycle is approaching, the distance at which an outside rear view mirror indicator will illuminate or blink will become fur- ther. ■ The safe exit assist is opera- tional when The safe exit assist is operational when all of the following conditions are met: ●When the power switch is ON, less than 3 minutes have elapsed since the EV system was off, or less than 3 minutes have elapsed since a door was opened and someone has entered the vehicle (the time which operation is possi- ble may be extended if a door is opened and closed) ●Safe exit assist is on ●The vehicle is stopped. ● The shift position is in a position other than R. ■ The safe exit assist will detect a vehicle when The safe exit assist will detect a vehicle present in the detection area in the following situations: When the vehicle is stopped and a vehicle or bicycle, which is traveling parallel to the vehicle, is approach- ing within the area that a door opens (other than the back door) ■ Conditions under which the system will not detect a vehicle ●Safe exit assist does not detect the following objects, vehicles, and bicycles: • Vehicles or bicycles which are approaching slowly* • Vehicles or bicycles which are determined to have a low possibil- ity of colliding with a door (other than the back door) when opened* • Vehicles or bicycles which are approaching from directly behind* • Vehicles or bicycles which are approaching from the front* • Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles, and other stationary objects* • Pedestrians, animals, etc.* *: Depending on the conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur. ● In situations such as the following, safe exit assist will not operate: • When 3 minutes or more have elapsed since the EV system off (the time which operation is possi- ble may be extended if a door is opened and closed) 340 5-4. Using the driving support systems • When your vehicle is not com- pletely stopped ■ Conditions under which the system may not function cor- rectly ● The safe exit assist may not detect vehicles correctly in the fol- lowing situations: • When the sensor is misaligned due to a strong impact to the sen- sor or its surrounding area • When mud, snow, ice, a sticker, etc., is covering the sensor or sur- rounding area on the rear bumper • When driving on a road surface that is wet with standing water during bad weather, such as heavy rain, snow, or fog • When a vehicle or bicycle approaches from behind a nearby parked vehicle • When an approaching vehicle or bicycle suddenly changes direc- tion • Immediately after a vehicle or bicycle starts moving • When the back door is open • When a bicycle carrier, ramp, or other accessory is installed to the back of the vehicle • When a parked vehicle, wall, sign, person or other stationary object is behind the vehicle • When the vehicle is stopped at an angle to the road • When a vehicle is traveling near an approaching vehicle or bicycle • When an approaching vehicle or bicycle is traveling along a station- ary object, such a wall or sign • When a vehicle or bicycle is approaching at high speed • When towing with the vehicle • When stopped on a steep slope • When stopped on a curve or at the exit of a curve ●Instances of the safe exit assist unnecessarily detecting a vehicle and/or object may increase in the following situations: • When the sensor is misaligned due to a strong impact to the sen- sor or its surrounding area • When a vehicle or bicycle approaches your vehicle from directly behind in an offset posi- tion • When the vehicle is stopped at an angle to the road • When a vehicle or bicycle approaches from behind a parked vehicle at an angle • When a parked vehicle, wall, sign, person or other stationary object is behind the vehicle • When an approaching vehicle or bicycle suddenly changes direc- tion • When an approaching vehicle or bicycle is traveling along a station- ary object, such a wall or sign • When the back door is open • When a bicycle carrier, ramp, or other accessory is installed to the back of the vehicle • When a vehicle or bicycle is approaching at high speed • When towing with the vehicle • When stopped on a steep slope • When stopped on a curve or at the exit of a curve • When a vehicle or bicycle approaches from behind a vehicle stopped in an adjacent lane 5-4. Using the driving support systems 341 SUBARU Parking Assist The SUBARU Parking Assist function detects the approximate distance from the vehicle and an object such as a wall using ultra- sonic sensors and informs the driver with the multime- dia display distance display and buzzer. is shown on the multimedia dis- play depending on the position and distance to the object. Vehicles without multimedia dis- play or rear camera: When detecting a stationary object, the SUBARU Parking Assist detec- tion indicator illuminates. (→P.150) System components ■ Type of sensors Front corner sensors Front center sensors Rear corner sensors Rear center sensors Front side sensors (vehicles with Advanced Park) Rear side sensors (vehicles with Advanced Park) ■ Display When the sensors detect an object, such as a wall, a graphic Front corner sensor detection 5 Front center sensor detection Rear corner sensor detection Rear center sensor detection Front side sensor detection (vehicles with Advanced Park) Rear side sensor detection (vehicles with Advanced Park) Turning the SUBARU Parking Assist function ON/OFF The SUBARU Parking Assist function can be enabled/dis- abled through a customize set- ting. (→P.608) 342 5-4. Using the driving support systems When the SUBARU Parking Assist function is disabled, the SUBARU Parking Assist OFF indicator (→P.150) illuminates on the multi-information display. If the system switches to OFF (disabled) and the SUBARU Parking Assist is stopped, the SUBARU Parking Assist will not be re-enabled until ON (enabled) is selected again from the customize setting (→P.608). (It remains off even if the power switch is turned to ON again after the power switch has been turned off.) Vehicles without the multimedia display or rear camera: How- ever, the system will automati- cally turn on (enabled) and the SUBARU Parking Assist OFF indicator will turn off if the shift position is changed to R. When the shift position is R, the SUBARU Parking Assist cannot be turned on or off. The setting of SUBARU Parking Assist itself will not change. WARNING ■ Cautions regarding the use of the system There is a limit to the degree of recognition accuracy and control performance that this system can provide, do not overly rely on this system. The driver is always responsible for paying attention to the vehicle’s surroundings and driving safely. ■ To ensure the system can operate properly Make sure to observe the follow- ing precautions. The system may not operate properly and may lead to an unexpected accident. When these precautions cannot be observed, turn the system off. ● Do not damage the sensors, and always keep them clean. ● Do not attach a sticker or install an electronic component, such as a backlit license plate (espe- cially fluorescent type), fog lights, fender pole or wireless antenna near a radar sensor. ● Do not subject the surrounding area of the sensor to a strong impact. If subjected to an impact, have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer. If the front or rear bumper needs to be removed/installed or replaced, contact your SUBARU dealer. ● Do not modify, disassemble or paint the sensors. ● Do not attach a license plate cover. ● Keep your tires properly inflated. ● Do not install a suspension other than a genuine suspen- sion. ■ Notes when washing the vehi- cle ●When using a high pressure washer to wash the vehicle, do not spray the sensors directly, as doing so may cause a sensor to malfunction. WARNING 5-4. Using the driving support systems ● It may be difficult to hear the 343 ●When using steam to clean the vehicle, do not direct steam too close to the sensors as doing so may cause a sensor to malfunc- tion. ■ The system can be operated when ●The power switch is in ON. ●The SUBARU Parking Assist is on. ●The vehicle speed is less than about 6 mph (10 km/h). ●A shift position other than P is selected. ●Vehicles without the multimedia display or rear camera: The sys- tem will automatically turn on (enabled) and the SUBARU Park- ing Assist OFF indicator will turn off if the shift position is changed to R. The setting of SUBARU Parking Assist itself will not change. ■ Sensor detection information ●The sensor’s detection areas are limited to the areas around the vehicle’s front and rear bumpers. ●Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the ability of a sensor to cor- rectly detect an object. ●Objects may not be detected if they are too close to the sensor. ●There will be a short delay between object detection and dis- play. Even at low speeds, there is a possibility that the object will come within the sensor’s detection areas before the display is shown and the warning beep sounds. ●It might be difficult to hear the buzzer due to the volume of the audio system or air flow noise of the air conditioning system. sound of this system due to the buzzers of other systems. ● If the meter malfunctions, the buzzer may not sound. ■ Objects which the system may not be properly detected The shape of the object may pre- vent the sensor from detecting it. Pay particular attention to the follow- ing objects: ●Wires, fences, ropes, etc. ● Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb sound waves ●Sharply-angled objects ●Low objects ● Tall objects with upper sections projecting outwards in the direc- tion of your vehicle People may not be detected if they are wearing certain types of cloth- ing. 5 ■ Situations in which the system may not operate properly Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the ability of a sensor to correctly detect objects. Particular instances where this may occur are listed below. ●There is dirt, snow, water drops or ice on a sensor. (Cleaning the sensors will resolve this problem.) ●A sensor is frozen. (Thawing the area will resolve this problem.) In especially cold weather, if a sensor is frozen the sensor dis- play may be displayed abnormally, or objects, such as a wall, may not be detected. ●When a sensor or the area around a sensor is extremely hot or cold. 344 5-4. Using the driving support systems ● If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load ● If the vehicle cannot be driven in a stable manner, such as when the vehicle has been in an accident or is malfunctioning ●When tire chains, compact spare tire or an emergency tire puncture ●On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass. ●When vehicle horns, vehicle detectors, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large vehicles, the clear- ance sonar of other vehicles or other devices which produce ultra- sonic waves are near the vehicle ●A sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain. ●If objects draw too close to the sensor. ●When a pedestrian is wearing clothing that does not reflect ultra- sonic waves (ex. skirts with gath- ers or frills). ●When objects that are not perpen- dicular to the ground, not perpen- dicular to the vehicle traveling direction, uneven, or waving are in the detection range. ●When strong winds are blowing ●When driving in inclement weather such as fog, snow or a sandstorm ●When an object that cannot be detected is between the vehicle and a detected object ●If an object such as a vehicle, motorcycle, bicycle or pedestrian cuts in front of the vehicle or runs out from the side of the vehicle ●If the orientation of a sensor has been changed due to a collision or other impact ●When equipment such as a towing eyelet, transport hook, bumper protector, bumper trim, bicycle carrier or snow-removal device (snow plow) is installed near the sensor repair kit are used ●When towing with the vehicle ■ Situations in which the system may operate even if there is no possibility of a collision In some situations, such as the fol- lowing, the system may operate even though there is no possibility of a collision. ●When driving on a narrow road ●When driving toward a banner, flag, low-hanging branch or boom barrier (such as those used at rail- road crossings, toll gates and parking lots) ●When there is a rut or hole in the surface of the road ●When driving on a metal cover (grating), such as those used for drainage ditches ●When driving up or down a steep slope ● If a sensor is hit by a large amount of water, such as when driving on a flooded road ●There is dirt, snow, water drops or ice on a sensor. (Cleaning the sensors will resolve this problem.) ●A sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain ●When driving in inclement weather 5-4. Using the driving support systems 345 such as fog, snow or a sandstorm ●When strong winds are blowing ●When vehicle horns, vehicle detectors, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large vehicles, the clear- ance sonar of other vehicles or other devices which produce ultra- sonic waves are near the vehicle ●If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load ●If the orientation of a sensor has been changed due to a collision or other impact ●The vehicle is approaching a tall or curved curb ●Driving close to columns (H- shaped steel beams, etc.) in multi- story parking garages, construc- tion sites, etc. ●If the vehicle cannot be driven in a stable manner, such as when the vehicle has been in an accident or is malfunctioning ●On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass ●When tire chains, compact spare tire or an emergency tire puncture repair kit are used ●When towing with the vehicle Sensor detection display, object distance ■ Detection range of the sen- sors ▶ Vehicles without Advanced Park 5 Approximately 3.3 ft. (100 cm) Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm) Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm) The diagram shows the detection range of the sensors. Note that the sensors cannot detect objects that are extremely close to the vehicle. The range of the sensors may change depending on the shape of the object, etc. 346 5-4. Using the driving support systems ▶ Vehicles with Advanced Park Approximately 6.6 ft. (200 cm) The diagram shows the detection range of the sensors. Note that the sensors cannot detect objects that are extremely close to the vehicle. The range of the sensors may change depending on the shape of the object, etc. ■ The distance and buzzer ▶ Vehicles without Advanced Park Approximate distance to obstacle Buzzer Front center sensor: Approximately 3.3 ft. (100 cm) to 2.0 ft. (60 cm)* Rear center sensor: Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm) to 2.0 ft. (60 cm)* Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm) to 1.5 ft. (45 cm)* Approximately 1.5 ft. (45 cm) to 1.0 ft. (30 cm)* Approximately less than 1.0 ft. (30 cm) Slow Medium Fast Continuous *: Automatic buzzer mute function is enabled. (→P.348) 5-4. Using the driving support systems ▶ Vehicles with Advanced Park Approximate distance to obstacle Buzzer Front center sensor: Approximately 6.6 ft. (200 cm) to 3.3 ft. (100 cm)* Rear center sensor: Approximately 6.6 ft. (200 cm) to 4.9 ft. (150 cm)* 347 Corner sensor: Approximately 6.6 ft. (200 cm) to 2.0 ft. (60 cm)* Side sensor: Approximately 6.6 ft. (200 cm) to 5.4 ft. (165 cm)* Front center sensor: Approximately 3.3 ft. (100 cm) to 2.0 ft. (60 cm)* Rear center sensor: Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm) to 2.0 ft. (60 cm)* Side sensor: Approximately 5.4 ft. (165 cm) to 2.0 ft. (60 cm)* Except side sensor: Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm) to 1.5 ft. (45 cm)* Side sensor: Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm) to 1.3 ft. (40 cm)* Does not sound (Display only) 5 Slow Medium 348 5-4. Using the driving support systems Approximate distance to obstacle Except side sensor: Approximately 1.5 ft. (45 cm) to 1.0 ft. (30 cm)* Side sensor: Approximately 1.3 ft. (40 cm) to 1.0 ft. (30 cm)* Approximately less than 1.0 ft. (30 cm) Fast Continuous Buzzer *: Automatic buzzer mute function is enabled. (→P.348) SUBARU Parking Assist buzzer A buzzer sounds when the sen- sors are operating. ⚫ The buzzer beeps faster as the vehicle approaches a static object. When the vehicle comes within the approximately 1.0 ft. (30 cm) of the object, the buzzer will sound continu- ously. ⚫ When 2 or more sensors simultaneously detect a static object, the buzzer sounds for the nearest object. ⚫ After a buzzer begins sound- ing, if the distance between the vehicle and the detected a static object does not become shorter, the buzzer will be muted automatically. (auto- matic buzzer mute function) ■ Adjusting the buzzer volume The buzzer volume of the SUBARU Parking Assist, RCTA, and RCD* can all be changed at once from the customize settings. (→P.608) *: If equipped ■ Muting a buzzer When the temporary mute switch is displayed on the multimedia display, this switch can be pressed to tem- porarily mute the buzzer. Select the switch to mute a buzzer of the SUBARU Parking Assist, RCTA, and RCD* all together. ●Mute will be automatically can- celed in the following situations: • When the shift position is changed. • When the vehicle speed exceeds a certain speed. • When there is a malfunction in a sensor or the system is temporar- ily unavailable. • When the operating function is disabled manually. • When the power switch is turned off. *: If equipped 5-4. Using the driving support systems SUBARU Parking Assist object warning function (vehicles with Advanced Park) The object warning function informs the driver of the exis- tence of objects along the side 349 of the vehicle, using a display and buzzer, if the objects are within the estimated path of the vehicle. Object Calculated vehicle route When the vehicle is moving, the side sensors or side cameras can detect objects. While the vehicle is moving, if a detected object can no longer be detected by the side sensors or side cameras, the loca- tion of the object relative to the vehicle is estimated. If the object is determined to be in the estimated path of the vehicle, the object warning function will operate. 5 Object detected by side sensors or side cameras 1 The vehicle is stopped and objects along the sides of the vehicle are not detected. 2 Objects are detected as the vehicle is moving. 3 Even though the objects are outside of the detection area of the side sensors or side cameras, a warning is displayed and a buzzer sounds. 350 5-4. Using the driving support systems ■ Object warning function operat- ing conditions ● The vehicle moves about 23.0 ft. (7 m) after the EV system is started. ● The R shift position is selected. ●After the D shift position has been selected, the vehicle has moved 23.0 ft. (7 m) or less. ● switch has been pressed and the multimedia display is dis- played. ● The front or rear sensor detects a stationary object. ■ Detection of objects along the sides of the vehicle ●Objects along the sides of the vehicle are not instantaneously detected. The location of objects in relation to the vehicle is esti- mated after they are first detected by the front or rear side sensors, or side cameras. Therefore, after the power switch is changed to ON, even if an object is along the side of the vehicle, it may not be detected until the vehicle has been driven a small amount and the side sensors or side cameras completely scan the areas along the sides of the vehicle. ●If a vehicle, person, animal, etc., is detected by a side sensors or side cameras, but then leaves the detection area of the side sensors or side cameras, the system will assume the object has not moved. WARNING ■ Side sensors and side cam- eras In situations such as the following, the function may not operate cor- rectly, possibly leading to an acci- dent. Proceed carefully. ●When starting off shortly after the power switch is turned to ON and a small vehicle or other object which cannot be detected by a front side sensor is next to the vehicle. In the situation shown in the fol- lowing illustration, even if the vehicle starts off, the vehicle on the left will not be detected and the object warning function will not operate. ●When an object or person is in a position which cannot be detected by the side sensors or side cameras. ●When, after the side sensors have completed scanning the areas along the sides of the vehicle, a vehicle, person, or other object approaches the side of the vehicle and cannot be detected. ●When the outside rear view mir- ror is closed, the side sensors or side cameras cannot detect objects. ● If the 12-volt battery was dis- charged or has been removed and installed, fold and extend the outside rear view mirrors. 5-4. Using the driving support systems 351 RCTA (Rear Cross Traf- fic Alert) System components The RCTA function uses the BSM rear side radar sen- sors installed behind the rear bumper. This function is intended to assist the driver in checking areas that are not easily visible when backing up. WARNING ■ Cautions regarding the use of the system The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your sur- roundings. The RCTA function is only a sup- plementary function which alerts the driver that a vehicle is approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle. As the RCTA function may not function correctly under certain conditions, the driver’s own visual confirmation of safety is neces- sary. Over reliance on this function may lead to an accident resulting death or serious injury. ■ To ensure the system can operate properly →P.332 Meter control switches Operate the meter control switches to enable/disable the RCTA func- tion on the multi-information dis- 5 play. Outside rear view mirror indi- cators If a vehicle is detected as approaching from the left or right behind the vehicle, both outside rear view mirror indicators (→P.150) will blink and a buzzer will sound. Multimedia display If a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle is detected, the RCTA icon (→P.352) for the detected side will be displayed on the multimedia dis- play. This illustration* shows an example of a vehicle approaching from both sides of the vehicle. *: Depending on the vehicle grade and equipped options, the actual screen may be different from this illustration. 352 5-4. Using the driving support systems Driving assist information indicator Illuminates when the RCTA is turned off. At this time, a message will be displayed on the multi-infor- mation display. Turning the RCTA func- tion on/off The RCTA can be enabled/dis- abled through a customize set- ting. (→P.608) When the RCTA function is off, the driving assist information indicator (→P.150) will illuminate and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display. Each time the power switch is turned to ON, the RCTA function is enabled. ■ Outside rear view mirror indica- tor visibility In strong sunlight, the outside rear view mirror indicator may be difficult to see. ■ Hearing the RCTA buzzer The RCTA buzzer may be difficult to hear over loud noises, such as if the audio system volume is high. ■ Rear side radar sensors →P.332 right or left at the rear of the vehicle and alerts the driver of the presence of such vehicles by flashing the outside rear view mirror indicators and sounding a buzzer. Approaching vehicles Detection areas of approach- ing vehicles ■ RCTA icon display When a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle is detected, the following will be displayed on the multimedia display. • Example (Panoramic view monitor): Vehicles are approaching from both sides of the vehicle RCTA function ■ Operation of the RCTA function The RCTA function uses rear side radar sensors to detect vehicles approaching from the 5-4. Using the driving support systems 353 ■ RCTA function detection areas The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below. The buzzer can alert the driver of faster vehicles approaching from farther away. Example: (if equipped) can be adjusted all together through a customize set- ting. (→P.608) ■ Muting a buzzer temporarily When an object is detected, the temporary mute switch is displayed on the multimedia display. Select the switch to mute the buzzer of the SUBARU Parking Assist, RCTA, and RCD (if equipped) all together. Mute will be canceled automatically in the following situations: ●When the shift position is changed. ●When the vehicle speed exceeds a certain speed. ●When there is a malfunction in a sensor or the system is temporar- ily unavailable. ●When the operating function is Approaching vehicle speed 34 mph (56 km/h) (fast) 5 mph (8 km/h) (slow) Approximate alert distance 98 ft. (30 m) 13 ft. (4 m) disabled manually. 5 ●When the power switch is turned off. ■ Conditions under which the system will not detect a vehicle The RCTA function is not designed to detect the following types of vehi- cles and/or objects: ●Vehicles approaching from directly ■ The RCTA function is opera- tional when The RCTA function operates when all of the following conditions are met: ●The power switch is in ON. ● The RCTA function is on. ● The shift position is in R. ●The vehicle speed is less than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h). ●The approaching vehicle speed is between approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) and 34 mph (56 km/h). ■ Setting the buzzer volume The buzzer volume of the RCTA, SUBARU Parking Assist, and RCD behind ●Vehicles backing up in a parking space next to your vehicle ●Vehicles that the sensors cannot detect due to obstructions ●Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects* 354 5-4. Using the driving support systems ●Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, etc.* ●Vehicles moving away from your vehicle ●Vehicles approaching from the parking spaces next to your vehi- cle* ●The distance between the sensor and approaching vehicle gets too close *: Depending on the conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur. ■ Situations in which the system may not operate properly The RCTA function may not detect vehicles correctly in the following situations: ●When the sensor is misaligned due to a strong impact to the sen- sor or its surrounding area ●When mud, snow, ice, a sticker, etc.,is covering the sensor or sur- rounding area on the position above the rear bumper ●When driving on a road surface that is wet with standing water during bad weather, such as heavy rain, snow, or fog ●When multiple vehicles are approaching with only a small gap between each vehicle ●When a vehicle is approaching at high speed ●When equipment that may obstruct a sensor is installed, such as a towing eyelet, bumper pro- tector (an additional trim strip, etc.), bicycle carrier, or snow plow ●When backing up on a slope with a sharp change in grade ●When backing out of a sharp angle parking spot ● Immediately after the RCTA func- tion is turned on ● Immediately after the EV system is started with the RCTA function on ●When the sensors cannot detect a vehicle due to obstructions ●When towing with the vehicle ●When there is a significant differ- ence in height between your vehi- cle and the vehicle that enters the detection area ●When a sensor or the area around a sensor is extremely hot or cold ● If the suspension has been modi- fied or tires of a size other than specified are installed ● If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load ●When turning while backing up 5-4. Using the driving support systems 355 ●When a vehicle turns into the detection area ■ Situations in which the system may operate even if there is no possibility of a collision Instances of the RCTA function unnecessary detecting a vehicle and/or object may increase in the following situations: ●When the parking space faces a street and vehicles are being driven on the street ●When the distance between your vehicle and metal objects, such as a guardrail, wall, sign, or parked vehicle, which may reflect electri- cal waves toward the rear of the vehicle, is short ●When equipment that may obstruct a sensor is installed, such as a towing eyelet, bumper pro- tector (an additional trim strip, etc.), bicycle carrier, or snow plow ●When a vehicle passes by the side of your vehicle 5 ●When a detected vehicle turns while approaching the vehicle ●When there are spinning objects near your vehicle such as the fan of an air conditioning unit ●When water is splashed or sprayed toward the rear bumper, such as from a sprinkler ●Moving objects (flags, exhaust fumes, large rain droplets or snowflakes, rain water on the road surface, etc.) ●When the distance between your vehicle and a guardrail, wall, etc., that enters the detection area is short ●Gratings and gutters 356 5-4. Using the driving support systems ●When a sensor or the area around a sensor is extremely hot or cold ●If the suspension has been modi- fied or tires of a size other than specified are installed ●If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load ●When towing with the vehicle. RCD (Rear Camera Detection)* *: If equipped When the vehicle is backing up, the rear camera detec- tion function can detect pedestrians in the detec- tion area behind the vehicle. If a pedestrian is detected, a buzzer will sound and an icon will be displayed on the multimedia display to inform the driver of the pedestrian. WARNING ■ Cautions regarding the use of the system The recognition and control capa- bilities for this system are limited. The driver should always drive safely by always being responsi- ble without over relying on the system and have a understanding of the surrounding situations. ■ To ensure the system can operate properly Observe the following, otherwise there is the danger that could lead to an accident. ● Always clean the camera with- out damaging it. ● Do not install market electronic parts (such as Illuminated license plate, fog lamps, etc.) in the camera vicinity. WARNING 5-4. Using the driving support systems RCD display 357 ● Do not subject the camera vicin- ity to strong impacts. If the vicin- ity is subjected to a strong impact, have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer. ● Do not disassemble, remodel or paint the camera. ● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the camera. ● Do not install market protection parts (bumper trim, etc.) to the rear bumper. ● Maintain suitable tire air pres- sure. ● Make sure the back door is completely closed. ■ RCD function is turned off In the following situations the sys- tem turns off. The RCD function may not operate properly and thus there is the danger that an accident may occur. ●The contents mentioned above are not observed ●Suspensions other than the genuine parts are installed System component Location of the rear camera Pedestrian detection icon Displayed automatically when a pedestrian is detected behind the vehicle. Turning the RCD function on/off 5 The RCD function can be enabled/disabled through a cus- tomize setting. (→P.608) When the RCD function is dis- abled, the driving assist informa- tion indicator (→P.150) illuminates, and a message is displayed on the multi-informa- tion display. Each time the power switch is turned off then changed to ON, the RCD function will be enabled auto- matically. When a pedestrian is detected If a pedestrian is in the area behind the vehicle or if the rear camera detected that a pedes- trian is approaching the vehicle 358 5-4. Using the driving support systems from behind, the system urges caution from the driver by sounding the buzzer and dis- playing the detection of a pedes- trian on the multimedia display as follows: If a pedestrian is detected in area Buzzer: Sounds repeatedly Pedestrian detection icon: Blinks If a pedestrian is detected in area Buzzer (When the vehicle is stationary): Sounds 3 times Buzzer (When the vehicle is backing up, when a pedes- trian approaches the rear of the vehicle): Sounds repeat- edly Pedestrian detection icon: Blinks If the system determines that your vehicle may collide with a pedestrian in area Buzzer: Sounds repeatedly Pedestrian detection icon: Blinks ■ The rear camera detection func- tion is operational when ●The power switch is in ON. ● RCD function is on. ●The shift position is in R. ●Advanced Park is not operating. ■ Setting the buzzer volume The buzzer volume of the SUBARU Parking Assist, RCTA, and RCD can all be changed at once from the cus- tomize settings. (→P.608) ■ Muting a buzzer temporarily When an object is detected, the temporary mute switch is displayed on the multimedia display. Select the switch to mute a buzzer of the SUBARU Parking Assist, RCTA, and RCD all together. Mute will be automatically canceled in the following situations: ●When the shift position is changed. ●When the vehicle speed exceeds a certain speed. ●When there is a malfunction in a sensor or the system is temporar- ily unavailable. ●When the operating function is disabled manually. ●When the power switch is turned off. ■ Situations in which the system may not operate properly ●Some pedestrians, such as the following, may not be detected by the rear camera detection func- tion, preventing the function from operating properly: • Pedestrians who are bending for- ward or squatting 5-4. Using the driving support systems 359 • Pedestrians who are lying down • Pedestrians who are running • Pedestrians who suddenly appear from the shadow of the vehicle or a building • Pedestrians who are riding mov- ing objects such as a bicycle or skateboard • Pedestrians wearing oversized clothing such as a rain coat, long skirt, etc., making their silhouette obscure • Pedestrians whose body is par- tially hidden by an object, such as a cart or umbrella • Pedestrians which are obscured by darkness, such as at night ●In some situations, such as the following, pedestrians may not be detected by the rear camera detection function, preventing the function from operating properly: • When backing up in inclement weather (rain, snow, fog, etc.) • The lens is dirty (by dirt or snow- melting agent, etc.) or scratched • When a very bright light, such as the sun, or the headlights of another vehicle, shines directly into the rear camera • When backing up in a place where the surrounding brightness changes suddenly, such as at the entrance or exit of a garage or underground parking lot • When backing up in a dim envi- ronment such as during dusk or in an underground parking lot • When the camera position and direction are deviated • When a towing hook is attached • When water droplets are flowing on the camera lens • When the vehicle height is extremely changed (nose up, nose down, etc.). • When tire chains or an emergency tire puncture repair kit are used • When the suspension has been lowered or tires that have a differ- ent size than the genuine tires are installed • When an aftermarket electronic part (backlit license plate, fog light, etc.) is installed near the rear camera • If a bumper protector, such as an additional trim strip, is installed to the rear bumper • When towing with the vehicle ■ Situations in which the system may operate unexpectedly ●Even though there are no pedes- trians in the detection area, some objects, such as the following, may be detected, possibly caus- ing the rear camera detection function to operate. • Three dimensional objects, such as a pole, traffic cone, fence, or parked vehicle • Moving objects, such as a car or motorcycle • Objects moving toward your vehi- cle when backing up, such as flags or puddles (or airborne mat- ter, such as smoke, steam, rain, or snow) 5 • Cobblestone or gravel roads, tram rails, road repairs, white lines, pedestrian crossings or fallen leaves on the road • Metal covers (gratings), such as those used for drainage ditches • Objects reflected in a puddle or on a wet road surface • Shadows on the road ● In some situations, such as the following, the rear camera detec- tion function may operate even though there are no pedestrians in the detection area. • When backing up toward the road- side or a bump on the road • When backing up toward an incline/decline • When the vehicle height is extremely changed (nose up, nose down, etc.) • When an aftermarket electronic part (backlit license plate, fog light, etc.) is installed near the rear camera • If a bumper protector, such as an additional trim strip, is installed to the rear bumper 360 5-4. Using the driving support systems • If the orientation of the rear cam- era has been changed due to a collision or other impact, or removal and installation • If a towing eyelet is installed to the rear of the vehicle • When water is flowing over the rear camera lens • The lens is dirty (by dirt or snow- melting agent, etc.) • If there is a flashing light in the detection area, such as the emer- gency flashers of another vehicle • When tire chains or an emergency tire puncture repair kit are used • When towing with the vehicle ●Situations in which the rear cam- era detection function may be diffi- cult to notice • The buzzer may be difficult to hear if the surrounding area is noisy or the audio system volume is high. • If the temperature in the cabin is extremely high or low, the multi- media display may not operate correctly. PKSB (Parking Sup- port Brake) The PKSB (Parking Sup- port Brake) is a system that issues warnings and auto- matically performs braking to help reduce collision damage with operation tar- gets that were detected when traveling at a low speed such as when park- ing. PKSB (Parking Support Brake) system The system has detected the following as operation targets. (The operation targets vary depending on the function.) ⚫ Parking Support Brake func- tion (static objects front and rear of the vehicle): →P.365 ⚫ Parking Support Brake func- tion (moving vehicles rear of the vehicle): →P.369 ⚫ Parking Support Brake func- tion (pedestrians rear of the vehicle): →P.371 ⚫ Parking Support Brake func- tion (static objects around the vehicle) (vehicles with the Advanced Park): →P.366 WARNING 5-4. Using the driving support systems ●When inspecting the vehicle 361 ■ Cautions regarding the use of the system Do not overly rely on the system, as doing so may lead to an acci- dent. Always drive while checking the safety of the surroundings of the vehicle. Depending on the vehicle and road conditions, weather, etc., the system may not operate. The detection capabilities of sen- sors and radars are limited. Always drive while checking the safety of the surroundings of the vehicle. ●The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive carefully, taking care to observe your surroundings. The Parking Support Brake system is designed to provide support to lessen the severity of collisions. However, it may not operate in some situations. ●The Parking Support Brake sys- tem is not designed to stop the vehicle completely. Additionally, even if the system has stopped the vehicle, it is necessary to depress the brake pedal imme- diately as brake control will be canceled after approximately 2 seconds. ● It is extremely dangerous to check the system operations by intentionally driving the vehicle into the direction of a wall, etc. Never attempt such actions. ■ When to disable the Parking Support Brake In the following situations, disable the Parking Support Brake as the system may operate even though there is no possibility of a colli- sion. using a chassis roller, chassis dynamo or free roller ●When loading the vehicle onto a boat, truck or other transport vessel ● If the suspension has been modified or tires of a size other than specified are installed ● If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load ●When equipment such as a tow- ing hook, transport hook, bumper protector, bumper trim, bicycle carrier or snow-removal device (snow plow) is installed near the sensor ●When using automatic car washing devices 5 ● If the vehicle cannot be driven in a stable manner, such as when the vehicle has been in an acci- dent or is malfunctioning ●When the vehicle is driven in a sporty manner or off-road ●When the tires are not properly inflated ●When the tires are very worn ●When tire chains, a compact spare tire or an emergency tire puncture repair kit are used ●When towing with the vehicle 362 5-4. Using the driving support systems WARNING ■ Precautions for the suspen- sion Do not modify the suspension of the vehicle. If the height or tilt of the vehicle is changed, the sen- sors may not be able to detect detectable objects and the system may not operate correctly, possi- bly leading to an accident. Enabling/Disabling the Parking Support Brake The Parking Support Brake function can be enabled/dis- abled through a customize set- ting. (→P.608) When the PKSB (Parking Sup- port Brake) is disabled, the driv- ing assist information indicator (→P.150) illuminates, and a message is displayed on the multi-information display. If the system switches to OFF (disabled) and the PKSB (Park- ing Support Brake) is stopped, the PKSB (Parking Support Brake) will not be re-enabled until ON (enabled) is selected again from the customize setting (→P.608). (It remains off even if the power switch is turned to ON again after the power switch has been turned off.) Display and buzzer for EV system output restriction control and brake control If the EV system output restric- tion control or brake control operates, a buzzer will sound and a message will be displayed on the multimedia display and multi-information display, to alert the driver. Depending on the situation, out- put restriction control operates to either limit acceleration or restrict output as much as possi- ble. ⚫ EV system output restriction control is operating (accelera- tion restriction) Acceleration greater than a certain amount is restricted by the system. Multimedia display: No warning dis- played Multi-information display: “Object Detected Acceleration Reduced” Driving assist information indicator: Not illuminated Buzzer: Does not sound ⚫ EV system output restriction control is operating (output restricted as much as possi- ble) The system has determined that stronger-than-normal brake opera- tion is necessary. Multimedia display (vehicles with panoramic view monitor or parking assist monitor with RCD [Rear Camera Detection]): “BRAKE!” Multi-information display: “BRAKE!” 5-4. Using the driving support systems System overview 363 Driving assist information indicator: Not illuminated Buzzer: Short beep ⚫ Brake control is operating The system determined that emer- gency braking is necessary. Multimedia display (vehicles with panoramic view monitor or parking assist monitor with RCD [Rear Camera Detection]): “BRAKE!” Multi-information display: “BRAKE!” Driving assist information indicator: Not illuminated Buzzer: Short beep ⚫ Vehicle stopped by system operation The vehicle has been stopped by brake control operation. Multimedia display (vehicles with panoramic view monitor or parking assist monitor with RCD [Rear Camera Detection]): “Press Brake Pedal” Multi-information display: “Acceler- ator Pedal is Pressed Press Brake Pedal” If the accelerator pedal is not depressed, “Press Brake Pedal” will be displayed. Driving assist information indicator: Illuminated Buzzer: Sounds repeatedly If the Parking Support Brake determines that a collision with a detected object or pedestrian is possible, the EV system output will be restricted to restrain any increase in the vehicle speed. (EV system output restriction control: See figure 2 below.) Additionally, if the accelerator pedal continues to be depressed, the brakes will be applied automatically to reduce the vehicle speed. (Brake con- trol: See figure 3.) ⚫ Figure 1: When the PKSB (Parking Support Brake) is not operating 5 EV system output Braking force Time ⚫ Figure 2: When EV system output restriction control oper- ates 364 5-4. Using the driving support systems detected object is high) Brake control begins operat- ing (System determines that possibility of collision with detected object is extremely high) EV system output Braking force Time EV system output restriction control begins operating (System determines that pos- sibility of collision with detected object is high) ⚫ Figure 3: When EV system output restriction control and brake control operates EV system output Braking force Time EV system output restriction control begins operating (System determines that pos- sibility of collision with ■ If the Parking Support Brake has operated If the vehicle is stopped due to oper- ation of the Parking Support Brake, the Parking Support Brake will be disabled and the driving assist infor- mation indicator will illuminate. In addition, even when the PKSB (Parking Support Brake) operates, the brake control is canceled after approximately 2 seconds to start off. Furthermore, the brake control also can be canceled by depressing the brake pedal. Depressing the accel- erator pedal again after that allows the vehicle to start off. ■ Re-enabling the Parking Sup- port Brake To re-enable the Parking Support Brake when it is disabled due to operation of the PKSB (Parking Support Brake), either enable the system again (→P.362), or turn the power switch off and then back to ON. Additionally, if any of the following conditions are met, the system will be re-enabled automatically and the driving assist information indicator will turn off (→P.150): ● The P shift position is selected ● Drive with no operation targets in the traveling direction of the vehi- cle ● Change the traveling direction of the vehicle 5-4. Using the driving support systems 365 ■ Buzzer Regardless of whether the SUBARU Parking Assist is enabled or not (→P.341), if the PKSB (Parking Support Brake) system is enabled (→P.362), the buzzer will sound to notify the driver of the approximate distance to the object when the brake control and the EV system output restriction control are oper- ated. Parking Support Brake function (static objects front and rear of the vehicle/static objects around the vehicle*) *: If equipped If the sensors detect a static object, such as a wall, in the traveling direction of the vehicle and the system determines that a collision may occur due to the vehi- cle suddenly moving for- ward due to an accidental accelerator pedal operation, the vehicle moving the 5 unintended direction due to the wrong shift position being selected, or while parking or traveling at low speeds, the system will operate to lessen the impact with the detected static object and reduce the resulting damage. Examples of function operation (static objects front and rear of the vehi- cle) This function will operate in situ- ations such as the following if an object is detected in the travel- ing direction of the vehicle. 366 5-4. Using the driving support systems ■ When traveling at a low speed and the brake pedal is not depressed, or is depressed late ■ When the accelerator pedal is depressed excessively ■ When the vehicle moves forward due to the incorrect shift position being selected Examples of function operation (static objects around the vehicle) (Vehi- cles with Advanced Park) The system will operate in the following situations when a sta- tionary object is detected in the surrounding area. 5-4. Using the driving support systems 367 ■ When moving forward and a collision with a stationary object on the inner side of a turn is likely ■ When reversing and a colli- sion with a stationary object on the outer side of a turn is likely Types of sensors →P.341 WARNING ■ To ensure the system can operate properly →P.342 ■ If the Parking Support Brake function operates unneces- sarily, such as at a railroad crossing →P.364 ■ Notes when washing the vehi- cle →P.342 ■ The Parking Support Brake function (static objects front and rear of the vehicle) will 5 operate when The function will operate when the driving assist information indicator is not illuminated (→P.148, 150) and all of the following conditions are met: ●EV system output restriction con- trol • The Parking Support Brake is enabled. • The vehicle speed is approxi- mately 9 mph (15 km/h) or less. • There is a static object in the trav- eling direction of the vehicle and approximately 6 to 13 ft. (2 to 4 m) away. • The Parking Support Brake deter- mines that a stronger-than-nor- mal brake operation is necessary to avoid a collision. ●Brake control • EV system output restriction con- trol is operating. • The Parking Support Brake deter- mines that an immediate brake operation is necessary to avoid a collision. 368 5-4. Using the driving support systems ■ The Parking Support Brake function (static objects around the vehicle) will operating when (Vehicles with Advanced Park) This function is operable when any of the following conditions is met in addition to the operating conditions for static objects in front and rear of the vehicle. ●After the EV system has been started, the vehicle has moved approximately 23.0 ft. (7 m) or less ● The R shift position is selected ●After the shift position has been changed from R to D, the vehicle has moved approximately 23.0 ft. (7 m) or less ■ The Parking Support Brake function (static objects front and rear of the vehicle/static objects around the vehicle) will stop operating when The function will stop operating if any of the following conditions are met: ●EV system output restriction con- trol • The Parking Support Brake is dis- abled. • The system determines that the collision has become avoidable with normal brake operation. • The static object is no longer approximately 6 to 13 ft. (2 to 4 m) away from the vehicle or in the traveling direction of the vehicle. ●Brake control • The Parking Support Brake is dis- abled. • Approximately 2 seconds have elapsed since the vehicle was stopped by brake control. • The brake pedal is depressed after the vehicle is stopped by brake control. • The static object is no longer approximately 6 to 13 ft. (2 to 4 m) away from the vehicle or in the traveling direction of the vehicle. ■ Detection range of the Parking Support Brake function (static objects front and rear of the vehicle/static objects around the vehicle) The detection range of the Parking Support Brake function (static objects front and rear of the vehi- cle/static objects around the vehicle) differs from the detection range of the SUBARU Parking Assist (→P.345). Therefore, even if the SUBARU Parking Assist detects an object and provides a warning, the Parking Support Brake function (static objects front and rear of the vehicle/static objects around the vehicle) may not start operating. ■ Situations in which the system may not operate properly →P.343 ■ Situations in which the system may operate even if there is no possibility of a collision →P.344 ■ Situations in which the system may operate even though there is no possibility of a collision (static objects around the vehi- cle) (vehicles with Advanced Park) In addition to the situations in which static objects in front and rear of the vehicle (→P.367) may not be detected, objects may not be detected by the sensors in the fol- lowing situations: ●When moving sideways, such as when parallel parking (→390) ■ Detection of objects along the sides of the vehicle (static objects around the vehicle) (vehicles with Advanced Park) ●Objects along the sides of the vehicle are not instantaneously detected. The location of objects in relation to the vehicle is esti- mated after they are first detected by the front or rear side sensors, or side cameras. Therefore, after 5-4. Using the driving support systems 369 the power switch is changed to ON, even if an object is along the side of the vehicle, it may not be detected until the vehicle has been driven a small amount and the side sensors or side cameras completely scan the areas along the sides of the vehicle. ●If a vehicle, person, animal, etc., is detected by a side sensors or side cameras, but then leaves the detection area of the side sensors or side cameras, the system will assume the object has not moved. Parking Support Brake function (moving vehi- cles rear of the vehi- cle) If a rear radar sensor detects a vehicle approach- ing from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle and the system determines that the possibility of a collision is high, this function will perform brake control to reduce the likelihood of an impact with the approach- ing vehicle. Examples of the function 5 operation This function will operate in situ- ations such as the following if a vehicle is detected in the travel- ing direction of the vehicle. ■ When reversing, a vehicle is approaching and the brake pedal is not depressed, or is depressed late 370 5-4. Using the driving support systems Types of sensors →P.332 WARNING ■ To ensure the system can operate properly →P.332 ■ The Parking Support Brake function (moving vehicles rear of the vehicle) will operate when The function will operate when the driving assist information indicator is not illuminated (→P.148, 150) and all of the following conditions are met: ●EV system output restriction con- trol • The Parking Support Brake is enabled. • The vehicle speed is approxi- mately 9 mph (15 km/h) or less. • Vehicles are approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehi- cle at a traveling speed of approx- imately 5 mph (8 km/h) or more. • The shift position is in R. • The Parking Support Brake deter- mines that a stronger than normal brake operation is necessary to avoid a collision with an approach- ing vehicle. ●Brake control • EV system output restriction con- trol is operating. • The Parking Support Brake deter- mined that an emergency brake operation was necessary to avoid a collision with a vehicle approaching from the rear. ■ The Parking Support Brake function (moving vehicles rear of the vehicle) will stop operat- ing when The function will stop operating if any of the following conditions are met: ●EV system output restriction con- trol • The Parking Support Brake is dis- abled. • The collision becomes avoidable with normal brake operation. • A vehicle is no longer approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle. ●Brake control • The Parking Support Brake is dis- abled. • Approximately 2 seconds have elapsed since the vehicle was stopped by brake control. • The brake pedal is depressed after the vehicle is stopped by brake control. ■ Situations in which the system may not operate properly →P.354 ■ Situations in which the system may operate even if there is no possibility of a collision →P.355 5-4. Using the driving support systems 371 Parking Support Brake function (pedestrians rear of the vehicle)* *: If equipped If the rear camera sensor detects a pedestrian behind the vehicle while backing up and the system deter- mines that the possibility of colliding with the detected pedestrian is high, a buzzer will sound. If the system determines that the possi- bility of colliding with the detected pedestrian is extremely high, the brakes will be applied automati- cally to help reduce the impact of the collision. Examples of system oper- ation The system operates when an approaching pedestrian is detected behind the vehicle while backing up, and when the brake pedal is not depressed or is depressed late. Screen display of pedes- trians rear of the vehicle Displays a message to urge the driver to take evasive action when a pedestrian is detected in the detection area behind the vehicle. Pedestrian detection icon 5 “BRAKE!” WARNING ■ If the Parking Support Brake function (pedestrians rear of the vehicle) operates unnec- essarily Depress the brake pedal immedi- ately after the Parking Support Brake function (pedestrians rear of the vehicle) operates. (Opera- tion of the function is canceled by depressing the brake pedal.) ■ Correct use of the Parking Support Brake function (pedestrians rear of the vehi- cle) →P.356 372 5-4. Using the driving support systems after the vehicle is stopped by ■ The Parking Support Brake function (pedestrians rear of the vehicle) will operate when The function will operate when the driving assist information indicator is not illuminated (→P.148, 150) and all of the following conditions are met: ●EV system output restriction con- trol • The Parking Support Brake is enabled. • The vehicle speed is 9 mph (15 km/h) or less. • The shift position is in R. • When a pedestrian is to the rear of the vehicle • The PKSB (Parking Support Brake) determines that a stronger- than-normal brake operation is necessary to avoid a collision. ●Brake control • EV system output restriction con- trol is operating. • The Parking Support Brake deter- mines that an emergency brake operation is necessary to avoid a collision with a pedestrian. ■ The Parking Support Brake function (pedestrians rear of the vehicle) will stop operating when The function will stop operating if any of the following conditions are met: ●EV system output restriction con- trol • The Parking Support Brake is dis- abled. • The collision becomes avoidable with normal brake operation. • The pedestrian is no longer detected behind your vehicle. ●Brake control • The Parking Support Brake is dis- abled. • Approximately 2 seconds have elapsed since the vehicle was stopped by brake control. • The brake pedal is depressed brake control. ■ Re-enabling the Parking Sup- port Brake function (pedestri- ans rear of the vehicle) →P.364 ■ Detection area of the Parking Support Brake function (pedes- trians rear of the vehicle) The detection area of the Parking Support Brake function (pedestrians rear of the vehicle) differs from the detection area of the RCD function (→P.357). Therefore, even if the RCD function detects a pedestrian and provides an alert, the Parking Support Brake function (pedestrians rear of the vehicle) may not start operating. ■ Situations in which the system may not operate properly →P.358 ■ Situations in which the system may operate unexpectedly →P.359 5-4. Using the driving support systems 373 Advanced Park* *: If equipped Function description The Advanced Park is a system which assists in a safe and smooth parking or exiting from a parking space by displaying the blind spots around the vehicle and the target parking spot through a bird’s eye view, deliv- ering operation guidance through displays and buzzer operation, and changing the shift position, operating the steering wheel, accelerator pedal, and brake pedal. Additionally, the panoramic view monitor* can display the area in front, behind, and from above the vehicle, helping confirm the condition of the area around the vehicle. The turn signal lights will blink automatically when the parking assistance starts until the vehi- cle reaches the target parking spot, to notify people around the vehicle that parking is being per- formed. Depending on the condition of the road surface or the vehicle, the distance between the vehi- cle and a parking space, etc., it may not be possible to assist in parking in the target space. Only use Advanced Park in accordance with all local road traffic laws and regulations. *: For details on the panoramic view monitor refer to “MULTIMEDIA OWNER’S MANUAL”. ■ Remote control function (if equipped) Remote control function is a system which assists in parking or exiting from a parking space selected on the center display by allowing changing the shift position, operating the steering wheel, accelerator pedal, and brake pedal from outside of the vehicle via a smartphone. The turn signal lights will blink 5 automatically when the parking assistance, except that for mov- ing the vehicle forward and backward, starts until the vehicle reaches the target parking spot, to notify people around the vehi- cle that parking is being per- formed. Preparation before using: →P.405 Functions ■ Perpendicular parking (for- ward/reverse) function Assistance is provided from the position the vehicle is stopped near the target parking space until the vehicle is in the parking space. (→P.385) 374 5-4. Using the driving support systems ■ Perpendicular exiting (for- ward/reverse) function Assistance is provided from the parked position until the vehicle is in a position where you can easily exit from the parking space. (→P.388) ■ Parallel parking function Assistance is provided from the position the vehicle is stopped near the target parking space until the vehicle is in the parking space. (→P.390) ■ Parallel exiting function Assistance is provided from the parked position until the vehicle is in a position where you can easily exit from the parking space. (→P.393) ■ Memory function Assistance is provided until the vehicle is guided into a previ- ously registered parking space. (→P.395) ■ Remote control function (if equipped) By operating a smartphone, assistance in parking or exiting from a nearby target parking space, confirmed on the screen of the smartphone, is provided from outside of the vehicle. (→P.400) WARNING ■ Cautions regarding the use of Advanced Park, including Remote control function The recognition and control capa- bilities for this system are limited. The driver should always drive safety by always being responsi- ble without over relying on the system and have a understanding of the surrounding situations. ● As with a normal vehicle, take care to observe your surround- ings while the vehicle is moving. ● Always pay attention to the vehicle’s surroundings while the system is operating and depress the brake pedal as nec- essary to slow or stop the vehi- cle. If Remote control function is in operation, use the smartphone application to cancel the opera- tion and stop the vehicle. ●When parking, make sure that the vehicle can be parked in the target parking space before beginning operation. ● Depending on the condition of the road surface or the vehicle, the distance between the vehi- cle and a parking space, etc., it may not be possible to detect a parking space or the system may not be able to provide assistance to the point the vehi- cle is fully parked. 5-4. Using the driving support systems 375 WARNING ●This system will guide the vehi- cle to appropriate positions for changing the direction of travel, however, if you feel that the vehicle is approaching too close to an adjacent parked vehicle at any time, depress the brake pedal and change the shift posi- tion. However, if this is per- formed, the number of times the vehicle changes direction may increase, and the vehicle may be parked at an angle. ●As certain objects or materials, such as the following, may not be detected, make sure to check the safety of the area around your vehicle and depress the brake pedal to stop the vehicle if it may collide with an object. If Remote control function is in operation, use the smartphone application to cancel the opera- tion and stop the vehicle. • Thin objects (wires, fences, ropes, poles, etc.) or objects that appear like thin from a cer- tain angle of approach (signs, bicycles, etc.) • Materials that absorb sound waves (cotton, snow, etc.) • Sharp-edged objects (block walls/columns, wall corners, etc.) • Objects in lower places (curb stones/blocks, stairs, parking blocks, etc.) • Tall objects with upper sections that protrude outward (beams, etc.) • Objects which are not perpen- dicular to the ground • Objects to which the vehicle is approaching diagonally ● Even if there is an object in the target parking space, it may not be detected and assistance may be performed. ● If it is likely that your vehicle will collide with a nearby vehicle, object, or person, or go over the top of a parking block, depress the brake pedal to stop the vehi- cle and press the Advanced Park main switch to disable the system. If Remote control function is in operation, use the smartphone application to cancel the opera- tion and stop the vehicle. ● Never use only the multimedia display to view the area behind the vehicle. The image dis- played may differ than the actual situation. Using only the screen when backing up may lead to an accident, such as a 5 collision with another vehicle. When backing up, make sure to look directly or use the mirrors to check the safety of the area around your vehicle, especially behind the vehicle. ●When the ambient temperature is extremely low, the screen may appear dark or the dis- played image may become unclear. Also, as moving objects may appear distorted or may not be able to be seen on the screen, make sure to directly check the safety of the area around your vehicle. 376 5-4. Using the driving support systems WARNING ● In the following situations, while the vehicle is stopped and held by Advanced Park, it may be canceled and the vehicle may start moving. Immediately depress the brake pedal. Fail- ure to do so may lead to an accident. If Remote control function is in operation, use the smartphone application to cancel the opera- tion and stop the vehicle. • When the driver’s door is opened • When operations instructed by the system are not performed within a certain amount of time • When the brake pedal is depressed and the vehicle is stopped for a certain amount of time • When the system malfunctions ●As the steering wheel will turn while this system is operating, pay attention to the following. • Be careful so that a necktie, scarf, or arm does not get caught. Keep your upper body away from the steering wheel. Also, keep children away from the steering wheel. • Long fingernails may be caught and when the steering wheel is rotating, leading to injury. • In an emergency, depress the brake pedal to stop the vehicle, and then press the Advanced Park main switch to disable the system. If Remote control function is in operation, use the smartphone application to cancel the opera- tion and stop the vehicle. ● Do not allow anyone to put their hands outside of a window while this system is operating. ■ To ensure correct operation of the Advanced Park Observe the following precau- tions. Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely and possibly cause an acci- dent. ● Do not use this system in situa- tions such as the following: • When in areas other than com- mon parking spaces • When the surface of the parking space is sand or gravel and is not clearly defined with parking space lines • When the parking space is not level, such as on a slope, or having differences in height, holes, or gutters • Mechanical parking system • Parking lot with a device which raises to contact the bottom of the vehicle • When the road surface is fro- zen, slick, or covered with snow • When it is extremely hot and the asphalt is melting • When there are objects around the vehicle • When there is an object between your vehicle and the target parking spot or within the target parking spot (within the displayed blue box) • When in high pedestrian or vehicle traffic areas 5-4. Using the driving support systems 377 WARNING • When the parking space is in a location that is difficult to park in (too narrow for your vehicle, etc.) • When images are unclear due to dirt or snow attached to the camera lens, light being shined into the camera or shadows • When tire chains or a compact spare tire is installed to the vehi- cle • When the doors or back door are not completely closed • When an arm is held outside of a window • In inclement weather such as heavy rain or snow ● Make sure to use only standard sized tires, such as those that were installed to the vehicle when it was shipped from the factory. Otherwise, Advanced Park may not operate properly. Also, when the tires have been replaced, the displayed position of the lines or box displayed on the screen may become incor- rect. When replacing the tires, contact your SUBARU dealer. ● In situations such as the follow- ing, it may not be possible for the system to provide assis- tance to a registered parking spot or to operate correctly: • When the tires are extremely worn or the tire inflation pres- sure is low • When carrying a heavy load • When the vehicle is tilted due to the carried load • When a heater is installed in the surface of the parking space (road surface freeze prevention heater) • When the wheels are mis- aligned, such after a wheel has been subjected to a strong impact • When a pedestrian or passing vehicle is detected during assis- tance • When a device, such as a tow- ing hook, bumper protector, bumper trim, bicycle carrier, snow plow, etc., is installed • When something is incorrectly detected as a parking line (light, reflections from a building, dif- ference in height on the parking surface, a gutter, painted road lines, redrawn lines, etc.) 5 If the vehicle deviates greatly from the set parking space in any situa- tion other than the above, have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer. ■ When using Remote control function (if equipped) ● Remote control function is a function of the Advanced Park system. When using Remote control function on public roads, be sure to follow all local road traffic laws and regulations. ● Remote control function can only be used after agreeing to the disclaimer of the smart- phone application. 378 5-4. Using the driving support systems WARNING ● Remote control function can only perform some driving oper- ations. It should only be oper- ated by a driver with a valid driving license. While using application, carry electronic key. While operating, do not stare at the application screen, and pay attention to the vehicle’s sur- roundings. In an emergency, cancel the Remote control func- tion operation and stop the vehi- cle. ●As with a normal vehicle, take care to observe the area around the vehicle while the vehicle is moving. ●Always pay attention to the vehicle’s surroundings while the system is operating. ● Make sure that the hood is closed before operating the sys- tem. ● Remote control function is a system which assists in remote parking or exiting operations using a smartphone. When using Remote control function, the driver must carry the elec- tronic key and smartphone and confirm the safety of the area around the vehicle. ●While using Remote control function, the vehicle can be stopped by stop continuously operating the smartphone (stop- ping movement of your finger, removing your finger from the screen, etc.). The vehicle can also be stopped by touching the cancel button on the smart- phone application, unlocking the doors using the electronic key, or opening a door. ●If it seems like your vehicle may contact an obstruction, etc., stop operating the smartphone and cancel Remote control function if necessary. ● System operation will only be performed at a fixed speed and the vehicle cannot be acceler- ated or decelerated even if the speed of continuous operation of the smartphone is increased or decreased. ● Never drive the vehicle while staring at the smartphone screen. ●When driving, make sure to directly check the safety of the area around your vehicle. ● Do not use Remote control function when passengers or pets are in the vehicle. ● In an emergency, the system can be canceled by operating a switch on the electronic key or by opening a door. ● To use Remote control function, it is necessary to have a smart- phone with the latest version of the Remote Park app. The fol- lowing operating systems are supported: • Android™ • Apple® iOS ●When registering the vehicle to the Remote Park smartphone app, disconnect any other apps which are connected to the vehicle. ● To enable Remote control func- tion, make sure to disable the Apple CarPlay connection. 5-4. Using the driving support systems 379 WARNING ●When parking, make sure that the vehicle can be parked in the target parking space before beginning operation. ●Only use Remote control func- tion on level road surfaces which are not slick. Do not use Remote control function for parking spaces on a downward or upward slope. ●While Remote control function is operating, if a malfunction or system limitation is detected, the following will occur automat- ically: • Remote control function will be canceled • The vehicle will stop • The shift position will change to P and the parking brake will be engaged • The power switch will turn off (for some malfunctions, the power switch will not turn off or cannot be turned off. Enter the vehicle and take corrective action according to the mes- sage displayed on the smart- phone.) • The doors will remain locked ●When starting Remote control function, unlock the doors with wireless remote control by elec- tronic key. ●When Remote control function is operating, the driver should remain within approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) of the vehicle. If the driver becomes more than approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) away, Remote control function will be suspended and a mes- sage will be displayed on the smartphone. Remote control function operation can be resumed by approaching the vehicle. ●The headlights will be turned on if the surrounding area is dark. ● If system operation is canceled due to a malfunction, the emer- gency flashers will flash. The emergency flashers will turn off if any of the following conditions are met: • A door is opened 5 • 3 minutes have elapsed since the emergency flashers began flashing ● Remote control function can only be started when the follow- ing conditions are met: • When the EV system is starting, after assist mode is selected • When the power switch is off NOTICE ■ Precautions for use Advanced Park If the 12-volt battery was dis- charged or has been removed and installed, fold and extend the outside rear view mirrors. ■ When using Remote control function (if equipped) 380 5-4. Using the driving support systems NOTICE ● Check the battery charge level of the smartphone before using Remote control function. If the battery of the smartphone dies while operating Remote control function, assist will be sus- pended. Also, if the battery charge level of the smartphone is 20% or less when attempting to start Remote control function, Remote control function will not be started. ●Turn on the Bluetooth communi- cation function of the smart- phone before using Remote control function. Remote con- trol function cannot be used if the Bluetooth function is off. ● Do not turn off the Bluetooth function of the smartphone or disconnect from the multimedia system while using Remote control function. If the vehicle cannot be connected to via Bluetooth, Remote control func- tion cannot be used. ●While using Remote control function, if a call is received, etc., and another app is opened, Remote control func- tion will be suspended. Assist can be resumed if the Remote Park app is reopened within 3 minutes. If 3 minutes or more elapse, assist will be canceled. ●While using Remote control function, if the home button or power button of the smartphone is pressed and the screen is locked, Remote control function will be suspended. Assist can be resumed if the Remote Park app is reopened within 3 min- utes. If 3 minutes or more elapse, assist will be canceled. ● Do not force close the Remote Park app while Remote Park is being used. If the app is force closed, assist will be canceled. ●When the ambient temperature is low, it may take time for the system to start, due to 12-volt battery charging. ● If the 12-volt battery voltage drops, assistance will be can- celed. ●When using Remote control function on a slope, the vehicle speed will be slower and the distance that the vehicle will approach objects will become longer than when on a level road surface. ● If a system temporary failure occurs, after the vehicle is stopped by the electronic park- ing brake or the shift position being changed to P, the power switch may turn off and the sys- tem may be canceled. In this case, have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer. ● If a system malfunction occurs, assistance may be temporarily suspended. If the system returns to normal, operation can be resumed. Follow the content on the smartphone screen to resume operation. ● Remote control function may not operate properly if the EV system has been started using a remote start. NOTICE 5-4. Using the driving support systems ▶ Side cameras 381 ●After Remote control function completes, the parking brake will be engaged as per regula- tions. As the parking brake may freeze and not be able to be released, avoid using Remote control function in extremely cold areas. Also, if the parking brake freezes, it may make a noise when it is released. How- ever, this does not indicate a malfunction. ● Do not use Remote control function when the electronic key battery is depleted. Types of cameras and sensors used for the Advanced Park Cameras and sensors are used to detect parked vehicles, mak- ing it easier to identify parking spaces. ▶ Front camera ▶ Rear camera 5 ▶ Sensors →P.341 ■ Camera images As special cameras are used, the colors in displayed images may dif- fer from the actual color. ■ Precautions for use For details on the following, refer to the “MULTIMEDIA OWNER’S MAN- UAL”. ● Displayable range of the screens ● Cameras ● Differences between displayed images and the actual road ● Differences between displayed images and the actual objects ■ Detection range of the cameras and sensors ● If a parked vehicle is behind the target parking space and the dis- tance between it and the vehicle 382 5-4. Using the driving support systems becomes far, it may no longer be able to be detected. Depending on shape or condition of a parked vehicle, the detection range may become short or the vehicle may not be detected. ●Objects other than parked vehi- cles, such as columns, walls, etc., may not be detected. Also, if they are detected, they may cause the target parking space to be mis- aligned. ■ Situations in which parking space lines may not be recog- nized properly ●In situations such as the following, parking space lines on the road surface may not be detected: • When the parking space does not use lines (parking space boundar- ies are marked with rope, blocks, etc.) • When the parking space lines are faded or dirty, making them unclear • When the road surface is bright, such as concrete, and the contrast between it and the white parking space lines is small • When the parking space lines are any color other than yellow or white • When the area surrounding the parking space is dark, such as at night, in an underground parking lot, parking garage, etc. • When it is raining or has rained and the road surface is wet and reflective or there are puddles • When the sun is shining directly into a camera, such as in the early morning or evening • When the parking space is cov- ered with snow or de-icing agent • When there marks from repairs or other marks on the road surface, or there is a traffic bollard, or other object on the road surface • When the color or brightness of the road surface is uneven • When a camera has been splashed by hot or cold water and the lens has fogged up • When the appearance of the park- ing space is affected by the shadow of the vehicle or trees • When a camera lens is dirty or covered with water droplets ● In situations such as the following, the target parking space may not be recognized correctly: • When there marks from repairs or other marks on the road surface, or there is a parking block, traffic bollard, or other object on the road surface • When it is raining or has rained and the road surface is wet and reflective or there are puddles • When the area around the vehicle is dark or backlit • When the color or brightness of the road surface is uneven • When the parking space is on a slope • When there are diagonal lines (access aisle) near the parking space • When the appearance of the park- ing space is affected by the shadow of a parked vehicle (such as shadows from the grille, side step, etc.) • When accessories which obstruct the view of the camera are installed • When the parking space lines are faded or dirty, making them unclear • When the appearance of the park- ing space is affected by the shadow of the vehicle or trees ■ Sensor detection information →P.343 ■ Objects which the sensor may not be properly detected →P.343 ■ Situations in which the sensor may not operate properly →P.343 5-4. Using the driving support systems ■ Situations in which parking assistance may not operate even if there is no possibility of a collision →P.344 383 WARNING ■ Precautions for the cameras and sensors ● Due to the characteristics of the camera lens, the position of and distance to people and objects displayed on the screen may differ from the actual situation. For details, refer to “MULTIME- DIA OWNER’S MANUAL”. ● Make sure to observe the pre- cautions for using the SUBARU Parking Assist (→P.342), other- wise a sensor may not operate correctly, possibly leading to an accident. ● In situations such as the follow- ing, the sensors may not oper- ate correctly, possibly leading to an accident. Proceed carefully. • When there is a parked vehicle next to the target parking space, if the displayed target parking space is far from the actual tar- get parking space, a sensor may be misaligned. Have the vehicle inspected by your SUB- ARU dealer. • Do not install any accessories near the detection area of the sensors. Turning the Advanced Park system on/off Press the Advanced Park main switch. If the switch is pressed while assis- tance is being performed, the assis- tance will be canceled. ■ Operating conditions of the Advanced Park Assistance will begin when all of the following conditions are met: ●The brake pedal is depressed ●The vehicle is stopped ● The driver’s seat belt is fastened ●The steering wheel is not being operated ●The accelerator pedal is not depressed ●All of the doors and the back door are closed ●The outside rear view mirrors are not folded ●The parking brake is not engaged ●The dynamic radar cruise control are not operating ●ABS, VSC, TRAC, PCS and PKSB are not operating ●The vehicle is not on a steep slope ●The VSC and TRAC are not turned off If assistance cannot be started, check the message displayed on the multimedia display (→P.410) Advanced Park guidance screens Guidance screens are displayed on the multimedia display. 384 5-4. Using the driving support systems ▶ Guidance screen (When assistance starts) Target parking space box (blue) Advice display Parking type change button If multiple buttons are displayed, depending on the condition of the button its function differs as follows. or : Change the target to another parking space. or : Select the current target parking space. : Select to change to the parallel parking function : Change the perpendicular parking (forward/reverse) function “MODE” button Select to change between the memory function and the perpen- dicular parking (forward/reverse) function and parallel parking func- tion. (→P.398) “Start” button Select to start parking assistance. Perpendicular parking direc- tion change button Select to change between the park- ing (forward) function and parking (reverse) function : Change the perpendicular parking (forward) function : Change the perpendicular parking (reverse) function Customize setting button Select to display the Advanced Park setting screen. (→P.408) Registration button Select to begin registering a park- ing space. Remote control function start button (if equipped) Select to start parking assistance operation on the smartphone dis- play. ▶ Guidance screen (When reversing) Operation icon Displayed when the Advanced Park is operating. Guide lines (yellow and red) Display points from the center of the edge of the front or rear bumper to the target stopping position (yel- low)* and approximately 1 ft. (0.3 5-4. Using the driving support systems 385 m) (red) from the vehicle. Moving object warning icon Emergency support brake control operation display “BRAKE!” is displayed. SUBARU Parking Assist dis- play →P.341 *: The yellow lateral line is not dis- played when the target stopping position is approximately 8.2 ft. (2.5 m) or more away from the vehicle. ■ SUBARU Parking Assist pop-up display Regardless of whether the SUBARU Parking Assist is off or on (→P.341), if an object is detected by the SUB- ARU Parking Assist when the Advanced Park is operating, the SUBARU Parking Assist pop up dis- play will automatically be displayed over the guidance display. ■ Brake control operation when Advanced Park is operating While the Advanced Park is operat- ing, if the system determines that the possibility of collision with detected moving or stationary object is high, the EV system output restriction control and brake control will operate. If brake control operates, Advanced Park operation will be suspended and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display. ■ Buzzer Depending on surrounding sounds or sounds from other systems, it may be difficult to hear the buzzer of this system. ■ If a black screen is displayed on the multimedia display when the Advanced Park is operating The system is being affected by radio waves or may be malfunction- ing. If a radio antenna is installed near a camera, move it to a location as far from the cameras as possible. If a radio antenna is not installed near a camera, and the screen does not return to normal after turning the power switch off and then starting the EV system again, have the vehi- cle inspected by your SUBARU dealer. Perpendicular parking (forward/reverse) function The perpendicular parking (for- ward/reverse) function can be used if the target parking space can be detected when the vehi- 5 cle is stopped close and perpen- dicular to the center of the parking space. Also, depending on the condition of the parking space, etc., if it is necessary to change the direction of travel of the vehicle, the shift position can be changed by assistance con- trol. Parking using the perpen- dicular parking (for- ward/reverse) function 1 Stop the vehicle at a position close and perpendicular to the center of the target park- ing space. 386 5-4. Using the driving support systems ▶ If there are parking space lines Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m)* Approximately 8.2 ft. (2.5 m)* Approximately 19.7 ft. (6 m) or more* Approximately 18.0 ft. (5.5 m) or more* The system can operate even if there is a parking space line on only one side of the target parking space. *: This is a reference measurement for detection of a parking space. Depending on the surrounding environment, detection may not be possible. ▶ If there is an adjacent parked vehicle Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m)* Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more* Approximately 19.7 ft. (6 m) or more* Approximately 18.0 ft. (5.5 m) or more* The system can operate even if there is a vehicle on only one side of the target parking space. *: This is a reference measurement for detection of a parking space. Depending on the surrounding environment, detection may not be possible. 2 Press the Advanced Park main switch and check that a possible parking space is dis- played on the multimedia dis- play. ⚫ If a space which your vehicle can be parked is detected, a target parking space box will be displayed. ⚫ If it is possible to parallel park in the space, select the park- 5-4. Using the driving support systems 387 ing space, and then select to change to the parallel park- ing function. ⚫ If it is possible to change the direction which a parking space is entered, select the parking space, and then select or change the direction. ⚫ Depending on the surround- ing environment, it may not be possible to use this function. According to the information displayed on the multimedia display, use the function on another parking space. 3 Select “Start” button. A buzzer will sound, an operation message will be displayed on the multi-information display, and assis- tance will begin operating. ⚫ When the brake pedal is released, “Moving Forward.”, “Backing Up.” will be dis- played and the vehicle will begin moving for- ward/reverse. ⚫ To cancel assistance, press the Advanced Park main switch. If assistance is canceled, “Advanced Park Cancelled” will be displayed. If you feel that the vehicle is approaching close to a surround- ing vehicle, object, person, or gut- ter: →P.387 4 Perform operations as indi- cated by the advice displays until the vehicle stops in the target parking space. When the vehicle stops, “Advanced Park Finished” will be displayed and parking assistance will end. If you select on the multimedia display, the vehicle displayed on the parking assist completion screen will rotate. 5 ■ If you feel that the vehicle is approaching close to a sur- rounding vehicle, object, per- son, or gutter Depress the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and then change the shift position to change the direction of travel of the vehicle. At this time, assist will be suspended. However, if the “Start” button is selected, assist will resume and the vehicle will move in the direction corre- sponding to the selected shift posi- tion. 388 5-4. Using the driving support systems ■ When the brakes have been operated When the brakes have been oper- ated, brake operation sound may be heard. This does not indicate a mal- Advanced Park perpen- dicular exiting (for- ward/reverse) function function. When exiting from a perpendic- ular parking space, if the system NOTICE ■ When using the perpendicu- lar parking (forward/reverse) function ● Make sure that there are no obstructions within the yellow guide lines and between the vehicle and target parking spot. If there are any obstructions between the vehicle and the tar- get parking space, or between the yellow guide lines, cancel the function. ●As the target parking space will not be able to be set correctly if the surface of the parking space is on a slope or has differences in height, the vehicle may stray from the target parking space or be slanted. Therefore, do not use the function for this kind of parking spot. ●When parking in a narrow park- ing space, the vehicle may closely approach an adjacent parked vehicle. If a collision seems likely, depress the brake pedal to stop the vehicle. ● If a detected parked vehicle is narrow or parked extremely close to the curb, the position at which assistance will park the vehicle will also be close to the curb. If it seems likely the vehi- cle will collide with something or drive off of the road, depress the brake pedal to stop the vehi- cle, and then press the Advance Park main switch to disable the system. determines that exit is possible the perpendicular exiting (for- ward/reverse) function can be used. Also, depending on the surrounding environment, if it is necessary to change the direc- tion of travel of the vehicle, the shift position can be changed by assistance control. Leaving a parking space using the perpendicular exiting (forward/reverse) function 1 With the brake pedal depressed and P shift posi- tion selected, press the Advanced Park main switch and check that the exit direc- tion selection screen is dis- 5-4. Using the driving support systems 389 played on the multimedia display. 2 Select an arrow on the multi- media display to select the direction you wish to exit. If the turn signal lever is operated, only exit to the left or right can be selected. 3 Depress the brake pedal and select “Start” button. A buzzer will sound, an operation message will be displayed on the multi-information display, and assis- tance will begin operating. To cancel assistance, press the Advanced Park main switch. If assistance is canceled, “Advanced Park Cancelled” will be displayed. If you feel that the vehicle is approaching close to a surround- ing vehicle, object, person, or gut- ter: →P.389 4 Perform operations as indi- cated by the advice displays until the vehicle is in a posi- tion where exit is possible. When the vehicle reaches a posi- tion where exit is possible, “You can exit by moving the steering wheel” will be displayed. If the steering wheel is operated, “Advanced Park Finished” will be displayed and assistance will end. As assistance will end while the vehicle is moving, grip the steering wheel and drive forward. If the steering wheel is not oper- ated, the vehicle will stop at the exit position. Assistance can be ended by depressing the accelerator pedal or brake pedal. 5 ■ If you feel that the vehicle is approaching close to a sur- rounding vehicle, object, per- son, or gutter →P.387 ■ Perpendicular exiting (for- ward/reverse) function Do not use exiting (for- ward/reverse) function in any situa- tion other than when exiting a parallel parking spot. If assistance is started unintentionally, depress the brake pedal and stop the vehicle, then press the Advanced Park main switch to cancel assistance. 390 5-4. Using the driving support systems ■ Situations in which the perpen- dicular exiting (forward/reverse) function will not operate In situations such as the following, the perpendicular exiting (for- ward/reverse) function will not oper- ate: ●When a vehicle which is waiting to park is in the exit direction ●When a wall, column, or person is detected as near a front or rear center or corner sensor ■ When the brakes have been operated →P.388 Advanced Park Parallel parking function The parallel parking function can be used if the target parking space can be detected when the vehicle is stopped close and aligned with the center of the parking space. Also, depending on the condition of the parking space, etc., if it is necessary to change the direction of travel of the vehicle, the shift position can be changed by assistance con- trol. Parking using the parallel parking function 1 Stop the vehicle with it aligned near the center of the target parking space. ▶ If there are parking space lines Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m)* Approximately 19.7 ft. (6 m)* Approximately 14.8 ft. (4.5 m) or more* Approximately 26.2 ft. (8 m) or more* *: This is a reference measurement for detection of a parking space. Depending on the surrounding environment, detection may not 5-4. Using the driving support systems 391 be possible. ▶ If there is an adjacent parked vehicle Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m)* Approximately 23.0 ft. (7 m) or more* Approximately 14.8 ft. (4.5 m) or more* Approximately 26.2 ft. (8 m) or more* *: This is a reference measurement for detection of a parking space. Depending on the surrounding environment, detection may not be possible. 2 Press the Advanced Park main switch and check that a possible parking space is dis- played on the multimedia dis- play. ⚫ If a space which your vehicle can be parked is detected, a target parking space box will be displayed. 5 ⚫ If it is possible to perpendicu- lar parking (forward/reverse) in the space, select the park- ing space, and then select to change to the perpendicu- lar parking (forward/reverse) function. ⚫ Depending on the surround- ing environment, it may not be possible to use this function. According to the information displayed on the multimedia display, use the function on another parking space. 3 Select “Start” button. A buzzer will sound, an operation message will be displayed on the multi-information display, and assis- 392 5-4. Using the driving support systems tance will begin operating. ⚫ When the brake pedal is released, “Moving Forward.” will be displayed and the vehi- cle will begin moving forward. ⚫ To cancel assistance, press the Advanced Park main switch. If assistance is canceled, “Advanced Park Cancelled” will be displayed. If you feel that the vehicle is approaching close to a surround- ing vehicle, object, person, or gut- ter: →P.392 4 Perform operations as indi- cated by the advice displays until the vehicle stops in the target parking space. When the vehicle stops, “Advanced Park Finished” will be displayed and parking assistance will end. If you select on the multimedia display, the vehicle displayed on the parking assist completion screen will rotate. ■ If you feel that the vehicle is approaching close to a sur- rounding vehicle, object, per- son, or gutter →P.387 ■ If “No available parking space” is displayed Even if the vehicle is stopped paral- lel to a parking space, an adjacent parked vehicle may not be detected. In this case, if the vehicle is moved to a position that a parked vehicle can be detected, assistance can be started. ■ When the brakes have been operated →P.388 5-4. Using the driving support systems 393 NOTICE ■ When using the parallel park- ing function ● Make sure that there are no obstructions within the yellow guide lines and between the vehicle and target parking spot. If any obstructions are detected within the yellow guide lines or between the vehicle and the tar- get parking space, the parallel parking function will be can- celled or suspended. ●As the target parking space will not be able to be set correctly if the surface of the parking space is on a slope or has differences in height, the vehicle may stray from the target parking space or be slanted. Therefore, do not use the parallel parking func- tion for this kind of parking spot. ● If an adjacent parked vehicle is narrow or parked extremely close to the curb, the position at which assistance will park the vehicle will also be close to the curb. If it seems likely the vehi- cle will collide with the curb or drive off of the road, depress the brake pedal to stop the vehi- cle, and then press the Advanced Park main switch to disable the system. 5 ●If there is a wall or other barrier on the inner side of the parking space, the vehicle may stop at a position slightly outside of the set target parking space. Advanced Park Parallel exiting function When exiting from a parallel parking space, if the system determines that exit is possible the parallel exiting function can be used. Also, depending on the surrounding environment, if it is necessary to change the direc- tion of travel of the vehicle, the shift position can be changed by assistance control. 394 5-4. Using the driving support systems Leaving a parking space using the parallel exiting function 1 With the brake pedal depressed and P shift posi- tion selected, press the Advanced Park main switch and check that the exit direc- tion selection screen is dis- played on the multimedia display. If you feel that the vehicle is approaching close to a surround- ing vehicle, object, person, or gut- ter: →P.395 4 Perform operations as indi- cated by the advice displays until the vehicle is in a posi- tion where exit is possible. When the vehicle reaches a posi- tion where exit is possible, “You can exit by moving the steering wheel” will be displayed. If the steering wheel is operated, “Advanced Park Finished” will be displayed and assistance will end. As assistance will end while the vehicle is moving, grip the steering wheel and drive forward. If the steering wheel is not oper- ated, the vehicle will stop at the exit position. Assistance can be ended by depressing the accelerator pedal or brake pedal. 2 Select an arrow on the multi- media display to select the direction you wish to exit. If the turn signal lever is operated, only exit to the left or right can be selected. 3 Depress the brake pedal and select “Start” button. A buzzer will sound, an operation message will be displayed on the multi-information display, and assis- tance will begin operating. To cancel assistance, press the Advanced Park main switch. If assistance is canceled, “Advanced Park Cancelled” will be displayed. 5-4. Using the driving support systems 395 ■ If you feel that the vehicle is approaching close to a sur- rounding vehicle, object, per- son, or gutter →P.387 ■ Parallel exiting function Do not use parallel exiting function in any situation other than when exiting a parallel parking spot. If assistance is started unintention- ally, depress the brake pedal and stop the vehicle, then press the Advanced Park main switch to can- cel assistance. ■ Situations in which the parallel exiting function will not operate In situations such as the following, the parallel exiting function will not operate: ●When vehicles waiting at a traffic signal in the exit direction ●When a vehicle is stopped in the area behind where the vehicle will exit ●When a wall, column, or person is detected as near a front or rear side sensor ●When the vehicle has been parked on a curb and a side sen- sor detects the road surface ●When a vehicle is not parked in front of the vehicle ●When there is excessive space 5 between the front of the vehicle and a parked vehicle ■ When the brakes have been operated →P.388 Advanced Park Memory function The memory function can be used to park in a previously reg- istered parking space, even if there are no parking space lines or adjacent parked vehicles. Up to 3 parking spaces can be registered. 396 5-4. Using the driving support systems Registering a parking space 1 Stop the vehicle with it aligned near the center of the target parking space. Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m) 2 Press the main switch and then select If the Advanced Park main switch is pressed at a parking space without parking lines or any adjacent parked vehicles, “No available parking space” may be displayed. Continuously select and hold . 3 Select perpendicular parking (forward/reverse) function or parallel parking function. Only parking spaces for which assist can be performed are dis- played. 4 Select the parking direction. When perpendicular parking (for- ward/reverse) was selected in step 3: When parallel parking was selected in step 3: 5 Using the arrow buttons, adjust the position of the parking space to be regis- 5-4. Using the driving support systems 397 tered, and then select “OK” button. 6 Select “Start” button. A buzzer will sound, an operation message will be displayed on the multi-information display, and assis- tance will begin operating. When the brake pedal is released, “Moving Forward.” will be dis- played and the vehicle will begin moving forward. If you feel that the vehicle is approaching close to a surround- ing vehicle, object, person, or gut- ter: →P.398 7 Perform operations as indi- cated by the advice displays until the vehicle stops in the target parking space. 8 Check the position that the vehicle has stopped. If nec- essary, adjust the position of the parking spot to be regis- tered using the arrow but- tons, and then select “Reg.” button. “Registration Completed” will be displayed on the multimedia dis- play. 5 ⚫ Register the parking space only if there are no obstruc- tions within the area shown by the thick lines. ⚫ The amount that the position of the parking spot to be reg- istered can be adjusted is lim- ited. 398 5-4. Using the driving support systems When parking in a parking space registered to the memory function 1 Stop the vehicle with it aligned near the center of the target parking space. Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m) 2 Press the Advanced Park main switch and check that a possible parking space is dis- played on the multimedia dis- play. If the “MODE” button is displayed, the button can be touched to change between the memory func- tion, perpendicular parking (for- ward/reverse) function and parallel parking function. 3 Select the desired parking space, and then select “Start” button. Perform the procedure for the per- pendicular parking (for- ward/reverse) function from step 3. (→P.385) ■ If you feel that the vehicle is approaching close to a sur- rounding vehicle, object, per- son, or gutter →P.387 ■ When overwriting a registered parking space If the maximum number of parking spaces have been registered and is selected, a registered parking space can be selected and then overwritten with a new parking space. ■ When multiple parking spaces are registered Select the desired parking space, and then select “Start” button. ■ When the brakes have been operated →P.388 5-4. Using the driving support systems 399 NOTICE ■ When using the memory function (→P.388, 393) ● The memory function is a func- tion which provides assistance in parking in a previously regis- tered parking space. If the condition of the road sur- face, vehicle, or surrounding area differs from when registra- tion was performed, the parking space may not be able to be detected correctly or assis- tance may not be provided to the point that the vehicle is fully parked. ● Do not register a parking space in situations such as the follow- ing, as the set parking space may not be able to be registered or assistance may not be possi- ble later. • When a camera lens is dirty or covered with water droplets • When it is raining or snowing • When the surrounding area is dark (at night, etc.) ● In situations such as the follow- ing, it may not be possible to register a parking space. • When there is insufficient space between the road and parking space • When the road surface around the parking space does not have any differences the sys- tem can recognize ● If a parking space has been reg- istered in situations such as the following, assistance may not be able to be started later or assistance to the registered position may not be possible. • When shadows are cast on the parking space (there is a carport over the parking space, etc.) • When there are leaves, gar- bage, or other objects which will likely move, in the parking space • When the road surface around the parking space has the same repeating pattern (brick, etc.) 5 ● In situations such as the follow- ing, it may not be possible for the system to provide assis- tance to a registered parking spot: • When the appearance of the parking space is affected by the shadow of the vehicle or trees • When an object is detected in the registered parking space • When a pedestrian or passing vehicle is detected during assis- tance • When the position the vehicle is stopped when assistance is started differs from the position when registration was per- formed 400 5-4. Using the driving support systems NOTICE • When the registered parking space cannot be reached due to the existence of parking blocks, etc. • When the road surface around the parking space has changed (road surface has degraded or been resurfaced) • When the sunlight conditions differ from when registration was performed (due to weather or time of day) • When the sun is shining directly into a camera, such as in the early morning or evening • When the color or brightness of the road surface is uneven • When a light is temporarily shined on the parking space (lights of another vehicle, secu- rity light, etc.) • When the road surface around the parking space has the same repeating pattern • When there is a low protrusion on the road surface near the parking space • When the parking space is on a slope • When a camera has been splashed by hot or cold water and the lens has fogged up • When a camera lens is dirty or covered with water droplets • When accessories which obstruct the view of the camera are installed If assistance is ended during reg- istration, perform registration again. ●When registering a parking space to the memory function, if the road surface cannot be detected “No available parking space to register” will be dis- played. ●When using the memory func- tion, make sure to stop immedi- ately in front of the stop position. Otherwise the parking space may not be able to be detected correctly or assis- tance may not be provided to the point that the vehicle is fully parked. ● Do not use the memory function if a camera has been subjected to a strong impact or images of the panoramic view monitor are misaligned. ● If a camera has been replaced, as the installation angle of the camera will have changed, it will be necessary to reregister park- ing spaces of the memory func- tion. Remote control function (if equipped) A smartphone can be used to remotely operate the parking functions and exit functions. Also, assistance can be pro- vided to remotely move the vehi- cle forward or backward into a garage, etc. Parking using Remote control function A smartphone can be used to remotely operate the parking function if the target parking space can be detected when the 5-4. Using the driving support systems 401 vehicle is stopped close and perpendicular to the center of the parking space. Also, depending on the condition of the parking space, etc., if it is necessary to change the direc- tion of travel of the vehicle, the shift position can be changed by assistance control. 1 Stop the vehicle with it aligned near the center of the target parking space. (→P.385, 390) 2 Press the Advanced Park main switch and check that a possible parking space is dis- played on the multimedia dis- play. (→P.385, 390) 3 Select and then select [Perpendicular/parallel]. 4 Select [OK] button. 5 Exit the vehicle while carrying the electronic key and smart- phone, and then start the Remote Park app on the function while standing approxi- mately 1.6 ft. (50 cm) or more from the vehicle and out of the path of the vehicle. 7 Checking the safety of the area around the vehicle, trace the operation area on the screen of the smart- phone. While continuously tracing the operation area, the vehicle will move and parking assistance will be performed. If operation of the screen of the smartphone is stopped, assistance can be suspended and the vehicle can be stopped. When the opera- tion of the screen of the smart- phone is resumed to move the vehicle, the vehicle will be locked automatically before moving. 8 When the parking space is 5 reached, after the vehicle is stopped by the parking brake, the shift position will be changed to P, the power switch will be turned off, and the doors will be locked. A completion screen will be dis- played on the smartphone smartphone. The detection area of the electronic key is within approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) around the vehicle. If there is an obstruction in the path of the vehicle, move it before park- ing the vehicle. A corn can also be moved after exit the vehicle. 6 From outside of the vehicle, confirm the parking space on the screen of the smartphone and then select the start but- ton. Start operation of Remote control ■ The parking function can be used even if obstructions exist if ●When using the parking functions at a parking space made of white lines, even if an obstruction exists in the parking space, the space can be set as the target parking space. This allows for assistance to continue after setting a parking space from inside the vehicle and then exiting the vehicle to move an obstruction, such as a traffic cone placed in a handicapped parking space. ●When perpendicular parking using 402 5-4. Using the driving support systems Advanced Park, 3 parking spaces on each side of the vehicle (up to 6 total) can be detected. However, when using Remote control func- tion, only 1 parking space on each side of the vehicle can be detected ■ When the brakes have been operated →P.388 Moving the vehicle for- ward and backward using Remote control function After the vehicle is stopped, assistance can be provided to move the vehicle into a garage, etc., by using the forward and backward movement function. 1 Stop the vehicle at the loca- tion you would like to start assistance. 2 Press the Advanced Park main switch. (→P.385) 3 Select and then select [Forward/reverse]. 4 Select [OK] button. 5 Exit the vehicle while carrying the electronic key and smart- phone, and then start the Remote Park app on the smartphone. The detection area of the electronic key is within approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) around the vehicle. 6 From outside of the vehicle, confirm the direction of travel on the screen of the smart- phone and then select the start button. Start operation of Remote control function while standing approxi- mately 1.6 ft. (50 cm) or more from the vehicle and out of the path of the vehicle. The detection area of the electronic key is within approxi- mately 9.8 ft. (3 m) around the vehi- cle. 7 Checking the safety of the area around the vehicle, trace the operation area on the screen of the smart- phone. While continuously tracing the operation area, the vehicle will move and forward and reverse movement assistance will be per- formed. If operation of the screen of the smartphone is stopped, assistance can be suspended and the vehicle can be stopped. While assistance is being performed, it can be stopped part way or the direction of travel of the vehicle can be changed. 8 Select the power button on the screen of the smart- phone. The power switch will then turn OFF and the doors will lock auto- matically. ■ Changing the direction of travel While assistance is being per- 5-4. Using the driving support systems 403 formed, the direction of travel of the vehicle can be changed by the for- ward and reverse movement func- tion. When there is a wall behind the vehicle, etc., by operating the direc- tion of travel changing button on the screen of the smartphone, the vehi- cle can be slightly moved forward to allow loading of items and then moved back to its original position. ■ When the brakes have been operated →P.388 Exiting using Remote con- trol function Assistance can be provided to exit from a perpendicular or par- allel parking space when the power switch OFF. When for- ward and backward movement is selected, the maximum dis- tance the vehicle can move is 23.0 ft. (7 m) from the starting point and possible to change the direction of travel. 1 While near the parked vehi- cle, unlock the doors using the electronic key, and then start the Remote Park app on the smartphone. If the smartphone cannot connect to the vehicle, using the electronic key, unlock the doors again. 2 Select the start button on the screen of the smartphone. The power switch will change to ON. 3 Check that a possible exit direction is displayed, select the exit direction. 4 Checking the safety of the area around the vehicle, trace the operation area on the screen of the smart- phone. While continuously tracing the operation area, the vehicle will move and departure assistance will be performed. If operation of the screen of the smartphone is stopped, assistance can be suspended and the vehicle can be stopped. While assistance 5 is being performed, it can be stopped part way or the direction of travel of the vehicle can be changed. 5 Move the vehicle to the posi- tion where assistance ends and enter the vehicle while carrying the electronic key. To stop assistance part way, stop operating the smartphone or enter the vehicle. ■ When the brakes have been operated →P.388 Parking using the Remote control function and mem- ory function A smartphone can be used to remotely operate the memory function if the target parking 404 5-4. Using the driving support systems space can be detected when the vehicle is stopped close to a parking space which was previ- ously registered to the memory function. Also, depending on the condition of the parking space, etc., if it is necessary to change the direction of travel of the vehicle, the shift position can be changed by assistance control. 1 Stop the vehicle with it aligned near the center of the target parking space. (→P.398) 2 Press the Advanced Park main switch and check that a possible parking space is dis- played on the multimedia dis- play. (→P.398) 3 Select and then select [Perpendicular/parallel]. 4 Select [OK] button. If the [MODE] button is displayed, the button can be selected to change between the memory func- tion, perpendicular parking (for- ward/reverse) function and parallel parking function. 5 Exit the vehicle while carrying the electronic key and smart- phone, and then start the Remote Park app on the smartphone. The detection area of the electronic key is within approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) around the vehicle. If there is a cone or other obstruction in the path of the vehicle, move it after exiting the vehicle. 6 From outside of the vehicle, confirm the parking space on the screen of the smartphone and then select the start but- ton. Start operation of Remote control function while standing approxi- mately 1.6 ft. (50 cm) or more from the vehicle and out of the path of the vehicle. 7 Checking the safety of the area around the vehicle, trace the operation area on the screen of the smart- phone. While continuously tracing the operation area, the vehicle will move and parking assistance will be performed. If operation of the screen of the smartphone is stopped, assistance can be suspended and the vehicle can be stopped. When the opera- tion of the screen of the smart- phone is resumed to move the vehicle, the vehicle will be locked automatically before moving. 8 When the parking space is reached, after the vehicle is stopped by the parking brake, the shift position will be changed to P, the power switch will be turned off, and the doors will be locked. A completion screen will be dis- played on the smartphone. ■ When the brakes have been operated →P.388 5-4. Using the driving support systems 405 Preparation before using Remote control function ■ Preparation before using Make sure to perform the follow- ing before using Remote control function: 1 Download the Remote Park app from the app store. 2 Turn the power switch to ON and register the smartphone as a Bluetooth device to the multimedia system. For details on registering a Bluetooth device, refer to the “MUL- TIMEDIA OWNER’S MANUAL”. 3 Setup the Remote Park app and register the vehicle. 4 The registered vehicle will be displayed on the screen of the smartphone. Select the vehicle. The name and image of the vehicle can be changed on the new vehicle registration screen. Vehicles can be added through the menu screen. ■ Remote control function on/off 1 Select and then select “Advanced Park” on the mul- timedia display. 2 Select “Remote Park” to turn it on/off. (The default setting is on.) 3 Press the Advanced Park main switch. If the switch is pressed while assis- tance is being performed, the assis- tance will be canceled. 4 Select displayed on the multimedia display. NOTICE ■ Remote control function ●When using Remote control function, make sure carry an electronic key in your pocket, etc. 5 ● If an electronic key is held together with a smartphone, etc., the electronic key may not be able to be detected. ●Vehicles with a digital key: Remote control function cannot be used when carrying only a digital key. The driver should always carry the electronic key. ●When entering the vehicle after using Remote control function, make sure that the electronic key is brought into the vehicle and all of the doors are closed. Vehicles with a power easy access system: After entering the vehicle and ending Remote con- trol function operation, the seat return function will operate when the driver’s seat seat belt is fas- tened or the brake pedal is depressed. 406 5-4. Using the driving support systems NOTICE ● If the power switch is turned off when Remote control function operation has finished or been canceled, the doors will be locked automatically. However, if a door is open, it may not be locked. Check the vehicle con- dition after Remote control func- tion operation has finished. ●When the doors are locked after Remote control function opera- tion has finished or been can- celed, an alarm may sound if someone is detected inside the vehicle. ■ Situations in which the func- tion may not operate cor- rectly ●When the functions of the Smart key system may not operate correctly: →P.185 ●When the vehicle is near fluo- rescent lights ● Radio wave interference: →P.187 ■ Electronic key battery con- sumption ●When Remote control function is being used, the electronic key battery will be used as the elec- tronic key will continuously send and receive radio waves. ● If the electronic key battery is depleted: →P.527 ■ Situations in which the sen- sors may not operate prop- erly →P.343 ●When using Remote control function, visibility of the area around the vehicle may be lim- ited. Make sure to check the fol- lowing when using Remote control function: • The vehicle and area around the vehicle are clearly visible • There are no people, animals, or objects in the path of the vehicle • An appropriate distance from the vehicle can be maintained and the safety of yourself and others can be ensured • Caution for the area around the vehicle is always maintained and there is no potential for danger • You can cancel Remote control function immediately if neces- sary Advanced Park cancel- ation/suspension ■ Assistance will be can- celed when In situations such as the follow- ing, Advanced Park operation will be canceled. Firmly hold the steering wheel and depress the brake pedal to stop the vehicle. As system operation has been can- celed, begin the operation again or continue parking manually, using the steering wheel. ⚫ The Advanced Park main switch is pushed ⚫ The shift position has been changed to P ⚫ The parking brake is engaged ⚫ A door or the back door is opened ⚫ The driver’s seat belt is unfas- tened 5-4. Using the driving support systems 407 ⚫ The outside rear view mirrors are folded ⚫ The TRAC or VSC is turned off ⚫ The TRAC, VSC or ABS oper- ates ⚫ The power switch is pressed ⚫ The system determines assis- tance cannot be continued in the current parking environ- ment ⚫ The system malfunctions ⚫ While the vehicle was stopped, “Cancel” was selected on the multimedia display ■ Assistance will be sus- pended when In situations such as the follow- ing, Advanced Park operation will be suspended. Assistance can be started again by following the directions displayed on the multimedia display. Also, when assistance is sus- pended, if the shift position is changed twice with the brake pedal depressed, assistance will be can- celed in that shift position. How- ever, if assistance is suspended by changing the shift position, assis- tance will be canceled if the shift position is changed once. ⚫ The steering wheel is oper- ated ⚫ The accelerator pedal is depressed ⚫ The shift position has been changed ⚫ A moving object or stationary object that may collide with your vehicle has been detected, resulting in the operation of the EV system output control/braking control ⚫ Camera switch is pressed ■ Remote control function assistance will be canceled when (if equipped) In situations such as the follow- ing, Remote control function operation will be canceled. As system operation has been canceled, while carrying an 5 electronic key, enter the vehicle and park the vehicle manually, using the steering wheel. ⚫ When a condition for stopping Advanced Park assistance is met, with the exception sus- pension due to a door being opened or the driver’s seat belt being released ⚫ When 5 minutes have elapsed since Remote con- trol function operation was started ⚫ When 3 minutes have elapsed since any operation was performed ⚫ When 30 seconds have elapsed with the vehicle not being able to be driven, even though the screen of the 408 5-4. Using the driving support systems smartphone is being operated to drive the vehicle ⚫ When the power button on the screen of the smartphone is selected ⚫ When the Remote Park app is force closed ⚫ When the vehicle is on a steep slope ⚫ When an electronic key is detected inside the vehicle while Remote control function operation is suspended ⚫ When the ambient tempera- ture is 14°F (-10°C) or less ■ Remote control function assistance will be sus- pended when (if equipped) In situations such as the follow- ing, assistance will be sus- pended. ⚫ When the Bluetooth commu- nication between the smart- phone and multimedia system get lost ⚫ When smartphone continuous operation is suspended ⚫ When the Remote Park app is pushed to the background (a call is received, the home but- ton is pressed, etc.) ⚫ When electronic key does not detected ⚫ When there is an obstruction in the movement direction of the vehicle ⚫ When the vehicle is operated while it is being driven by assistance ⚫ When the smart key is oper- ated while it is being driven by assistance ⚫ When the door is unlocked while it is being driven by assistance ⚫ When a door is opened while the vehicle is being driven Changing the Advanced Park settings Select on the multimedia dis- play, and then select “Advanced Park”. ■ Remote Park (if equipped) Remote control function can be turned on/off. ■ Speed profile The vehicle speed for when assistance is performed can be set. This setting cannot be changed when registering a parking space to the memory function. ■ Obstacle detection range The distance from which obsta- cles will be avoided while assis- tance is being performed can be set. ■ Preferred parking method The preferred parking direction displayed when at a parking 5-4. Using the driving support systems 409 space which perpendicular (for- ward/reverse) or parallel parking is possible can be set. ■ Preferred parking direction The preferred parking direction displayed when it is possible to pull perpendicular forward or reverse into a parking space can be selected. ■ Preferred exit direction (perpendicular) The preferred exit direction dis- played when it is possible to pull forward or reverse to the left or right out of a parking space can be selected. ■ Preferred exit direction (parallel) The preferred exit direction dis- played when it is possible to exit to the left or right from a parallel parking space can be selected. ■ Camera view when parking The display angle of the camera image when using the perpen- dicular parking (for- ward/reverse) function or parallel parking function can be set. ■ Camera view when exiting The display angle of the camera image when using the perpen- dicular exiting (forward/reverse) function or parallel parking exit function can be set. ■ Parking path adjustment The course for when parking assistance is operating can be adjusted inward or outward. If the tires are worn, the path of vehicle may be offset from the center of the parking space. In this case, use this setting to adjust the parking course. ■ Road width adjustment When parking assistance is started, the amount of lateral movement while the vehicle is moving forward can be adjusted. ■ Park position adjustment (forward) The position at which perpendic- 5 ular parking (forward) is com- pleted can be adjusted. (Except when using the memory func- tion.) ■ Park position adjustment (reverse) The position at which perpendic- ular parking (reverse) is com- pleted can be adjusted. (Except when using the memory func- tion.) ■ Rear accessory setting If an accessory, such as a trailer hitch, has been installed to the rear of the vehicle, the length of the rear of the vehicle can be adjusted to help avoid colliding with objects to the rear of the vehicle. 410 5-4. Using the driving support systems ■ Clear registered parking space The parking spaces registered to the memory function can be deleted. Parking space informa- tion cannot be deleted when assistance is being performed or when registering parking space information to the mem- ory function. NOTICE ● Take care when using the park position adjustment (forward) or park position adjustment (reverse) for adjusting because the vehicle may collide with parking blocks, curb stones, or other low objects. ●If it is likely that your vehicle will collide with a nearby vehi- cle/object, parking block, curb stone, etc., depress the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and press the Advanced Park main switch to disable the system. Changing the Remote Park app settings (if equipped) ■ SUBARU Parking Assist warning sound ON/OFF (Smartphone setting) The warning sounds of the SUB- ARU Parking Assist from smart- phone application can be turned on/off using the Remote Park app. ■ SUBARU Parking Assist warning sound volume adjustment (Smartphone setting) The volume of the warning sounds of the SUBARU Parking Assist from smartphone applica- tion can be adjusted using the Remote Park app. Advanced Park Displayed messages The operating state, assistance operation, etc. of the Advanced Park is displayed on the multi- media display. If a message is displayed, respond according to the content displayed. ■ If “No available parking space” is displayed Move the vehicle to a location where a parking space or parking lines can be detected. ■ If “Unavailable in current condi- tion” is displayed Move the vehicle to another location and use the system. ■ If “Not enough space to exit” is displayed The parallel parking exit function cannot be used due to a situation such as the distance between your vehicle and vehicles parked in front of and behind your vehicle being short, the existence of an object in the exit direction, etc. Check the conditions of the area around your vehicle and exit from the parking space manually. 5-4. Using the driving support systems 411 ■ If “Cannot control speed” is displayed The system judged that it cannot adjust the speed of the vehicle when using the system in an area with a slope or step and assistance was canceled. Use the system in a level location. ■ If “Obstacle detected” is dis- played As a moving object or stationary object that may collide with your vehicle has been detected, the EV system output control/braking con- trol operates to suspend Advanced Park assistance. Check the condition of the surround- ing area. To resume assistance, select the “Start” button on the multi- media display. ■ If “No available parking space to register” is displayed This message is displayed when is selected at a parking space that cannot be detected. Operate the system at a parking space where differences in the road surface can be recognized. (→P.395) Drive mode select switch The drive modes can be selected to suit driving con- dition. Selecting a drive mode Each time the switch is pressed, the system changes between power mode, normal mode, and Eco drive mode. 5 1 Normal mode It has a good balance electrical consumption performance, quiet- ness, and drive performance, and is suitable for normal driving. 2 Power mode By controlling the EV system, it is possible to speed up the reaction to the accelerator operation and accelerate powerfully. 3 Eco drive mode It moderates the driving force for accelerator operations. It is suited for driving with an awareness of 412 5-4. Using the driving support systems improving power consumption. The Eco drive mode indicator turns on. ■ Drive mode cancellation • Power mode is automatically can- celed when the power switch is turned off or “X-MODE” is selected, and returns to normal mode. • Normal mode and Eco drive mode are not canceled unless switched to another driving mode or select “X-MODE”. (Even if the power switch is turned off, it will not be canceled automatically) ●When drive mode select is not available When “X-MODE” is selected, it is not possible to switch to power mode and Eco drive mode. X-MODE This mode has improved road handling ability off roads. Select between the 2 types of mode, SNOW/DIRT and D.SNOW/MUD. During “X-MODE”, the downhill assist control will control the brakes to main- tain a constant vehicle speed when driving on steep descents. Grip control supports the driver’s operation by main- taining a low vehicle speed on steep inclines and slip- pery roads without having to step on the accelerator pedal or brake pedal. WARNING ■ Be sure to observe the follow- ing before using “X-MODE” If not observed, there is the dan- ger that it may lead to an unex- pected accident. ● Drive the vehicle after checking that the SNOW/DIRT indica- tor/D.SNOW/MUD indicator turns on. ●“X-MODE” is not a device that enhances the limited perfor- mance of the vehicle. Carefully check the road surface condi- tions and the driving route in advance, and then drive with caution. 5-4. Using the driving support systems 413 WARNING ■ Conditions in which it may not function correctly When driving on the following road surfaces, it may not be pos- sible to maintain a constant speed of the vehicle, which may lead to an unexpected accident. • Extremely steep inclines • Rough road surfaces • Slippery road surfaces such as snowy roads and frozen road surfaces less than approximately 13 mph (20 km/h). When the drive mode is switched, the buzzer sounds. System Components “X-MODE” switch Grip control switch (→P.415) Indicators Selecting the Drive Mode Press the “X-MODE” switch repeatedly until the system switches to the desired driving mode while the vehicle is stopped or traveling at a speeds 1 Normal mode Has a good balance of electrical 5 consumption performance, quiet- ness, and driving performance, and is suitable for driving in urban areas. 2 SNOW/DIRT mode When the tires are likely to slip or slip on slippery roads such as snowy roads, gravel roads, etc., the tire spinning is reduced, making it easier to drive. At this time, the SNOW/DIRT mode indicator lights up in green on the meter. 3 D.SNOW/MUD mode In special cases such as the tires being buried in deep snow or mud, the TRAC (Traction Control) func- tion is temporarily canceled, and the tires are idled as needed to make it easier to start. At this time, the D.SNOW/MUD mode indicator lights up in green on 414 5-4. Using the driving support systems the meter. In addition, the VSC OFF indicator and PCS warning light will be turned on in the meter. ■ When “X-MODE” is not avail- able In the following cases, the system does not operate. • When the EV system is not started • When SNOW/DIRT mode or D.SNOW/MUD mode is not selected • When “S PEDAL DRIVE” is selected • When Advanced Park is being used (If equipped) • When the EV system is malfunc- tioning ■ About Dynamic Radar Cruise Control or Cruise Control Dynamic radar cruise control and cruise control cannot be used during “X-MODE”. If dynamic radar cruise control or cruise control are being used, it will be automatically can- celed. ■ During “X-MODE” • In “X-MODE”, VSC does not switch ON/OFF even if the VSC OFF switch is operated. It is fixed as ON in SNOW/DIRT mode and OFF in D.SNOW/MUD mode. • During “X-MODE”, even if the Eco mode switch, drive mode select switch, or “S PEDAL DRIVE” switch is operated, operations will not switch to the respective modes. • The SNOW/DIRT and D.SNOW/MUD modes control the vehicle so that it can maximize the drive force and improve the drive force on rough roads. As a result, power consumption may diminish when compared to driving in nor- mal mode. ■ “X-MODE” Automatic Release • “X-MODE” is automatically can- celed when the power switch is turned OFF. • When the vehicle speed exceeds about 25 mph (40 km/h), the “X- MODE” is canceled, the “X- MODE” indicator on the meter lights up in white, and switches to the normal mode. • When the vehicle speed is approximately 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, “X-MODE” indicator lights up in green and switches to “X- MODE” again. ■ Cautions regarding the use of the system For safety, the following operations are not accepted when “X-MODE” is ON. • Drive mode select switch Opera- tion • “S PEDAL DRIVE” operations When selecting “X- MODE”, Downhill Assist Control When the “X-MODE” switch is pressed and SNOW/DIRT mode or D.SNOW/MUD mode is selected, the Downhill Assist Control automatically enters the standby state and operates under the following conditions. • When the vehicle speed is approximately 18 mph (30 km/h) or less • Neither the accelerator pedal or brake pedal are not oper- ated 5-4. Using the driving support systems 415 ■ When changing the target vehi- cle speed When changing the target vehicle speed, adjust it with the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal. When the foot is removed from the pedal, the system will operate at the vehicle speed at that time. ■ Downhill Assist Control during “X-MODE” • In SNOW/DIRT mode or D.SNOW/MUD mode, the down- hill assist control can be set to standby state. The operation indi- cator changes depending on the operating status of the downhill assist control. • When the system is not operating, the indicator turns on white. ■ When Downhill Assist Control is not available when selecting “X-MODE” In the following cases, the system does not operate. • When SNOW/DIRT mode or D.SNOW/MUD mode is not selected • When the shift position is in P • When the Grip control is operating • When the brake system or EV system is malfunctioning When using Grip control With SNOW/DIRT mode or D.SNOW/MUD mode selected, press down on the Grip control switch. At this time, the downhill assist control system indicator turns off and the Grip control indicator turns on. When the vehicle is stopped, press the brake pedal firmly and operate the switch. The vehicle may start moving unintentionally on an incline. ■ Set the speed of the Grip control Press the Grip control switch up or down to set the desired speed (approximately 2 to 6 mph [2 to 10 km/h]). The set speed is shown on the multi- information display. 5 Increase Speed Decrease Speed Indicator Lights ■ Grip control Operations During system operations, the Grip control indicator turns on green. If the Grip control indica- tor is white, release the brake pedal to activate the system. While the system is operating, the accelerator pedal and brake pedal can be used to temporar- ily accelerate or decelerate. If operating the accelerator pedal 416 5-4. Using the driving support systems or brake pedal is stopped, the speed will return to the set speed. ■ When Grip control is released • Press the “X-MODE” Switch When the Grip control is released, the Grip control operation light turns off, and after a while, the downhill assist control system indi- cator light turns on. Drive carefully when releasing Grip control while driving. ■ Grip control Operations Condi- tions • When in “X-MODE” • When the shift position is in D • When the parking brake has been released • When the driver side door is closed • When the vehicle is stopped by stepping on the brake or the vehi- cle speed is approximately 2 to 6 mph (2 to 10 km/h) ■ Automatic Releasing the Grip control In case of any of the following, the Grip control is released. • When the vehicle is stopped by stepping on the brake pedal • When the vehicle speed exceeds more than 13 mph (20 km/h) • When the shift position in a posi- tion other than D • When the parking brake is oper- ated • When the driver side door is opened • ABS/VSC is activated. • When brake control and output suppression by the driving support device are activated (example: Pre-Collision System, Parking Support Brake) • When the system determines it cannot continue in the current environment • When the power switch is turned OFF ■ When Grip control is not avail- able In the following conditions, Grip con- trol is not available. • When the brake system or EV system is malfunctioning • After the EV system is started and until the vehicle has been running for a while ■ Brake hold system The brake hold system turns OFF when the Grip control is being used. Press the brake pedal firmly and operate the switch. When using the brake hold system again, turn ON the brake hold sys- tem after releasing the Grip control. NOTICE ■ Long term usage If used continuously for a long periods of time, the temperature of the brakes may rise the system may temporarily stop. ■ Operation noises and vibra- tions • Operating noise may be heard from motor room, however this is not a malfunction. • When the brake pedal is depressed, it may become harder than usual or it may feel different from normal, but this is not a malfunction. 5-4. Using the driving support systems 417 NOTICE ■ When the operation indicator does not turn on in the meter even after operating the switch The system may not be working properly. Have the vehicle inspected at your SUBARU dealer. Driving assist systems To keep driving safety and performance, the following systems operate automati- cally in response to various driving situations. Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle. Summary of the driving assist systems ■ ECB (Electronically Con- trolled Brake System) 5 The electronically controlled system generates braking force corresponding to the brake operation ■ ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys- tem) Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if the brakes are applied while driving on a slip- pery road surface ■ Brake assist Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is depressed when the system detects a panic stop sit- uation 418 5-4. Using the driving support systems ■ VSC (Vehicle Stability Con- trol) Helps the driver to control skid- ding when swerving suddenly or turning on slippery road sur- faces. ■ Enhanced VSC (Enhanced Vehicle Stability Control) Provides cooperative control of the ABS, TRAC, VSC and EPS. Helps to maintain directional stability when swerving on slip- pery road surfaces by con- trolling steering performance. ■ Trailer Sway Control Helps the driver to control trailer sway by selectively applying brake pressure for individual wheels and reducing driving torque when trailer sway is detected. ■ TRAC (Traction Control) Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the drive wheels from spinning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slip- pery roads ■ Active Cornering Assist (ACA) Helps to prevent the vehicle from drifting to the outer side by performing inner wheel brake control when attempting to accelerate while turning ■ Hill-start assist control Helps to reduce the backward movement of the vehicle when starting on an uphill ■ EPS (Electric Power Steer- ing) Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn the steering wheel. ■ The Secondary Collision Brake (Secondary collision reduction at the time of a frontal collision) When the SRS airbag sensor detects a collision and the sys- tem operates, the brakes and brake lights are automatically controlled to reduce the vehicle speed and help reduce the pos- sibility of further damage due to a secondary collision. ■ When the TRAC/VSC/ABS/Trailer Sway Control systems are operating The slip indicator light will flash while the TRAC/VSC/ABS/Trailer Sway Control systems are operat- ing. ■ Disabling the TRAC system If the vehicle gets stuck in mud, dirt or snow, the TRAC system may reduce power from the EV system to the wheels. 5-4. Using the driving support systems 419 Pressing to turn the system off may make it easier for you to rock the vehicle in order to free it. To turn the TRAC system off, quickly press and release . The “Traction Control Turned OFF” will be shown on the multi-informa- tion display. Press again to turn the system back on. ■ Turning off both TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control sys- tems To turn the TRAC/VSC/Trailer Sway Control systems off, press and hold for more than 3 seconds while the vehicle is stopped. The VSC OFF indicator light will come on and the “Traction Control Turned OFF” will be shown on the multi-information display.* Press again to turn the systems back on. *: PCS (Pre-Collision System) will also be disabled (only pre-collision warning is available). The PCS warning light will come on and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display. (→P.275) ■ When the message is dis- played on the multi-information display showing that TRAC has been disabled even if has not been pressed TRAC is temporary deactivated. If the information continues to show, contact your SUBARU dealer. ■ Operating conditions of hill- start assist control When all of the following conditions are met, the hill-start assist control will operate: ●The shift position is in a position other than P or N (when starting off forward/backward on an upward incline) ●The vehicle is stopped ●The accelerator pedal is not depressed ●The parking brake is not engaged 5 ●Power switch is turned to ON ■ Automatic system cancelation of hill-start assist control The hill-start assist control will turn off in any of the following situations: ● The shift position is shifted to P or N ●The accelerator pedal is depressed ●The brake pedal is depressed and the parking brake is engaged ●A maximum of 2 seconds have elapsed after the brake pedal is released ●Power switch is turned to OFF ■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, VSC, Trailer Sway Control, TRAC and hill-start assist control systems ●A sound may be heard from the motor compartment when the brake pedal is depressed repeat- edly, when the EV system is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does 420 5-4. Using the driving support systems not indicate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems. ●Any of the following conditions may occur when the above sys- tems are operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred. • Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering. • A motor sound may be heard also after the vehicle comes to a stop. ■ ECB operating sound ECB operating sound may be heard in the following cases, but it does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred. ●Operating sound heard from the motor compartment when the brake pedal is operated. ●Operating sound heard from the motor compartment when one or two minutes passed after the stop of the EV system. ■ Active Cornering Assist opera- tion sounds and vibrations When the Active Cornering Assist is operated, operation sounds and vibrations may be generated from the brake system, but this is not a malfunction. ■ Automatic reactivation of TRAC, Trailer Sway Control and VSC systems After turning the TRAC, Trailer Sway Control and VSC systems off, the systems will be automatically re- enabled in the following situations: ●When the power switch is turned off ●If only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC will turn on when vehicle speed increases. If both the TRAC and VSC sys- tems are turned off, automatic re- enabling will not occur when vehi- cle speed increases ■ Operating conditions of Active Cornering Assist The system operates when the fol- lowing occurs. ● TRAC/VSC can operate ● The driver is attempting to accel- erate while turning ●The system detects that the vehi- cle is drifting to the outer side ●The brake pedal is released ■ Reduced effectiveness of the EPS system The effectiveness of the EPS sys- tem is reduced to prevent the sys- tem from overheating when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The steer- ing wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur, refrain from excessive steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the EV system off. The EPS system should return to normal within 10 minutes. ■ Secondary Collision Brake (Secondary collision reduction at the time of a frontal collision) operating conditions The system operates when the SRS airbag sensor detects a collision while the vehicle is in motion. How- ever, the system does not operate when the components are dam- aged. ■ Secondary Collision Brake (Secondary collision reduction at the time of a frontal collision) automatic cancellation The system is automatically can- celed in any of the following situa- tions. ●The vehicle speed drops to approximately 0 mph (0 km/h) ●A certain amount of time elapses during operation ●The accelerator pedal is depressed a large amount 5-4. Using the driving support systems 421 WARNING ■ The ABS does not operate effectively when ● The limits of tire gripping perfor- mance have been exceeded (such as excessively worn tires on a snow covered road). ●The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on wet or slick roads. ■ Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of normal conditions The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping dis- tance. Always maintain a safe dis- tance from the vehicle in front of you, especially in the following sit- uations: ●When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads ●When driving with tire chains ●When driving over bumps in the road ●When driving over roads with potholes or uneven surfaces ■ TRAC/VSC may not operate effectively when Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road surfaces, even if the TRAC/VSC system is operating. Drive the vehicle carefully in con- ditions where stability and power may be lost. ■ Active Cornering Assist does not operate effectively when ●Do not overly rely on Active Cornering Assist. Active Corner- ing Assist may not operate effectively when accelerating down slopes or driving on slip- pery road surfaces. ●When Active Cornering Assist frequently operates, Active Cor- nering Assist may temporarily stop operating to ensure proper operation of the brakes, TRAC and VSC. ■ Hill-start assist control does not operate effectively when ● Do not overly rely on hill-start assist control. Hill-start assist control may not operate effec- tively on steep inclines and roads covered with ice. ● Unlike the parking brake, hill- start assist control is not intended to hold the vehicle sta- tionary for an extended period of time. Do not attempt to use hill-start assist control to hold the vehicle on an incline, as doing so may lead to an acci- dent. 5 ■ When the TRAC/ABS/VSC/Trailer Sway Control is activated The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes. ■ When the TRAC/VSC/Trailer Sway Control systems are turned off Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As these are the sys- tems to help ensure vehicle stabil- ity and driving force, do not turn the TRAC/VSC/Trailer Sway Con- trol systems off unless necessary. Trailer Sway Control is part of the VSC system and will not operate if VSC is turned off or experiences a malfunction. 422 5-4. Using the driving support systems WARNING ■ Replacing tires Make sure that all tires are of the specified size, brand, tread pat- tern and total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recommended tire inflation pressure level. The ABS, TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control systems will not function correctly if different tires are installed on the vehicle. Contact your SUBARU dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels. ■ Handling of tires and the sus- pension Using tires with any kind of prob- lem or modifying the suspension will affect the driving assist sys- tems, and may cause a system to malfunction. ■ Trailer Sway Control precau- tion The Trailer Sway Control system is not able to reduce trailer sway in all situations. Depending on many factors such as the condi- tions of the vehicle, trailer, road surface and driving environment, the Trailer Sway Control system may not be effective. Refer to your trailer owner’s manual for information on how to tow your trailer properly. ■ If trailer sway occurs Observe the following precau- tions. Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury. ●Firmly grip the steering wheel. Steer straight ahead. Do not try to control trailer swaying by turning the steering wheel. ● Begin releasing the accelerator pedal immediately but very gradually to reduce speed. Do not increase speed. Do not apply vehicle brakes. If you make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes, your vehicle and trailer should stabi- lize. (→P.231) ■ Secondary Collision Brake (Secondary collision reduc- tion at the time of a frontal collision) Do not rely solely upon the Sec- ondary Collision Brake (Second- ary collision reduction at the time of a frontal collision). This system is designed to help reduce the possibility of further damage due to a secondary collision, however, that effect changes according to various conditions. Overly relying on the system may result in death or serious injury. Winter driving tips 5-5. Driving tips 423 ● Do not drive in excess of 75 Carry out the necessary preparations and inspec- tions before driving the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a man- ner appropriate to the pre- vailing weather conditions. Pre-winter preparations ⚫ Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside tem- peratures. • Power control unit coolant • Heater coolant • Washer fluid ⚫ Have a service technician inspect the condition of the 12-volt battery. ⚫ Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of tire chains for the front tires. Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains match the size of the tires. WARNING ■ Driving with snow tires Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents. Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury. ●Use tires of the specified size. ● Maintain the recommended level of air pressure. mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires being used. ● Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels. ■ Driving with tire chains Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents. Failure to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may cause death or serious injury. ● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used, or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower. ●Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes. ●Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden brak- ing and shifting operations that cause sudden regenerative braking. ● Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is maintained. ● Do not use LTA (Lane Tracing Assist). NOTICE ■ Repairing or replacing snow tires Request repairs or replacement of snow tires from your SUBARU dealer or legitimate tire retailers. This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters. 424 5-5. Driving tips Before driving the vehicle Perform the following according to the driving conditions: ⚫ Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing. ⚫ To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan, remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in front of the wind- shield. ⚫ Check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumulated on the exterior lights, outside rear view mirrors, windows, vehi- cle’s roof, chassis, around the tires or on the brakes. ⚫ Remove any snow or mud from the bottom of your shoes before getting in the vehicle. When driving the vehicle Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a safe distance between you and the vehicle ahead, and drive at a reduced speed suit- able to road conditions. When parking the vehicle ⚫ Turn automatic mode of the parking brake off. Otherwise, the parking brake may freeze and not be able to be released automatically. Also, avoid using the following as the parking brake may operate automatically, even if automatic mode is off. • Brake hold system • Remote parking function ⚫ Park the vehicle and shift the shift position to P without set- ting the parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being released. If the vehicle is parked without setting the parking brake, make sure to block the wheels. Failure to do so may be dan- gerous because it may cause the vehicle to move unexpect- edly, possibly leading to an accident. When the parking brake is in automatic mode, release the parking brake after shifting the shift position to P. (→P.246) ⚫ If the vehicle is parked without setting the parking brake, confirm that the shift position cannot be moved out of P. 5-5. Driving tips 425 ⚫ If the vehicle is left parked with the brakes damp in cold temperatures, there is a pos- sibility of the brakes freezing. WARNING ■ When parking the vehicle When parking the vehicle without applying the parking brake, make sure to chock the wheels. If you do not chock the wheels, the vehi- cle may move unexpectedly, pos- sibly resulting in an accident. Selecting tire chains Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the tire chains. Chain size is regulated for each tire size. Side chain: 0.12 in. (3 mm) in diameter 0.39 in. (10 mm) in width 1.18 in. (30 mm) in length Cross chain: 0.16 in. (4 mm) in diameter 0.55 in. (14 mm) in width 0.98 in. (25 mm) in length Regulations on the use of tire chains Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary depending on location and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing chains. ■ Tire chain installation Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains: ● Install and remove tire chains in a safe location. ● Install tire chains on the front tires only. Do not install tire chains on the rear tires. ● Install tire chains on front tires as tightly as possible. Retighten 5 chains after driving 1/4 – 1/2 mile (0.5 – 1.0 km). ● Install tire chains following the instructions provided with the tire chains. NOTICE ■ Fitting tire chains The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly when tire chains are fit- ted. 426 5-5. Driving tips Utility vehicle precau- tions This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class, which has higher ground clear- ance and narrower tread in relation to the height of its center of gravity to make it capable of performing in a wide variety of off-road applications. Utility vehicle feature ⚫ Specific design characteris- tics give it a higher center of gravity than ordinary passen- ger cars. This vehicle design feature causes this type of vehicle to be more likely to rollover. And, Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. ⚫ An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems. ⚫ It is not designed for corner- ing at the same speeds as ordinary passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Therefore, sharp turns at excessive speeds may cause the vehicle to roll- over. WARNING ■ Utility vehicle precautions Always observe the following pre- cautions to minimize the risk of death, serious injury or damage to your vehicle: ● In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wear- ing a seat belt. Therefore, the driver and all passengers should always fasten their seat belts. ●Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers, if at all possible. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover caus- ing death or serious injury. ● Loading cargo on the roof lug- gage carrier (if equipped) will make the center of the vehicle gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or abrupt maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss of control or vehi- cle rollover due to failure to operate this vehicle correctly. ● Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. Because of its pro- file and higher center of gravity, your vehicle is more sensitive to side winds than an ordinary passenger car. Slowing down will allow you to have better control. ● Do not drive horizontally across steep slopes. Driving straight up or straight down is preferred. Your vehicle (or any similar off- road vehicle) can tip over side- ways much more easily than forward or backward. 5-5. Driving tips 427 Off-road driving When driving your vehicle off- road, please observe the follow- ing precautions to ensure your driving enjoyment and to help prevent the closure of areas to off-road vehicles: ⚫ Drive your vehicle only in areas where off-road vehicles are permitted to travel. ⚫ Respect private property. Get owner’s permission before entering private property. ⚫ Do not enter areas that are closed. Honor gates, barriers and signs that restrict travel. ⚫ Stay on established roads. When conditions are wet, driving techniques should be changed or travel delayed to prevent damage to roads. ■ Additional information for off- road driving ▶ For owners in U.S. mainland and Hawaii: To obtain additional information per- taining to driving your vehicle off- road, consult the following organiza- tions: • State and Local Parks and Recre- ation Departments • State Motor Vehicle Bureau • Recreational Vehicle Clubs • U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management WARNING ■ Off-road driving precautions Always observe the following pre- cautions to minimize the risk of death, serious injury or damage to your vehicle: ● Drive carefully when off the road. Do not take unnecessary risks by driving in dangerous places. ● Do not grip the steering wheel spokes when driving off-road. A bad bump could jerk the wheel and injure your hands. Keep both hands and especially your thumbs on the outside of the rim. ● Always check your brakes for effectiveness immediately after driving in sand, mud, water or snow. 428 5-5. Driving tips WARNING ●After driving through tall grass, mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., check that there is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or trapped on the underbody. Clear off any such matter from the underbody. If the vehicle is used with these materials trapped or adhering to the underbody, a breakdown or fire could occur. ●When driving off-road or in rug- ged terrain, do not drive at excessive speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. You are also risking expensive damage to your vehicle’s suspension and chassis. NOTICE ■ To prevent the water damage Take all necessary safety mea- sures to ensure that water dam- age to the traction battery, EV system or other components does not occur. ●Water entering the motor com- partment may cause severe damage to the EV system. ●Water entering the transmis- sion will cause deterioration in transmission quality. The mal- function indicator may come on, and the vehicle may not be driv- able. ●Water can wash the grease from wheel bearings, causing rusting and premature failure, and may also enter the tran- saxle case, reducing the gear oil’s lubricating qualities. ■ When you drive through water If driving through water, such as when crossing shallow streams, first check the depth of the water and the bottom of the riverbed for firmness. Drive slowly and avoid deep water. ■ Inspection after off-road driv- ing ● Sand and mud that has accu- mulated around brake discs may affect braking efficiency and may damage brake system components. ● Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off- road driving that has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud, or water. For scheduled maintenance information, refer to the “Warranty and Mainte- nance Booklet” or “Warranty and Service Booklet”. Interior features 6 6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger ALL AUTO (ECO) control 430 Automatic air conditioning system. 432 Remote Air Conditioning System 439 Heated steering wheel/seat heaters/seat ventila- tors/radiant heaters . 441 6-2. Using the interior lights Interior lights list 445 6-3. Using the storage features List of storage features 448 Luggage compartment fea- tures 451 6-4. Using the other interior features Electronic sunshade 456 Other interior features . 458 Garage door opener 469 429 6 430 6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger ALL AUTO (ECO) con- trol The seat heaters/radiant heaters*, seat ventilators* and heated steering wheel* are each automatically con- trolled according to the set temperature of the air condi- tioning system, the outside and cabin temperature, etc. ALL AUTO (ECO) controls the power consumption in order to both extend the cruising range and main- tain comfortable conditions. *: if equipped Turning on ALL AUTO (ECO) control Press the AUTO switch The indicator on the AUTO switch illuminates, and the automatic air conditioning system, seat heat- ers/radiant heaters* and seat venti- lators*, and heated steering wheel* operate in automatic mode. If the fan speed control switch or airflow mode control switch is oper- ated, the indicator turns off. Even if ALL AUTO (ECO) control is turned off, the air conditioner, seat heaters/radiant heaters*, seat venti- lators*, and steering heater will not be turned off. Also, during ALL AUTO (ECO) con- trol operation, pressing the ECO switch turns off the eco air condi- tioning control. If the front window glass becomes cloudy due to a drop in the outside air temperature while the ALL AUTO (ECO) control is operating, you can remove the cloudiness by pressing the “A/C” switch or wind- shield defogger switch on the air conditioner control panel. *: If equipped Operation of each system ■ Automatic air conditioning system (→P.432) The temperature can be adjusted independently for each seat. ■ Seat heaters/radiant heat- ers* and seat ventilators* (→P.441) Heating or ventilation is auto- matically selected according to the set temperature of the air conditioning system, the out- side temperature, etc. *: if equipped ■ Heated steering wheel* (→P.441) Heated steering wheel operates automatically according to the set temperature of the air condi- tioning system, the outside tem- perature, etc. *: if equipped ■ Passenger detection functions When a passenger is detected in the front passenger seat, the seat 6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger heater/radiant heater* and seat ven- tilator* will operate automatically. *: if equipped ■ Seat heaters/radiant heaters* and seat ventilators* operation If the seat heaters/radiant heaters* and seat ventilators* switch is set to auto, it will operate without perform- ing the passenger detection. When the ALL AUTO (ECO) switch is pressed in that state, the passenger /radiant heater* and seat ventilator* will operate according to that pas- senger detected state. *: if equipped ■ Rear seat heater* operation The rear seat heaters are not con- trolled by the ALL AUTO (ECO) con- trol. *: if equipped 431 6 432 6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Automatic air conditioning system Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted accord- ing to the temperature setting. Air conditioning controls Eco air conditioning mode ALL AUTO (ECO) switch (→P.430) “OFF” switch Outside/recirculated air mode switch “A/C” switch Front seat concentrated airflow mode (S-FLOW) switch Windshield wiper de-icer switch “SYNC” switch Right-hand side temperature control switch Airflow mode control switch Fan speed control switch Left-hand side temperature control switch Rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger switch Windshield defogger switch 6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger 433 ■ Adjusting the temperature setting Operate the temperature con- trol switch upwards to increase the temperature and downwards to decrease the temperature. If “A/C” is not pressed, the system will blow ambient temperature air or heated air. ■ Setting the fan speed Operate the fan speed control switch upwards to increase the fan speed and downwards to decrease the fan speed. Press the “OFF” switch to turn off the fan. ■ Change the airflow mode Operate the airflow mode con- trol switch upwards or down- wards. The mode changes as follows each time the switch is operated. 1 Air flows to the upper body. 2 Air flows to the upper body and feet. 3 Air flows to the feet. 4 Air flows to the feet and the windshield defogger oper- ates. ■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes Press the outside/recirculated air mode switch. The mode switches between out- side air mode (the indicator is off) and recirculated air mode (the indi- cator is on) each time the switch is pressed. ■ Set cooling and dehumidifi- cation function Press the “A/C” switch. When the function is on, the indica- tor illuminates on the “A/C” switch. ■ Defogging the windshield 6 Defoggers are used to defog the windshield and front side win- dows. Press the windshield defogger switch. Set the outside/recirculated air mode switch to outside air mode if the recirculated air mode is used. (It may switch automati- cally.) To defog the windshield and the side windows quickly, turn the air flow and temperature up. To return to the previous mode, press the windshield defogger switch again when the wind- shield is defogged. 434 6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger When the windshield defogger switch is on, the indicator illumi- nates on the windshield defog- ger switch. ■ Defogging the rear window and outside rear view mir- rors Defoggers are used to defog the rear window and to remove rain- drops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors. Press the rear window and out- side rear view mirror defogger switch. The defoggers will automati- cally turn off after a period of time. ■ Windshield wiper de-icer This feature is used to prevent ice from building up on the wind- shield and wiper blades. Press the windshield wiper de- icer switch. The indicator comes on when the windshield wiper de-icer is on. The windshield wiper de-icer will automatically turn off after a period of time. ■ Fogging up of the windows ●The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high. Turning “A/C” switch on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the windshield effec- tively. ● If you turn “A/C” switch off, the windows may fog up more easily. ●The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used. ■ When driving on dusty roads Close all windows. If dust thrown up by the vehicle is still drawn into the vehicle after closing the windows, it is recommended that the air intake mode be set to outside air mode and the fan speed to any setting except off. ■ Outside/recirculated air mode ●Setting to the recirculated air mode temporarily is recom- mended in preventing dirty air from entering the vehicle interior and helping to cool the vehicle when the outside air temperature is high. ●Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on the temperature setting or the inside temperature. ■ When the outside temperature exceeds 75°F (24°C) and the air conditioning system is on ● In order to reduce the air condi- tioning power consumption, the air conditioning system may switch to 6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger 435 recirculated air mode automati- cally. This may also reduce elec- tricity consumption. ●Recirculated air mode is selected as a default mode when the power switch is turned to ON. ●It is possible to switch to outside air mode at any time by pressing the outside/recirculated air mode switch. ■ When the outside temperature falls to nearly 32°F (0°C) The dehumidification function may not operate even when “A/C” switch is pressed. ■ Operation of the air condition- ing system in the eco air condi- tioning mode ●In the eco air conditioning mode, the air conditioning system is con- trolled as follows to prioritize power consumption efficiency: • EV system and compressor oper- ation controlled to restrict heat- ing/cooling capacity • Fan speed restricted when auto- matic mode is selected ●The eco air conditioning mode can be turned on and off using the air conditioning control switch. (→P.432) ● To improve air conditioning perfor- mance, perform the following operations: • Adjust the fan speed • Turn off eco air conditioning mode (→P.432) ■ Ventilation and air conditioning odors ● To let fresh air in, set the air condi- tioning system to the outside air mode. ●During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be emitted from the vents. ● To reduce potential odors from occurring: • It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to out- side air mode prior to turning the vehicle off. • The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time immediately after the air con- ditioning system is started in auto- matic mode. ●When parking, the system auto- matically switches to outside air mode to encourage better air cir- culation throughout the vehicle, helping to reduce odors that occur when starting the vehicle. ■ Air conditioning filter →P.524 ■ Air conditioning system refrig- erant ●A label regarding the refrigerant of the air conditioning system is attached to the hood at the loca- tion shown in the following illustra- tion. 6 ●The meaning of each symbol on the label are as follows: Caution Air conditioning system Air conditioning system lubricant type 436 6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Requires registered technician to service air conditioning system Flammable refrigerant ■ Noise from air conditioning sys- tem Approximately 90 seconds after the power switch turned to OFF, you may hear sound coming from air conditioning system. This is the sound of a air conditioning system initialize and, it does not indicate a malfunction. ■ Customization Some functions can be customized. (Customizable features: →P.610) WARNING ■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up Do not use the windshield defog- ger switch during cool air opera- tion in extremely humid weather. The difference between the tem- perature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the wind- shield to fog up, blocking your vision. ■ To prevent burns ● Do not touch the rear view mir- ror surfaces when the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on. ● Do not touch the glass at lower part of the windshield or to the side of the front pillars when the windshield wiper de-icer is on. NOTICE ■ To prevent 12-volt battery dis- charge Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the EV system is off. ■ When repairing/replacing parts of the air conditioning system Have repair/replacement per- formed by your SUBARU dealer. When a part of the air conditioning system, such as the evaporator, is to be replaced, it must be replaced with a new one. Using automatic mode 1 Press the ALL AUTO (ECO) switch. (→P.430) The dehumidification function begins to operate. Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the tempera- ture setting and humidity. 2 Adjust the temperature set- ting. 3 To stop the operation, press the “OFF” switch. If the fan speed setting or air flow modes are operated, the automatic mode indicator goes off. However, automatic mode for functions other than that operated is maintained. ■ Using automatic mode Fan speed is adjusted automati- cally according to the temperature setting and the ambient conditions. Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow immediately after the auto- matic mode switch is pressed. 6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger 437 Adjusting the temperature for driver and front pas- senger seats separately (“SYNC” mode) To turn on the “SYNC” mode, perform any of the following pro- cedures: ⚫ Press the “SYNC” mode switch. ⚫ Adjust the front passenger’s side temperature setting. The indicator comes on when the “SYNC” mode is on. Air outlet layout and oper- ations ■ Location of air outlets The air outlets and air volume change according to the selected air flow mode. ■ Adjusting the air flow direc- tion and opening/closing the air outlets ▶ Front Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down Move the knob fully to the out- side to close the vent. 6 Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down Move the knob fully downward to close the vent. ▶ Rear 438 6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger 1 Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down 2 Turn the knob to open or close the vent WARNING ■ To not interrupt the wind- shield defogger from operat- ing Do not place anything on the instrument panel which may cover the air outlets. Otherwise, air flow may be obstructed, preventing the windshield defoggers from defog- ging. Front seat concentrated airflow mode (S-FLOW) This function automatically con- trols the air conditioning airflow so that priority is given to the front seats. Unnecessary air conditioning is suppressed, con- tributing to increased electricity consumption efficiency. Front seat concentrated airflow mode operates in the following situations. ⚫ No passengers are detected in the rear seats ⚫ The windshield defogger is not operating While operating, illuminates. ■ Manually turning front seat concentrated airflow mode on/off In front seat concentrated air- flow mode, directing airflow to the front seats only and to all seats can be switched via switch operation. When the mode has been switched manually, auto- matic airflow control stops oper- ating. Press on the air conditioning operation panel and switch the airflow. ⚫ Indicator illuminated: Airflow to the front seats only ⚫ Indicator off: Airflow to all the seats ■ Operation of automatic airflow control ● In order to maintain a comfortable interior, airflow may be directed to seats without passengers immedi- ately after the EV system is started and at other times depend- ing on the outside temperature. ●After the EV system is started, if passengers move around inside or enter/exit the vehicle, the sys- tem cannot accurately detect the presence of passengers and auto- matic airflow control will not oper- ate. ■ Operation of manual airflow control Even if the function is manually switched to directing airflow to only the front seats, when a rear seat is occupied, it may automatically direct airflow to all seats. 6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger 439 ■ To return to automatic airflow control 1 With the indicator off, turn the power switch off. 2 After 60 minutes or more elapse, turn the power switch to ON. Remote Air Condition- ing System The Remote Air Condition- ing System uses electrical energy stored in the trac- tion battery and allows the air conditioning to be oper- ated by remote control. If the Remote Air Condition- ing System is used while the charging cable is con- nected to the vehicle, the reduction of charge in the traction battery will be sup- pressed to allow you to use electricity from an external power source. Charging will be conducted automatically after the 6 Remote Air Conditioning Sys- tem is stopped. Before leaving the vehicle Check the temperature setting of the air conditioning system. (→P.433) The Remote Air Conditioning Sys- tem will operate in accordance with the temperature settings of the air conditioning system. Activating the Remote Air Conditioning System Press and hold “A/C” on the wireless remote control to oper- ate the Remote Air Conditioning 440 6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger System. The system will shut off if a door is opened. The system can be stopped by pressing “A/C” twice. ▶ Type A ▶ Type B ■ Operating conditions The system will only operate if all of the following conditions are met: ●The power switch is OFF. ●All doors are closed. ●The hood is closed. ■ Remote Air Conditioning Sys- tem automatic shut-off The system will automatically shut off under the following conditions: ●About 20 minutes have passed since operation began ●Any one of the operating condi- tions is not met The system may also shut off if the charge level of the traction battery drops to low. ■ Conditions affecting operation The system may not start in the fol- lowing situations: ● The charge level of the traction battery is low ●When the EV system is cool (for example, after being left for a long time in low temperatures) ■ Windshield defogger When defogging the windshield using the Remote Air Conditioning System, defogging may be insuffi- cient due to the power being restricted more than during normal air conditioning operation. Also, the outside of the windshield may fog up due to the outside temperature, humidity or air conditioning set tem- perature. ■ Security feature Any unlocked doors will be automat- ically locked when the system is operating. The emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked. ■ Conditions affecting operation →P.185 ■ While the Remote Air Condi- tioning System is operating ● Depending on the operating con- dition of the Remote Air Condition- ing System, the electric fan may spin and an operating noise may be heard. However, this does not indicate a malfunction. ● The Remote Air Conditioning Sys- tem may stop operating temporar- ily if other features that use electricity (for example, the seat heaters, lights, windshield wipers) are in operation or if the charge level of the 12-volt battery becomes low. ●The headlights, windshield wiper, meter, etc. will not operate. 6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger 441 ■ Electronic key battery depletion →P.162 ■ When the electronic key bat- tery is fully depleted →P.527 WARNING ■ Precautions for the Remote Air Conditioning System ● Do not use the system if people are in the vehicle. Even when the system is in use, the internal temperature may still reach a high or low level due to features such as the automatic shut-off. Children and pets left inside the vehicle may suffer heatstroke dehydration or hypothermia, or could result in death or serious injury. ● Depending on the surrounding environment, signals from the wireless switch may transmit further than expected. Pay appropriate attention to the vehicle’s surroundings and use the switch only when necessary. ● Do not operate “A/C” if the hood is open. The air conditioning may operate unintentionally and objects may be drawn into the electrical cooling fan. NOTICE ■ To prevent the traction bat- tery from being discharged through incorrect operation Use “A/C” only when necessary. Heated steering wheel*/seat heat- ers/seat ventila- tors*/radiant heaters* *: If equipped ⚫ Heated steering wheel Warms up the grip of the steering wheel ⚫ Seat heaters Warm up the seat upholstery ⚫ Seat ventilators Maintain good airflow on the seat upholstery by sucking air into the seats ⚫ Radiant heaters Warm up the feet of the front seats 6 WARNING ■ To prevent minor burn inju- ries Care should be taken if anyone in the following categories comes in contact with the steering wheel, seats or radiant heaters when the heater is on: ● Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physi- cally challenged ● Persons with sensitive skin ● Persons who are fatigued ● Persons who have taken alco- hol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold remedies, etc.) 442 6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to the seat heaters and seat ventila- tors Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat. ■ To prevent 12-volt battery dis- charge Do not use the functions when the EV system is off. Heated steering wheel Turns the heated steering wheel on/off Each time the switch is pressed, the operation condition changes as follows. AUTO (lit) → Hi (2 segments lit) → Lo (1 segment lit) → Off The AUTO indicator and/or level indicator illuminates during operation. ■ The heated steering wheel can be used when The power switch is in ON. Seat heaters ■ Front Turns the seat heaters on/off Each time the switch is pressed, the operation condition changes as follows. AUTO (lit) → Hi (3 segments lit) → Mid (2 segments lit) → Lo (1 seg- ment lit) → Off The AUTO indicator and/or level indicator illuminates during operation. ■ Rear (outboard rear seats) (If equipped) Each time the switch is pressed, the operation condition changes as follows. Hi (3 segments lit) → Mid (2 segments lit) → Lo (1 segment lit) → Off When not in use, put the switch in the neutral position. The indi- cator will turn off. 6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger 443 ■ The seat heaters can be used when The power switch is in ON. WARNING ■ To prevent causes of over- heating and minor burn inju- ries Observe the following precautions when using a seat heaters ● Do not cover the seat with a blanket or cushion when using the seat heaters ● Do not use seat heaters more than necessary. ■ The seat ventilators can be used when The power switch is in ON. ■ Air conditioning system-linked control mode When the seat ventilators fan speed level is Hi, the seat ventilators fan speed becomes higher according to the fan speed of the air conditioning system. Radiant heaters 6 Seat ventilators (front seats) Turns the seat ventilators on/off Each time the switch is pressed, the operation condition changes as follows. AUTO (lit) → Hi (3 segments lit) → Mid (2 segments lit) → Lo (1 seg- ment lit) → Off The AUTO indicator and/or level indicator illuminates during operation. Front passenger’s side radi- ant heater Driver’s side radiant heater Turns the radiant heaters on/off Each time the switch is pressed, the operation condition changes as 444 6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger follows. AUTO (lit) → Hi (3 segments lit) → Mid (2 segments lit) → Lo (1 seg- ment lit) → Off The AUTO indicator and/or level indicator illuminates during operation. ■ Use while driving Do not touch the radiant heaters or hold your hand or foot over it by releasing a hand from the handle or a foot from the pedal. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to the radiant heaters Do not pierce with uneven objects or sharp objects such as wires or needles. ■ The radiant heaters can be used when When the power switch is ON and the seatbelt is fastened. ●The power may be turned off auto- matically be continually touching the heater section. In that case, turn the radiant heaters switch on again. ●It may take some time for the heater temperature to rise. WARNING ■ To prevent causes of over- heating and minor burn inju- ries Observe the following precautions when using a radiant heaters ● Do not use radiant heaters more than necessary. ● Do not let blankets, cushions, luggage, etc., to touch the radi- ant heaters. 6-2. Using the interior lights 445 Interior lights list Location of the interior lights Outer foot lights (if equipped) 6 Inside door handle lights (if equipped) Rear interior light (→P.446) Footwell lights (if equipped) Front interior lights/personal lights (→P.446, 447) Shift lights Auxiliary box lights (if equipped)/Wireless charger tray lights (if equipped) Center console light (if equipped) Door trim ornament lights (if equipped) the presence of the electronic key, ■ Personal lights/interior lights automatic on/off ●Illuminated entry system: The lights automatically turn on/off according to power switch mode, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are opened/closed. ● If the interior lights remain on when the power switch is turned 446 6-2. Using the interior lights off, the lights will go off automati- cally after 20 minutes. ■ Automatic illumination of the interior lights If any of the SRS airbags deploy (inflate) or in the event of a strong rear impact, the interior lights will turn on automatically. The interior lights will turn off automatically after approximately 20 minutes. The interior lights can be turned off manually. However, in order to help prevent further collisions, it is rec- ommended that they be left on until safety can be ensured. (The interior lights may not turn on automatically depending on the force of the impact and conditions of the collision.) ■ Customization Setting (e.g. the time elapsed before the lights turn off) can be changed. (Customizable features: →P.610) NOTICE ■ To prevent 12-volt battery dis- charge Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the EV sys- tem is off. Operating interior lights ■ Front interior lights 1 Turns the door-linked func- tion off 2 Turns the door-linked func- tion on (door position) The lights turn on/off according to the opening/closing of the doors. 3 Turns the lights on/off Press the switch to turn on/off the front interior lights/personal lights and rear interior lights. ■ Rear interior light 1 Turns the light on 2 Turns the door-linked func- tion on (door position) The light turns on/off according to the opening/closing of the doors. The rear interior light turn on/off together the front interior light. 6-2. Using the interior lights 447 Operating personal lights Turns the lights on/off 6 448 6-3. Using the storage features List of storage features Location of the storage features Bottle holders (→P.450) Card holders (→P.450) Cup holders (→P.449) Auxiliary box (if equipped) (→P.450) Console box (→P.449) Open tray (→P.450) WARNING ■ Items that should not be left in the vehicle Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this may cause the following when cabin temperature becomes high: ●Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact with other stored items. ● Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into con- tact with other stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas, causing a fire hazard. Console box 6-3. Using the storage features NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to the console box Do not apply excessive force to the armrest. 449 1 Slide the lid as backward. 2 Lift the lid while pulling the lever to release the lock. Cup holders ■ Front Slide the lid as backward. ■ Console box lid The lid can be slide forward/back- ward. ■ Rear Pull down the armrest. 6 ■ Tray within console box The tray can be removed by lifting the tray it out. WARNING ■ Caution while driving Keep the console box closed. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking. WARNING ■ Items unsuitable for the cup holders Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders. Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking, caus- ing injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns. 450 6-3. Using the storage features Bottle holders ■ Front ■ Rear Card holders Flip down the visor. Auxiliary box (if equipped) Press the lid to open the auxil- iary box. ■ Bottle holders ●When storing a bottle, close the cap. ●The bottle may not be stored depending on its size or shape. NOTICE ■ Items that should be not stowed in the bottle holders Do not place open bottles or glass and paper cups containing liquid in the bottle holders. The contents may spill and glasses may break. Open tray WARNING ■ Caution while driving 6-3. Using the storage features Luggage compart- ment features 451 Observe the following precautions when putting items in the open tray. Failure to do so may cause items to be thrown out of the tray in the event of sudden braking or steering. In these cases, the items may interfere with pedal operation or cause driver distraction, result- ing in an accident. • Do not store items in the tray that can easily shift or roll out. • Do not stack items in the tray higher than the edge of tray. • Do not put items in the tray that may protrude over the edge of tray. Cargo hooks Raise the hooks to use. The cargo hooks are provided for securing loose items. Upper hook (rope hook) 6 Upper hook (utility hook) Lower hook WARNING ■ When cargo hooks are not in use To avoid injury, always return the hooks to their stowed positions when not in use. NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to the upper hook (utility hook) Do not hang any object heavier than 8 lb. (4 kg) on the upper hook (utility hook). 452 6-3. Using the storage features Deck board ■ Changing the deck board positions Height of the deck floor can be changed by setting the deck board under the floor. Upper Lower 1 Pull up the tab to raise the deck board and move it toward you to remove. 2 Place the deck board through the groove and move for- ward. ■ Setting the deck board upright When taking out the tools, the deck board can be set upright. When the back surface (resin sur- face) of the deck board is facing up, flip it back to the original position. 1 Pull up the tab to raise the deck board and fold it for- ward. 2 Deck board in a standing state, put the edge into the holes. 6-3. Using the storage features WARNING ■ Caution while driving Keep the deck board closed. 453 In the event of sudden braking, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the deck board or the items stored under the deck board. WARNING ■ When operating the deck board Do not place anything on the deck board when operating the board. Otherwise, your fingers may be caught or an accident may result causing injuries. ■ Caution while driving Keep the deck board closed. In the event of sudden braking, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the deck board or the items stored under the deck board. ■ Warning reflector Depending on the size and shape of the warning reflector case, you may not be able to store it. Luggage cover (if equipped) ■ Removing the luggage cover unit 1 Pull up the tab to raise the deck board and fold it for- ward. (→P.452) 2 Take out the luggage cover 6 unit. Deck under tray Pull up the tab to raise the deck board and fold it forward. 454 6-3. Using the storage features ■ Installing the luggage cover 1 Compress the both ends of the luggage cover and insert into the recess to install. 2 Pull out the luggage cover and hook it onto the anchors. ■ Removing the luggage cover 1 Release the cover from the left and right anchors and allow it to retract. 2 Compress the end of the lug- gage cover and lift the lug- gage cover up. ■ Stowing the luggage cover unit 1 Pull up the tab to raise the deck board and fold it for- ward. (→P.452) 2 To store the luggage cover unit, compress both ends until they lock. 1 Insert the left end of the lug- gage cover unit into the groove on the left side of the deck. 2 Insert the right end of the lug- gage cover unit into the groove on the right side of the deck side. 6-3. Using the storage features 455 WARNING ■ Luggage cover ●When installing/stowing the lug- gage cover, make sure that the luggage cover is securely installed/stowed. Failure to do so may result in serious injury in the event of sudden braking or a collision. ● Do not place anything on the luggage cover. In the event of sudden braking or turning, the item may go flying and strike an occupant. This could lead to an unexpected accident, resulting in death or serious injury. ● Do not allow children to climb on the luggage cover. Climbing on the luggage cover could result in damage to the luggage cover, possibly causing death or serious injury to the child. 6 456 6-4. Using the other interior features Electronic sunshade* *: If equipped Use the overhead switches to operate the electronic sunshade. Operating the electronic sunshade 1 Open* 2 Close* *: To stop the electronic sunshade partway, lightly press the either end of the switch. ■ The electronic sunshade can be operated when The power switch is in ON. ■ Jam protection function for the electronic sunshade ●If an object becomes jammed between the electronic sunshade and the sunshade frame while the electronic sunshade is closing, the electronic sunshade movement is stopped and the electronic sun- shade is opened slightly. ●When the jam protection function has operated, even if the “CLOSE” side of the switch is pressed again, the electronic sun- shade will not move in the close direction until the reverse opera- tion has stopped completely. ●The electronic sunshade may operate in reverse if the electronic sunshade is subject to an impact due to the surroundings or the driving conditions. ■ When the electronic sunshade does not close normally Perform the following initialization procedure. 1 Turn the power switch to ON. 2 Press and hold the “CLOSE” side of the switch. It closes until it is near the fully closed position and then stops. After that, it operates in the opening direction then closes to the fully closed position. If the switch is released at the incor- rect time, the procedure will have to be performed again from the begin- ning. If the automatic opening and closing function does not work normally even after performing the operations above, have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer. WARNING Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. 6-4. Using the other interior features 457 WARNING ■ Opening and closing the elec- tronic sunshade ● Check to make sure that all pas- sengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when the elec- tronic sunshade is being oper- ated. ● Do not let a child operate the electronic sunshade. Closing the electronic sunshade on someone can cause death or serious injury. ■ Jam protection function ● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function. ●The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the electronic sunshade is fully closed. Also, the jam protection function is not designed to operate while the switch is being pressed. Take care so that your fingers, etc., do not get caught. ■ To prevent burns or injuries Do not touch the area between the underside of the glass roof and the electronic sunshade. Your hand may get caught and you could injure yourself. Also, if the vehicle is left in direct sunlight for a long time, the underside of the panoramic moon roof could become very hot and could cause burns. 6 458 6-4. Using the other interior features Other interior features Sun visors lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes. NOTICE ■ To prevent 12-volt battery dis- charge Do not leave the vanity lights on for extended periods while the EV system is off. 1 To set the visor in the forward position, flip it down. 2 To set the visor in the side position, flip down, unhook, and swing it to the side. 3 To use the side extender, place the visor in the side position, then slide it back- ward. Vanity mirrors Slide the cover to open. The light turns on when the cover is opened. Power outlet (12 VDC) Please use a power supply for electronic goods that use less than 12 VDC /10 A (power con- sumption of 120 W). When using electronic goods, make sure that the power con- sumption of all the connected power outlets is less than 120 W. ■ Front Open the lid. ■ The power outlet can be used when The power switch is in ACC or ON. ■ When stopping the EV system Disconnect electrical devices with ■ Vanity lights If the vanity lights remain on when the power switch is turned off, the charging functions, such as mobile battery packs. If such devices are left connected, the EV system may not stop nor- mally. 6-4. Using the other interior features other purposes. Depending on the external 459 NOTICE ■ When power outlet is not in use To avoid damaging the power out- let, close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use. Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit. ■ To prevent 12-volt battery dis- charge Do not use the power outlet lon- ger than necessary when the EV system is off. ■ To prevent incorrect opera- tion of the vehicle When turning the power switch off, make sure to disconnect accessories designed for charging, such as portable char- gers, power banks, etc. from the power outlets. If such an accessory is left con- nected, the following may occur: ● The doors will not be able to be locked. ●The opening screen will be dis- played on the multi-information display. ● The interior lights, instrument panel lights, etc. will illuminate. USB Type-C charging ports The USB Type-C charging ports are used to supply 3 A of elec- tricity at 5 V to external devices. The USB Type-C charging ports are for charging only. They are not designed for data transfer or device, it may not charge prop- erly. Refer to the manual included with the device before using a USB charging port. Refer to “MULTIMEDIA OWNER’S MANUAL” for USB Type-A information. ■ Using the USB Type-C charging ports ▶ Center console 6 ▶ Rear ■ The USB Type-C charging ports can be used when The power switch is in ACC or ON. ■ Situations in which the USB Type-C charging ports may not operate correctly ● If a device which consumes more than 3 A at 5 V is connected ● If a device designed to communi- 460 6-4. Using the other interior features cate with a personal computer, such as a USB memory device, is connected ●If the connected external device is turned off (depending on device) ●If the temperature inside the vehi- cle is high, such as after the vehi- cle has been parked in the sun ■ About connected external devices Depending on the connected exter- nal device, charging may occasion- ally be suspended and then start again. This is not a malfunction. NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to the USB Type-C charging ports ● Do not insert foreign objects into the ports. ● Do not spill water or other liq- uids into the ports. ● Do not apply excessive force to or impact the USB Type-C charging ports. ● Do not disassemble or modify the USB Type-C charging ports. ■ To prevent damage to exter- nal devices ● Do not leave external devices in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to an external device. ● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary force to an exter- nal device or the cable of an external device while it is con- nected. ■ To prevent 12-volt battery dis- charge Do not use the USB Type-C charging ports for a long period of time with the EV system stopped. Wireless charger (if equipped) A portable device can be charged by just placing Qi stan- dard wireless charge compatible portable devices according to the Wireless Power Consortium, such as smartphones and mobile batteries, etc., on the charge area. The compatible portable devices can be found on the following Wireless Power Consortium website. https://www. wirelesspowerconsortium.com/ This function cannot be used with portable devices that are larger than the charging tray. Also, depending on the portable device, it may not operate as normal. Please read the opera- tion manual for portable devices to be used. ■ The “Qi” symbol The “Qi” symbol is a trademark of the Wireless Power Consor- tium. 6-4. Using the other interior features 461 ■ Name for all parts Charging tray Charging area* Operation indicator light *: Portable devices and wireless chargers contain charging coils. The charging coil in the wireless charger can be moved within the charge area near the center of the charging tray. If the charging coil inside a portable device is detected in the charge area, the charging coil inside the wireless charger will move toward it and start charging. If the charging coil inside a portable device moves outside of the charge area, charging will automatically stop. If 2 or more portable devices are placed on the charging tray, their charging coils may not be prop- erly detected and they may not be charged. ■ Using the wireless charger 1 Open the lid. 2 Place the portable device on the charging tray. Place the charging side of the por- table device down with the center of the device in the center of the charge area. Depending on the portable device, the charging coil may not be located in the center of the device. In this case, place the portable device so that its charging coil is in the center of the charge area. When charging, the operation indi- cator light (orange) comes on. If charging is not occurring, try plac- ing the portable device as close to the center of the charging area as possible. If charging is not per- formed, the operation indicator light will slowly illuminate in green and orange alternatively and a sound of charging coil operation may be heard repeatedly. When charging is complete, the operation indicator light (green) 6 comes on. ■ Recharging function ⚫ When charging is complete and after a fixed time in the charge suspension state, charging restarts. ⚫ When a portable device is moved significantly in the charge area, the charging coil 462 6-4. Using the other interior features is disconnected and charging is stopped momentarily. How- ever, if there is a charging coil in the charge area, the charging coil inside the wire- less charger will move toward it and then charging restarts. ■ Rapid charging function ⚫ The following portable devices support rapid charging. • Portable devices compliant with WPC Ver1.2.4 and compatible with rapid charging • iPhone’s with an iOS version that supports 7.5 W charging (iPhone 8 and later models) ⚫ When a portable device that supports rapid charging is charged, charging automati- cally switches to the rapid charging function. ■ Lighting conditions of operation indicator light Operation indicator light Charging tray side Turning off Green (comes on) Orange (comes on) Multimedia sys- tem screen side Disappear Gray Blue Conditions When the Wireless charger power supply is off On Standby (charging possible state)*1 When charging is complete*2 When placing the portable device on the charging area (detecting the por- table device) Charging *1: Charging power will not be output during standby. A metallic object will not be heated, if it is placed on the charging tray in this state. *2: Depending on the portable device, there are cases where the operation indicator light will continue being lit up orange even after the charging is complete. 6-4. Using the other interior features ■ The wireless charger is not working properly 463 The following are situations in which the wireless charger does not work properly and how to deal with the possible causes. Operation indica- tor light Orange (Flashing repeatedly once every second) Green (Flashing repeatedly once every second) Green (comes on) Multimedia sys- tem screen Gray Disappear Blue Suspected causes/Handling method Wireless charger and smart key communication failure → If the EV system is turned on, off and then restart the EV sys- tem. If the power switch is in ACC, start the EV system. (→P.233) Wireless charger and multimedia system communication failure → If the EV system is turned on, off and then restart the EV sys- tem. If the power switch is in ACC, start the EV system. (→P.233) AM radio stations are being auto- matically selected 6 → Wait until the system has com- pleted the automatic selection of AM radio stations. In the case that automatic selection cannot be completed, stop automatic selection. The smart key system is detecting the key → Please wait until the key detec- tion is complete. 464 6-4. Using the other interior features Operation indica- tor light Orange (Repeat- edly flashes 3 times continu- ously) Orange (Repeat- edly flashes 4 times continu- ously) Multimedia sys- tem screen Gray Gray Suspected causes/Handling method Foreign substance detection: A metallic foreign substance is in the charge area, and so the abnor- mal heating prevention function of the metallic foreign substance operated → Remove the foreign substance from the charge area. Portable device misaligned: → The charging coil in the porta- ble device moved outside of the charge area, and so the abnor- mal heating prevention function operated. Safety shutdown resulting when the temperature within the wire- less charger exceeded the set value → Stop charging, remove the por- table device from the charging tray, wait for the temperature to drop, and then start charging again. ●Failure to do so may result in the ■ The wireless charger can be operated when The power switch is in ACC or ON. ■ Portable devices that can be charged ●Portable devices compatible with the Qi wireless charging standard can be charged by the wireless charger. However, compatibility with portable devices that comply with Qi Ver. 1.0, 1.2.4 and later versions is not guaranteed. ●The wireless charger is designed to supply low power electricity (5 W or less) to a cellular phone, smartphone, or other portable device. possibility of fire, However, porta- ble devices, such as the following, can be charged with more than 5 W. • 7.5 W charging compatible iPhones can be charged at 7.5 W or less. • Portable devices which conform to WPC Ver 1.2.4 (Extended Power profile) can be charged at 10 W or less. ■ When covers and accessories are attached to portable devices Do not charge in situations where cover and accessories not able to handle Qi are attached to the porta- ble device. Depending on the type of cover 6-4. Using the other interior features 465 (including for certain genuine manu- facturer parts) and accessory, it may not be possible to charge. When charging is not performed even with the portable device placed on the charge area, remove the cover and accessories. ■ AM radio cooperation function during charging ●During charging, if noise occurs when listening to the AM radio, the charging frequency is auto- matically changed to reduce the noise. ●When automatically seeking AM radio stations, charging will be suspended to prevent charging noise from being detected as a radio station. Charging will resume automatically. ■ Charging precautions ●If the electronic key cannot be detected in the cabin, charging cannot be performed. When a door is opened and closed, charging may be temporarily sus- pended. ●While charging, the wireless char- ger and the portable device will become warm. This is not a mal- function. If a portable device becomes warm while charging and charging stops due to the protection func- tion of the portable device, wait until the portable device cools down and charge it again. ●Depending on usage of the porta- ble device, it may not be fully charged. This is not a malfunction. ■ Important points of the wire- less charger ●If the electronic key cannot be detected within the vehicle inte- rior, charging can not be done. When the door is opened and closed, charging may be tempo- rarily suspended. ●When charging, the wireless charging device and portable device will get warmer, however this is not a malfunction. When a portable device gets warm while charging may stop due to the pro- tection function on the portable device side. In this case, when the temperature of the portable drops significantly, charge again. The fan may start operating to lower the temperature inside the wireless charger, however this is not a malfunction. ■ Sound generated during opera- tion When the power supply switch is turned on or while a portable device is being identified, operation sounds may be heard. This is not a malfunc- tion. ■ Cleaning the wireless charger →P.482 ■ Trademark information ●iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. 6 ●Galaxy is a trademark or regis- tered trademark of Samsung Elec- tronics Co.,Ltd. ■ Certification →P.659 WARNING ■ Caution while driving When charging a portable device, for safety reasons, the driver should not operate the main part of the portable device while driv- ing. ■ Caution while in motion Do not charge lightweight devices such as wireless headphones while in motion. These devices are very light and may be ejected from the charging tray, which may lead to unforeseen accidents. 466 6-4. Using the other interior features WARNING ■ Caution regarding interfer- ence with electronic devices People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchroni- zation therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverters, as well as any other electrical medical device, should consult their physi- cian about the usage of the wire- less charger. ■ To prevent malfunctions or burns Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may result in a equipment failure and dam- age, catch fire, burns due to over- heat or electric shock. ● Do not insert any metallic objects between the charge area and the portable device while charging ● Do not attach an aluminum sticker or other metallic object to the charge area ● Do not attach an aluminum sticker or other metallic object to the side of the portable device (or to its case or cover) that touches the charge area ● Do not use the charging tray as a small storage space ● Do not subject to a strong force or impact ● Do not disassemble, modify or remove ● Do not charge devices other than specified portable devices ●Keep away from magnetic items ● Do not charge devices if the charge area is covered in dust ● Do not cover with a cloth or sim- ilar material NOTICE ■ Situations in which the func- tion may not operate normally Devices may not be charged nor- mally in the following situations. ●The portable device is fully charged ●The portable device is being charged with a cable connected ●There is foreign matter between the charge area and portable device ●Charging has caused the porta- ble device to heat up ●The temperature around the charging tray is 95°F (35°C) or higher, such as in extreme heat ●The portable device is placed with its charging side facing up ●The portable device is placed in an area misaligned from the charge area ●The portable device is larger than the charging tray ●The small portable device such as foldable type is placed in an area misaligned from the charge area ●The camera lens protrudes 0.12 in. (3 mm) or more from the sur- face of the portal device ●The vehicle is in an area where strong electrical waves or noise are emitted, such as near a tele- vision tower, power plant, gaso- line station, broadcasting station, large display, airport, etc. 6-4. Using the other interior features 467 NOTICE ●Any of the following objects that is protrudes 0.12 in. (3 mm) or thicker is stuck or installed between the charging side of the portable device and the charge area. • Thick cases or covers • A case or cover attached with an uneven or tilted surface, so that the charging side is not flat • Thick decorations • Accessories, such as finger rings, straps, etc. ●When the portable device is in contact with, or is covered by any of the following metallic objects: • A card that has metal on it, such as aluminum foil, etc. • A pack of cigarettes that includes aluminum foil • A wallet or bag that is made of metal • Coins • A heating pad • CDs, DVDs or other media • A metal accessory • A case or cover made of metal • Casing which has magnet in it on the charging side of the por- table device ●Electric wave type wireless remote controls are being used nearby ●The electronic key is not inside the vehicle ● If a portable device with a built in S-pen (Galaxy “Note” series, etc.) is placed on the tray with the S-Pen inserted ● 2 or more portable devices are placed on the charging tray at the same time If charging is abnormal or the operation indicator light contin- ues to flash for any other reason, the wireless charger may be mal- functioning. Contact your SUB- ARU dealer. ■ To prevent malfunctions and data corruptions ●When charging, bringing a credit, or other magnetic card, or magnetic storage media close to the charge area may clear any stored data due to magnetic influence. Also, do not bring a wristwatch or other pre- cision instrument close to the charge area since doing so may cause it to malfunction. 6 ● Do not charge with a non-con- tact IC card such as a transpor- tation system IC card inserted between the charging side of a portable device and the charge area. The IC chip may become extremely hot and damage the portable device or IC card. Be especially careful not to charge a portable device inside a case or cover with a non-contact IC card attached. ● Do not leave portable devices inside the vehicle. The inside of the vehicle can become hot in extreme heat, which could cause a malfunction. 468 6-4. Using the other interior features NOTICE ■ If the smartphone OS has been updated If the smartphone OS has been updated to a newer version, its charging specifications may have changed significantly. For details, check the information on the manufacturer’s website. ■ To prevent 12-volt battery dis- charge Do not use the wireless charger for a long period of time when the EV system is stopped. Armrest Fold down the armrest for use. Coat hooks The coat hooks are provided with the rear assist grips. WARNING ■ Items that must not be hanged on the hook Do not hang coat hangers or other hard or sharp objects on the hook. If the SRS curtain shield air- bags deploy, these items may become projectiles, causing death or serious injury. NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to the armrest Do not apply too much load on the armrest. Assist grips An assist grip installed on the ceiling can be used to support your body while sitting on the seat. 6-4. Using the other interior features 469 WARNING ■ Assist grips Do not use the assist grip when getting in or out of the vehicle or rising from your seat. NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to the assist grip Do not hang any heavy object or put a heavy load on the assist grip. Garage door opener* *: If equipped The garage door opener can be programmed using the HomeLink® to operate garage doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, security systems, and other devices. ■ HomeLink® programming pro- cedure The programming procedures can also be found at the following URL. Website: https://homelink.com/ subaru For support, contact customer sup- port at the following. Help Line: 1-800-355-3515 System components 6 The HomeLink® wireless control system in your vehicle has 3 buttons which can be pro- grammed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the program- ming methods on the following pages to determine the method which is appropriate for the device. 470 6-4. Using the other interior features ▶ Vehicles with auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror HomeLink® indicator light Garage door operation indi- cators HomeLink® icon Garage door operation indi- cators HomeLink® logo Appears while HomeLink® is oper- ating. When the HomeLink® button is pressed, the logo disappears even while the HomeLink® is operating. Setting icon Press the menu button to change the setting. Menu buttons HomeLink® buttons Illuminates while HomeLink® is operating. Buttons ▶ Vehicles with Digital inner mir- ror ■ Codes stored in the Home- Link® memory ●The registered codes are not erased even if the 12-volt battery cable is disconnected. ● If learning failed when registering a different code to a HomeLink® button that already has a code registered to it, the already regis- tered code will not be erased. WARNING ■ When programming a garage door or other remote control device The garage door or other device may operate, so ensure people and objects are out of danger to prevent potential harm. HomeLink® indicator light Illuminates above each button selected. HomeLink® icon 6-4. Using the other interior features 471 WARNING ■ Conforming to federal safety standards Do not use the HomeLink® com- patible transceiver with any garage door opener or device that lacks safety stop and reverse fea- tures as required by federal safety standards. This includes any garage door that cannot detect an interfering object. A door or device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury. ■ When operating or program- ming HomeLink® Never allow a child to operate or play with the HomeLink® buttons. Programming HomeLink® you may need a stepladder or other sturdy, safe device to reach the “Learn” or “Smart” button on the garage door opener motor. ■ Programming HomeLink® Steps 2 through 4 must be per- formed within 60 seconds, oth- erwise the HomeLink® indicator light will stop flashing and pro- gramming will not be success- fully completed. 1 Vehicles with Digital inner mirror: Press the HomeLink® button or menu button When the HomeLink® button is pressed: ® Homelink Training Tutorial will be ■ Before programming Home- Link® displayed to assist you program- ming the HomeLink®. ® 6 When Homelink Training Tutorial ⚫ During programming, it is pos- sible that garage doors, gates, or other devices may operate. For this reason, make sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or other devices to prevent injury or other potential harm. ⚫ It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the remote control transmitter for successful programming. ⚫ Garage door opener motors manufactured after 1995 may be equipped with rolling code protection. If this is the case, is displayed, follow the instructions displayed. When the menu button is pressed: Press the menu button and select the “Set Up >”. Homelink® Training Tutorial will be displayed to assist you programming the Home- Link®. When Homelink® Training Tutorial is displayed, follow the instructions displayed. 2 Press and release the Home- Link® button you want to pro- gram and check that the HomeLink® indicator light flashes (orange). 3 Point the remote control transmitter for the device at 472 6-4. Using the other interior features the rear view mirror, 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) from the HomeLink® buttons. Keep the HomeLink® indicator light in view while programming. 4 Program a device. ▶ Programming a device other than an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners) Press and hold the remote con- trol transmitter button until the HomeLink® indicator light changes from slowly flashing orange to rapidly flashing green (rolling code) or continuously lit green (fixed code), then release the button. ▶ Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Program- ming a device in the Cana- dian market Press and release the remote control transmitter button at 2 second intervals, repeatedly, until the HomeLink® indicator light changes from slowly flash- ing orange to rapidly flashing (green) (rolling code) or continu- ously lit (green) (fixed code). 5 Test the HomeLink® opera- tion by pressing the newly programmed button and observing the HomeLink® indicator light: ⚫ HomeLink® indicator light illu- minates: Programming of a fixed code device has com- pleted. The garage door or other device should operate when a HomeLink® button is pressed and released. ⚫ HomeLink® indicator light flashes rapidly: The garage door opener or other device is equipped with a rolling code. To complete programming, firmly press and hold the HomeLink® button for 2 sec- onds then release it. ⚫ If the garage door or other device does not operate, pro- ceed to “Programming a roll- ing code system”. 6-4. Using the other interior features 473 6 Repeat the steps above to program another device for any of the remaining Home- Link® buttons. ■ Programming a rolling code system Two or more people may be needed to complete rolling code programming. 1 Locate the “Learn” or “Smart” button on the garage door opener motor in the garage. This button can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the unit. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer. Refer to the owner’s manual supplied with the garage door opener motor for details. 3 Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button (inside the vehicle) for 2 seconds and release it. Repeat this sequence (press/hold/release) up to 3 times to complete program- ming. If the garage door opener motor operates when the HomeLink® button is pressed, the garage door opener motor recognizes the HomeLink® signal. 6 2 Press and release the “Learn” or “Smart” button. Perform 3 within 30 seconds after performing 2. ■ Enabling 2-way communi- cation with a garage door (only available for compati- ble devices) When enabled, 2-way communi- cation allows you to check the status of the opening and clos- ing of a garage door through indicators in your vehicle. 2-way communication is only available if the garage door opener motor used is a compati- ble device. (To check device compatibility, refer to www.homelink.com.) 474 6-4. Using the other interior features 1 Within 5 seconds after pro- gramming the garage door opener has been completed, if the garage door opener motor is trained to Home- Link®, both garage door operation indicators will flash rapidly (green) and the light on the garage door opener motor will blink twice, indicat- ing that 2-way communica- tion is enabled. If the indicators do not flash, per- form 2 and 3 within the first 10 presses of the HomeLink® button after programming has been com- pleted. 2 Press a programmed Home- ■ Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button When the following procedure is performed, buttons which already have devices registered to them can be overwritten: 1 Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. 2 When the HomeLink® indica- tor starts flashing orange, release the HomeLink® but- ton and perform “Program- ming HomeLink®” 1 (it takes 20 seconds for the Home- Link® indicator to start flash- ing). Link® button to operate a garage door. 3 Within 1 minute of pressing the HomeLink® button, after the garage door operation has stopped, press the “Learn” or “Smart” button on the garage door opener motor. Within 5 seconds of the establishment of 2-way communication with the garage door opener, both garage door operation indica- tors in the vehicle will flash rapidly (green) and the light on the garage door opener motor will blink twice, indicat- ing that 2-way communica- tion is enabled. ■ Before programming ● Install a new battery in the trans- mitter. ●The battery side of the transmitter must be pointed away from the HomeLink® buttons. Operating HomeLink® Press the appropriate Home- Link® button. The HomeLink® indicator light should turn on. The status of the opening and closing of a garage door is shown by the garage door oper- ation indicators. 6-4. Using the other interior features 475 ▶ Vehicles with auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror Color Orange (flash- ing) Green Red (flashing) Status Currently open- ing/closing Opening/closing has completed Feedback sig- nals cannot be received Opening Closing ▶ Vehicles with Digital inner mir- ror Opening Closing This function is only available if the garage door opener motor used is a compatible device. (To check device compatibility, refer to www.homelink.com.) The indicators can operate within approximately 820 ft. (250 m) of the garage door. However, if there are obstructions between the garage door and the vehicle, such as houses and trees, feedback signals from the garage door may not be received. To recall the previous door oper- ation status, press and release either HomeLink® buttons 6 and or and (vehicles with auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror), and or and (vehicles with Digital inner mirror) simulta- neously. The last recorded sta- tus will be displayed for 3 seconds. 476 6-4. Using the other interior features Erasing the entire Home- Link® memory (all three codes) Press and hold the 2 outside buttons for 10 seconds until the HomeLink® indicator light changes from continuously lit (orange) to rapidly flashing (green). If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the programs stored in the HomeLink® memory. Maintenance and care 7 7-1. Maintenance and care Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior 478 Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior . 481 7-2. Maintenance Maintenance requirements 485 General maintenance 486 7-3. Do-it-yourself mainte- nance Do-it-yourself service pre- cautions. 489 Hood . 491 Positioning a floor jack 493 Motor compartment . 494 Tires 501 Replacing the tire 514 Tire inflation pressure 521 Wheels 523 Air conditioning filter 524 Electronic key battery 527 Checking and replacing fuses 529 Headlight aim 531 Light bulbs. 532 477 7 478 7-1. Maintenance and care Cleaning and protect- ing the vehicle exte- rior Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condi- tion: Cleaning instructions ⚫ Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust. ⚫ Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois. ⚫ For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with water. ⚫ Wipe away any water. ⚫ Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deterio- rates. If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehi- cle body is cool. scratch and outside temperature. The restoration time may become shorter when the coating is warmed by applying warm water. ● Deep scratches caused by keys, coins, etc., cannot be restored. ● Do not use wax that contain abra- sives. ■ Automatic car washes ●Before washing the vehicle: • Fold the mirrors • Turn off the power back door (if equipped) Start washing from the front of the vehicle. Make sure to extend the mirrors before driving. ●Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface, parts (wheel, etc.) and harm your vehicle’s paint. ● Rear spoiler may not be washable in some automatic car washes. There may also be an increased risk of damage to vehicle. ●When the shift position needs to be held in N, refer to P.241. ■ High pressure car washes As water may enter the cabin, do not bring the nozzle tip near the gaps around the doors or perimeter of the windows, or spray these areas continuously. ■ Note for a smart key system If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, ■ Self-restoring coat The vehicle body has a self-restor- ing coating that is resistant to small surface scratches caused in a car wash, etc. ● The coating lasts for 5 to 8 years from when the vehicle is delivered from the plant. ● The restoration time differs depending on the depth of the follow the following correction pro- cedures to wash the vehicle: ●Place the key in a position 6 ft. (2 m) or more separate from the vehicle while the vehicle is being washed. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.) ●Set the electronic key to battery- saving mode to disable the smart key system. (→P.184) 7-1. Maintenance and care 479 ■ Wheels and wheel ornaments ●Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. ●Wash detergent off with water immediately after use. ● To protect the paint from damage, make sure to observe the follow- ing precautions. • Do not use acidic, alkaline or abrasive detergent • Do not use hard brushes • Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, such as after driving or parking in hot weather ■ Brake pads and calipers Rust may form if the vehicle is parked with wet brake pads or disc rotors, causing them to stick. Before parking the vehicle after it is washed, drive slowly and apply the brakes several times to dry the parts. ■ Bumpers Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners. ■ Plated portions If dirt cannot be removed, clean the parts as follows: ●Use a soft cloth dampened with an approximately 5% solution of neu- tral detergent and water to clean the dirt off. ●Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture. ● To remove oily deposits, use alco- hol wet wipes or a similar product. WARNING ■ When washing the vehicle Do not apply water to the inside of the motor compartment. Doing so may cause the electrical compo- nents, etc. to catch fire. ■ When cleaning the windshield Set the wiper switch to off. If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wipers may operate unexpect- edly in the following situations, and may result in hands being caught or other serious injuries and cause damage to the wiper blades. Off “AUTO” ●When the upper part of the windshield where the raindrop sensor is located is touched by hand ●When a wet rag or similar is held close to the raindrop sen- sor ● If something bumps against the 7 windshield ● If you directly touch the raindrop sensor body or if something bumps into the raindrop sensor ■ Precaution regarding the front and rear bumpers If the paint of the front or rear bumper is chipped or scratched, the following systems may not function correctly. If this occurs, consult your SUBARU dealer. ● SUBARU Safety Sense ● BSM ●RCTA ● SEA 480 7-1. Maintenance and care WARNING ● Rear Vehicle Approaching Indi- cation ●Secondary Collision Brake (Rear Impacts while Stopped) ●PKSB ●SUBARU Parking Assist NOTICE ■ To prevent paint deteriora- tion and corrosion on the body and components (alumi- num wheels, etc.) ●Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases: • After driving near the sea coast • After driving on salted roads • If coal tar or tree sap is present on the paint surface • If dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings are present on the paint surface • After driving in an area contami- nated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron powder or chem- ical substances • If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled with dust or mud • If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface ● If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately. ● To prevent the wheels from cor- roding, remove any dirt and store in a place with low humid- ity when storing the wheels. ■ Cleaning the exterior lights ●Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush. This may damage the surfaces of the lights. ● Do not apply wax to the sur- faces of the lights. Wax may cause damage to the lenses. ■ When using an automatic car wash Set the wiper switch to off posi- tion. If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wipers may operate and the wiper blades may be damaged. ■ When using a high pressure car wash ●When washing the vehicle, do not spray the camera or its sur- rounding area directly with a high pressure washer. Shock applied from high pressure water may cause the device to not operate normally. ● Do not spray water directly on the radar which is equipped behind the radar sensor cover. Otherwise it may cause the device to be damaged. ●Do not bring the nozzle tip close to boots (rubber or resin manu- factured cover), or connectors or the following parts. The parts may be damaged if they come into contact with high-pressure water. • Traction related parts • Steering parts • Suspension parts • Brake parts 7-1. Maintenance and care 481 NOTICE ●Keep the cleaning nozzle at least 11.9 in. (30 cm) away from the vehicle body. Otherwise resin section, such as moldings and bumpers, may be deformed and damaged. Also, do not con- tinuously hold the nozzle in the same place. ● Do not spray the lower part of the windshield continuously. If water enters the air conditioning system intake located near the lower part of the windshield, the air conditioning system may not operate correctly. ● Do not wash the underside of the vehicle using a high pres- sure car washer. If water enters the traction battery, the EV sys- tem may malfunction. ● Do not use the washer on the area around the charging port lid. Water could get into the charging inlet and could dam- age the vehicle. ■ Cleaning aluminum parts When cleaning the hood, do not push hard or put weight on it. The aluminum part may be dented. Cleaning and protect- ing the vehicle interior Perform cleaning in a man- ner appropriate to each component and its material. Protecting the vehicle interior ⚫ Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a cloth damp- ened with lukewarm water. ⚫ If dirt cannot be removed, wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with neutral deter- gent diluted to approximately 1%. Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off remaining traces of detergent and water. 7 ■ Shampooing the carpets There are several commercial foam- ing-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not use water. Wipe dirty surfaces and let them dry. Excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible. ■ Handling the seat belts Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts. ■ Front side windows with IR pro- tective coating The front side windows have IR pro- tective coating. To prevent any dam- 482 7-1. Maintenance and care age to the IR protective coating, observe the following: ●If the windows are dirty, gently wipe them with a cloth soaked in water or lukewarm water as soon as possible. ●If the windows are very dirty, do not open and close them repeat- edly. WARNING ■ Water in the vehicle ● Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle. Doing so may cause the electri- cal components, etc., to mal- function or catch fire. ● Do not get any of the SRS com- ponents or wiring in the vehicle interior wet. (→P.35) An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly, resulting in death or serious injury. ●Vehicles with wireless charger: Do not let the wireless charger (→P.460) get wet. Failure to do so may cause the charger to become hot and cause burns or could cause electric shock resulting in death or serious injury. ■ Cleaning the interior (espe- cially instrument panel) Do not use a polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off the windshield, obstructing the driver’s view and leading to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. NOTICE ■ Cleaning detergents ● Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may dis- color the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces: • Non-seat portions: Organic sub- stances such as benzene or gasoline, alkaline or acidic solu- tions, dye, and bleach • Seats: Alkaline or acidic solu- tions, such as thinner, benzene, and alcohol ● Do not use a polish wax or pol- ish cleaner. The instrument panel’s or other interior part’s painted surface may be dam- aged. ■ Water on the floor Do not wash the vehicle floor with water. Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into contact with electrical components such as the audio system above or under the floor of the vehicle. Water may also cause the body to rust. ■ When cleaning the inside of the windshield Do not allow glass cleaner to con- tact the lens. Also, do not touch the lens. (→P.260) ■ Cleaning the inside of the rear window ● Do not use a glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to the rear window defogger heater wires. Use a cloth dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the win- dow in strokes running parallel to the heater wires. 7-1. Maintenance and care 483 NOTICE ●Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires. ■ Cleaning the front side win- dows Do not use any compound or abrasive product (e.g., glass cleaner, detergent, wax) to clean the windows. It may damage the coating. Cleaning the areas with satin-finish metal accents ⚫ Remove dirt using a water dampened soft cloth or syn- thetic chamois. ⚫ Wipe the surface with a dry soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture. ■ Cleaning the areas with satin- finish metal accents The metal areas use a layer of real metal for the surface. It is necessary to clean them regularly. If dirty areas are left uncleaned for long periods of time, they may be difficult to clean. Cleaning the leather areas ⚫ Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. ⚫ Wipe off any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth damp- ened with diluted detergent. Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent. ⚫ Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all remaining traces of detergent. ⚫ Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and ventilated area. ■ Caring for leather areas SUBARU recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior. NOTICE ■ Preventing damage to leather surfaces Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deteriora- tion of leather surfaces: ● Remove any dust or dirt from leather surfaces immediately. ● Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended peri- ods of time. Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during 7 summer. ● Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or containing wax on the upholstery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up signifi- cantly. Cleaning the synthetic leather areas ⚫ Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. ⚫ Wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with neutral deter- gent diluted to approximately 1%. 484 7-1. Maintenance and care ⚫ Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off remaining traces of detergent and water. Cleaning fabric portions of the instrument panel ⚫ To remove dust from the fab- ric, use a vacuum cleaner or adhesive tape. However, please remove the dust near the passenger airbag orna- ment by hand. ⚫ Use a cloth dampened with water to gently wipe the fabric clean. Do not use detergents to clean the fabric. ⚫ Vehicles with radiant heaters: Do not hard scrub on the fab- ric portion of the radiant heat- ers (→P.443) Maintenance require- ments 7-2. Maintenance ■ Handling of the 12-volt bat- tery 485 To ensure safe and econom- ical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance are essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform regular checks. SUBARU recommends the following maintenance: ■ Repair and replacement It is recommended that genuine SUBARU parts be used for repairs to ensure performance of each sys- tem. If non-SUBARU parts are used in replacement or if a repair shop other than a SUBARU dealer per- forms repairs, confirm the warranty coverage. ■ Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a SUBARU dealer ●SUBARU technicians are well- trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information. They are well informed about the operations of all systems on your vehicle. ●Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been performed is under war- ranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your vehicle is under warranty, your SUBARU dealer will promptly take care of it. ●Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste pro- duced by component wear con- tain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash any affected area immediately. ● 12-volt battery posts, terminals and related accessories con- tain lead and lead compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling. (→P.497) General maintenance General maintenance should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by yourself or by a SUBARU dealer. Scheduled maintenance Scheduled maintenance should 7 be performed at specified inter- vals according to the mainte- nance schedule. For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the “Warranty and Maintenance Book- let” or “Warranty and Service Book- let”. WARNING ■ If your vehicle is not properly maintained Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible death or seri- ous injury. ■ Resetting the message indicat- ing maintenance is required After the required maintenance is performed according to the mainte- nance schedule, please reset the message. To reset the message, follow the procedure described below: 486 7-2. Maintenance 1 Press or of meter control switches and select on the multi-information display. 2 Press or of meter control switches and select “Vehicle Set- tings” and then press and hold . 3 Press or of meter control switches and select “Scheduled Maintenance” and then press. 4 Select the “Yes” and press . Do-it-yourself mainte- nance You can perform some mainte- nance procedures by yourself. Please be aware that do-it-your- self maintenance may affect warranty coverage. The use of SUBARU Repair Manu- als is recommended. For details about warranty cover- age, refer to the separate “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet” or “War- General maintenance Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet” or “Warranty and Service Booklet”. It is rec- ommended that any prob- lem you notice should be brought to the attention of your SUBARU dealer or qualified service shop for advice. WARNING ■ If the EV system is running Turn the EV system off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing maintenance checks. Motor compartment Items Check points Is the brake fluid at ranty and Service Booklet”. Brake fluid Power control unit/heater coolant 12-volt battery the correct level? (→P.497) Is the power con- trol unit/heater coolant at the cor- rect level? (→P.494, 496) Check the connec- tions. (→P.497) 7-2. Maintenance 487 Items Radiator/con- denser Washer fluid Check points The radiator and condenser should be free from for- eign objects. (→P.495) Is there sufficient washer fluid? (→P.500) Items Brakes Check points • The vehicle should not pull to one side when the brakes are applied. • The brakes should work effectively. • The brake pedal should not feel Vehicle interior Items Check points • The accelerator pedal should spongy. • The brake pedal should not get too close to the floor when the brakes are Accelerator pedal Transmission “Park” mecha- nism Brake pedal move smoothly (without uneven pedal effort or catching). • When parked on a slope and the shift position is in P, is the vehicle securely stopped? • Does the brake pedal move smoothly? • Does the brake pedal have appropriate clearance from the floor? • Does the brake pedal have the correct amount of free play? Head restraints Indica- tors/buzzers Lights Parking brake applied. • Do the head restraints move smoothly and lock securely? • Do the indica- tors and buzzers function prop- erly? 7 • Do all the lights come on? • Are the head- lights aimed cor- rectly? • Does the park- ing brake oper- ate normally? • When parked on a slope and the parking brake is on, is the vehicle securely stopped? 488 7-2. Maintenance Items Seat belts Seats Steering wheel Check points • Do the seat belts operate smoothly? • The seat belts should not be damaged. • Do the seat con- trols operate properly? • Does the steer- ing wheel rotate smoothly? • Does the steer- ing wheel have the correct amount of free play? • There should not be any strange sounds coming from the steer- ing wheel. Items Tires Windshield wipers Check points • Is the tire infla- tion pressure correct? • The tires should not be damaged or excessively worn. • Have the tires been rotated according to the maintenance schedule? • The wheel bolt should not be loose. • The wiper blades should not show any signs of cracking, split- ting, wear, con- tamination or deformation. • The wiper blades should clear the Vehicle exterior Items Check points • Do the doors windshield with- out streaking or skipping. Doors Hood Fluid leaks operate smoothly? • Does the hood lock system work properly? • There should not be any signs of fluid leakage after the vehicle has been parked. 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 489 Do-it-yourself service precautions If you perform maintenance by yourself, be sure to fol- low the correct procedure as given in these sections. Maintenance Items Parts and tools • Warm water Items Power control unit coolant level Parts and tools • In order to ensure maximum perfor- mance of the trac- tion battery cooling system and limit risks of battery short cir- cuit and other damage to your vehicle, SUBARU recommends using “Genuine Traction Battery 12-volt bat- tery condi- • Baking soda • Grease (→P.496) Coolant” or simi- lar high-quality tion (→P.497) • Conventional wrench (for termi- nal clamp bolts) • FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid FMVSS No.116 ethylene glycol- based, low electric conductivity cool- ant, non-amine and non-borate coolant with azole additives. Brake fluid level (→P.497) DOT 4 or SAE J1704 brake fluid • Rag or paper towel • Funnel (used only for adding brake fluid) • Funnel (used only for adding coolant) 7 490 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Items Parts and tools WARNING Heater cool- ant level (→P.494) Fuses (→P.529) Headlight aim (→P.531) Radiator and condenser (→P.495) Tire inflation pressure (→P.521) Washer fluid (→P.500) • “Toyota Super Long Life Cool- ant” or a similar high quality eth- ylene glycol-based non-silicate, non- amine, non-nitrite and non-borate coolant with long- life hybrid organic acid technology “Toyota Super Long Life Cool- ant” is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and 50% deion- ized water. • Funnel (used only for adding coolant) • Fuse with same amperage rating as original • Phillips-head screwdriver ⎯ • Tire pressure gauge • Compressed air source • Water or washer fluid containing antifreeze (for win- ter use) • Funnel (used only for adding water or washer fluid) The motor compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury, observe the following precautions. ■ When working on the motor compartment ● Make sure that “POWER ON” on the multi-information display and the “READY” indicator are both off. ● Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fan. ● Be careful not to touch the motor, power control unit, radia- tor, etc., right after driving as they may be hot. Coolant and other fluids may also be hot. ● Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper and rags, in the motor compartment. ● Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to the 12- volt battery. 12-volt battery fumes are flammable. ● Be extremely cautious when working on the 12-volt battery. It contains poisonous and corro- sive sulfuric acid. ● Never touch, disassemble, remove or replace the high volt- age parts, cables and their con- nectors. It can cause severe burns or electric shock that may result in death or serious injury. 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 491 WARNING ■ When working near the elec- tric cooling fan or radiator grille Be sure the power switch is OFF. With the power switch in ON, the electric cooling fan may automati- cally start to run if the air condi- tioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. (→P.495) ■ Safety glasses Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc., from getting in your eyes. Hood Opening the hood 1 Pull the hood lock release lever. The hood will pop up slightly. 2 Push the auxiliary catch lever to the left and lift the hood. 7 492 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 3 Hold the hood open by insert- ing the supporting rod into NOTICE the slot. ■ When closing the hood Be sure to return the support rod to its clip before closing the hood. Closing the hood without return- ing the support rod properly could cause the hood to bend. WARNING ■ Pre-driving check Check that the hood is fully closed and locked. If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion and cause an accident, which may result in death or seri- ous injury. ■ After installing the support rod into the slot Make sure the rod is properly inserted into the slot to prevent the hood from shutting on your head or body. Positioning a floor jack 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Rear 493 When using a floor jack, fol- low the instructions in the manual provided with the jack and perform the opera- tion safely. When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly. Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury. Location of the jack point ■ Front 7 494 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Motor compartment Components Heater coolant reservoir (→P.494) Washer fluid tank (→P.500) Power control unit coolant reservoir (→P.496) 12-volt battery (→P.497) Brake fluid reservoir (→P.497) Fuse box (→P.529) Radiator (→P.495) Condenser (→P.495) Electric cooling fan Checking the heater cool- ant The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the reservoir when the EV system is cold. 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 495 Reservoir cap “MAX” line “MIN” line If the level is on or below the “MIN” line, add coolant up to the “MAX” line. (→P.576) ■ Coolant selection Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and nonbo- rate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology. “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. (Minimum tem- perature: -31°F [-35°C]) For more details about coolant, con- tact your SUBARU dealer. ■ If the coolant level drops within a short time of replenishing Visually check the radiator, hoses, power control unit coolant reservoir caps, drain cock and water pump. If you cannot find a leak, have your SUBARU dealer, test the cap and check for leaks in the cooling sys- tem. WARNING ■ When the heater system is hot Do not remove the heater coolant reservoir caps. The heater system may be under pressure and may spray hot cool- ant if the cap is removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns. NOTICE ■ When adding coolant Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label. ■ If you spill coolant Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging parts or paint. Checking the radiator and condenser 7 Check the radiator and con- denser and clear away any for- eign objects. If either of the above parts is extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, have your vehicle inspected SUBARU dealer. WARNING ■ When the EV system is hot Do not touch the radiator or con- denser as they may be hot and cause serious injuries, such as burns. 496 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance WARNING ■ When the electric cooling fan are operating Do not touch the motor compart- ment. With the power switch in ON, the electric cooling fan may automati- cally start to run if the air condi- tioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. Be sure the power switch is OFF when work- ing near the electric cooling fan or radiator grille. Checking the power con- trol unit coolant The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the reservoir when the EV system is cold. Reservoir cap “MAX” line “MIN” line If the level is on or below the “MIN” line, add coolant up to the “MAX” line. your vehicle, SUBARU recom- mends using “Genuine Traction Bat- tery Coolant” or similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based, low electric conductivity coolant, non-amine and non-borate coolant with azole addi- tives. SUBARU cannot guarantee that the use of a product other than “Genu- ine Traction Battery Coolant” will prevent risks of battery short circuit or other damage. Never use water as it will cause damage. Do not reuse coolant that has been removed from the radiator. For more details about coolant, con- tact your SUBARU dealer. ■ If the coolant level drops within a short time of replenishing Visually check the hoses, heater coolant reservoir caps, drain cock and water pump. If you cannot find a leak, have your SUBARU dealer, test the cap and check for leaks in the cooling sys- tem. WARNING ■ When the EV system is hot Do not remove the power control unit coolant reservoir caps. The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot cool- ant if the cap is removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns. ■ Coolant selection In order to ensure maximum perfor- mance of the traction battery cooling system and limit risks of battery short circuit and other damage to NOTICE ■ When adding coolant 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance J1703 brake fluid FMVSS No.116 DOT 4 or SAE J1704 brake fluid 497 Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label. ■ If you spill coolant Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging parts or paint. Checking and adding the brake fluid ■ Checking fluid level The brake fluid level should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the tank. Reservoir cap “MAX” line “MIN” line ■ Adding fluid Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary item. ⚫ Fluid type FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE ⚫ Item Clean funnel ■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air Excess moisture in the brake fluid can cause a dangerous loss of brak- ing efficiency. Use only newly opened brake fluid. WARNING ■ When filling the reservoir Take care as brake fluid can harm your hands and eyes and damage painted surfaces. If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately. If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor. NOTICE ■ If the fluid level is low or high 7 It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear out or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high. If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, there may be a serious problem. Checking the 12-volt bat- tery Check the 12-volt battery as fol- lows. ■ 12-volt battery exterior Make sure that the 12-volt bat- tery terminals are not corroded 498 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance and that there are no loose con- nections, cracks, or loose clamps. Terminals Hold-down clamp ■ Checking 12-volt battery fluid Check that the level is between the “UPPER LEVEL” and “LOWER LEVEL” lines. “UPPER LEVEL” line “LOWER LEVEL” line If the fluid level is at or below the “LOWER LEVEL” line, add distilled water. ■ Adding distilled water 1 Remove the vent plug. 2 Add distilled water. If the “UPPER LEVEL” cannot be seen, check the fluid level by look- ing directly at the cell. 3 Put the vent plug back on and close it securely. ■ Before recharging When recharging, the 12-volt bat- tery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. There- fore, observe the following precau- tions before recharging: ● If recharging with the 12-volt bat- tery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable. ●Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and disconnecting the charger cables to the 12-volt battery. ■ After recharging/reconnecting the 12-volt battery ● The EV system may not start. Fol- low the procedure below to initial- ize the system. 1 Shift the shift position to P. 2 Open and close any of the doors. 3 Restart the EV system. ● Unlocking the doors using the Smart key system may not be possible immediately after recon- necting the 12-volt battery. If this happens, use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock/unlock the doors. ●Start the EV system with the power switch in ACC. The EV sys- tem may not start with the power switch turned off. However, the EV system will operate normally from the second attempt. ●The power switch mode is 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Where to safely charge the 12-volt battery 499 recorded by the vehicle. If the 12- volt battery is disconnected and reconnected, the vehicle will return the power switch mode to the status it was in before the 12- volt battery was disconnected. Make sure to turn off the power switch before disconnecting the 12-volt battery. Take extra care when connecting the 12-volt bat- tery if the power switch mode prior to the 12-volt battery being dis- connected is unknown. If the EV system will not start even after multiple attempts at all the methods above, contact your SUB- ARU dealer. WARNING ■ Chemicals in the 12-volt bat- tery Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious injury, take the following precau- tions while working on or near the 12-volt battery: ● Do not cause sparks by touch- ing the 12-volt battery terminals with tools. ● Do not smoke or light a match near the 12-volt battery. ●Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes. ● Never inhale or swallow electro- lyte. ●Wear protective safety glasses when working near the 12-volt battery. ●Keep children away from the 12-volt battery. Always charge the 12-volt battery in an open area. Do not charge the 12-volt battery in a garage or closed room where there is insuf- ficient ventilation. ■ Emergency measures regard- ing electrolyte ● If electrolyte gets in your eyes Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the near- est medical facility. ● If electrolyte gets on your skin Wash the affected area thor- oughly. If you feel pain or burn- ing, get medical attention immediately. ● If electrolyte gets on your clothes It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and follow the procedure above if necessary. ● If you accidentally swallow elec- 7 trolyte Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention immediately. ■ When there is insufficient 12- volt battery fluid Do not use if there is insufficient fluid in the 12-volt battery. There is a possible danger that the 12- volt battery may explode. 500 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance NOTICE ■ When recharging the 12-volt battery Never recharge the 12-volt bat- tery while the EV system is oper- ating. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off. ■ When adding distilled water Avoid overfilling. Water spilled during 12-volt battery recharging may cause corrosion. Adding the washer fluid If any washer does not work or the warning message appears on the multi-information display, the washer tank may be empty. Add washer fluid. NOTICE ■ Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid Do not use soapy water or anti- freeze instead of washer fluid. Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces, as well as damaging the pump lead- ing to problems of the washer fluid not spraying. ■ Diluting washer fluid Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary. Refer to the freezing tempera- tures listed on the label of the washer fluid bottle. WARNING ■ When adding washer fluid Do not add washer fluid when the EV system is hot or operating as washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the motor, etc. 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 501 Tires Replace or rotate tires in accordance with mainte- nance schedules and tread- wear. Checking tires Check if the treadwear indica- tors are showing on the tires. Also check the tires for uneven wear, such as excessive wear on one side of the tread. New tread Worn tread Treadwear indicator The location of treadwear indicators is shown by a “TWI” or “ ” mark, etc., molded into the sidewall of each tire. Replace the tires if the treadwear indicators are showing on a tire. ■ When to replace your vehicle’s tires Tires should be replaced if: ●The treadwear indicators are showing on a tire. ●You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric, and bulges indicating internal damage. ●A tire goes flat repeatedly or can- not be properly repaired due to the size or location of a cut or other damage. If you are not sure, consult with your SUBARU dealer. ■ Tire life Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if it has seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious. ■ Maximum load of tire Check that the number given by dividing the maximum load by 1.10 of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight 7 Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater. For the GAWR, see the Certification Regulation Label. For the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire. (→P.588) ■ Tire types ●Summer tires 502 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Summer tires are high-speed perfor- mance tires best suited to highway WARNING driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When install- ing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires. ●All season tires All season tires are designed to pro- vide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most win- ter conditions as well as for use year-round. All season tires, how- ever, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in accelera- tion and handling performance com- pared with summer tires in highway driving. ●Snow tires For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, con- struction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restrictions. Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. (→P.423) ■ If the tread on snow tires wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm) The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost. ■ When inspecting or replacing tires Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. Failure to do so may cause dam- age to parts of the drive train as well as dangerous handling char- acteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or seri- ous injury. ● Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread pat- terns. Also, do not mix tires of remark- ably different treadwear. ● Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by SUB- ARU. ● Do not mix differently con- structed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply tires). ● Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires. ● Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle. Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previ- ously. NOTICE ■ Driving on rough roads Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes. These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body. NOTICE ■ If tire inflation pressure of each tire becomes low while 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Tire pressure warning system 503 driving Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined. Tire rotation Rotate the tires in the order shown. To equalize tire wear and extend tire life, SUBARU recommends that tire rotation is carried out at the same interval as tire inspection. Do not fail to initialize the tire pres- sure warning system after tire rota- tion. Front ■ When rotating the tires Make sure that the power switch is OFF. If the tires are rotated while the power switch is in ON, the tire posi- tion information will not be updated. If this accidentally occurs, either turn the power switch to OFF and then to ON, or initialize the system after checking that the tire pressure is properly adjusted. Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise. The tire pressure warning sys- tem of this vehicle adopts a 2- type warning system. ⚫ When “Adjust Pressure” is displayed (Normal Warning) A warning with the tire pressure warning light and warning buzzer when there is an unknown level of low tire pressure with the appear- ance of the tire due to natural air leakage as well as the pressure lowering due to changes in the pressure according to the outside temperature. ⚫ When “Immediately Check 7 Tire when Safe” is displayed (Emergency Warning) A warning with the tire pressure warning light and warning buzzer when there is a known level of low tire pressure with the appearance of the tire due to pressure suddenly lowering. However, the system may not be able to detect sudden tire ruptures (bursting, etc.). ⚫ The tire pressure detected by the tire pressure warning sys- tem can be displayed on the multi-information display. 504 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ How to change the unit 1 Park the vehicle in a safe place and EV system off. 2 Start the EV system. Changing the unit cannot be per- formed while the vehicle is moving. 3 Press or of the meter control switch to select . 4 Press or to select “Vehicle Settings” and then press and hold “OK”. 5 Press or of the meter control switches and the meter control switches and select “TPWS setting” and then press “OK”. 6 Press or of the meter control switches and select “Setting Unit” and then press “OK”. 7 Press or of the meter control switches and select the desired unit and then press “OK”. ■ Routine tire inflation pressure checks The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily vehicle checks. ■ Tire inflation pressure ● It may take a few minutes to dis- play the tire inflation pressure after the power switch is turned to ON. It may also take a few min- utes to display the tire inflation pressure after inflation pressure has been adjusted. ●Tire inflation pressure changes with temperature. The displayed values may also be different from the values mea- sured using a tire pressure gauge. ■ Situations in which the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly ● In the following cases, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly. • If non-genuine SUBARU wheels are used. • A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not an OE (Original Equipment) tire. • A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not of the specified size. • Tire chains etc. are equipped. • If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed. • If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, particularly around the wheels or wheel housings. • If the tire inflation pressure is extremely higher than the speci- fied level. • If wheels without tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are used. • If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not registered in the tire pressure warning computer. 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 505 ●Performance may be affected in the following situations. • Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facil- ity that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise • When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication device If tire position information is not cor- rectly displayed due to the radio wave conditions, the display may be corrected by driving and changing the radio wave conditions. ●When the vehicle is parked, the time taken for the warning to start or go off could be extended. ●When tire inflation pressure declines rapidly for example when a tire has burst, the warning may not function. Installing tire pressure warning valves and trans- mitters When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must also be installed. When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed, new ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warn- ing computer and the tire pressure warning system must be initialized. (→P.510) ■ When replacing the tires and wheels If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 10 minutes, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute and stays on to indicate a system malfunction. NOTICE ■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warn- ing valves, transmitters and tire valve caps ●When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valves and transmit- ters, contact your SUBARU dealer as the tire pressure warning valves and transmit- ters may be damaged if not handled correctly. ● Make sure to install the tire valve caps. If the tire valve caps are not installed, water could enter the tire pressure warning valves and the tire pressure warning valves could be bound. ●When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than those specified. The cap may become stuck. ■ To avoid damage to the tire 7 pressure warning valves and transmitters When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warn- ing valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid seal- ant is used, contact your SUB- ARU dealer as soon as possible. After use of liquid sealant, make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when repairing or replacing the tire. 506 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Registration of the posi- tion of each wheel after performing a tire rotation ■ When rotating the tires It is necessary to register the position of each wheel after per- forming a tire rotation. Wheel position registration can be performed by oneself. Wheel position registration is per- formed by driving forward with moderate left and right turns. However, depending on the driv- ing conditions and driving envi- ronment, registration may take some time to complete. ■ Registration of the tire posi- tion 1 Park the vehicle in a safe place and stop the EV sys- tem for 15 minutes or more. 2 Start the EV system (→P.496) Registration cannot be performed while the vehicle is moving. 3 Press or of the meter control switches and select . 4 Press or of the meter control switches and select “Vehicle Settings”, and then press and hold the “OK”. 5 Press or of the meter control switches and select “TPWS Setting”, and then press “OK”. 6 Press or of the meter control switches and select “Tire Rotation”, and then press “OK”. 7 Press or of the meter control switches and select “OK”, and then press “OK”. A message is displayed on the multi-information display. Also, “–” is displayed for inflation pressure of each tire on the multi-information display while the tire pressure warning system determines the position. “Setting Pressure Wait a Moment” 8 Drive at approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more for approximately 10 to 30 min- utes. When wheel position registration is complete, the inflation pressure of each tire will be displayed on the multi-information display. Even if the vehicle is not driven at approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, registration can be com- pleted by driving for a long time. However, if initialization does not complete after driving for 1 hour or 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 507 more, park the vehicle in a safe place for approximately 15 minutes and then drive the vehicle again. ■ When performing wheel posi- tion registration ●Normally, wheel position registra- tion can be completed within approximately 30 minutes. ●Wheel position registration is per- formed while driving at a vehicle speed of approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more. ■ The initialization operation ●If the power switch is turned off while registering the wheel posi- tion, the next time the power switch is turned to ON, the wheel position registration will resume and it will not be necessary to restart the procedure. ●While the position of each tire is being determined and the inflation pressures are not being displayed on the multi-information display, if the inflation pressure of a tire drops, the tire pressure warning light will come on. ■ If the tire pressure warning sys- tem is not registered properly ●In the following situations, wheel position registration may take lon- ger than usual to be completed or may not be possible. • Vehicle is not driven at approxi- mately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more • Vehicle is driven on unpaved roads If initialization does not complete after driving for 1 hour or more, park the vehicle in a safe place for approximately 15 minutes and then drive the vehicle again. ●If the vehicle is reversed during wheel position registration, all data collected until then will be cleared. Perform driving again. Setting the tire pressure ■ When you need to setting the tire pressure In the following situations, it will be necessary to perform the tire inflation pressure setting proce- dure of the tire pressure warning system. ⚫ When the specified tire infla- tion pressure has changed, such as due to carried load, etc. ⚫ When the tire inflation pres- sure is changed such as when the tire size is changed. If the tire inflation pressure has been adjusted to the specified level, perform the tire inflation setting procedure by selecting specified inflation pressure on the multi-information display. When the tire inflation pressure 7 is to be other than specified, such as when tires other than the specified size are used, etc., set the tire inflation pressure using the current pressure. Make sure to adjust the tire inflation pressure of each tire to the appropriate level before per- forming tire pressure setting. The tire pressure warning sys- tem operates based on this tire inflation pressure. 508 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Setting by selecting a spec- ified tire inflation pressure 1 Start the EV system (→P.233) The tire inflation pressure cannot be set while the vehicle is moving. 2 Press or of the meter control switches and select . 3 Press or of the meter control switches and select “Vehicle Settings”, and then press and hold the “OK”. 4 Press or of the meter control switches and select “TPWS Setting”, and then press “OK”. 5 Press or of the meter control switches and select “Tire Pressure Setting”, and then press “OK”. 6 Press or of the meter control switches and select “Setting by Specified Pres- sure”, and then press “OK”. Select the desired front and rear tire pressures. 7 Press or of the meter control switches and select “OK”, and then press “OK”. The tire pressure warning light will slowly blink 3 times and a message indicating that tire inflation pressure is being set will be displayed on the multi-information display. After setting the tire inflation pres- sure, a message indicating that set- ting has been completed will be displayed on the multi-information display. “Setting Pressure Wait a Moment” ■ Setting using the current tire inflation pressure 1 Adjust the tire inflation pres- sure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. Make sure to adjust the tire pres- sure to the specified cold tire infla- tion pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will oper- ate based on this pressure level. 2 Start the EV system (→P.233) The tire inflation pressure cannot be set while the vehicle is moving. 3 Press or of the meter control switches and select . 4 Press or of the meter control switches and select “Vehicle Settings”, and then press and hold the “OK”. 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 509 5 Press or of the meter control switches and select “TPWS Setting”, and then press “OK”. 6 Press or of the meter control switches and select “Tire Pressure Setting”, and then press “OK”. 7 Press or of the meter control switches and select “Setting by Current Pressure” and then press “OK”. 8 Press or of the meter control switches and select “OK”, and then press “OK”. The tire pressure warning light will slowly blink 3 times and a message indicating that tire inflation pressure is being set will be displayed on the multi-information display. After setting the tire inflation pres- sure, a message indicating that set- ting has been completed will be displayed on the multi-information display. “Setting Pressure Wait a Moment” ■ Warning performance of the tire pressure warning system (Set- ting using the current tire infla- tion pressure) ●When performing the tire pressure setting using the current tire infla- tion pressure, the warning timing of the tire pressure warning sys- tem will vary according to the con- ditions under which tire pressure setting was performed. Therefore, a warning may be output even if the tire inflation pressure drops slightly or if the tire inflation pres- sure increases above that when the tire inflation pressure was set. ●Make sure to perform the tire pressure setting procedure after adjusting the tire inflation pres- sure. Also, make sure the tires are cold before performing the tire pressure setting procedure or adjusting the tire inflation pres- sure. ■ Tire inflation pressure setting procedure (Setting using the current tire inflation pressure) ● If the power switch is turned off while setting the tire inflation pres- sure, the next time the power switch is turned to ON, the setting procedure will resume and it will not be necessary to restart the procedure. ● If the tire inflation pressure setting procedure is started unnecessar- ily, adjust the tire inflation pres- sure to the specified level with the tires cold and then perform setting by selecting a specified tire infla- tion pressure, or perform the tire inflation pressure setting proce- dure with the current tire inflation pressure. ■ If the tire inflation pressure can- not be set properly ● Normally, the tire inflation pres- sure setting procedure can be completed in 2 or 3 minutes. ● If the tire pressure warning light 510 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance does not blink 3 times when start- ing the tire inflation pressure set- ting procedure, the procedure may not have started. Perform the procedure again from the begin- ning. ●If tire inflation pressure setting procedure cannot be completed after performing the above proce- dure, contact your SUBARU dealer. WARNING ■ When setting using the cur- rent tire inflation pressure Make sure to adjust the tire infla- tion pressure of each tire to the appropriate level before perform- ing tire pressure setting. Other- wise, the tire pressure warning light may not illuminate even if the tire inflation pressure drops or may illuminate even though the tire inflation pressure is normal. Registering ID codes ■ When registering ID codes The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a unique ID code. When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed, new ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer. ■ How to register ID code 1 Park the vehicle in a safe place, wait for approximately 15 minutes. 2 Start the EV system. (→P.233) The ID code registration procedure cannot be performed while the vehicle is moving. 3 Press or of the meter control switches and select . 4 Press or of the meter control switches and select “Vehicle Settings”, and then press and hold the “OK”. 5 Press or of the meter control switches and select “TPWS Setting”, and then press “OK”. 6 Press or of the meter control switches and select “Tire Set Switching”, and then press “OK”. 7 Press or of the meter control switches and select “Register New Valve/ID” and then press “OK”. 8 Check if the desired wheel set (“Tire Set 1” or “Tire Set 2”) is displayed. ID codes will be registered to the displayed wheel set. To change the wheel set to be reg- istered, press or of the meter control switches, and then select the wheel set you wish to register. If ID codes have already been reg- istered for that wheel set, the tire pressure warning light will slowly blink 3 times, and a message indi- cating that change is occurring will 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 511 be displayed on the multi-informa- tion display. “Setting Pressure Wait a Moment” 9 Press or of the meter control switches and select “OK” and then press “OK”. The tire pressure warning light will slowly blink 3 times and a message indicating that ID code registration is being performed will be displayed on the multi-information display. Wheel set changing will be can- celed and registration will begin. When registration is being per- formed, the tire pressure warning light will blink for approximately 1 minute then illuminate and “–” will be displayed for the inflation pres- sure of each tire on the multi-infor- mation display. “Setting Pressure Wait a Moment” 10Drive straight (with occa- sional left and right turns) at approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more for approxi- mately 10 to 30 minutes. When registration is complete, the tire pressure warning light will turn off and a message indicating that registration has been completed will be displayed on the multi-infor- mation display. Registration may take longer than normal to complete if the vehicle speed cannot be maintained at approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more. If registration cannot be com- pleted after driving for 1 hour or more, perform the registration pro- cedure again from the beginning. ■ When registering ID codes ● Normally, wheel position registra- tion can be completed within approximately 30 minutes. ● ID code registration is performed while driving at a vehicle speed of approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more. ● ID codes can be registered by 7 yourself, but depending on the driving conditions and driving environment, registration may take some time to complete. ●When using a wheel set which all of the ID codes have already been registered, the wheel set can be changed in a short amount of time. ■ If ID codes are not registered properly ●In the following situations, ID code registration may take longer than usual to be completed or may not be possible. • When the vehicle has not been parked for approximately 15 min- utes or more before being driven • Vehicle is not driven at approxi- mately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more 512 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance • Vehicle is driven on unpaved roads • Vehicle is driven near other vehi- cles and system cannot recog- nize tire pressure warning valves and transmitters of your vehicle over those of other vehicles • Wheel with tire pressure warning valve and transmitter installed is inside or near the vehicle ●If the vehicle is reversed during registration, all data collected until then will be cleared. Perform driv- ing again. ●If registration does not complete after driving for 1 hour or more, perform the ID code registration procedure again from the begin- ning. ●If the tire pressure warning light does not blink 3 times when start- ing ID code registration proce- dure, the procedure may not have started. Perform the procedure again from the beginning. ●If ID codes cannot be registered even when performing the above procedure, contact your SUBARU dealer. Canceling ID code regis- tration To cancel ID code registration after it has been started, select “Register New Valve / ID” again on the multi-information display. If ID code registration has been canceled, the tire pressure warning light will turn off. If the warning light does not turn off, ID code registration may not have been canceled correctly. To cancel registration, select “Register New Valve / ID” again on the multi-information display. Selecting wheel set Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure warning system with a function to register two sets of ID codes. This allows for registration of a second wheel set, for example a winter set. ⚫ The wheel set can be changed only if a second wheel set has been registered to the system. If a second wheel set has not been regis- tered, message will be dis- played and it will not be possible to change to the selected wheel set. ID codes can be registered by yourself. ⚫ Only a change between both registered wheel set is possi- ble, mixing between these wheel sets is not supported. ⚫ While registering ID codes, it may not be possible to change between wheel sets normally. Cancel registration before changing between wheel sets. ■ How to change between wheel sets 1 Install the desired wheel set. 2 Start the EV system. (→P.233) The ID code selecting procedure cannot be performed while the vehicle is moving. 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 513 3 Press or of the meter control switches and select . 4 Press or of the meter control switches and select “Vehicle Settings”, and then press and hold the “OK”. 5 Press or of the meter control switches and select “TPWS Setting”, and then press “OK”. 6 Press or of the meter control switches and select “Tire Set Switching”, and then press “OK”. 7 Press or of the meter control switches and select “Register Valve/ID” and then press “OK”. 8 Press or of the meter control switches and wheel set (“Tire Set 1” or “Tire Set 2”) is selected. 9 Press or of the meter control switches and select “OK” and then press “OK”. The tire pressure warning light will slowly blink 3 times, a message indicating that change is occurring will be displayed, and the wheel set change will begin. Wheel set change will begin and the tire pressure warning light will blink for 1 minute and then illumi- nate. Also, while the change is being performed, “–” will be dis- played for the tire inflation pressure of each tire on the multi-information display. After approximately 2 minutes, the wheel set change will complete, the tire pressure warning light will turn off, and a completion message will be displayed on the multi-informa- tion display. If changing does not complete after approximately 4 minutes, a mes- sage indicating that the change could not be completed will be dis- played. Check which wheel set is installed and perform the change procedure again from the beginning. 7 “Setting Pressure Wait a Moment” 10If the specified tire inflation pressure of the wheel set installed differs from that of the previous set, it will be necessary to perform the tire inflation pressure setting pro- cedure of the tire pressure warning system. If the specified tire inflation pres- sure is the same, it will not be nec- essary to perform the tire inflation pressure setting procedure. 514 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 11Register the position of each wheel. Replacing the tire When replacing the tires yourself, prepare the neces- sary tools and a jack. This vehicle uses wheel bolts. When using wheels that were installed when the vehicle was shipped from the factory, specialized SUBARU genuine wheel bolts must be used. If necessary tire replace- ment seems difficult to per- form, contact your SUBARU dealer. Before jacking up the vehicle ⚫ Stop the vehicle in a safe place on a hard, flat surface. ⚫ Set the parking brake. ⚫ Shift the shift position to P. ⚫ Stop the EV system. ⚫ Vehicles with power back door: Turn off the power back door system. (→P.182) ■ Tools As your vehicle is equipped with an emergency tire puncture repair kit, the following tools for replacing a tire are not included with your vehi- cle. They can be purchased your SUBARU dealer. ●Jack ●Jack handle ●Guide pin ●Wheel bolt socket 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ●Wheel bolt wrench 515 Location of the tools Guide pin* Towing eyelet 7 Wheel bolt wrench* Jack* Jack handle* Wheel bolt socket* *: They can be purchased your SUBARU dealer. 516 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance WARNING ■ Using the tire jack Observe the following precau- tions. Improper use of the tire jack may cause the vehicle to suddenly fall off the jack, leading to death or serious injury. ● Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and removing tire chains. ● Do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires on this vehicle. Replacing a flat tire 1 Chock the tires. Wheel chock ●Put the jack properly in its jack point. ●Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is sup- ported by the jack. ● Do not start the EV system or drive the vehicle while the vehi- cle is supported by the jack. ● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is inside. ●When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack. Tire Front left-hand Front right-hand Rear left-hand Rear right-hand positions Behind the rear right-hand side tire Behind the rear left-hand side tire In front of the front right-hand side tire In front of the front left-hand side tire ● Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire. ● Use a jack stand if it is neces- sary to get under the vehicle. ●When lowering the vehicle, make sure that there is no-one near the vehicle. If there are people nearby, warn them vocally before lowering. 2 Slightly loosen the wheel bolts (one turn). 3 Turn the part of the jack by hand and place the top of the 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 517 jack in the position shown in the illustration. ▶ Front ▶ Rear 4 Install the wheel bolt wrench in jack handle. 5 Raise the vehicle until the tire is slightly raised off the ground. 6 Remove the uppermost wheel bolt and install the 7 guide pin by hand. Turn the guide pin clockwise to tighten it until it stops. 7 Remove all the wheel bolts and the tire. When resting the tire on the 518 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ground, place the tire so that the wheel design faces up to avoid scratching the wheel surface. WARNING ■ Replacing a flat tire ● Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immediately after the vehicle has been driven. After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around the brakes will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet or other body parts while changing a tire, etc. may result in burns. ●Failure to follow these precau- tions could cause the wheel bolts to loosen and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury. • The contact surfaces of the wheel bolt and wheel are designed specifically to fit together. When using wheels that were installed when the vehicle was shipped from the factory, use specialized SUB- ARU genuine wheel bolts. Do not use wheel bolts designed for other models, model years or types even if they are SUBARU genuine parts. If the vehicle does not have wheels that were installed to the vehicle when it was shipped from the factory, the factory-installed wheel bolts may not be appropriate for the wheel. Contact either the retailer where the wheels were purchased or the manufacturer of the wheels for proper installa- tion advice. • Never apply oil or grease to the wheel bolts or their contact sur- face on the wheel . Doing so may cause the wheel bolts to be tightened exces- sively, leading to damage to the wheel bolts, the threaded por- tion the wheel bolts install to , or the wheel. Remove any oil or grease that has adhered when installing the wheel bolts. • After replacing a tire, check the tightening torque as soon as possible. If you cannot confirm the tightening torque yourself, have the vehicle inspected at your SUBARU dealer. 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 519 WARNING • If a wheel bolt hole in a wheel or the threads of a wheel bolt or the wheel hub are deformed, cracked, rusty or otherwise damaged, have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer. ■ When tightening the wheel bolts Do not tighten the wheel bolts excessively. Doing so may cause the wheel bolts, the threads of the wheel hub, or the wheel to be damaged. ■ Guide pin When removing or installing a tire, make sure to use the guide pin. Also, the guide pin is made of resin. It may be damaged if the wheel is placed anywhere other than or if a large amount of force is applied to the guide pin. ■ Replacing a flat tire for vehi- cles with power back door In cases such as when replacing tires, make sure to cancel the power back door system (→P.182). Failure to do so may cause the back door to operate unintentionally if the power back door switch is accidentally touched, resulting in hands and fingers being caught and injured. NOTICE ■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warn- ing valves, transmitters and tire valve caps →P.505 Installing the tire 1 Remove any dirt or foreign matter from the wheel con- tact surfaces and wheel bolts. If foreign matter is on the wheel contact surface, the wheel bolts may loosen while the vehicle is in motion, causing the tire to come off. 7 2 Align a wheel bolt hole on the tire with the guide pin, and set the tire on the guide pin. Securely set the tire so that its wheel is touching the contact sur- face. 520 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 3 Loosely tighten each wheel bolt by hand or using a wheel bolt socket . Push the tire to prevent it from fall- ing. Do not use the wheel bolt socket for anything other than loosely tighten- ing the wheel bolts by hand. 4 Remove the guide pin and loosely tighten the wheel bolt as in step 3. 5 Lower the vehicle. 6 Securely tighten the wheel bolts two or three times in the order shown in the illustration using a wheel bolt wrench. Tightening torque: 103 ft•lbf (140N•m, 14.3 kgf•m) 7 Stow all the tools. 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 521 Tire inflation pressure Make sure to maintain the proper tire inflation pres- sure. Tire inflation pressure should be checked at least once per month. However, SUBARU recommends that tire inflation pressure be checked once every two weeks. (→P.587) Checking the specified tire inflation pressure The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size are displayed on the tire and loading information label. (→P.587) Inspection and adjust- ment procedure Tire valve Tire pressure gauge 1 Remove the tire valve cap. 2 Press the tip of the tire pres- sure gauge onto the tire valve. 3 Read the pressure using the gauge gradations. 4 If the tire inflation pressure is not at the recommended level, adjust the pressure. If 7 you add too much air, press the center of the valve to deflate. 5 After completing the tire infla- tion pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage. 6 Put the tire valve cap back on. ■ Tire inflation pressure check interval You should check tire inflation pres- sure every two weeks, or at least once a month. 522 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure WARNING Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following: ●Reduced electricity consumption ●Reduced driving comfort and poor handling ●Reduced tire life due to wear ●Reduced safety ●Damage to the drive train If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it checked by your SUBARU dealer. ■ Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure When checking tire inflation pres- sure, observe the following: ●Check only when the tires are cold. If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or has not been driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading. ●Always use a tire pressure gauge. It is difficult to judge if a tire is properly inflated based only on its appearance. ●It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving as heat is generated in the tire. Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. ●Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight. Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced. ■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance Keep your tires properly inflated. If the tires are not properly inflated, the following conditions may occur which could lead to an accident resulting in death or seri- ous injury: ●Excessive wear ●Uneven wear ● Poor handling ● Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires ● Air leaking from between tire and wheel ●Wheel deformation and/or tire damage ●Greater possibility of tire dam- age while driving (due to road hazards, expansion joints, sharp edges in the road, etc.) NOTICE ■ When inspecting and adjust- ing tire inflation pressure Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on. If a valve cap is not installed, dirt or moisture may get into the valve and cause an air leak, resulting in decreased tire inflation pressure. 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 523 Wheels If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced. Other- wise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause a loss of handling control. Wheel selection When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diam- eter, rim width and inset*. Replacement wheels are avail- able at your SUBARU dealer. *: Conventionally referred to as off- set. SUBARU does not recommend using the following: ⚫ Wheels of different sizes or types ⚫ Used wheels ⚫ Bent wheels that have been straightened ■ When replacing wheels The wheels of your vehicle are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advance warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pres- sure. Whenever wheels are replaced, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed. (→P.505) WARNING ■ When replacing wheels ● Do not use wheels that are a dif- ferent size from those recom- mended in the Owner’s Manual, as this may result in a loss of handling control. ● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury. ■ Wheel bolts Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or seri- ous injury: ● Do not over tighten. ● Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts. Oil and grease may cause the wheel bolts to be excessively tightened, leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the wheel bolts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, caus- ing a serious accident. Remove any oil or grease from the wheel bolts. 7 ● If there are any cracks or defor- mations in the wheel bolts, or if the surface treatment becomes worn, have the wheel bolts replaced at your SUBARU dealer. Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel bolts to loosen and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury. ■ Use of defective wheels pro- hibited Do not use cracked or deformed wheels. Doing so could cause the tire to leak air during driving, possibly causing an accident. 524 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance NOTICE ■ Replacing tire pressure warn- ing valves and transmitters ●Because tire repair or replace- ment may affect the tire pres- sure warning valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your SUBARU dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmit- ters at your SUBARU dealer. ●Ensure that only genuine SUB- ARU wheels are used on your vehicle. Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with non-genuine wheels. Aluminum wheel precau- tions ⚫ Use only SUBARU wheel bolts and wrenches designed for use with your aluminum wheels. ⚫ When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel bolts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km). ⚫ Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire chains. ⚫ Use only SUBARU genuine balance weights or equiva- lent and a plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels. Air conditioning filter The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency. Removal method 1 Turn the power switch off. Confirm that the charging connec- tor is not connected. Also, do not use the Remote Air Conditioning System during the procedure. 2 Open the front passenger’s door. By keeping the door open, unex- pected operation of the Remote Air Conditioning System can be pre- vent. (→P.439) 3 While pressing the claw, hold handle and remove the panel. 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 525 4 Vehicles with footwell lights: Unplug the connector. 7 Hold the filter case and pull down the upper filter case. 8 Hold the filter case and 5 Unlock the filter cover ( ), pull the filter cover out of the claws ( ), and remove the filter cover. remove the upper filter case. Dust and dirt (fallen leaves, etc.) may have accumulated within the bottom of the air conditioning unit, so remove it with a vacuum cleaner. 7 6 Hold the filter case and remove the lower filter case. 9 Remove the air conditioning filter from the upper and lower filter case and replace it with a new one. 526 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Install so that the arrow points to the rear of the vehicle. WARNING 10When installing, reverse the steps listed. ■ When installing the filter cover Slide the recessed part of the fil- ter cover on the upper surface of the upper filter case as shown in the figure, and attach it so that it is lifted toward the insertion part of the cover attachment. ■ Checking interval Inspect and replace the air condi- tioning filter according to the mainte- nance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet” or “Warranty and Service Booklet”.) ■ If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary. ■ Air conditioning filter with deodorizing function When fragrances are placed in your vehicle, the deodorizing effect may become significantly weakened in a short period. When an air conditioning odor comes out continuously, replace the air conditioning filter. ■ When replacing the air condi- tioning filter Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may result in the air conditioning system operating during the procedure, possibly resulting in injury. ● Check that the charging con- nector is not connected. ● Do not use the Remote Air Con- ditioning System. NOTICE ■ When using the air condition- ing system ● Make sure that a filter is always installed. Using the air condi- tioning system without a filter may cause damage to the sys- tem. ●The filter is replaceable. When cleaning the filter, do not clean with water or an air gun. ■ To prevent damage to the fil- ter cover When moving the filter cover in the direction of arrow to release the fitting, pay attention not to apply excessive force to the claws. Otherwise, the claws may be damaged. 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 527 Electronic key battery Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted. ■ If the key battery is depleted The following symptoms may occur: ●The smart key system and wire- less remote control will not func- tion properly. ●The operational range will be reduced. Items to prepare Prepare the following before replacing the battery: ⚫ Flathead screwdriver ⚫ Small flathead screwdriver ⚫ Lithium battery CR2450 ■ Use a CR2450 lithium battery ●Batteries can be purchased at your SUBARU dealer, local electri- cal appliance shops or camera stores. ●Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. ●Dispose of used batteries accord- ing to the local laws. Replacing the battery 1 Release the lock and remove the mechanical key. 2 Remove the key cover. Use a screwdriver of an appropriate size. Forcedly prying may cause the cover damaged. To prevent damage to the key, cover the tip of the flathead screw- driver with a tape. 7 3 Remove the depleted battery using a small flathead screw- driver. When removing the cover, the elec- tronic key module may stick to the cover and the battery may not be visible. In this case, remove the electronic key module in order to remove the battery. When removing the battery, use a screwdriver of an appropriate size. Insert a new battery with the “+” ter- 528 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance minal facing up. 4 When installing the key cover and mechanical key, install by conducting step 2 and step 1 with the directions reversed. WARNING ■ Battery precautions Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ● Do not swallow the battery. Doing so may cause chemical burns. ●A coin battery or button battery is used in the electronic key. If a battery is swallowed, it may cause severe chemical burns in as little as 2 hours and may result in death or serious injury. ●Keep away new and removed batteries from children. ● If the cover cannot be firmly closed, stop using the electronic key and stow the key in the place where children cannot reach, and then contact your SUBARU dealer. ● If you accidentally swallow a battery or put a battery into a part of your body, get emer- gency medical attention imme- diately. ■ To prevent battery explosion or leakage of flammable liq- uid or gas ● Replace the battery with a new battery of the same type. If a wrong type of battery is used, it may explode. ● Do not expose batteries to extremely low pressure due to high altitude or extremely high temperatures. ● Do not burn, break or cut a bat- tery. NOTICE ■ When replacing the battery Use a flathead screwdriver of appropriate size. Applying exces- sive force may deform or damage the cover. ■ For normal operation after replacing the battery Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents: ● Always work with dry hands. Moisture may cause the battery to rust. ● Do not touch or move any other component inside the remote control. ● Do not bend either of the battery terminals. Checking and replac- 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 3 Remove the fuse. 529 ing fuses If any of the electrical com- ponents do not operate, a fuse may have blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary. Checking and replacing fuses 1 Turn the power switch off. Confirm that the charging connec- tor is not connected. Also, do not use the Remote Air Conditioning System during the procedure. 2 Open the fuse box cover. ▶ Motor compartment Push the tab in and lift the lid off. Only type A fuse can be removed using the pullout tool. 4 Check if the fuse is blown. Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid. ▶ Type A 7 ▶ Left side instrument panel Remove the lid. Normal fuse Blown fuse ▶ Type B Normal fuse 530 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Blown fuse WARNING ▶ Type C Normal fuse Blown fuse ■ After a fuse is replaced ●When installing the lid, make sure that the tab is installed securely. ●If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need replacement. ●If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected SUB- ARU dealer. ■ If there is an overload in a cir- cuit The fuses are designed to blow, pro- tecting the wiring harness from damage. ■ When replacing an electronic component, such as a lights, etc. SUBARU recommends that you use genuine SUBARU products designed for this vehicle. Because certain bulbs are connected to cir- cuits designed to prevent overload, non-genuine parts or parts not designed for this vehicle may be unusable. ■ To prevent system break- downs and vehicle fire Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may cause dam- age to the vehicle, and possibly a fire or injury. ● Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than that indi- cated, or use any other object in place of a fuse. ● Always use a genuine SUBARU fuse or equivalent. Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix. ● Do not modify the fuses or fuse boxes. NOTICE ■ Before replacing fuses Have the cause of electrical over- load determined and repaired SUBARU dealer as soon as pos- sible. 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 531 Headlight aim Vertical movement adjust- ing bolts Adjustment bolt A Adjustment bolt B Before checking the head- light aim ⚫ Park the vehicle on level ground. ⚫ Make sure the tire inflation pressure is at the specified level. ⚫ Have someone sit in the driver’s seat. ⚫ Bounce the vehicle several times. Remember the turning direc- tion and the number of turns. 2 Turn bolt B the same number of turns and in the same direction as step 1. If the headlight cannot be adjusted using this procedure, take the vehi- cle to your SUBARU dealer to adjust the headlight aim. 7 Adjusting the headlight aim 1 Using a Phillips-head screw- driver, turn bolt A in either direction. 532 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Light bulbs If any exterior light does not turn on, have it replaced by your SUBARU dealer. ■ LED lights The lights consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your SUBARU dealer to have the light replaced. ■ Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a malfunction. Contact your SUBARU dealer for more information in the following sit- uations: ●Large drops of water have built up on the inside of the lens. ●Water has built up inside the headlight. ■ When replacing an electronic component, such as a lights, etc. →P.530 When trouble arises 8 8-1. Essential information Emergency flashers 534 If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency 535 If the vehicle is submerged or water on the road is ris- ing . 536 8-2. Steps to take in an emer- gency If your vehicle needs to be towed. 537 If you think something is wrong 541 If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds 542 If a warning message is dis- played 551 If you have a flat tire 557 If the EV system will not start . 568 If you lose your keys . 570 If the electronic key does not operate properly 570 If the 12-volt battery is dis- charged . 572 If your vehicle overheats 576 If the vehicle becomes stuck 578 533 8 534 8-1. Essential information Emergency flashers sion.) The emergency flashers are used to warn other drivers when the vehicle has to be stopped in the road due to a breakdown, etc. Operating instructions Press the switch. All the turn signal lights will flash. To turn them off, press the switch once again. ■ Emergency flashers ●If the emergency flashers are used for a long time while the EV system is not operating (while the “READY” indicator is not illumi- nated), the 12-volt battery may discharge. ●If any of the SRS airbags deploy (inflate) or in the event of a strong rear impact, the emergency flash- ers will turn on automatically. The emergency flashers will turn off automatically after operating for approximately 20 minutes. To manually turn the emergency flashers off, press the switch twice. (The emergency flashers may not turn on automatically depending on the force of the impact and conditions of the colli- If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emer- gency Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehi- cle using the following pro- cedure: Stopping the vehicle 1 Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly depress it. Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the effort required to slow the vehicle. 2 Shift the shift position to N. ▶ If the shift position is shifted to N 3 After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road. 4 Stop the EV system. ▶ If the shift position cannot be shifted to N 3 Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehicle speed as much as possible. 4 To stop the EV system: Press and hold the power switch for 2 consecutive seconds or 8-1. Essential information 535 more, or press it briefly 3 times or more in succession. 5 Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road. ■ If emergency stopped The functions of the air conditioning, etc., may be partially limited in order to reduce the power consumption of the 12-volt battery. WARNING ■ If the EV system has to be turned off while driving Turning the EV system off while driving will not cause a loss of steering or braking control. How- ever, power assist for the steering wheel may be lost making it diffi- cult to steer smoothly before stop- ping the vehicle depending on the 8 remaining charge in the 12-volt battery or usage conditions. Decelerate as much as possible before turning off the EV system. 536 8-1. Essential information If the vehicle is sub- merged or water on the road is rising When the outside water level exceeds half the height of the door, the door cannot be opened from the inside due to water pressure. This vehicle is not designed to be able to drive on roads that are deeply flooded with water. Do not drive on roads where the roads may be submerged or the water may be rising. It is danger- ous to remain in the vehicle, if it is anticipated that the vehicle will be flooded or set adrift. Remain calm and follow the following. ⚫ If the door can be opened, open the door and exit the vehicle. ⚫ If the door cannot be opened, open the window using the power window switch and ensure an escape route. ⚫ If the window can be opened, exit the vehicle through the window. ⚫ If the door and window cannot be opened due to the rising water, remain calm, wait until the water level inside the vehicle rises to the point that the water pressure inside of the vehicle equals the water pressure outside of the vehi- cle and then open the door after waiting for the rising water to enter the vehicle, and exit the vehicle. ■ Water level exceeds the floor When the water level exceeds the floor and time has passed, the elec- trical equipment will get damaged, the power windows will not operate, the motor stop, and the vehicle may not be able to get moving. ■ Using an emergency escape hammer* Laminated glass is used in the wind- shield on this vehicle. Laminated glass cannot be shat- tered with an emergency hammer*. Tempered glass is used in the win- dows on this vehicle. *: Contact your SUBARU dealer or aftermarket accessory manufac- turer for further information about an emergency hammer. WARNING ■ Caution while driving Do not drive on roads where the roads may be submerged or the water may be rising. Otherwise the vehicle may be damaged and cannot move, as well as become flooded and set adrift, which may lead to death. 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 537 If your vehicle needs to be towed If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your SUB- ARU dealer or commercial towing service, using a wheel-lift type truck or flat- bed truck. Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial and local laws. Situations when it is not possible to be towed by another vehicle In the following situations, it is not possible to be towed by another vehicle using cables or chains, as the front wheels may be locked due to the parking lock. Contact your SUBARU dealer or commercial towing service. ⚫ There is a malfunction in the shift control system. (→P.235, 552) ⚫ There is a malfunction in the immobilizer system. (→P.68) ⚫ There is a malfunction in the smart key system. (→P.570) ⚫ The 12-volt battery is dis- charged. (→P.572) Situations when it is nec- essary to contact dealers before towing The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact your SUBARU dealer or commercial towing service before towing. ⚫ The EV system warning mes- sage is shown on the multi- information display and the vehicle does not move. ⚫ The vehicle makes an abnor- mal sound. Towing with a wheel-lift type truck ▶ From the front 8 Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels. 538 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency ▶ From the rear NOTICE Use a towing dolly under the front wheels. WARNING Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ■ When towing the vehicle Be sure to transport the vehicle with all four wheels raised off the ground. If the vehicle is towed with the tires contacting the ground, the drivetrain or related parts may be damaged, the vehi- cle may fly off the truck, or elec- tricity generated by the operation of the motor may cause a fire to occur depending on the nature of the damage or malfunction. ■ To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing using a wheel-lift type truck When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could be damaged while being towed. ■ Towing with a sling-type truck Do not tow with a sling-type truck to prevent body damage. Using a flatbed truck When using a flatbed truck to transport the vehicle, use tire strapping belts. Refer to the owner’s manual of the flatbed truck for the tire strapping method. In order to suppress vehicle movement during transporta- tion, set the parking brake and turn the power switch off. Emergency towing If a tow truck is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed using cables or chains secured to the emergency towing eyelets. This 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 539 should only be attempted on hard surfaced roads for short distances at under 18 mph (30 km/h). A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition. Emergency towing proce- dure To have your vehicle towed by another vehicle, the towing eye- let must be installed to your vehicle. Install the towing eyelet using the following procedure. 1 Take out the wheel bolt wrench* and towing eyelet. (→P.559) *: Wheel bolt wrench can be pur- chased at your SUBARU dealer. 2 Remove the eyelet cover using a flathead screwdriver. To protect the bodywork, place a rag between the screwdriver and the vehicle body as shown in the illustration. 3 Insert the towing eyelet into the hole and tighten partially by hand. 4 Tighten down the towing eye- let securely using a wheel bolt wrench* or hard metal bar. *: Wheel bolt wrench can be pur- chased at your SUBARU dealer. 5 Securely attach cables or 8 chains to the towing eyelet. Take care not to damage the vehi- cle body. 6 Enter the vehicle being towed and start the EV system. If the EV system does not start, turn the power switch to ON. 7 Shift the shift position to N and release the parking brake. Turn automatic mode off. (→P.246) 540 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency ■ While towing If the EV system is off, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not function, making steering and braking more difficult. ■ Wheel bolt wrench Wheel bolt wrench can be pur- chased at your SUBARU dealer. NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to the vehicle during emergency towing Do not secure cables or chains to the suspension components. WARNING Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ■ While towing ●When towing using cables or chains, avoid sudden starts, etc., which place excessive stress on the towing eyelets, cables or chains. The towing eyelets, cables or chains may become damaged, broken debris may hit people, and cause serious damage. ● Do not perform any of the fol- lowing as doing so may cause the parking lock mechanism to engage, locking the front wheels and possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury: • Unfasten the driver’s seat belt and open the driver’s door. • Turn the power switch off. ■ Installing towing eyelets to the vehicle Make sure that towing eyelets are installed securely. If not securely installed, towing eyelets may come loose during towing. 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 541 If you think something is wrong If you notice any of the fol- lowing symptoms, your vehicle probably needs adjustment or repair. Con- tact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. ⚫ Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches the floor Visible symptoms ⚫ Fluid leaks under the vehicle (Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is nor- mal.) ⚫ Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear Audible symptoms ⚫ Excessive tire squeal when cornering ⚫ Strange noises related to the suspension system ⚫ Other noises related to the EV 8 system Operational symptoms ⚫ Stumbling or running roughly ⚫ Appreciable loss of power ⚫ Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking ⚫ Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road 542 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights comes on or flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then goes off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunc- tion in the system. However, if this continues to occur, have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer. Actions to the warning lights or warning buzzers ■ Brake system warning light (warning buzzer) Warning light Details/Actions (U.S.A.) or (Canada) (Red) Indicates that: ⚫The brake fluid level is low; or ⚫The brake system is malfunctioning → Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and con- tact your SUBARU dealer. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous. ■ Brake system warning light (warning buzzer) Warning light Details/Actions Indicates a malfunction in: ⚫The regenerative braking system; ⚫The electronically controlled brake system; or ⚫The parking brake system (Yellow) → Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately. ■ Charging system warning light* Warning light Details/Actions Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system → Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and con- tact your SUBARU dealer. *: This light illuminates on the multi-information display with a message. 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency ■ SRS warning light (warning buzzer) Warning light Details/Actions Indicates a malfunction in: ⚫The SRS airbag system; or ⚫The seat belt pretensioner system 543 → Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately. ■ ABS warning light Warning light Details/Actions (U.S.A.) or (Canada) Indicates a malfunction in: ⚫The ABS; or ⚫The brake assist system → Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately. ■ Inappropriate pedal operation warning light* (warning buzzer) Warning light Details/Actions When a buzzer sounds: Indicates a malfunction in: ⚫Brake Override System is malfunctioning ⚫ Drive-Start Control is malfunctioning ⚫ Drive-Start Control is operating → Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-infor- 8 mation display. When a buzzer does not sound: Brake Override System is operating → Release the accelerator pedal and depress the brake pedal. *: This light illuminates on the multi-information display. 544 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency ■ Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer) Warning light Details/Actions (Red) or Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steer- ing) system → Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately. (Yellow) ■ Traction battery charge warning light Warning light (Yellow) Details/Actions Indicates that the remaining charge of the traction battery is low and charging is required When the outside temperature is low, this light may turn on earlier than usual to urge the driver to charge the traction battery early. → Charge the traction battery. (→P.97) ■ Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light (warn- ing buzzer*) Warning light Details/Actions Warns the driver and/or front passenger to fasten their seat belts → Fasten the seat belt. If the front passenger’s seat is occupied, the front passenger’s seat belt also needs to be fastened to make the warning light (warning buzzer) turn off. *: Driver’s seat belt warning buzzer: The driver’s seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or her seat belt is not fastened. Once the power switch is turned to ON, the buzzer sounds. If the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer sounds inter- mittently for a certain period of time after the vehicle reaches a certain speed. Front passenger’s seat belt warning buzzer: The front passenger’s seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. If the seat belt is unfas- 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 545 tened, the buzzer sounds intermittently for a certain period of time after the vehicle reaches a certain speed. ■ Rear passengers’ seat belt reminder lights (warning buzzer*) Warning light Details/Actions Warns the rear passengers to fasten their seat belts → Fasten the seat belt. *: Rear passengers’ seat belt warning buzzer: The rear passengers’ seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the rear pas- senger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. If the seat belt is unfas- tened, the buzzer sounds intermittently for a certain period of time, after the seat belt is fastened and unfastened and the vehicle reaches a certain speed. ■ Tire pressure warning light Warning light Details/Actions When the light comes on after blinking for approximately 1 minute (a buzzer does not sounds): Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system → Have the system checked by your SUBARU dealer. When the light comes on (a buzzer sounds): Low tire inflation pressure from natural causes → After the temperature of the tires has lowered suffi- ciently, check the inflation pressure of each tire and adjust them to the specified level.(→P.587) Low tire inflation pressure from flat tire 8 → Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and per- form the necessary actions (→P.549) ■ LDA indicator (warning buzzer) Warning light Details/Actions Indicates a malfunction in the LDA (Lane Departure Alert). → Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-infor- (Yellow) mation display. 546 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency ■ LTA indicator (warning buzzer) Warning light Details/Actions Indicates a malfunction in the LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) → Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-infor- (Yellow) mation display. ■ PDA indicator (warning buzzer) Warning light Details/Actions Indicates a malfunction in the PDA (Proactive Driving Assist). (Yellow) → Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-infor- mation display. ■ Driving assist information indicator Warning light Details/Actions The following systems may be malfunctioning. ⚫PCS (Pre-Collision System) ⚫ LDA (Lane Departure Alert) → Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-infor- mation display. Indicates one of the following systems is malfunctioning or disabled. ⚫PKSB (Parking Support Brake) ⚫ RCD (Rear Camera Detection) (if equipped) ⚫BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) ⚫ RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) ⚫Safe Exit Assist (with door opening control) → Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-infor- mation display. 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency ■ SUBARU Parking Assist OFF indicator (warning buzzer) Warning light Details/Actions When a buzzer sounds: Indicates a malfunction in the SUBARU Parking Assist function 547 → Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately. When a buzzer does not sound: Indicates that the system is temporarily unavailable, possi- bly due to a sensor being dirty or covered with ice, etc. → Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-infor- mation display. (→P.553) ■ Cruise control indicator (warning buzzer) Warning light (Yellow) Details/Actions Indicates a malfunction in the cruise control. → Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-infor- mation display. ■ Dynamic radar cruise control indicator (warning buzzer) Warning light Details/Actions Indicates a malfunction in the dynamic radar cruise control. → Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-infor- (Yellow) mation display. ■ PCS warning light (warning buzzer) 8 Warning light Details/Actions Indicates a malfunction in the PCS (Pre-Collision System). → Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-infor- mation display. Illuminates when the PCS (Pre-Collision System) or VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) system is disabled. 548 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency ■ Slip indicator Warning light Details/Actions Indicates a malfunction in: ⚫The VSC system; ⚫The TRAC system; ⚫Trailer Sway Control; or ⚫ The hill-start assist control system → Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately. ■ Parking brake indicator Warning light Details/Actions (U.S.A.) (Flashes) or (Canada) (Flashes) It is possible that the parking brake is not fully engaged or released → Operate the parking brake switch once again. This light comes on the parking brake is not released. If the light turns off after the parking brakes is fully released, the system is operating normally. ■ Brake hold operated indicator Warning light Details/Actions Indicates a malfunction in the brake hold system → Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer (Flashes) immediately. ● If a cushion is placed on the seat, ■ Warning buzzer In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard due to being in a noisy location or audio sound. ■ Front passenger detection sen- sor, seat belt reminder and warning buzzer ●If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passen- ger detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash and the warning buzzer to sound even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat. the sensor may not detect a pas- senger, and the warning light may not operate properly. ■ SRS warning light This warning light indicates prob- lems with the following: ●Airbag sensor assembly ●Front impact sensors ●Side impact sensors (front door) ●Front passenger occupant classifi- cation sensors ●Driver’s seat position sensor 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 549 ●Driver’s seat belt buckle switch ●Front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch ●SRS warning light ● “AIR BAG ON” indicator light ● “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light ●SRS airbags ●SRS system related wiring har- nesses and power sources ■ Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer) When the 12-volt battery charge becomes insufficient or the voltage temporarily drops, the electric power steering system warning light may come on and the warning buzzer may sound. ■ When the tire pressure warning light comes on Inspect the tires to check if a tire is punctured. If a tire is punctured: →P.557 If none of the tires are punctured: Turn the power switch off then turn it to ON. Check if the tire pressure warning light comes on or blinks. ▶ If the tire pressure warning light blinks for approximately 1 minute then stays on There may be a malfunction in the tire pressure warning system. Have the vehicle inspected by your SUB- ARU dealer immediately. ▶ If the tire pressure warning light comes on 1 After the temperature of the tires has lowered sufficiently, check the inflation pressure of each tire and adjust them to the specified level. 2 If the warning light does not turn off even after several minutes have elapsed, check that the inflation pressure of each tire is at the specified level and perform the tire inflation pressure setting procedure. (→P.512) If the warning light does not turn off even after several minutes have elapsed since performing the tire inflation pressure setting proce- dure, have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. ■ The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes such as natural air leaks and tire inflation pressure changes caused by tem- perature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes). ■ Conditions that the tire pres- sure warning system may not function properly →P.503 WARNING ■ If both the ABS and the brake system warning lights remain on Stop your vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact your SUBARU dealer. The vehicle will become extremely unstable during brak- ing, and the ABS system may fail, which could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. 8 ■ When the electric power steering system warning light comes on When the light comes on yellow, the assist to the power steering is restricted. When the light comes on red, the assist to the power steering is lost and handling oper- ations of the steering wheel become extremely heavy. When steering wheel operations are heavier than usual, grip the steering wheel firmly and operate it using more force than usual. 550 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency WARNING ■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury. ●Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pressure immedi- ately. ● If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire infla- tion pressure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If a tire is flat, repair the flat tire by using emergency tire puncture repair kit. ●Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes. ■ If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately. ■ Maintenance of the tires Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recom- mended by the vehicle manufac- turer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load infor- mation label], you should deter- mine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning sys- tem) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under- inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pres- sure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pres- sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency (for electric vehicles, traction battery effi- ciency) and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper tire mainte- nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-infla- tion has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pres- sure warning light). 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 551 WARNING Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pres- sure warning system) malfunc- tion indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pres- sure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illumi- nated. This sequence will con- tinue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunc- tion exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys- tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS (tire pressure warning sys- tem) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction tell- tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to continue to function properly. NOTICE ■ To ensure the tire pressure warning system operates properly Do not install tires with different specifications or makers, as the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly. If a warning message is displayed The multi-information dis- play shows warnings of system malfunctions, incor- rectly performed opera- tions, and messages that indicate a need for mainte- nance. When a message is shown, perform the correc- tion procedure appropriate to the message. If a warning message is dis- played again after the appropriate actions have been performed, contact your SUBARU dealer. Additionally, if a warning light comes on or flashes at the same time that a warn- ing message is displayed, take the appropriate correc- tive action for the warning light. (→P.542) 8 ■ Warning messages The warning messages explained below may differ from the actual messages according to operation conditions and vehicle specifica- tions. ■ Warning buzzer In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard due to being in a noisy location or audio sound. ■ If “EV system stopped Steering Power low” is displayed This message is displayed if the EV system is stopped while driving. 552 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency When steering wheel operations are heavier than usual, grip the steering wheel firmly and operate it using more force than usual. ■ If “EV system overheated Out- put power reduced” is dis- played This message may be displayed when driving under severe operat- ing conditions. (For example, when driving up a long steep hill.) Handling method: →P.576 ■ If “Shift System Malfunction Shifting Unavailable Drive to a Safe Place and Stop” or “Shift System Malfunction Driving Unavailable” is displayed There is a malfunction in the shift control system. Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately. ■ If “Shift is in N Release Acceler- ator before shifting” is dis- played The accelerator pedal has been depressed when the shift position is in N. Release the accelerator pedal and shift the shift position to D or R. ■ If “Press brake when vehicle is stopped EV system may over- heat” is displayed The message may be displayed when the accelerator pedal is depressed to hold the vehicle while the vehicle is stopped on an incline, etc. The EV system may overheat. Release the accelerator pedal and depress the brake pedal. ■ If “Auto Power OFF to Conserve Battery” is displayed Power was turned off due to the automatic power off function. Next time when starting the EV system, operate the EV system for approxi- mately 5 minutes to recharge the 12-volt battery. ■ If “Regenerative Braking Lim- ited Press Brake to Decelerate” is displayed Regenerative braking may be restricted in the following situations. Firmly depress the brake pedal to decelerate the vehicle. ●When electrical energy cannot be regenerated any more as the trac- tion battery is fully charged ●When the temperature of the trac- tion battery is extremely high or extremely low ●When the temperature of the elec- tric motor or power control unit, etc. is extremely high ■ If “High Power Consumption Power to Climate Temporarily Limited” is displayed Turn off unnecessary electronic equipment to reduce power con- sumption. Please wait until the power supply returns to normal. ■ If “Headlight System Malfunc- tion Visit Your Dealer” is dis- played The following systems may be mal- functioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately. ●The LED headlight system ●Automatic High Beam ■ If “Parking Assist Unavailable Sensor Blocked” is displayed A sensor may be covered with water drops, ice, snow, dirt, etc. Remove the water drops, ice, snow, dirt, etc., from the sensor to return the system to normal. Also, due to ice forming on a sensor at low temperatures, a warning message may be displayed or the sensor may not be able to detect an object. Once the ice melts, the sys- tem will return to normal. If a sensor is dirty, the position of the dirty sensor will be shown on the 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 553 display. If an abnormality is displayed even though there are no water drops, ice, snow or dirt, the sensor may be operating abnormally. Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer. ■ If “Parking Assist Unavailable Low Visibility See Owner’s Man- ual” is displayed Indicates one of the following sys- tems is disabled. ● RCD (Rear Camera Detec- tion) (if equipped) ● PKSB (Parking Support Brake) Remove any dirt or foreign matter from the rear camera. ■ If “System Malfunction Visit Your Dealer” is displayed Indicates one of the following sys- tems is disabled. ●PCS (Pre-Collision System) ●LDA (Lane Departure Alert) ●LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) ● LCA (Lane Change Assist) ●AHB (Automatic High Beam) ●Dynamic radar cruise control ● RSA (Road Sign Assist) ● PDA (Proactive Driving Assist) ● BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) ● RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) ● Safe Exit Assist ● SUBARU Parking Assist ● PKSB (Parking Support Brake) ● RCD (Rear Camera Detec- tion) (if equipped) Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately. ■ If “System Stopped See Owner’s Manual” is displayed Indicates one of the following sys- tems is disabled. ●PCS (Pre-Collision System) ●LDA (Lane Departure Alert) ●LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) ● LCA (Lane Change Assist) ●AHB (Automatic High Beam) ● Dynamic radar cruise control ● RSA (Road Sign Assist) ● PDA (Proactive Driving Assist) ● BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) ● RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) ● Safe Exit Assist ● SUBARU Parking Assist ● PKSB (Parking Support Brake) 8 ● RCD (Rear Camera Detec- tion) (if equipped) Follow the following correction methods. • Check the voltage of the battery • Check the sensors that the SUB- ARU Safety Sense uses for for- eign matter covering them. Remove them if any. (→P.262) • Vehicles with RCD (Rear Camera Detection): Check if the back door is open. Indicates the sensors may not be 554 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency operating properly. (→P.265, 335, 340, 343, 354, 358, 368, 370, 372) • Check the rear bumper around the sensors (→P.332, 338) used by the BSM, RCTA, Safe Exit Assist for foreign matter covering them. Remove them if any. • Check the sensors including cam- era sensors used by the SUBARU Parking Assist, and PKSB, for for- eign matter covering them. Remove them if any. (→P.341) When problems are solved and the sensors are operational, this indica- tion may disappear by itself. ■ If “System Stopped Front Cam- era Low Visibility See Owner’s Manual” is displayed Indicates one of the following sys- tems is disabled. ●PCS (Pre-Collision System) ●LDA (Lane Departure Alert) ●LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) ● LCA (Lane Change Assist) ●AHB (Automatic High Beam) ●Dynamic radar cruise control ● RSA (Road Sign Assist) ● PDA (Proactive Driving Assist) Follow the following correction methods. • Using the windshield wipers, remove the dirt or foreign matter from the windshield. • Using the air conditioning system, defog the windshield. • Close the hood, remove any stick- ers, etc. to clear the obstruction in front of the front camera. ■ If “System Stopped Front Cam- era Out of Temperature. Range Wait until Normal Temperature” is displayed Indicates one of the following sys- tems is disabled. ●PCS (Pre-Collision System) ●LDA (Lane Departure Alert) ●LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) ● LCA (Lane Change Assist) ●AHB (Automatic High Beam) ● Dynamic radar cruise control ● RSA (Road Sign Assist) ● PDA (Proactive Driving Assist) Follow the following correction methods. • If the front camera is hot, such as after the vehicle is parked in the sun, use the air conditioning sys- tem to decrease the temperature around the front camera • If a sunshade was used when the vehicle was parked, depending on its type, the sunlight reflected from the surface of the sunshade may cause the temperature of the front camera to become excessively high • If the front camera is cold, such after the vehicle is parked in an extremely cold environment, use the air conditioning system to increase the temperature around the front camera ■ If “System Stopped Front Radar Sensor Blocked Clean Radar Sensor” is displayed Indicates one of the following sys- tems is disabled. ●PCS (Pre-Collision System) ●LDA (Lane Departure Alert) ●LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) ● LCA (Lane Change Assist) 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 555 ●AHB (Automatic High Beam) ●Dynamic radar cruise control ● PDA (Proactive Driving Assist) Follow the following correction methods. • Check if there is any foreign mat- ter attached to the radar sensor or radar sensor cover and clean them if necessary (→P.263) • This message may be displayed when driving in an open area with few nearby vehicles or structures, such as a desert, grasslands, sub- urbs, etc. The message may be cleared by driving the vehicle in an area with structures, vehicles, etc. nearby. ■ If “System Stopped Front Radar Sensor Out of Temperature. Range Wait until Normal Tem- perature” is displayed Indicates one of the following sys- tems is disabled. ●PCS (Pre-Collision System) ●LDA (Lane Departure Alert) ●LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) ● LCA (Lane Change Assist) ●AHB (Automatic High Beam) ●Dynamic radar cruise control ● PDA (Proactive Driving Assist) Follow the following correction methods. • The temperature of the radar sen- sor is outside of the operating range. Wait for the temperature to become appropriate. ■ If “System Stopped Front Radar In Self Calibration See Owner’s Manual” is displayed Indicates one of the following sys- tems is disabled. ●PCS (Pre-Collision System) ●LDA (Lane Departure Alert) ●LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) ● LCA (Lane Change Assist) ●AHB (Automatic High Beam) ● Dynamic radar cruise control ● PDA (Proactive Driving Assist) Follow the following correction methods. • Check if there is any foreign mat- ter attached to the radar sensor or radar sensor cover and clean them if necessary (→P.263) • The radar sensor may be mis- aligned and will be adjusted auto- matically while driving. Continue driving for a while. ■ If “Unavailable Activation Con- dition not Satisfied See Owner’s Manual” is displayed The LCA function cannot be used as the operating conditions have not been met. (→P.288) Operate the turn signal lever again after all of the operating conditions are met. ■ If “Cruise Control Unavailable See Owner’s Manual” is dis- played Indicates one of the following sys- 8 tems is disabled. ● Dynamic radar cruise control ● Cruise control A message is displayed when the driving assist switch is pushed repeatedly. Press the driving assist switch quickly and firmly. ■ If “Driver Monitor Out of Tem- perature Range Wait until Nor- mal Temperature” is displayed Indicates one of the following sys- tems is disabled. 556 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency ●Driver Monitor ●Traffic Jam Assist The temperature of the driver moni- tor camera is outside of the operat- ing range. Wait for the temperature to become appropriate. ■ If “Driver Monitor Unavailable See Owner’s Manual” is dis- played The lens of the driver monitor cam- era may be dirty. When there is dirt on the camera lens, clean it with a dry, soft cloth so as to not damage it. ■ If a message that indicates the need for visiting your SUBARU dealer is displayed The system or part shown on the multi-information display is malfunc- tioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer immedi- ately. ■ If a message that indicates the need for the rotary shifter oper- ation is displayed To prevent the rotary shifter from being operated incorrectly or the vehicle from moving unexpectedly, a message that requires shifting the shift position may be displayed on the multi-information display. In that case, follow the instruction of the message and shift the shift position. ■ If a message that indicates the need for referring to Owner’s Manual is displayed ●If any of the following messages are shown on the multi-informa- tion display, follow the instruc- tions. • “Battery Low” (→P.572) • “Check Charging System Close Charging Port Lid” (→P.140) • “Charging system malfunction” (→P.140) • “Charging stopped High energy use” (→P.140) ●If any of the following messages are shown on the multi-informa- tion display, it may indicate a mal- function. Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately. • “Entry & Start System Malfunction” • “Traction battery system malfunc- tion” • “Accelerator system malfunction” • “Plug-in Charging System Mal- function” • “EV system malfunction” • “Shift System Malfunction Apply Parking Brake Securely When Parking See Owner’s Manual” • “Shift System Malfunction See Owner’s Manual” • “Shift System Malfunction Stop in a Safe Place See Owner’s Man- ual” • “P Switch Malfunction Apply Park- ing Brake Securely When Parking See Owner’s Manual” • “Shift System Unavailable Apply Parking Brake Securely When Parking See Owner’s Manual” • “Battery Low Shifting Unavailable See Owner’s Manual” ● If any of the following messages are shown on the multi-informa- tion display, it may indicate a mal- function. Immediately stop the vehicle and contact your SUBARU dealer. • “Braking Power Low” NOTICE ■ If “High Power Consumption Power to Climate Temporar- ily Limited” is displayed fre- quently There is a possible malfunction relating to the charging system or the 12-volt battery may be deteri- orating. Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer. 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 557 NOTICE ■ If “Battery Low” is displayed frequently The 12-volt battery may have deteriorated. As the battery may discharge in this state when left unattended, have the battery inspected by your SUBARU dealer. ■ If “Maintenance Reqd. For Traction Battery At Your Dealer” is shown The traction battery is scheduled to be inspected or replaced. Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately. ● Continuing to drive the vehicle without having the traction bat- tery inspected will cause the EV system not to start. ● If the EV system does not start, contact your SUBARU dealer immediately. If you have a flat tire Your vehicle is not equipped with a spare tire, but instead is equipped with an emergency tire puncture repair kit. A puncture caused by a nail or screw passing through the tire tread can be repaired temporarily using the emergency tire puncture repair kit. (The kit contains a bottle of sealant. The sealant can be used only once to temporar- ily repair one tire without removing the nail or screw from the tire.) Depending on the damage condition of the flat tire, it may not be able to repaired with the emer- gency tire puncture repair kit. After temporarily repairing the tire with the kit, have the 8 tire repaired or replaced by your SUBARU dealer. WARNING ■ If you have a flat tire Do not continue driving with a flat tire. Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel beyond repair, which could result in an accident. 558 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency Before repairing the vehi- cle ⚫ Stop the vehicle in a safe place on a hard, flat surface. ⚫ Set the parking brake. ⚫ Shift the shift position to P. ⚫ Stop the EV system. ⚫ Turn on the emergency flash- ers. ⚫ Check the degree of the tire damage. A tire should only be repaired with the emergency tire puncture repair kit if the damage is caused by a nail or screw passing through the tire tread. • Do not remove the nail or screw from the tire. Removing the object may widen the opening and make emergency repair with the repair kit impossible. • To avoid sealant leakage, move the vehicle until the area of the puncture, if known, is positioned at the top of the tire. tire puncture repair kit. Contact your SUBARU dealer. ●When the tire is damaged due to driving without sufficient air pres- sure ●When there are any cracks or damage at any location on the tire, such as on the side wall, except the tread ●When the tire is visibly separated from the wheel ●When the cut or damage to the tread is 0.16 in. (4 mm) long or more ●When the wheel is damaged ●When two or more tires have been punctured ●When more than one sharp objects such as nails or screws have passed through the tread on a single tire ■ A flat tire that cannot be repaired with the emergency tire puncture repair kit In the following cases, the tire can- not be repaired with the emergency 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency Location of the emergency tire puncture repair kit and tools 559 Towing eyelet Emergency tire puncture repair kit Emergency tire puncture repair kit components ■ Bottle 8 Sticker 560 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency ■ Compressor Air pressure gauge Compressor switch Power plug Hose Air release cap ■ Emergency tire puncture repair kit ●The sealant stored in the emer- gency tire puncture repair kit can be used only once to temporarily repair a single tire. If the sealant in the bottle and other parts of the kit have been used and need to be replaced, contact your SUBARU dealer. ●The compressor can be used repeatedly. ●The sealant can be used when the outside temperature is from -40°F (-40°C) to 140°F (60°C). ●The kit is exclusively designed for size and type of tires originally installed on your vehicle. Do not use it for tires that a different size than the original ones, or for any other purposes. ● If the sealant gets on your clothes, it may stain. ● If the sealant adheres to a wheel or the surface of the vehicle body, the stain may not be removable if it is not cleaned at once. Immedi- ately wipe away the sealant with a wet cloth. ● During operation of the repair kit, a loud operation noise is pro- duced. This does not indicate a malfunction. ● Do not use to check or to adjust the tire pressure. ■ Note for checking the emer- gency tire puncture repair kit ● Check the sealant expiry date occasionally. The expiry date is shown on the bottle. ● Do not use sealant whose expiry date has already passed. Other- wise, repairs conducted using the emergency tire puncture repair kit may not be performed properly. ●The sealant has a limited life span. The expiry date is marked on the bottle. The sealant should be replaced before the expiry date. Contact your SUBARU dealer for replacement. WARNING ■ If you have a flat tire Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel beyond repair. Driving with a flat tire may cause a circumferential groove on the side wall. In such a case, the tire may explode when using a repair kit. WARNING ■ Caution while driving 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 2 Remove the cover. 561 ●Store the repair kit in the lug- gage compartment. Injuries may result in the event of an acci- dent or sudden braking. ●The repair kit is exclusively only for your vehicle. Do not use repair kit on other vehicles, which could lead to an accident causing death or serious injury. ● Do not use repair kit for tires that are different size than the original ones, or for any other purpose. If the tires have not been completely repaired, it could lead to an accident caus- ing death or serious injury. ■ Precautions for use of the sealant ● Ingesting the sealant is hazard- ous to your health. If you ingest sealant, consume as much water as possible, then immedi- ately consult a doctor. ● If sealant gets in eyes or adheres to skin, immediately wash it off with water. If discom- fort persists, consult a doctor. Taking out the emer- gency tire puncture repair kit 1 Open the deck board. 3 Take out the emergency tire puncture repair kit. 1 Compressor 2 Bottle Emergency repair proce- dure 1 Take out the repair kit from 8 the plastic bag. Attach the sticker enclosed with the bottle on the specified locations. (See step 10.) 562 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 2 Remove the hose and take out the power plug from the compressor. 3 Connect the bottle to the compressor. Insert and connect the bottle straight into the compressor as shown in the illustration, and check that the claws of the bottle are con- cealed in the holes. 4 Connect the hose to the bot- tle. As shown in the illustration, make sure the hose is connected securely to the bottle. 5 Remove the valve cap from the valve of the punctured tire. 6 Extend the hose. Remove the air release cap from the hose. You will use the air release cap again. Therefore keep it in a safe 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 563 place. 7 Connect the hose to the valve. Screw the end of the hose clock- wise as far as possible. 8 Make sure that the compres- sor switch is off. 9 Connect the power plug to the power outlet socket. (→P.458) 10Attach the sticker provided with the tire puncture repair kit to a position easily seen from the driver’s seat. 11Check the specified tire infla- tion pressure. Tire inflation pressure is specified on the label as shown. (→P.587) 12Start the EV system. (→P.233) 13To inject the sealant and inflate the tire, turn the com- 8 pressor switch on. 564 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 14Inflate the tire until the rec- ommended pressure is reached. The sealant will be injected and the pressure will spike to between 44 psi (300 kPa, 3.0 kgf/cm² or bar) and 58 psi 2 5 to 20 minutes (depending on the outside temperature). If the tire inflation pressure is still lower than the specified point after infla- tion for 25 minutes, the tire is too damaged to be repaired. Turn the compressor switch off and con- tact your SUBARU dealer. • If the tire inflation pressure exceeds the specified air pres- sure, let out some air to adjust the tire inflation pressure. (→P.566) 15With the compressor switch off, pull out the power plug from the power outlet socket and then disconnect the hose from the valve on the tire. Some sealant may leak when the hose is removed. 16Install the valve cap onto the valve of the emergency repaired tire. 17Attach the air release cap to the end of the hose. If the air release cap is not attached, the sealant may leak and (400 kPa, 4.0 kgf/cm or bar), the vehicle may get dirty. then gradually decrease. The air pressure gauge will display the actual tire inflation pressure about 1 to 5 min- utes after the switch is turned on. • Turn the compressor switch off and then check the tire inflation pressure. Being careful not to over inflate, check and repeat the inflation procedure until the speci- fied tire inflation pressure is reached. • The tire can be inflated for about 18Temporarily store the bottle in the luggage compartment while it is connected to the compressor. 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 565 19To spread the liquid sealant evenly within the tire, imme- diately drive safely for about 3 miles (5 km) below 50 mph (80 km/h). 20After driving, stop your vehi- cle in a safe place on a hard, flat surface and reconnect the repair kit. Remove the air release cap from the hose before reconnecting the hose. 21Turn the compressor switch on and wait for several sec- onds, then turn it off. Check the tire inflation pressure. If the tire inflation pressure is 19 psi (130 kPa, 1.3 kgf/cm² or bar) or higher, but less than the specified air pres- sure: Proceed to step 22. If the tire inflation pressure is the specified air pressure (→P.587): Proceed to step23. 22Turn the compressor switch on to inflate the tire until the specified air pressure is reached. Drive for about 3 miles (5 km) and then per- form step 20. 23Attach the air release cap to the end of the hose. If the air release cap is not attached, the sealant may leak and the vehicle may get dirty. 8 If the tire inflation pressure is under 19 psi (130 kPa, 1.3 kgf/cm² or bar): The puncture cannot be repaired. Contact your SUBARU dealer. 24Store the bottle in the lug- gage compartment while it is connected to the compres- sor. 25Taking precautions to avoid sudden braking, sudden acceleration and sharp turns, drive carefully at under 50 mph (80 km/h) to the nearest 566 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency SUBARU dealer that is less than 62 miles (100 km) away for tire repair or replacement. For repair and replacement of a tire or disposal of the tire puncture repair kit, contact your SUBARU dealer. When having the tire repaired or replaced, make sure to tell the SUBARU dealer that the sealant is injected. ■ If the tire is inflated to more than the specified air pressure 1 Disconnect the hose from the valve. 2 Install the air release cap to the end of the hose and push the protrusion on the air release cap into the valve to let some air out. 3 Disconnect the hose from the valve, remove the air release cap from the hose and then recon- nect the hose. 4 Turn the compressor switch on and wait for several seconds, then turn it off. Check that the air pressure indicator shows the specified air pressure is reached. (→P.587) If the air pressure is under the designated pressure, turn the compressor switch on again and repeat the inflation procedure until the specified air pressure is reached. ■ After a tire is repaired with the emergency tire puncture repair kit ● The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter should be replaced. ●Even if the tire inflation pressure is at the recommended level, the tire pressure warning light may come on/flash. WARNING ■ When fixing the flat tire ●Stop your vehicle in a safe and flat area. ● Do not touch the wheels or the area around the brakes immedi- ately after the vehicle has been driven. After the vehicle has been driven, the wheels and the area around the brakes may be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet or other body parts may result in burns. ● Connect the valve and hose securely with the tire installed on the vehicle. If the hose is not properly con- nected to the valve, air leakage may occur as sealant may be sprayed out. ● If the hose comes off the valve while inflating the tire, there is a risk that the hose will move abruptly due to air pressure. ● After inflation of the tire has completed, the sealant may splatter when the hose is dis- connected or some air is let out of the tire. ●Follow the operation procedure to repair the tire. If the proce- dure is not followed, the sealant may spray out. WARNING 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency ● If the vehicle does not drive straight or you feel a pull 567 ●Keep back from the tire while it is being repaired, as there is a chance of it bursting while the repair operation is being per- formed. If you notice any cracks or deformation of the tire, turn off the compressor switch and stop the repair operation imme- diately. ●The repair kit may overheat if operated for a long period of time. Do not operate the com- pressor continuously for more than 40 minutes. ●Parts of the repair kit become hot during operation. Be careful handling the repair kit during and after operation. Do not touch the metal part connecting the bottle and the compressor. It will be extremely hot. ● Do not attach the vehicle speed warning sticker to an area other than the one indicated. If the sticker is attached to an area where an SRS airbag is located, such as the pad of the steering wheel, it may prevent the SRS air bag from operating properly. ■ Driving to spread the liquid sealant evenly Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents. Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury. ● Drive the vehicle carefully at a low speed. Be especially careful when turning and cornering. through the steering wheel, stop the vehicle and check the fol- lowing: • Tire condition. The tire may have separated from the wheel. • Tire inflation pressure. If the tire inflation pressure is 19 psi (130 kPa, 1.3 kgf/cm² or bar) or less, the tire may be severely dam- aged. NOTICE ■ When performing an emer- gency repair ● Perform the emergency repair without removing the nail or screw that has punctured the tread of the tire. If the object that has punctured the tire is removed, repair by the emer- gency tire puncture repair kit may not be possible. ●The repair kit is not waterproof. Make sure that the repair kit is not exposed to water, such as when it is being used in the rain. ● Do not put the repair kit directly onto dusty ground such as sand at the side of the road. If the repair kit vacuums up dust, etc., 8 a malfunction may occur. ● Make sure the sealant bottle of the repair kit is in a vertical posi- tion. The repair kit does not operate properly when it is laid. ■ Precautions for the emer- gency tire puncture repair kit ●The repair kit power source should be 12 V DC suitable for vehicle use. Do not connect the repair kit to any other source. 568 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency NOTICE ●Place the repair kit in a storage to prevent it from being exposed to dirt or water. ●Store the repair kit in the lug- gage compartment out of reach of children. ● Do not disassemble or modify the repair kit. Do not subject parts such as the air pressure indicator to impacts. This may cause a malfunction. ■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warn- ing valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid seal- ant is used, contact your SUB- ARU dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. After use of liquid sealant, make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when repairing or replacing the tire. (→P.505) If the EV system will not start Reasons for the EV system not starting vary depending on the situation. Check the following and perform the appropriate procedure: The EV system will not start even though the cor- rect starting procedure is being followed (→P.233) One of the following may be the cause of the problem: ⚫ The charging cable may be connected to the vehicle. (→P.100) ⚫ The electronic key may not be functioning properly.* (→P.570) ⚫ The traction battery may be completely discharged. Charge the traction battery. (→P.97) ⚫ There may be a malfunction in the immobilizer system.* (→P.68) ⚫ There may be a malfunction in the shift control system.* (→P.235, 556) ⚫ The EV system may be mal- functioning due to an electri- cal problem such as electronic key battery deple- tion or a blown fuse. However, 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 569 depending on the type of mal- function, an interim measure is available to start the EV system. (→P.569) ⚫ There is a possibility that the temperature of the traction battery is extremely low (approximately below -22°F [- 30°C]). (→P.77, 234) *: It may not be possible to shift the shift position from P The interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume One of the following may be the cause of the problem: ⚫ The 12-volt battery may be discharged. (→P.572) ⚫ The 12-volt battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded. (→P.497) The interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound One of the following may be the cause of the problem: ⚫ The 12-volt battery may be discharged. (→P.572) ⚫ One or both of the 12-volt bat- tery terminals may be discon- nected. (→P.497) Contact your SUBARU dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures are unknown. Starting the EV system in an emergency When the EV system does not start, the following steps can be used as an interim measure to start the EV system if the power switch is functioning normally. Do not use this starting proce- dure except in cases of emer- gency. 1 Set the parking brake. 2 Turn the power switch to ACC.* 3 Press and hold the power switch for about 15 seconds while depressing the brake pedal firmly. Even if the EV system can be started using the above steps, the system may be malfunction- ing. Have the vehicle inspected 8 by your SUBARU dealer. *: Setting can be customized. (→P.604) 570 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency If you lose your keys New genuine keys can be made by your SUBARU dealer using the other key and the key number stamped on your key num- ber plate. Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. NOTICE ■ When an electronic key is lost If the electronic key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Visit your SUBARU dealer immediately with all remaining electronic keys that were provided with your vehicle. If the electronic key does not operate prop- erly If communication between the electronic key and vehi- cle is interrupted (→P.185) or the electronic key cannot be used because the battery is depleted, the smart key system and wireless remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors can be opened and the EV sys- tem can be started by fol- lowing the procedure below. ■ When the electronic key does not work properly ●Make sure that the smart key sys- tem has not been deactivated in the customization setting. If it is off, turn the function on. (Customizable features: →P.601) ● Check if battery-saving mode is set. If it is set, cancel the function. (→P.185) NOTICE ■ In case of a smart key system malfunction, or other key related problems Take your vehicle with all the elec- tronic keys provided with your vehicle to your SUBARU dealer. Locking and unlocking the doors Use the mechanical key (→P.164) in order to perform the following operations. 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 571 1 Locks all the doors 2 Unlocks the door Turning the key rearward unlocks the driver’s door. Turning the key once again within 5 seconds unlocks the other doors. ■ Key linked functions 1 Closes the windows (turn and hold)* 2 Opens the windows (turn and hold)* *: These settings must be custom- ized at your SUBARU dealer. WARNING ■ When using the mechanical key and operating the power windows Operate the power window after checking to make sure that there is no possibility of any passenger having any of their body parts caught in the window. Also, do not allow children to operate the mechanical key. It is possible for children and other passengers to get caught in the power window. Starting the EV system 1 Depress the brake pedal. 2 Touch the electronic key to the power switch. When the electronic key is detected, a buzzer sounds and the power switch will turn to ON. When the smart key system is deactivated in customization set- ting, the power switch will turn to ACC. 8 3 Firmly depress the brake pedal and check that is displayed on the multi-infor- mation display. 4 Press the power switch shortly and firmly. In the event that the EV system still 572 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency cannot be started, contact your SUBARU dealer. ■ Stopping the EV system Shift the shift position to P, set the parking brake and press the power switch as you normally do when stopping the EV system. ■ Replacing the key battery As the above procedure is a tempo- rary measure, it is recommended that the electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the bat- tery is depleted. (→P.527) ■ Alarm If a door is unlocked using the mechanical key when the alarm sys- tem is set, the alarm may be trig- gered. (→P.69) ■ Changing power switch modes Release the brake pedal and press the power switch in step 3 above. The EV system does not start and modes will be changed each time the switch is pressed. (→P.236) If the 12-volt battery is discharged The following procedures may be used to start the EV system if the vehicle’s 12- volt battery is discharged. You can also call your SUB- ARU dealer or a qualified repair shop. Restarting the EV system If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your vehicle by following the steps below. 1 Confirm that the electronic key is being carried. When connecting the jumper (or booster) cables, depending on the situation, the alarm may activate and the doors locked. (→P.70) 2 Open the hood (→P.491). 3 Open the positive (+) battery terminal cover. While pressing on the claw, open the cover as shown in the illustra- tion. 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 573 4 Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to on your vehicle and connect the clamp on the other end of the positive cable to on the second vehicle. Then, connect a negative cable clamp to on the second vehicle and connect the clamp at the other end of the negative cable to . Use jumper cables that can reach the specified terminals and connecting point. 8 Positive (+) battery terminal (your vehicle) Positive (+) battery terminal (second vehicle) Negative (-) battery terminal (second vehicle) Metallic point shown in the illustration 5 Start the engine of the sec- ond vehicle. Increase the engine speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the 12-volt battery of your vehicle. 574 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 6 Open and close any of the doors of your vehicle with the power switch OFF. 7 Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start the EV system of your vehi- cle by turning the power switch to ON. 8 Make sure the “READY” indi- cator comes on. If the indica- tor light does not come on, contact your SUBARU dealer. 9 Once the EV system has started, remove the jumper cables in the exact reverse order from which they were connected. 10Close the positive (+) battery terminal cover. Once the EV system starts, have the vehicle inspected at your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. ■ Starting the EV system when the 12-volt battery is dis- charged The EV system cannot be started by push-starting. ■ To prevent 12-volt battery dis- charge ●Turn off the headlights, the air conditioning system, the audio system, etc. while the EV system is off. ●Turn off any unnecessary electri- cal components when the vehicle is running at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic. ■ Charging the 12-volt battery The electricity stored in the 12-volt battery will discharge gradually even when the vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the drain- ing effects of certain electrical appli- ances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the 12-volt battery may dis- charge, and the EV system may be unable to start. (The 12-volt battery recharges automatically while the EV system is operating.) ■ When the 12-volt battery is removed or discharged ● Information stored in the ECU is cleared. When the 12-volt battery is depleted, have the vehicle inspected at your SUBARU dealer. ● In some cases, it may not be pos- sible to unlock the doors using the smart key system when the 12- volt battery is discharged. Use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors. ● The EV system may not start on the first attempt after the 12-volt battery has recharged but will start normally after the second attempt. This is not a malfunction. ●The power switch mode is memo- rized by the vehicle. When the 12- volt battery is reconnected, the system will return to the mode it was in before the 12-volt battery was discharged. Before discon- necting the 12-volt battery, turn the power switch off. If you are unsure what mode the power switch was in before the 12-volt battery discharged, be especially careful when recon- necting the 12-volt battery. ● If the 12-volt battery discharges, it may not be possible to shift the shift position to other positions. In this case, the vehicle cannot be towed without lifting both front wheels because the front wheels will be locked. 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 575 ●The power back door (if equipped) must be initialized. (→P.179) ■ When replacing the 12-volt bat- tery ●Use a 12-volt battery that con- forms to European regulations. ●Use a 12-volt battery that the case size is same as the previous one (LN1), 20 hour rate capacity (20HR) is equivalent (45Ah) or greater, and performance rating (CCA) is equivalent (286A) or greater. • If the sizes differ, the 12-volt bat- tery cannot be properly secured. • If an improper 12-volt battery is used, battery performance may decrease and the EV system may not be able to restart. • If the 20 hour rate capacity is low, even if the time period where the vehicle is not used is a short time, the 12-volt battery may discharge and EV system may not be able to start. For details, consult your SUBARU dealer. WARNING ■ When removing the 12-volt battery terminals Always remove the negative (-) terminal first. If the positive (+) ter- minal contacts any metal in the surrounding area when the posi- tive (+) terminal is removed, a spark may occur, leading to a fire in addition to electrical shocks and death or serious injury. ■ Avoiding 12-volt battery fires or explosions Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable gas that may be emit- ted from the 12-volt battery: ● Make sure each jumper cable is connected to the correct termi- nal and that it is not unintention- ally in contact with any other than the intended terminal. ● Do not allow the other end of the jumper cable connected to the “+” terminal to come into contact with any other parts or metal surfaces in the area, such as brackets or unpainted metal. ●Do not allow the + and – clamps of the jumper cables to come into contact with each other. ● Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near the 12-volt battery. ■ 12-volt battery precautions The 12-volt battery contains poi- sonous and corrosive acidic elec- trolyte, while related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the 12-volt battery: ●When working with the 12-volt battery, always wear safety 8 glasses and take care not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body. ● Do not lean over the 12-volt bat- tery. 576 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency WARNING ● In the event that battery fluid (acid) comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical atten- tion. Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be received. ●Always wash your hands after handling the 12-volt battery and other battery-related parts. ● Do not allow children near the 12-volt battery. ■ When replacing the 12-volt battery ●When the vent plug is close to the hold down clamp, the bat- tery fluid (acid) may leak. ●For information regarding bat- tery replacement, contact your SUBARU dealer. NOTICE ■ When handling jumper cables When connecting the jumper cables, ensure that they do not become entangled in the cooling fan. ■ When connecting jumper cables Make sure to connect jumper cables to the specified terminals and connecting point. Failure to do so may adversely affect the electronic devices or damage to them. If your vehicle over- heats When “EV System over- heated Output power reduced” is shown on the multi-information display, your vehicle may be over- heating. NOTICE ■ Cooling system coolant The radiator coolant is exclusive for radiator usage. Damage may occur when water or any other type of coolant is used, so never use any other fluid. When there is no “Genuine Traction Battery Coolant”, immediately contact your SUBARU dealer. Correction procedures 1 Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air con- ditioning system. 2 Leave the EV system operat- ing and carefully lift the hood. 3 Check if the cooling fan is operating. If the fan is operating: Wait until the “EV System overheated Output power reduced” message disap- 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 577 pears and then stop the EV system. If the message does not disappear, call your SUB- ARU dealer. If the fan is not operating: Stop the EV system immedi- ately and call your SUBARU dealer. 4 After the EV system has cooled down, inspect the hoses and radiator core (radi- ator) for any leaks. Radiator Cooling fan If a large amount of coolant leaks, immediately contact your SUBARU dealer. 5 The coolant level is satisfac- tory if it is between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the reser- voir. Reservoir “MAX” line “MIN” line 6 If the coolant is insufficient, replenish with “Genuine Trac- tion Battery Coolant”. If you don’t have “Genuine Traction Battery Coolant”, contact your SUBARU dealer. 1 Remove the bolt. 2 Open the reservoir cap Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest your SUBARU dealer. WARNING ■ To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under 8 the hood of your vehicle Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may result in seri- ous injury such as burns. ● If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the steam has sub- sided. The motor compartment may be very hot. 578 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency WARNING ●Keep hands and clothing (espe- cially a tie, a scarf or a muffler) away from the fan. Failure to do so may cause the hands or clothing to be caught, resulting in serious injury. ●Do not loosen the coolant reser- voir cap while the EV system and radiator are hot. High tem- perature steam or coolant could spray out. NOTICE ■ When adding coolant Add coolant slowly after the EV system has cooled down suffi- ciently. Adding cool coolant to a hot EV system too quickly can cause damage to the EV system. ■ To prevent damage to the cooling system Observe the following precau- tions: ●Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust, etc.). ● Do not use water or any other coolant when refilling coolant. Also, do not use any additive agents for the coolant. If the vehicle becomes stuck Carry out the following pro- cedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt or snow: Recovering procedure 1 Stop the EV system. Set the parking brake and shift the shift position to P. 2 Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the stuck tire. 3 Place wood, stones or some other material under the front wheels to help provide trac- tion. 4 Restart the EV system 5 Shift the shift position to D or R and release the parking brake. Then, while exercising caution, depress the acceler- ator pedal. ■ When it is difficult to free the vehicle Press to turn off TRAC. (→P.418) 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 579 WARNING ■ When attempting to free a stuck vehicle If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people. The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution. ■ When shifting the shift posi- tion Be careful not to shift the shift position with the accelerator pedal depressed. This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. NOTICE ■ To avoid damaging the trans- mission and other compo- nents ●Avoid spinning the tires and depressing the accelerator pedal more than necessary. ●If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed, the vehicle may 8 require towing to be freed. 580 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 581 Vehicle specifications 9 9-1. Specifications Maintenance data . 582 Tire information . 588 9-2. Customization Customizable features 598 9-3. Initialization Items to initialize . 612 9 582 9-1. Specifications Maintenance data Dimensions and weights Overall length Overall width Overall height* Wheelbase Tread Front Rear 184.6 in. (4690 mm) 73.2 in. (1860 mm) 65.0 in. (1650 mm) 112.2 in. (2850 mm) 63.0 in. (1600 mm) 63.4 in. (1610 mm) Vehicle capacity weight (Occupants + luggage) *: Unladen vehicle 1045 lb. (475 kg) Seating capacity Seating capacity 5 (Front 2, Rear 3) Vehicle identification ■ Vehicle identification num- ber The vehicle identification num- ber (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This is the pri- mary identification number for your SUBARU. It is used in reg- istering the ownership of your vehicle. This number is on the top left of the instrument panel. This number is also stamped under the right-hand front seat. 9-1. Specifications the motor as shown. 583 ▶ Front electric motor (traction motor) This number is also on the Certi- fication Regulation Label. ▶ Rear electric motor (traction motor) ■ Motor model type and motor number The motor model type and the motor number are stamped on Front electric motor (traction motor) Model Type Maximum output Maximum torque 1YM Permanent magnet synchronous motor 80 kW 9 124.3 ft•lbf (168.5 N•m, 17.2 kgf•m) Rear electric motor (traction motor) Model Type Maximum output Maximum torque 1YM Permanent magnet synchronous motor 80 kW 124.3 ft•lbf (168.5 N•m, 17.2 kgf•m) 584 9-1. Specifications Traction battery Type Voltage Capacity Quantity Nominal voltage Lithium-ion battery 3.7 V/cell 205 Ah 96 cells 355.2 V Cooling system Capacity* Coolant type 8.0 qt. (7.6 L, 6.7 Imp. qt.) Use either of the following: • “Genuine Traction Battery Coolant” • Similar high-quality ethylene glycol- based, low electric conductivity coolant, non-amine and non-borate coolant with azole additives. Do not use plain water alone. *: The coolant capacity is the quantity of reference. If replacement is necessary, contact your SUBARU dealer. 9-1. Specifications 585 NOTICE ■ Cooling system coolant In order to ensure maximum performance of the traction battery cooling system and limit risks of battery short circuit and other damage to your vehicle, SUBARU recommends using “Genuine Traction Battery Coolant” or similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based, low electric conductivity coolant, non-amine and non-borate coolant with azole additives. SUBARU cannot guarantee that the use of a product other than “Genuine Traction Battery Coolant” will prevent risks of battery short circuit or other damage. Never use water as it will cause damage. Do not reuse coolant that has been removed from the radiator. Heater system Capacity Coolant type 4.8 qt. (4.5 L, 4.0 Imp. qt.) Use either of the following: • “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” • Similar high-quality ethylene glycol- based non-silicate, non-amine, non- nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long- life hybrid organic acid technology Do not use plain water alone. 9 Electrical system (12-volt battery) Specific voltage reading at 68°F (20°C): Charging rates 12.0 V or More In the case the voltage is less than stan- dard, charge battery. (Voltage is checked 20 minutes after the motor and all lights turned off.) 5 A max. 586 9-1. Specifications Front eAxle Fluid capacity* Fluid type 4.1 qt. (3.9 L, 3.4 Imp.qt.) e-Transaxle Fluid TE *: The fluid capacity is a reference quantity. If replacement is necessary, contact your SUBARU dealer. NOTICE ■ Front eAxle fluid type Using transaxle fluid other than the above type may cause abnormal noise or vibration, or ultimately damage the front eAxle of your vehicle. Rear eAxle (rear electric motor) Fluid capacity* Fluid type 3.3 qt. (3.1 L, 2.7 Imp.qt.) e-Transaxle Fluid TE *: The fluid capacity is a reference quantity. If replacement is necessary, contact your SUBARU dealer. NOTICE ■ Rear eAxle fluid type Using transaxle fluid other than the above type may cause abnormal noise or vibration, or ultimately damage the rear eAxle of your vehicle. Brakes Pedal clearance*1 Pedal free play Parking brake indicator*2 Fluid type 2.28 in. (58 mm) Min. 0.04 – 0.24 in. (1.0 – 6.0 mm) When pushing the parking brake switch for 1 to 4 seconds: turns off When pulling the parking brake switch for 1 to 4 seconds: comes on FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 FMVSS No.116 DOT 4 or SAE J1704 *1: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 66 lbf (300 N, 31 kgf) while the EV system is operating. 9-1. Specifications 587 *2: Make sure to confirm that the brake system warning light (yellow) does not illuminate. (If the brake system warning light illuminates, refer to P.542) Steering Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm) Tires and wheels ▶ Vehicles with 18-inch wheels Tire size 235/60R18 103V Front: Tire inflation pressure (Recommended cold tire infla- tion pressure) Wheel size Wheel bolt torque 38 psi (260 kPa, 2.6 kgf/cm² or bar) Rear: 38 psi (260 kPa, 2.6 kgf/cm² or bar) 18 x 7 1/2J 103 ft•lbf (140 N•m, 14.3 kgf•m) ▶ Vehicles with 20-inch wheels Tire size 235/50R20 100V Front: Tire inflation pressure (Recommended cold tire infla- tion pressure) Wheel size Wheel bolt torque 38 psi (260 kPa, 2.6 kgf/cm² or bar) Rear: 38 psi (260 kPa, 2.6 kgf/cm² or bar) 20 x 7 1/2J 9 103 ft•lbf (140 N•m, 14.3 kgf•m) 588 9-1. Specifications Tire information Typical tire symbols Location of treadwear indicators (→P.501) Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure (→P.592) Maximum cold tire inflation pressure (→P.592) This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated. Tire size (→P.589) TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly put into the tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pres- sure. Radial tires or bias-ply tires A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “RADIAL” is a bias-ply tire. Summer tires or all season tires (→P.501) An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a summer tire. Tire ply composition and materials Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands which form the plies in a tire. DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) (→P.589) Uniform tire quality grading 9-1. Specifications 589 For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows. Typical DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) ▶ Type A DOT symbol* Tire Identification Number (TIN) Tire manufacturer’s identifi- cation mark Tire size code Manufacturer’s optional tire type code (3 or 4 letters) Manufacturing week Manufacturing year *: The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Fed- eral Motor Vehicle Safety Stan- dards. ▶ Type B DOT symbol* Tire Identification Number (TIN) Tire manufacturer’s identifi- cation mark Manufacturer’s code Manufacturing week Manufacturing year *: The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Fed- eral Motor Vehicle Safety Stan- dards. Tire size 9 ■ Typical tire size information The illustration indicates typical tire size. 590 9-1. Specifications Tire section names Section width (millimeters) Aspect ratio (tire height to section width) Tire construction code (R = Radial, D = Diagonal) Wheel diameter (inches) Load index (2 digits or 3 dig- its) Speed symbol (alphabet with one letter) ■ Tire dimensions Section width Tire height Wheel diameter Bead Sidewall Shoulder Tread Belt Inner liner Reinforcing rubber Carcass Rim lines Bead wires Chafer Uniform Tire Quality Grading This information has been pre- pared in accordance with regu- lations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis- tration of the U.S. Department of Transportation. It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of SUBARU vehicles with infor- 9-1. Specifications 591 mation on uniform tire quality grading. Your SUBARU dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information. ■ DOT quality grades All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Trac- tion AA Temperature A ■ Treadwear The treadwear grade is a com- parative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 – 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use. Performance may differ significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. ■ Traction AA, A, B, C The traction grades, from high- est to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified govern- ment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not include corner- ing (turning) traction. ■ Temperature A, B, C The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, repre- senting the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled condi- tions on a specified indoor labo- ratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Fed- eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher 9 levels of performance on the labo- ratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning: The temperature grades of a tire assume that it is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. 592 9-1. Specifications Glossary of tire terminology Tire related term Cold tire inflation pres- sure Maximum inflation pres- sure Recommended inflation pressure Accessory weight Curb weight Maximum loaded vehicle weight Normal occupant weight Occupant distribution Meaning Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for three hours or more, or has not been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer The combined weight (in excess of those stan- dard items which may be replaced) of transmis- sion, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory- installed equipment (whether installed or not) The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum capacity of traction battery and coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional traction motor The sum of: (a) Curb weight (b) Accessory weight (c) Vehicle capacity weight (d) Production options weight 150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1* that follows Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as speci- fied in the third column of Table 1* below The combined weight of installed regular pro- duction options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the standard items which they Production options weight replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim 9-1. Specifications 593 Rim Tire related term Meaning A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated Rim diameter (Wheel diameter) Rim size designation Rim type designation Rim width Vehicle capacity weight (Total load capacity) Vehicle maximum load on the tire Vehicle normal load on the tire Weather side Bead Bead separation Bias ply tire Carcass Chunking Cord Nominal diameter of the bead seat Rim diameter and width The industry manufacturer’s designation for a rim by style or code Nominal distance between rim flanges The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68 kg) times the vehicle’s designated seating capacity The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the max- imum loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1* below), and dividing by two The surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire The part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the rim A breakdown of the bond between components in the bead A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that 9 extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90 degrees to the center- line of the tread The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall The strands forming the plies in the tire 594 9-1. Specifications Tire related term Cord separation Cracking CT Extra load tire Groove Innerliner Innerliner separation Intended outboard side- wall Light truck (LT) tire Load rating Maximum load rating Maximum permissible inflation pressure Meaning The parting of cords from adjacent rubber com- pounds Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or inner- liner of the tire extending to cord material A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the correspond- ing standard tire The space between two adjacent tread ribs The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass (a)The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or (b)The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetri- cal tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehi- cle A tire designated by its manufacturer as primar- ily intended for use on lightweight trucks or mul- tipurpose passenger vehicles The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure The load rating for a tire at the maximum per- missible inflation pressure for that tire The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated 9-1. Specifications 595 Tire related term Measuring rim Open splice Outer diameter Overall width Passenger car tire Ply Ply separation Pneumatic tire Radial ply tire Reinforced tire Section width Sidewall Sidewall separation Meaning The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord material The overall diameter of an inflated new tire The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multi- purpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less. A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies A mechanical device made of rubber, chemi- cals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, pro- vides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the correspond- ing standard tire The linear distance between the exteriors of the 9 sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands That portion of a tire between the tread and bead The parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the sidewall 596 9-1. Specifications Tire related term Snow tire Test rim Tread Tread rib Tread separation Treadwear indicators (TWI) Wheel-holding fixture Meaning A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E- 1136-93 Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( ) on at least one sidewall The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road A tread section running circumferentially around a tire Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass The projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing *: Table 1 ⎯ Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities Designated seating capacity, Number of occupants 2 through 4 5 through 10 Vehicle normal load, Number of occupants 2 3 Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehi- cle 2 in front 2 in front, 1 in second seat 9-1. Specifications 597 Designated seating capacity, Number of occupants 11 through 15 16 through 20 Vehicle normal load, Number of occupants 5 7 Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehi- cle 2 in front, 1 in second seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat 2 in front, 2 in second seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat 9 598 9-2. Customization Customizable features Your vehicle includes a vari- ety of electronic features that can be personalized to suit your preferences. The settings of these features can be changed using the multi-information display, multimedia system, or at your SUBARU dealer. Customizing vehicle fea- tures ■ Changing using the multi- information display 1 Press or of the meter control switches and select . 2 Press or of the meter control switches, select the item. 3 To switch the function on and off, press icon to switch to the desired setting. 4 To perform detailed setting of the function, press and hold and display the setting screen. The method of detailed setting dif- fers for each screen. Please refer to the advice sentence displayed on the screen. To go back to the previous screen or exit the customize mode, press . ■ Changing by using the mul- timedia system 1 Select on the main menu. 2 Select “Vehicle customize”. 3 According to the display, select the desired setting. Various setting can be changed. Refer to the list of settings that can be changed for details. ■ When customizing using the multimedia system or multi- information display Stop the vehicle in a safe place, apply the parking brake, and shift the shift position to P. Also, to pre- vent 12-volt battery discharge, leave the EV system operating while cus- tomizing the features. NOTICE ■ During customization To prevent 12-volt battery dis- charge, ensure that the EV sys- tem is operating while customizing features. Customizable Features 9-2. Customization 599 Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other func- tions being customized. Contact your SUBARU dealer for further details. Settings that can be changed using the multimedia system Settings that can be changed using the multi-information display Settings that can be changed by your SUBARU dealer Definition of symbols: O = Available, – =Not available ■ Charging system (→P.104, 112) Function Default setting Customized setting 16A Charging current Charging limit DC charging power* Battery cooler MAX Full MAX On 8A 90% 80% 70% 60% 50% 125 kW 100 kW 75 kW 50 kW Off O O – O O – O O – O O – 9 *: Values that can be selected will vary depending on the vehicle grade and optional equipment. 600 9-2. Customization ■ Gauges, meters and multi-information display (→P.152, 155) Function* Default setting Customized French Language Units Power Consumption Audio system linked display Symmetrical AWD Drive Info Type Drive Info Items Pop-up display Closing display Suggestion function Stop light indicator English miles (miles/kWh) Total average (Average power con- sumption [after reset]) On On After Start Distance On Drive Info On On ⎯ O ⎯ Spanish km (kWh/100km) ⎯ O ⎯ km (km/kWh) Trip average (Average power con- ⎯ O ⎯ sumption [after start]) Off ⎯ O ⎯ Off ⎯ O ⎯ After Reset ⎯ O ⎯ Average Speed ⎯ O ⎯ Total Time Off ⎯ O ⎯ Charging O ⎯ Schedule On (when the vehicle is stopped) O ⎯ O Off Off ⎯ O ⎯ *: For details about each function: →P.158 ■ Rear seat reminder (→P.169) Function Default setting Customized setting Indication to prevent mis- placement in the rear seat On Off — O — ■ Door lock (→P.167, 570) 9-2. Customization 601 Function Unlocking using a mechani- cal key Automatic door locking func- tion Automatic door unlocking function Default setting Driver’s door unlocked in first step, all doors unlocked in second step Shift position linked door locking opera- tion Shift position linked door unlocking operation Customized setting All doors unlocked in – – O first step Off Speed linked O – O door locking operation Off Driver’s door linked door O – O unlocking operation ■ Smart key system and wireless remote control (→P.164, 183) Function Default setting Customized setting Operation signal (emer- gency flashers) Operation buzzer volume Time elapsed before the automatic door lock function is activated if a door is not opened after being unlocked Open door reminder buzzer On 5 60 seconds On Off O – O Off O – O 1 to 7 Off 30 seconds O – O 9 120 seconds Off – – O ■ Smart key system (→P.183) Function Default setting Customized setting Smart key system On Off – – O Smart door unlocking Driver’s door All the doors O – O 602 9-2. Customization Function Default setting Customized setting Number of consecutive door lock operations Time elapsed before unlock- ing all the door when gripping and holding the driver’s door handle* 2 times 2 seconds As many as desired Off 1.5 seconds 2.5 seconds – – O – – O *: This setting can be changed when the smart door unlocking setting is set to Driver’s door. ■ Wireless remote control (→P.164) Function Default setting Customized setting Wireless remote control On Off – – O Driver’s door Unlocking operation Theft deterrent panic mode Locking operation when door opened The function that activates the switch of the wire- less remote control when locking the door* (→P.175) *: If equipped unlocked in first step, all doors unlocked in second step On On On (Unlocking all the door) All doors unlocked in O – O first step Off – – O Off O – O Off On (Unlocking – – O back door only) ■ Power back door* (→P.175) Function Default setting Customized setting 1 to 4 Power back door opening position 5 User optional setting – O – 9-2. Customization Function Default setting Customized setting 603 Power back door operation Buzzer volume Operation buzzer *: If equipped On Level 3 Off Off Level 1 Level 2 On – O – – O – – – O ■ Driving position memory* (→P.211) Function Default setting Customized setting Selection the door linking driving position memory with door unlock operation *: If equipped Driver’s door All doors ⎯ ⎯ O ■ Enabling easier driver entry and exit (power easy access sys- tem)* (→P.211) Function Default setting Customized setting Driver’s seat slide movement when exiting the vehicle *: If equipped Full Off Partial O – O ■ Outside rear view mirrors (→P.205) Function Default setting Customized setting 9 Linked to the Off Automatic mirror folding and locking/unlock- Linked to oper- ⎯ ⎯ O extending operation* *: If equipped ing of the doors ation of the power switch 604 9-2. Customization ■ My Settings (→P.215) Function Default setting Customized setting Driver1 Switching drivers ■ Power windows (→P.208) Guest Driver2 Driver3 O ⎯ ⎯ Function Key linked operation (open) Key linked operation (close) Wireless remote control linked operation (open) Wireless remote control linked operation signal (buzzer) ■ Power switch (→P.236) Default setting Off Off Off On Customized setting On On On Off – – O – – O – – O – – O Function ACC mode ■ Lights (→P.250) Function Daytime Running Lights* Light reminder buzzer *: Except for Canada Customized setting ON/OFF Default setting Customized setting On Off On Off O – O O – O – – O ■ Reverse warning buzzer (→P.237) Function Default setting Customized setting Signal (buzzer) when the shift position is in R Continual Mute – – O 9-2. Customization ■ Automatic light control system (→P.250) Function Default setting Customized setting Brighter Bright 605 Light sensor sensitivity Time elapsed before head- lights automatically turn off after doors are closed Windshield wiper linked headlight illumination Normal 30 seconds On Dark Darker Off 60 seconds 90 seconds Off O – O O – O – – O ■ PCS (Pre-Collision System) (→P.270) Function Pre-Collision System Warning timing Customized setting ON/OFF Later/Default/Earlier – O – – O – ■ LDA (Lane Departure Alert) (→P.292) Function Lane Departure Alert system Alert timing Alert options Customized setting ON/OFF Default/Earlier Vibration/Audible – O – – O – – O – ■ PDA (Proactive Driving Assist) (→P.297) 9 Function Customized setting Proactive Driving Assist (PDA) Support timing ON/OFF Later/Default/Earlier — O — — O — 606 9-2. Customization ■ Dynamic radar cruise control (→P.305) Function Extended Resume Time* Acceleration setting* Guide message* Curve speed reduction* Customized setting ON/OFF High/Mid/Low ON/OFF High/Mid/Low/OFF – O – – O – – O – – O – *: This setting changes in accordance with My Settings. ■ RSA (Road Sign Assist) (→P.303) Function Road Sign Assist Excess speed notification method Other notifications method Excess speed notification level Customized setting ON/OFF None/Visual/Visual & Audible None/Visual/Visual & Audible 5 mph (10 km/h)/3 mph (5 km/h)/1 mph (2 km/h) – O – – O – – O – – O – ■ Driver break suggestion (→P.292) Function Driver break suggestion ■ Driver monitor (→P.268) Customized setting ON/OFF – O – Function Warning function* Customized setting ON/OFF – O – *: This setting changes in accordance with My Settings. ■ LCA (Lane Change Assist) (→P.288) Function Lane Change Assist* Customized setting ON/OFF – O – *: This setting changes in accordance with My Settings. 9-2. Customization ■ FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert) (→P.320) 607 Function Front Cross Traffic Alert Warning timing* Customized setting ON/OFF Later/Default/Earlier – O – – O – *: This setting changes in accordance with My Settings. ■ Traffic Jam Assist (→P.325) Function Traffic Jam Assist* Driver Monitor Camera Recording* Customized setting ON/OFF ON/OFF – O – – O – *: This setting changes in accordance with My Settings. ■ BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) (→P.331) Function BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) Outside rear view mirror indi- cator brightness* Alert timing for presence of approaching vehicle (sensi- tivity)* Buzzer warning* Customized setting On/Off Dim/Bright Later/Default/Earlier On/Off – O – – O – – O – – O – *: This setting changes in accordance with My Settings ■ Safe Exit Assist (→P.336) 9 Function Customized setting Safe Exit Assist On/Off – O – Outside rear view mirrors dis- play* Detection sensitivity* On/Off Low/Mid/High – O – – O – *: This setting changes in accordance with My Settings 608 9-2. Customization ■ RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) (→P.351) Function RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) Buzzer volume of RCTA when operating*1, 2 Customized setting On/Off Level 1/Level 2/Level 3 – O – – O – *1: This setting changes in accordance with My Settings *2: The sound volume is linked among the SUBARU Parking Assist, RCTA, and RCD. ■ SUBARU Parking Assist (→P.341) Function SUBARU Parking Assist*1 Buzzer volume of SUBARU Parking Assist when operat- ing*1, 2 Customized setting On/Off Level 1/Level 2/Level 3 – O – – O – *1: This setting changes in accordance with My Settings *2: The sound volume is linked among the SUBARU Parking Assist, RCTA, and RCD. ■ RCD (Rear Camera Detection)* (→P.356) Function RCD (Rear Camera Detec- tion) function *: If equipped Customized setting On/Off – O – ■ PKSB (Parking Support Brake) (→P.360) Function PKSB (Parking Support Brake) function* Customized setting On/Off – O – *: This setting changes in accordance with My Settings ■ Advanced Park*(→P.373) 9-2. Customization 609 Function Remote Park* Vehicle speed during opera- tion Distance to objects Preferred parking method Preferred parking direction Preferred exit direction (per- pendicular) Preferred exit direction (par- allel) Camera view when parking Camera view when exiting Parking path adjustment Road width adjustment Park position adjustment (forward) Park position adjustment (reverse) Rear accessory setting Clear registered parking space Default setting On Standard Standard Parallel Forward Right Left Standard Wide 0 (Centered) Standard 0 (Centered) 0 (Centered) Off – Customized setting Off O – – Slow O – – Fast Far O – – Perpendicular O – – Reverse O – – Left O – – Right O – – Wide O – – Standard O – – -3 (Inward) to +3 (Outward) O – – Slightly narrow O – – Narrow -3 (Rearward) to +3 (Front- O – – ward) -3 (Rearward) to +3 (Front- O – – ward) 9 3.9 in. (10 cm) 7.9 in. (20 cm) 11.8 in. (30 O – – cm) 15.7 in. (40 cm) – O – – 610 9-2. Customization *: If equipped ■ Automatic air conditioning system (→P.432) Function Default setting Customized setting A/C Auto switch operation On Off O – O ■ Illumination (→P.445) Function Default setting Customized setting Off Time elapsed before the inte- rior lights turn off Operation after the power switch is turned off Operation when the doors are unlocked Operation when you approach the vehicle with the electronic key on your per- son Interior lights, footwell lights*, shift lights, inside door han- dle lights*, door trim orna- ment lights*, center console light*, auxiliary box lights* and wireless charger tray lights* Time elapsed before the outer foot lights* turn off 15 seconds On On On On 15 seconds 7.5 seconds 30 seconds Off Off Off Off Off O – O – – O – – O – – O – – O – – O 9-2. Customization Function Default setting Customized setting 611 Operation of the outer foot lights* when you approach On the vehicle with the elec- tronic key on your person* Operation of the outer foot lights* when the doors are On unlocked* *: If equipped Off Off – – O – – O ■ Vehicle customization ●When the speed linked door locking function and shift position linked door locking function are both on, the door lock operates as follows. • If the vehicle is started with all the doors locked, the speed linked door locking function would not operate. • If the vehicle is started with any door unlocked, the speed linked door lock- ing function will operate. • When shifting the shift position to any position other than P, all the doors will be locked. ●When the smart key system is off, the selecting door to unlock cannot be customized. ●When the doors remain closed after unlocking the doors and the auto- matic door lock function is activated, the signals will be generated in accordance with the Operation signal (buzzer) and the Operation signal (emergency flashers) settings. 9 612 9-3. Initialization Items to initialize The following items must be initialized for normal system operation after such cases as the battery being reconnected, or maintenance being performed on the vehicle: List of the items to initialize Item Power back door* Power window Tire pressure warning system *: If equipped When to initialize • After reconnecting or chang- ing the 12-volt battery • After changing a fuse • When functioning abnor- mally • When the specified tire infla- tion pressure has changed, such as due to carried load, etc. • When the tire inflation pres- sure is changed such as when the tire size is changed. Reference P.179 P.208 P.506 613 For owners 10 10-1.For owners Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners. 614 Reporting safety defects for Canadian owners 614 Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French) 615 SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French) 616 Headlight aim instructions for Canadian owners (in French) 622 10 614 10-1. For owners Reporting safety defects for U.S. own- ers Reporting safety defects for Canadian owners If you believe that your vehi- cle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to noti- fying SUBARU of America, Inc. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or SUBARU of America, Inc. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888- 327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424- 9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave. S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety- related defect to Transport Canada, Defects Investiga- tions and Recalls, may tele- phone the toll-free hotline 1- 800-333-0510, mail Trans- port Canada – ASFAD, 330 Sparks Street, Ottawa, ON, K1A 0N5, or complete the online form at https://www.tc.gc.ca/recalls. Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French) The following is a French 10-1. For owners sécurité. Entretien et soin ■ Soins à porter aux cein- tures de sécurité 615 explanation of seat belt instructions extracted from the seat belt section in this manual. See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in English. Utilisation correcte des ceintures de sécurité ⚫ Déroulez la sangle diagonale de telle sorte qu’elle passe bien sur l’épaule, sans pour autant être en contact avec le cou ou glisser de l’épaule. ⚫ Placez la sangle abdominale le plus bas possible sur les hanches. ⚫ Réglez la position du dossier de siège. Asseyez-vous le dos le plus droit possible et calez-vous bien dans le siège. ⚫ Ne pas vriller la ceinture de Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une éponge humectée d’eau savon- neuse tiède. Par ailleurs, véri- fiez régulièrement que les ceintures ne sont pas effilochées, entaillées, ou ne paraissent pas exagérément usées. AVERTISSEMENT ■ État et usure des ceintures de sécurité Inspectez les ceintures de sécu- rité périodiquement. Contrôlez qu’elles ne sont pas entaillées, effilochées, et que leurs ancrages ne sont pas desserrés. Ne pas uti- liser une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse avant qu’elle ne soit remplacée. Une ceinture de sécu- rité défectueuse n’apporte aucune garantie de protection de l’occu- pant contre des blessures graves, voire mortelles. 10 616 10-1. For owners SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French) The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instruc- tions extracted from the SRS airbag section in this manual. See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instruc- tions in English. Système de coussins gonflables SRS ■ Emplacement des coussins gonflables SRS Coussin gonflable SRS conducteur/passager avant Contribuent à réduire l’impact de la tête et du thorax du conducteur ou de la conductrice et du passager avant Coussins gonflables SRS de genoux Contribuent à réduire l’impact sur le conducteur ou la conductrice et le pas- sager avant Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux Contribuent à réduire l’impact du thorax des occupants des sièges avant Coussins gonflables SRS rideau • Contribuent à réduire l’impact de la tête des occupants des sièges avant et des sièges arrière latéraux 10-1. For owners 617 • Participent à empêcher les occupants d’être éjectés du véhicule en cas de retournement de celui-ci Votre véhicule est équipé de COUSSINS GONFLABLES INTELLI- GENTS (ADVANCED AIRBAGS) conçus selon les normes de sécu- rité américaines applicables aux véhicules à moteur (FMVSS208). Le boîtier électronique de coussins gonflables (ECU) utilise les infor- mations reçues des capteurs, etc., détaillés dans le schéma ci-des- sus de composition du système pour commander le déploiement des coussins gonflables. Ces informations comprennent des infor- mations sur la gravité de la collision et les occupants. Le déploie- ment rapide des coussins gonflables est obtenu au moyen d’une réaction chimique dans les dispositifs pyrotechniques, qui produit un gaz inoffensif permettant d’amortir le mouvement des occupants. AVERTISSEMENT ■ Précautions avec les couss- ins gonflables SRS Respectez les précautions suiva- ntes. À défaut, des blessures graves, voire mortelles, pourraient s’ensuivre. ● La personne au volant et tous les passagers à bord du véhicule doivent porter correcte- ment leur ceinture de sécurité. Les coussins gonflables SRS sont des dispositifs de protec- tion complémentaires aux cein- tures de sécurité. ● Le coussin gonflable SRS con- ducteur se déploie avec une puissance considérable et peut occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, notam- ment lorsque le conducteur se trouve très près du coussin gon- flable. L’autorité fédérale chargée de la sécurité routière aux États-Unis, la NHTSA (National Highway Traffic Safety Administration) conseille: Sachant que la zone de danger pour le coussin gonflable conduc- teur se trouve dans les premiers 2 à 3 in. (50 à 75 mm) du déploie- ment, placez-vous à 10 in. (250 mm) du coussin gonflable conducteur pour garantir une marge de sécurité suffisante. Cette distance est à mesurer entre le moyeu du volant de direc- tion et le sternum. Si votre posi- 10 tion de conduite vous place à moins de 10 in. (250 mm) du coussin gonflable conducteur, vous pouvez en changer de dif- férentes façons: 618 10-1. For owners AVERTISSEMENT • Reculez votre siège au plus loin possible tout en continuant à pouvoir atteindre confortable- ment les pédales. • Inclinez légèrement le dossier de siège. Bien que les véhicules soient différents les uns des autres, la plupart des conduc- teurs et conductrices peuvent s’asseoir à une distance de 10 in. (251 mm), même avec le siège conducteur complètement avancé, en inclinant simplement un peu le dossier du siège. Si vous avez des difficultés à voir la route après avoir incliné le dossier de siège, utilisez un coussin ferme et antidérapant pour vous rehausser ou, si votre véhicule est équipé du réglage en hauteur du siège, remontez- le. • Si votre volant de direction est réglable, inclinez-le vers le bas. Cela vous permet d’orienter le coussin gonflable vers votre buste plutôt que vers la tête et le cou. Vous devez régler le siège selon les recommanda- tions de la NHTSA, tout en con- tinuant à pouvoir agir sur le volant de direction et les pédales pour maîtriser le véhicule et en conservant votre vue des commandes au tableau de bord. ● Si vous attachez une rallonge de ceinture de sécurité à la bou- cle de ceinture d’un siège avant, mais pas au pêne de la ceinture de sécurité proprement dite, le système de coussins gonfla- bles SRS détermine que l’occu- pant porte sa ceinture de sécurité, alors même qu’elle n’est pas attachée. Dans ce cas, les coussins gonflables SRS frontaux risquent de ne pas se déployer correctement en cas de collision, causant des blessures graves, voire mor- telles. Veillez à porter correcte- ment la ceinture de sécurité lorsque vous utilisez une ral- longe de ceinture de sécurité. ● Le coussin gonflable SRS pas- sager avant se déploie avec une violence considérable, qui peut être très dangereuse voire mortelle si le passager ou la passagère avant se trouve très près de lui. Le siège passager avant doit être reculé le plus loin possible du coussin gonflable, avec le dossier réglé de manière à ce que le passager ou la passagère soit assis(e) bien droit(e). 10-1. For owners 619 AVERTISSEMENT ● Le déploiement d’un coussin gonflable peut infliger des bles- sures graves, voire mortelles, aux nourrissons et aux enfants mal assis et/ou mal attachés. Installez dans un siège de sécu- rité enfant les enfants trop jeunes pour pouvoir utiliser la ceinture de sécurité. SUBARU recommande vivement que tous les nourrissons et enfants soient installés dans les sièges arrière du véhicule et conven- ablement attachés. Les sièges arrière sont plus sûrs pour les nourrissons et les enfants que le siège passager avant. ● Ne jamais installer un siège de sécurité enfant type dos à la route sur le siège passager avant, même si le témoin indica- teur “AIR BAG OFF” est allumé. En cas d’accident, la force exer- cée par le déploiement rapide du coussin gonflable passager avant peut causer des bless- ures graves, voire mortelles à un enfant, si le siège de sécurité enfant type dos à la route est installé sur le siège passager avant. ● Ne pas s’asseoir sur le bord du siège et ne pas s’appuyer con- tre la planche de bord. ● Ne pas laisser un enfant se tenir debout devant le coussin gon- flable SRS passager avant ni assis sur les genoux du pas- sager ou de la passagère avant. ● Ne pas s’appuyer contre la porte, contre le rail latéral de toit ou contre le montant avant, latéral ou arrière. ● Interdisez à quiconque de s’agenouiller sur un siège en appui contre la porte ou de sor- tir la tête ou les mains à l’extérieur du véhicule. 10 ● La personne occupant le siège avant ne doit jamais voyager avec quoi que ce soit sur ses genoux. 620 10-1. For owners AVERTISSEMENT ● Ne rien fixer ou disposer sur la planche de bord, la garniture centrale du moyeu de volant de direction et la partie inférieure du tableau de bord. ● Ne rien fixer sur les parties telles que les portes, la vitre de pare-brise, les vitres latérales, les montants avant ou arrière, les rails latéraux de toit et les poignées de maintien. (À l’exception de l’étiquette de lim- itation de vitesse) ● Ne pas suspendre aux crochets à vêtements un cintre nu ni aucun objet dur ou tranchant. Ces objets peuvent se trans- former en projectiles capables de tuer ou de blesser griève- ment en cas de déploiement des coussins gonflables SRS rideau. ●Si une housse en vinyle recou- vre la partie où le coussin gon- flable SRS de genoux se déploie, veillez à l’enlever. ● N’utilisez pour les sièges aucun accessoire venant recouvrir les parties par lesquelles se déploient les coussins gonfla- bles SRS latéraux, car il risquer- ait d’en gêner le déclenchement. De tels acces- soires risquent d’empêcher les coussins gonflables SRS latéraux de se déployer cor- rectement, de neutraliser le sys- tème ou de provoquer le déploiement intempestif des coussins gonflables SRS, avec un risque possible de blessures graves, voire mortelles. ● Ne pas faire subir de chocs vio- lents ni des pressions exces- sives aux éléments constitutifs du système de coussins gonfla- bles SRS, ni aux parties qui les entourent. En effet, vous risqueriez d’occa- sionner un mauvais fonctionne- ment des coussins gonflables SRS. ● Ne touchez aucun élément con- stitutif des coussins gonflables SRS immédiatement après leur déclenchement (déploiement), car ils sont alors encore très chauds. ●Si vous avez des difficultés à respirer après le déploiement des coussins gonflables SRS, ouvrez une porte ou une vitre pour faire entrer de l’air frais, ou bien descendez du véhicule si cela ne présente pas de danger. Retirez tout résidu dès que pos- sible afin d’éviter d’éventuelles irritations de la peau. ● Si une partie renfermant un coussin gonflable SRS est abîmée ou fendue, faites-la remplacer par votre concession- naire SUBARU. 10-1. For owners 621 AVERTISSEMENT ● Ne rien poser sur le siège du passager avant, comme un coussin par exemple. Cela a pour conséquence de répartir le poids du passager sur toute la surface du siège, ce qui empêche le capteur de détecter normalement le poids du pas- sager. Il s’ensuit le risque que les coussins gonflables SRS frontaux du siège passager avant ne se déploient pas en cas de collision. ■ Modification et élimination en fin de vie des éléments du système de coussins gonfla- bles SRS Ne mettez pas à la casse votre véhicule et ne lui apportez aucune des modifications suivantes sans consulter votre concessionnaire SUBARU. Il pourrait arriver que les coussins gonflables SRS fonctionnent anormalement ou se déploient intempestivement, avec un risque possible de blessures graves, voire mortelles. ● Dépose, repose, démontage ou réparation des coussins gonfla- bles SRS ● Réparation, dépose ou modifi- cation des pièces suivantes ou des parties qui les entourent • Volant de direction • Tableau de bord • Planche de bord • Sièges • Sellerie de sièges • Montants avant • Montants latéraux • Montants arrière • Rails latéraux de toit • Panneaux de portes avant • Habillage de portes avant • Haut-parleurs de portes avant ● Modifications des panneaux de portes avant (percer un trou dedans, par exemple) ● Réparation ou modification des pièces suivantes ou des parties qui les entourent • Aile avant • Pare-chocs avant • Côtés de l’intérieur du véhicule ● Montage des pièces ou acces- soires suivants • Pare-buffles ou pare-kangou- rous • Chasse-neiges • Treuils • Galeries de pavillon ● Modifications de la suspen- sions du véhicule 10 ● Installation d’appareils électro- niques, tels qu’un système radio émetteur/récepteur mobile (émetteur RF) ou un lecteur de CD 622 10-1. For owners AVERTISSEMENT ●Aménagements du véhicule visant à permettre sa conduite par une personne atteinte d’un handicap physique Headlight aim instruc- tions for Canadian owners (in French) The following is a French explanation of headlight aim instructions from the headlight aim section in this manual. Boulons de réglage verti- cal Boulon de réglage A Boulon de réglage B Avant de vérifier la portée des phares ⚫ Assurez-vous que le réservoir de carburant du véhicule est plein et que la partie de car- rosserie située autour des phares n’est pas déformée. ⚫ Garez le véhicule sur un sol parfaitement horizontal. ⚫ Assurez-vous que la pression de gonflage des pneus est au niveau prescrit. ⚫ Demandez à quelqu’un de s’asseoir sur le siège du con- ducteur. ⚫ Faites rebondir le véhicule à plusieurs reprises. 10-1. For owners règle la portée des phares. 623 Réglage de la portée des phares 1 Tournez le boulon A vers la droite ou vers la gauche à l’aide d’un tournevis cruci- forme. Retenez le sens de rotation et le nombre de tours. 2 Tournez le boulon B du même nombre de tours et dans le même sens qu’à l’étape 1. Si vous n’arrivez pas à régler vos phares en suivant cette procédure, apportez le véhicule chez votre concessionnaire SUBARU afin qu’il 10 624 10-1. For owners

[/comment]

SEOCONTENT-START

625 Index What to do if. (Trouble- shooting) . 626 Alphabetical Index. 629 626 What to do if. (Troubleshooting) What to do if. (Troubleshooting) If you have a problem, check the following before contacting your SUBARU dealer. The doors cannot be locked, unlocked, opened or closed You lose your keys ⚫ If you lose your keys or mechanical keys, new genu- ine keys or mechanical keys can be made by your SUB- ARU dealer. (→P.570) ⚫ If you lose your electronic keys, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Con- tact your SUBARU dealer immediately. (→P.570) The doors cannot be locked or unlocked ⚫ Is the key battery weak or depleted? (→P.527) ⚫ Is the power switch in ON? When locking the doors, turn the power switch off. (→P.236) ⚫ Is the electronic key left inside the vehicle? When locking the doors, make sure that you have the electronic key on your person. ⚫ The function may not operate properly due to the condition of the radio wave. (→P.185) The rear door cannot be opened ⚫ Is the child-protector lock set? The rear door cannot be opened from inside the vehi- cle when the lock is set. Open the rear door from outside and then unlock the child-pro- tector lock. (→P.171) If you think something is wrong The EV system does not start ⚫ Is the charging cable con- nected to the vehicle? (→P.100) ⚫ Did you press the power switch while firmly depress- ing the brake pedal? (→P.233) ⚫ Is the shift position in P? (→P.233) ⚫ Is the electronic key any- where detectable inside the vehicle? (→P.184) ⚫ Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted? What to do if. (Troubleshooting) 627 In this case, the EV system can be started in a temporary way. (→P.571) ⚫ Is the 12-volt battery dis- charged? (→P.572) The windows do not open or close by operating the power window switches ⚫ Is the window lock switch pressed? The power window except for the one at the driver’s seat cannot be operated if the win- dow lock switch is pressed. (→P.210) The power switch is turned off automatically ⚫ The auto power off function will be operated if the vehicle is left in ACC or ON (the EV system is not operating) for a period of time. (→P.236) A warning buzzer sounds during driving ⚫ The seat belt reminder light is flashing Are the driver and the passengers wearing the seat belts? (→P.544, 545) ⚫ The parking brake indicator is on Is the parking brake released? (→P.247) Depending on the situation, other types of warning buzzer may also sound. (→P.542, 551) An alarm is activated and the horn sounds ⚫ Did anyone inside the vehicle open a door during setting the alarm? The sensor detects it and the alarm sounds. (→P.69) To stop the alarm, turn the power switch to ACC or ON, or start the EV system. A warning buzzer sounds when leaving the vehicle ⚫ Is the message displayed on the multi-information display? Check the message on the multi-information display. (→P.551) A warning light turns on or a warning message is displayed ⚫ When a warning light turns on or a warning message is dis- played, refer to P.542, 551. 628 What to do if. (Troubleshooting) When a problem has occurred If you have a flat tire ⚫ Stop the vehicle in a safe place and replace the flat tire with the spare tire. (→P.557) The vehicle becomes stuck ⚫ Try the procedure for when the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow. (→P.578) Alphabetical Index Alphabetical Index 629 A A/C . 432 Air conditioning filter . 524 Automatic air conditioning sys- tem . 432 Front seat concentrated airflow mode (S-FLOW). 438 My Room Mode 127 Remote Air Conditioning System . 439 “SYNC” mode. 437 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) . 417 Function . 417 Warning light 543 AC charging 104 AC charging cable 87 CCID (Charging Circuit Interrupt- ing Device) . 89 If the AC charging connector cannot be unlocked 93 Indicator . 90 Maintenance. 92 Safety functions 89 ACA (Active Cornering Assist) . 418 Acoustic Vehicle Alerting Sys- tem . 74 Active Cornering Assist (ACA) . 418 Advanced Park . 373 Memory function. 395 Parallel exiting function 393 Parallel parking function. 390 Perpendicular exiting (forward/ reverse) function 388 Perpendicular parking (forward/ reverse) function 385 Remote control function . 400 Air conditioning filter .524 Air conditioning system Air conditioning filter .524 Automatic air conditioning sys- tem .432 Front seat concentrated airflow mode (S-FLOW) .438 Remote Air Conditioning System .439 “SYNC” mode .437 Airbags 35 Airbag operating conditions 36 Airbag precautions for your child .39 Correct driving posture .29 Curtain shield airbag operating conditions .37 Curtain shield airbag precautions .39 Front passenger occupant clas- sification system .43 General airbag precautions 39 Locations of airbags .35 Modification and disposal of air- bags42 Side airbag operating conditions .37 Side airbag precautions39 Side and curtain shield airbags operating conditions .37 Side and curtain shield airbags precautions .39 SRS airbags .35 SRS warning light .543 Alarm .69 Alarm 69 Warning buzzer 542 630 Alphabetical Index ALL AUTO (ECO) control . 430 Anchor brackets . 51, 60 Antenna (Smart key system). 183 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Warning light 543 Anti-lock brake system (ABS)417 Function . 417 Approach warning 312 Armrest . 468 Assist grips. 468 Audio system-linked display. 158 Automatic air conditioning sys- tem . 432 Air conditioning filter . 524 Front seat concentrated airflow mode (S-FLOW). 438 Remote Air Conditioning System . 439 “SYNC” mode. 437 Automatic door locking and unlocking systems . 171 Automatic High Beam (AHB). 252 Automatic light control system . 250 Auxiliary box lights 445 Auxiliary boxes. 450 Average power consumption 157 Average vehicle speed. 158 B Back door 172 Power back door 175 Wireless remote control164, 175 Back-up lights Replacing light bulbs 532 Battery (12-volt battery) .497 Battery checking .497 If the 12-volt battery is dis- charged 572 Preparing and checking before winter423 Replacing .575 Warning light.542 Battery (traction battery)72 Charging .104, 112 Location 72 Specification .584 Traction battery cooler98 Traction battery heater .97 Warning messages.140 Battery Electric Vehicle driving tips .81 Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) 331 Enabling/disabling the system .333 Bottle holders .450 Brake Brake Hold248 Fluid497, 586 Parking brake .245 Regenerative braking .73 Warning light.542 Brake assist 417 Brake Hold248 Brake Override System 220 Break-in tips220 Brightness control Instrument panel light control155 BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) 331 Enabling/disabling the system .333 Alphabetical Index 631 C Camera Advanced Park . 381 Digital inner mirror 201 Driver monitor. 262, 268 Front camera 262 Card holders . 450 Care Aluminum wheels . 479 Exterior . 478 Interior 481 Seat belts . 481 Cargo and luggage. 225 Cargo capacity . 225, 230 Cargo hooks . 451 CCID (Charging Circuit Interrupt- ing Device) 89 Indicator . 90 Operation . 90 Center console light. 445 Chains . 425 Charging . 104, 112 AC charging . 104 AC charging cable 87 Charging components 85 Charging indicator 90 Charging methods 97 Charging procedure . 104, 112 Charging schedule function 117 Charging time may increase 103 Charging tips 99 DC charging . 112 Display . 99, 119, 127, 129, 140 Information related to charging display 99, 119, 127, 129, 140 Locking and unlocking the AC charging connector.93 My Room Mode 127 Opening and closing the charging port lids 85 Power sources precautions 96 Power sources that can be used .95 Safety functions 89, 100 Things to know before charging .100 Warning messages.140 When AC charging cannot be performed .131 When charging schedule func- tion cannot be performed .137 When DC charging cannot be performed .134 Charging equipment.85 Charging methods97 AC charging104 DC charging . 112 Charging ports Charging port lid .85 Locking and unlocking the AC charging connector.93 Opening and closing.85 Charging schedule function117 Setting 119 Charging tips 99 Charging-linked functions My Room Mode 97 Traction battery cooler98 Traction battery heater .97 Traction battery warming control .97 632 Alphabetical Index Child restraint system . 49 Fixed with a LATCH system . 58 Fixed with a seat belt . 53 Front passenger occupant clas- sification system. 43 Points to remember 49 Riding with children 48 Types of child restraint system installation method . 51 Using an anchor bracket 60 Child safety . 48 12-volt battery precautions. 575 Airbag precautions . 39 Back door precautions . 172 Child restraint system. 51 Electronic sunshade. 457 How your child should wear the seat belt 32 Power window lock switch 210 Power window precautions 209 Rear door child-protectors 171 Seat belt precautions . 31 Child-protector . 171 Cleaning 478, 481 Aluminum wheels . 479 Digital inner mirror 201 Exterior . 478 Interior 481 Radar sensor 263 Seat belts . 481 Clock .152, 155 Coat hooks 468 Condenser 495 Console box 449 Coolant Capacity .584 Checking 494 Preparing and checking before winter423 Cooling system EV system overheating 576 Cruise control Dynamic radar cruise control .305, 316 Warning lights.547 Cup holders.449 Current Power consumption .157 Curtain shield airbags35 Customizable features .598 D Daytime running light system250 Daytime running lights Replacing light bulbs 532 DC charging 112 Deck board 452 Deck under tray 453 Defogger Outside rear view mirrors .434 Rear window.434 Windshield 433 Digital inner mirror .197 Digital key165 Dimension .582 Dinghy towing.232 Display Charging . 99, 119, 127, 129, 140 Cruise control .316 Dynamic radar cruise control308 Alphabetical Index 633 Multi-information display 155 Pedestrians Rear of the Vehicle . 371 RCD (Rear Camera Detection) . 357 Rear Camera Detection (RCD) . 357 SUBARU Parking Assist. 341 Warning message 551 Do-it-yourself maintenance. 486, 489 Door lock Back door . 172 Side doors 167 Smart key system. 183 Wireless remote control . 164 Door trim ornament lights . 445 Doors Automatic door locking and unlocking system 171 Back door . 172 Door glasses 208 Door lock 167 Open door warning buzzer. 170 Outside rear view mirrors . 205 Rear door child-protectors 171 Side doors 167 Drive distance. 158 Drive information . 158 Drive-start control 225 Driver monitor 268 Driver’s seat position memory . 211 Driving position memory. 211 Memory recall function . 213 Power easy access system 211 Driving .219 Battery Electric Vehicle driving tips 81 Break-in tips .220 Correct posture.29 Drive mode select switch 411 Procedures .219 Winter drive tips423 Driving assist information Warning light.546 Driving information display .157 Driving position memory .211 Memory recall function .213 Power easy access system 211 Driving range 152 Driving support system informa- tion display157 Dynamic radar cruise control .305, 316 Approach warning 312 Curve speed reduction function .312 Warning lights.547 E ECB (Electronically Controlled Brake System).417 Warning light.542 Eco Drive mode 411 EDR (Event data recorder).11 Elapsed time .158 Electric motor (traction motor) Identification number 583 Location 72 Electric Power Steering (EPS) Function418 Warning light.544 634 Alphabetical Index Electric Vehicle system features . 72 Electric Vehicle system precau- tions. 76 Electronic key Battery-saving function. 184 If the electronic key does not operate properly . 570 Replacing the battery . 527 Electronic sunshade 456 Operation . 456 Electronically Controlled Brake System (ECB) . 417 Warning light 542 Emergency Driving Stop System . 322 Emergency flashers . 534 Emergency tire puncture repair kit . 557 Storage location . 559 Emergency, in case of If a warning buzzer sounds 542 If a warning light turns on . 542 If a warning message is dis- played. 551 If the 12-volt battery is dis- charged 572 If the electronic key does not operate properly . 570 If the EV system will not start568 If the vehicle is submerged or water on the road is rising 536 If you have a flat tire. 557 If you lose your keys 570 If you think something is wrong . 541 If your vehicle becomes stuck .578 If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency .535 If your vehicle needs to be towed .537 If your vehicle overheats 576 EPS (Electric Power Steering) Function418 Warning light.544 EV system .72 ACC 236 Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System .74 Battery Electric Vehicle driving tips 81 Brake Override System 220 Drive-start control .225 Driving range 83 Electric Vehicle system precau- tions 76 Emergency shut off system 80 Features .72 How to start the EV system 233 How to use AC charging .104 How to use DC charging 112 If the EV system will not start568 If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency .535 Ignition switch (power switch) .233 Overheating 576 Power meter .152 Power switch 233 Regenerative braking .73 Starting the EV system .233 Event data recorder (EDR).11 Alphabetical Index 635 F FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert) . 320 Flat tire 557 Tire pressure warning system . 503 Floor mats . 28 Fluid Brake 586 Front eAxle. 586 Rear eAxle . 586 Washer . 500 Fog lights Replacing light bulbs 532 Switch. 255 Footwell lights 445 Front Cross Traffic Alert (FCTA) . 320 Front eAxle Fluid . 586 Front electric motor (traction motor) Specification. 583 Front fog lights Replacing light bulbs 532 Switch. 255 Front interior lights 446 Front passenger occupant clas- sification system 43 Front seat concentrated airflow mode (S-FLOW) 438 Front seats 188 Adjustment . 188 Cleaning . 481 Correct driving posture. 29 Driving position memory. 211 Head restraints . 192 Memory recall function . 213 Power easy access system 211 Seat heaters .441 Seat position memory. 211 Seat ventilators.441 Front side marker lights.250 Light switch.250 Front turn signal lights Replacing light bulbs 532 Turn signal lever .244 Fuses .529 G Garage door opener .469 Gauges 152 Grip control .415 H Head restraints .192 Headlights .250 Automatic High Beam (AHB) 252 Light switch.250 Replacing light bulbs 532 Headlights aim 531 Heated steering wheel441 ALL AUTO (ECO) control .430 Heater coolant Checking 494 Heater system Capacity .585 Heaters Automatic air conditioning sys- tem .432 Heated steering wheel442 Outside rear view mirrors .434 Seat heaters .441 Traction battery heater .97 Hill-start assist control.418 Hood 491 636 Alphabetical Index Hooks Cargo hooks. 451 Coat hooks . 468 Retaining hooks (floor mat) 28 Horn . 195 I Identification Electric motor (traction motor) . 583 Vehicle 582 If your vehicle overheats . 576 Ignition switch (power switch) . 233 Auto power off function 236 Changing the power switch modes 236 If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency. 535 Starting the EV system. 233 Illuminated entry system . 445 Immobilizer system 68 Indicators 150 Charging cable . 90 Charging indicator 86 Charging indicator (CCID) 90 Error warning indicator . 90 Power indicator 90 Initialization Electronic sunshade. 456 Items to initialize. 612 Power back door 179 Power windows 208 Inside door handle lights. 445 Inside rear view mirror. 196 Interior lights 445 J Jack Positioning a floor jack .493 Vehicle-equipped jack 515 Jack handle .515 Jam protection function Power back door 178 Power windows 208 K Keyless entry Smart key system .183 Wireless remote control164 Keys .162 Battery-saving function .184 Digital key.165 Electronic key .162 If the electronic key does not operate properly .570 If you lose your keys.570 Key number plate .162 Keyless entry 164, 183 Mechanical key.164 Power switch 233 Replacing the battery .527 Warning buzzer 184 Wireless remote control key .164 Knee airbags .35 L Lane Change Assist (LCA) 288 Operation288 Lane Departure Alert (LDA) .292 Operation292 Warning lights.545 Alphabetical Index 637 Lane Tracing Assist (LTA) 282 Operation . 282 Warning lights. 546 Language (multi-information dis- play) .158, 600 LATCH anchors 58 LCA (Lane Change Assist) 288 Operation . 288 LDA (Lane Departure Alert) . 292 Operation . 292 Warning lights. 545 Lever Auxiliary catch lever . 491 Hood lock release lever 491 Turn signal lever. 244 Wiper lever . 256 License plate lights Light switch 250 Replacing light bulbs 532 Light bulbs Replacing . 532 Lights Automatic High Beam (AHB) 252 Emergency flasher switch 534 Fog light switch 255 Headlight switch . 250 Interior light list . 445 Interior lights. 446 Luggage compartment light 174, 177 Personal lights 447 Replacing light bulbs 532 Turn signal lever. 244 Vanity lights 458 Load capacity . 230 Locking and unlocking the AC charging connector 93 LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) 282 Operation282 Warning lights.546 Luggage compartment features .451 Luggage compartment light 174, 177 Luggage cover 453 M Maintenance AC charging cable 92 Do-it-yourself maintenance 489 General maintenance .486 Maintenance data .582 Maintenance requirements .485 Menu icons156 Meter Clock 152 Indicators 150 Instrument panel light control155 Meter control switches156 Meters 152 Multi-information display.155 Settings 158, 599 Units .600 Warning lights.542 Warning message.551 Mirrors Digital inner mirror 197 Inside rear view mirror 196 Outside rear view mirror defog- gers 434 Outside rear view mirrors .205 Vanity mirrors458 638 Alphabetical Index Motor Compartment . 494 Multi-information display. 155 Audio system-linked display . 158 Charging. 99, 119, 127, 129, 140 Clock 155 Convenience Services (Sugges- tion function). 600 Cruise control . 316 Driving information display . 157 Driving support system informa- tion display . 157 Dynamic radar cruise control308 Language . 600 LCA (Lane Change Assist) . 291 LDA (Lane Departure Alert) 296 LTA (Lane Tracing Assist). 287 Menu icons . 156 Meter control switches . 156 Navigation system-linked display . 157 Power consumption 157 Settings 158, 599 Suggestion function 159 Tire pressure 503 Units . 600 Vehicle information display. 158 Warning message 551 My Room Mode. 127 Display . 127 Starting My Room Mode 127 Warning messages. 129 N Navigation system-linked display .157 O Odometer.154 Odometer and trip meter display Display items 154 Open tray.450 Opener Back door .174, 176 Garage door .469 Outer foot lights445 Outside rear view mirrors 205 Adjusting and folding 205 BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) .331 Folding and extending 206 Linked mirror function when reversing.206 Mirror position memory. 211 Outside rear view mirror defog- gers 434 RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) .351 SEA (Safe Exit Assist) 336 Outside temperature 152 P Paddle shift switch .241 Panic mode .164 Parking brake245 Operation245 Parking brake engaged warning buzzer.247 Warning light.548 Warning message.247 Alphabetical Index 639 Parking lights Light switch 250 Parking Support Brake (PKSB) . 360 Enabling/disabling the system . 362 PCS (Pre-Collision System). 270 Enabling/disabling the system . 281 Function . 270 Warning light 547 PDA (Proactive driving assist) . 297 PDA indicator Warning light 546 Personal lights . 445, 447 Switch. 447 PKSB (Parking Support Brake) . 360 Enabling/disabling the system . 362 Moving Vehicle Rear of the Vehi- cle. 369 Pedestrians Rear of the Vehicle . 371 Static Objects Front and Rear of the Vehicle 365 Power back door 175 Power back door switch 176 Power consumption. 157 Average power consumption 157 Current power consumption . 157 Power control unit coolant Checking 496 Preparing and checking before winter 423 Power easy access system .211 Power meter 152 Power mode 411 Power outlets 458 Power sources 95 Power steering (Electric Power Steering system).418 Power steering (Electric power steering system) Warning light.544 Power switch.233 Auto power off function.236 Changing the power switch modes.236 If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency .535 Starting the EV system .233 Power windows Catch protection function208 Door lock linked window opera- tion209 Jam protection function 208 Operation208 Window lock switch 210 Pre-Collision System (PCS).270 Enabling/disabling the system .281 Function270 Warning light.547 Proactive driving assist (PDA) .297 640 Alphabetical Index R Radar cruise control 316 Radar cruise control (dynamic radar cruise control) 305 Radiant heaters 441 ALL AUTO (ECO) control . 430 Radiator. 495 RCD (Rear Camera Detection) . 356 Enabling/disabling the system . 357 RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) . 351 Enabling/disabling the system . 352 Rear Camera Detection (RCD) . 356 Enabling/disabling the system . 357 Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) . 351 Enabling/disabling the system . 352 Rear eAxle Fluid . 586 Rear electric motor (traction motor) Specification. 583 Rear fog light Replacing light bulbs 532 Rear interior lights . 446 Rear seat Folding down the rear seatbacks . 190 Rear seats .189 Adjustment .189 Head restraints .192 Rear side marker lights Light switch.250 Rear turn signal lights Replacing light bulbs 532 Turn signal lever .244 Rear view mirror Digital inner mirror 197 Inside rear view mirror 196 Outside rear view mirrors .205 Rear window defogger .434 Regenerative braking .73 Warning lights.542 Remote Air Conditioning System .439 Replacing Electronic key battery .527 Fuses529 Light bulbs 532 Tires514 Replacing the tire .514 Road Sign Assist (RSA) .303 Roof luggage carrier 225 Roof tent228 RSA (Road Sign Assist) .303 S S PEDAL DRIVE switch242 Safe Exit Assist (SEA) Enabling/disabling the system .338 SEA (Safe Exit Assist) 336 Enabling/disabling the system .338 Alphabetical Index 641 Seat belt reminder light . 544, 545 Seat belts 31 Adjusting the seat belt shoulder anchor height . 33 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) 33 Child restraint system installation . 53 Cleaning and maintaining the seat belt 481 Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) 33 How to wear your seat belt. 32 How your child should wear the seat belt 32 Pregnant women, proper seat belt use. 31 Reminder light and buzzer . 544, 545 Seat belt pretensioners 33 SRS warning light. 543 Seat heaters 441 ALL AUTO (ECO) control . 430 Seat position memory 211 Seat ventilators 441 ALL AUTO (ECO) control . 430 Seating capacity .230, 582 Seats188, 189 Adjustment .188, 189 Adjustment precautions 189 Child seats/child restraint system installation 49 Cleaning . 481 Driving position memory. 211 Folding down the rear seatbacks . 190 Head restraints .192 Power easy access system 211 Properly sitting in the seat 29 Seat heaters .441 Seat position memory. 211 Seat ventilators.441 Secondary Collision Brake (Sec- ondary collision reduction at the time of a frontal collision) .418 Sensor Automatic headlight system .250 Automatic High Beam (AHB) 252 BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) .332 Digital inner mirror 200 Dynamic radar cruise control262 Inside rear view mirror 196 LCA (Lane Change Assist) .288 LDA (Lane Departure Alert) 292 LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) .282 Moving Vehicle Rear of the Vehi- cle .332 PCS (Pre-Collision System) .262 Radar sensor 262 Rain-sensing windshield wipers .257 RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) .332, 351 SEA (Safe Exit Assist) 332 Static Objects Front and Rear of the Vehicle 341 SUBARU Parking Assist sensor .341 Service plug 76 642 Alphabetical Index Shift lights. 445 Shift position 237 Drive mode select switch . 411 Paddle shift switch . 241 Side airbags 35 Side doors. 167 Side marker lights Light switch 250 Side mirrors 205 Adjustment . 205 BSM (Blind Spot Monitor). 331 Folding and extending 206 Heaters. 434 Linked mirror function when reversing 206 Mirror position memory 211 Outside rear view mirror defog- gers 434 RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) . 351 SEA (Safe Exit Assist) 336 Side turn signal lights Replacing light bulbs 532 Turn signal lever. 244 Side windows . 208 Smart key system. 183 Antenna location 183 Entry functions .167, 173 Starting the EV system. 233 Snow tires . 423 SOC (State of Charge) gauge 152 Software update . 259 “SOS” button 63 Specifications . 582 Speedometer 152 SRS airbags 35 Steering wheel 195 Adjustment .195 Heated steering wheel441 Meter control switches156 Stop lights Replacing light bulbs 532 Storage feature .448 Storage precautions.448 Stuck If the vehicle becomes stuck 578 SUBARU Parking Assist 341 Enabling/disabling the system .341 Function341 Warning lights.547 SUBARU Parking Assist sensor .341 SUBARU Safety Sense.260 AHB (Automatic High Beam) 252 Driver monitor .268 Dynamic radar cruise control305 Emergency Driving Stop System .322 FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert) .320 LCA (Lane Change Assist) .288 LDA (Lane Departure Alert) 292 LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) .282 PCS (Pre-Collision System) .270 PDA (Proactive Driving Assist) .297 RSA (Road Sign Assist)303 Software update .259 Traffic Jam Assist .325 SUBARU SOLTERRA CONNECT .63 Alphabetical Index 643 Suggestion function. 159 Sun visors . 458 Sunshade 456 Switches Automatic High Beam switch252 Brake hold switch . 248 Cruise control . 316 Door lock switch . 170 Drive mode select switch . 411 Driving position memory switches . 211 Dynamic radar cruise control308 Electronic sunshade switch 456 Emergency flashers switch 534 Fog light switch 255 Garage door opener switches . 469 Grip control.412, 415 Heated steering wheel . 442 Ignition switch (power switch) . 233 Light switch 250 LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) switch . 285 Meter control switches . 156 Outside rear view mirror switches . 205 Paddle shift switch . 241 Parking brake switch 245 Power back door switch . 176 Power switch 233 Power window switch . 208 Radiant heaters 443 Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers switch . 434 S PEDAL DRIVE switch .242 Seat heater switches 442 “SOS” button 63 Tire pressure warning reset switch .506 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch .308 Ventilators (seat ventilators) .443 VSC OFF switch .418 Window lock switch 210 Windshield defogger switch433 Windshield wipers and washer switch .256 X-MODE switch 412 Switching the meter display 154 “SYNC” mode .437 T Tail lights Light switch.250 Replacing light bulbs 532 Theft deterrent system Alarm 69 Immobilizer system.68 Tire inflation pressure 158 Maintenance data .587 Tire inflation pressure display function.503 Warning buzzers.545 Warning light.545 Tire information 588 Glossary .592 Size 589 Tire identification number .589 Tire section names .590 644 Alphabetical Index Tire pressure warning system . 503 Function . 503 Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters 505 Registering ID codes 510 Registration of the position of each wheel . 506 Selecting wheel set 512 Setting the tire pressure . 507 Warning buzzers 545 Warning light 545 Tires. 501 Chains 425 Checking 501 Emergency tire puncture repair kit 557 Glossary . 592 If you have a flat tire. 557 Inflation pressure 521 Information . 588 Replacing . 514 Rotating tires 503 Size 587 Snow tires 423 Tire identification number . 589 Tire inflation pressure display function. 503 Tire pressure warning system . 503 Uniform Tire Quality Grading 590 Warning buzzers 545 Warning light 545 Tools 515, 559 Top tether strap 60 Total load capacity .225, 230 Towing Dinghy towing .232 Emergency towing 537, 538 Towing eyelet539 Trailer sway control 418 Trailer towing 231 TRAC (Traction Control) 418 Traction battery.72 Charging .104, 112 Location 72 Specification .584 Traction battery cooler98 Traction battery heater .97 Warning messages.140 Traction battery charge Warning light.544 Traction Control (TRAC) 418 Traffic Jam Assist .325 Trailer sway control418 Trailer towing 231 Trip meters 154 Turn signal lights Replacing light bulbs 532 Turn signal lever .244 U USB charging ports459 Utility vehicle precautions .426 Alphabetical Index 645 V Vanity lights Vanity lights 458 Vanity mirrors . 458 Vanity lights 458 Vehicle data recordings . 9 Vehicle identification number582 Vehicle information display. 158 Vehicle Stability Control (VSC) . 418 Ventilators (seat ventilators) . 441 VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) . 418 W Warning buzzers Acceleration Suppression at Low Speed. 273 Approach warning 312 Brake hold 548 Brake Override System 543 Brake system . 542 Break suggestion function 295 Cruise control . 547 Drive-Start Control . 543 Dynamic radar cruise control547 Electric power steering. 544 Hands off steering wheel warn- ing (LDA) 294 Hands off steering wheel warn- ing (LTA) . 284 LCA (Lane Change Assist) . 288 LDA (Lane Departure Alert) 292, 545 LTA (Lane Tracing Assist).282, 546 Open door 170 Open hood170 Open window209 PCS (Pre-Collision System) .547 Pre-collision warning 271 RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) .352 Seat belt .544, 545 SRS airbag .543 SUBARU Parking Assist .346, 547 Tire pressure 545 Warning lights.542 ABS 543 Brake hold operated indicator .548 Brake Override System 543 Brake system542 Charging system 542 Cruise control indicator.547 Drive-Start Control543 Driving assist information indica- tor .546 Dynamic radar cruise control indicator 547 Electric power steering .544 LDA indicator 545 LTA indicator .546 Parking brake indicator.548 PDA indicator546 Pre-collision system .547 Seat belt reminder light 544, 545 Slip indicator .548 SRS airbag .543 SUBARU Parking Assist OFF indicator 547 Tire pressure 545 Traction battery charge.544 646 Alphabetical Index Warning messages. 551 Washer Low washer fluid warning mes- sage . 500 Preparing and checking before winter 423 Switch. 256 Washing and waxing 478, 481 Weight Cargo capacity .225, 230 Load limits 230 Weight 582 Wheel bolt wrench . 515 Wheels. 523 Wireless remote control.164 Battery-saving function .184 Locking/Unlocking 164 Panic mode 164 Remote Air Conditioning System .439 Replacing the battery .527 X X-MODE .412 Grip control .412 Replacing wheels . 523 Size 587 Window glasses Power windows 208 Window lock switch . 210 Windows Power windows 208 Rear window defogger . 434 Washer . 256 Windshield defogger 433 Windshield wipers Position 256 Rain-sensing windshield wipers . 256 Winter driving tips 423 Wireless charger 460 Wireless charger tray lights 445 For information regarding the equipment listed below, refer to the “MUL- TIMEDIA OWNER’S MAN- UAL”. · Navigation system · Audio system · Rear view monitor system · SUBARU Parking Assist monitor · Panoramic view monitor Alphabetical Index 647 648 Certifications SUBARU SOLTERRA CONNECT 649 Immobilizer system ▶ For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. and Hawaii 650 ▶ For vehicles sold in Canada 651 Digital key ▶ For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. and Hawaii 652 ▶ For vehicles sold in Canada 653 654 Smart key system ▶ For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. and Hawaii ▶ For vehicles sold in Canada 655 SUBARU Safety Sense ▶ For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. and Hawaii 656 ▶ For vehicles sold in Canada 657 BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) ▶ For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. and Hawaii ▶ For vehicles sold in Canada 658 659 Wireless charger ▶ For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. and Hawaii 660 ▶ For vehicles sold in Canada Garage door opener ▶ For vehicles sold in the U.S. mainland and Hawaii ▶ For vehicles sold in Canada 661 Tire pressure warning system ▶ For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. and Hawaii 662 ▶ For vehicles sold in Canada 663 SUBARU Parking Assist ▶ For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. and Hawaii ▶ For vehicles sold in Canada 664 CHARGING STATION INFORMATION Auxiliary catch lever (→P.491) Charging port lid (→P.85) Power back door switch* (→P.176) Hood lock release lever (→P.491) Tire inflation pressure (→P.587) *: If equipped External power source Time needed for charging Traction battery type Cold tire inflation pressure P.97 P.99 P.584 P.587

**************************************************************************************************************

SEOCONTENT-END

Last update on 2025-04-17 / Affiliate links / Images from Amazon Product Advertising API

This product presentation was made with AAWP plugin.